 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as hitachi electric and hitachi xx, to renesas technology corp. the semiconductor operations of mitsubishi electric and hitachi were transferred to renesas technology corporation on april 1st 2003. these operations include microcomputer, logic, analog and discrete devices, and memory chips other than drams (flash memory, srams etc.) accordingly, although hitachi, hitachi, ltd., hitachi semiconductors, and other hitachi brand names are mentioned in the document, these names have in fact all been changed to renesas technology corp. thank you for your understanding. except for our corporate trademark, logo and corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been made to the contents of the document, and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the contents of the document itself. renesas technology home page: http://www.renesas.com renesas technology corp. customer support dept. april 1, 2003 to all our customers
cautions keep safety first in your circuit designs! 1. renesas technology corporation puts the maximum effort into making semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the possibility that trouble may occur with them. trouble with semiconductors may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. remember to give due consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of nonflammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap. notes regarding these materials 1. these materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the selection of the renesas technology corporation product best suited to the customer's application; they do not convey any license under any intellectual property rights, or an y other rights, belonging to renesas technology corporation or a third party. 2. renesas technology corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, or infringement of any third-party's rights, originating in the use of any product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, or circuit application examples contained i n these materials. 3. all information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs and algorithms represents information on products at the time of publication of these materials, and are subject to change by renesas technology corporation without notice due to product improvements or other reasons. it is therefore recommended that customers contact renesas technology corporation or an authorized renesas technology corporation product distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product listed herein. the information described here may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. renesas technology corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability, or other loss rising from these inaccuracies or errors. please also pay attention to information published by renesas technology corporation by various means, including the renesas technology corporation semiconductor home page (http://www.renesas.com). 4. when using any or all of the information contained in these materials, including product data, diagrams, charts, programs, an d algorithms, please be sure to evaluate all information as a total system before making a final decision on the applicability of the information and products. renesas technology corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage, liability or other loss resulting from the information contained herein. 5. renesas technology corporation semiconductors are not designed or manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. please contact renesas technology corporation or an authorized renesas technology corporation product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation, vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use. 6. the prior written approval of renesas technology corporation is necessary to reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials. 7. if these products or technologies are subject to the japanese export control restrictions, they must be exported under a lice nse from the japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than the approved destination. any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and regulations of japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited. 8. please contact renesas technology corporation for further details on these materials or the products contained therein. h8/3067 series h8/3067, h8/3066, h8/3065 h8/3067 f-ztat tm h8/3067f, h8/3067fr hardware manual ade-602-135b rev. 3.0 22/2/99 hitachi, ltd. cautions 1. hitachi neither warrants nor grants licenses of any rights of hitachi? or any third party? patent, copyright, trademark, or other intellectual property rights for information contained in this document. hitachi bears no responsibility for problems that may arise with third party? rights, including intellectual property rights, in connection with use of the information contained in this document. 2. products and product specifications may be subject to change without notice. confirm that you have received the latest product standards or specifications before final design, purchase or use. 3. hitachi makes every attempt to ensure that its products are of high quality and reliability. however, contact hitachi? sales office before using the product in an application that demands especially high quality and reliability or where its failure or malfunction may directly threaten human life or cause risk of bodily injury, such as aerospace, aeronautics, nuclear power, combustion control, transportation, traffic, safety equipment or medical equipment for life support. 4. design your application so that the product is used within the ranges guaranteed by hitachi particularly for maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, heat radiation characteristics, installation conditions and other characteristics. hitachi bears no responsibility for failure or damage when used beyond the guaranteed ranges. even within the guaranteed ranges, consider normally foreseeable failure rates or failure modes in semiconductor devices and employ systemic measures such as fail-safes, so that the equipment incorporating hitachi product does not cause bodily injury, fire or other consequential damage due to operation of the hitachi product. 5. this product is not designed to be radiation resistant. 6. no one is permitted to reproduce or duplicate, in any form, the whole or part of this document without written approval from hitachi. 7. contact hitachi? sales office for any questions regarding this document or hitachi semiconductor products. preface the h8/3067 series is a series of high-performance single-chip microcontrollers that integrate system supporting functions together with an h8/300h cpu core. the h8/300h cpu has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. it can address a 16-mbyte linear address space. the on-chip supporting functions include rom, ram, 16-bit timers, 8-bit timers, a programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), a watchdog timer (wdt), a serial communication interface (sci), an a/d converter, a d/a converter, i/o ports, a dma controller (dmac), and other facilities. the three-channel sci has been expanded to support the iso/iec7816-3 smart card interface. functions have also been added to reduce power consumption in battery-powered applications: individual modules can be placed in standby, and the frequency of the system clock supplied to the chip can be divided down under software control. the address space is divided into eight areas. the data bus width and access cycle length can be selected independently in each area, simplifying the connection of different types of memory. seven mcu operating modes (modes 1 to 7) are provided, offering a choice of data bus width and address space size. with these features, the h8/3067 series offers easy implementation of compact, high-performance systems. in addition to its mask rom versions, the h8/3067 series has an f-ztat * version with on- chip flash memory that can be programmed on-board. this version enables users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications. this manual describes the h8/3067 series hardware. for details of the instruction set, refer to the h8/300h series programming manual. note: * f-ztat (flexible ztat) is a registered trademark of hitachi, ltd. list of items revised or added for this version page item description 65 3.3 system control register (syscr) modification of the bit 4 bits 6 to 4: standby timer select 2 to 0 68 table 3.3 pin functions in each mode modification of the mode 3 and mode 4 of the port a modification of the note 3 126 6.2.4 bus release control register modification of the bit 4 (brcr) 137 6.2.12 address control register modification of the bit 0 (adrcr) 304 table 8.21 port a pin functions addition and modification of the note 1 (modes 1 to 7) 305 8.12.1 overview modification 310 to 311 table 8.23 port b pin functions modification (modes 1 to 5) 313 table 8.24 port b pin functions modification (modes 6 to 7) 327 9.2.3 timer mode register (tmdr) modification of the counting direction 352 9.4.2 basic functions modification of the detection edge external clock source 364 9.4.5 phase counting mode modification 392 10.2.4 timer control register (tcr) modification of the bits 2 to 0 399 figure 10.8 count timing for internal modification of the timing clock input supplementation of note 400 to 403 figure 10.9 to figure 10.16 modification of the timing 410 to 415 figure 10.19 to figure 10.24 modification of the timing 416 10.7.9 tcnt operation at internal modification clock source switchover 417 table 10.6 internal clock switchover modification and tcnt operation 660 20.4.6 cautions on clearing the addition software standby mode of f-ztat version 675 table 21.4 clock timing changes in numerical value of condition b 677 table 21.6 bus timing changes in numerical value of condition b 694 table 21.12 permissible output currents change in numerical value of condition 698 table 21.15 bus timing changes in numerical value of condition a i contents section 1 overview ........................................................................................................... 1 1.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 1 1.2 block diagram.............................................................................................................. ..... 6 1.3 pin description ............................................................................................................ ...... 7 1.3.1 pin arrangement .................................................................................................. 7 1.3.2 pin functions........................................................................................................ 9 1.3.3 pin assignments in each mode............................................................................ 14 1.4 notes on flash memory r version model........................................................................ 18 1.4.1 pin arrangement .................................................................................................. 18 1.4.2 product type names and markings ..................................................................... 18 1.4.3 differences in flash memory r version.............................................................. 19 section 2 cpu ..................................................................................................................... 21 2.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 21 2.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 2 1 2.1.2 differences from h8/300 cpu............................................................................. 22 2.2 cpu operating modes ...................................................................................................... 23 2.3 address space.............................................................................................................. ...... 24 2.4 register configuration ..................................................................................................... .25 2.4.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 25 2.4.2 general registers.................................................................................................. 26 2.4.3 control registers.................................................................................................. 27 2.4.4 initial cpu register values ................................................................................. 28 2.5 data formats............................................................................................................... ....... 29 2.5.1 general register data formats ............................................................................ 29 2.5.2 memory data formats.......................................................................................... 30 2.6 instruction set............................................................................................................ ........ 32 2.6.1 instruction set overview...................................................................................... 32 2.6.2 instructions and addressing modes ..................................................................... 33 2.6.3 tables of instructions classified by function...................................................... 34 2.6.4 basic instruction formats..................................................................................... 43 2.6.5 notes on use of bit manipulation instructions.................................................... 45 2.7 addressing modes and effective address calculation ..................................................... 47 2.7.1 addressing modes................................................................................................ 47 2.7.2 effective address calculation.............................................................................. 49 2.8 processing states .......................................................................................................... ..... 53 2.8.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 53 2.8.2 program execution state ...................................................................................... 54 2.8.3 exception-handling state .................................................................................... 54 ii 2.8.4 exception-handling sequences............................................................................ 56 2.8.5 bus-released state ............................................................................................... 57 2.8.6 reset state ............................................................................................................ 57 2.8.7 power-down state................................................................................................ 57 2.9 basic operational timing.................................................................................................. 5 8 2.9.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 58 2.9.2 on-chip memory access timing ........................................................................ 58 2.9.3 on-chip supporting module access timing....................................................... 59 2.9.4 access to external address space ....................................................................... 60 section 3 mcu operating modes ................................................................................ 61 3.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 61 3.1.1 operating mode selection.................................................................................... 61 3.1.2 register configuration ......................................................................................... 62 3.2 mode control register (mdcr) ....................................................................................... 63 3.3 system control register (syscr).................................................................................... 64 3.4 operating mode descriptions............................................................................................ 66 3.4.1 mode 1.................................................................................................................. 6 6 3.4.2 mode 2.................................................................................................................. 6 6 3.4.3 mode 3.................................................................................................................. 6 6 3.4.4 mode 4.................................................................................................................. 6 7 3.4.5 mode 5.................................................................................................................. 6 7 3.4.6 mode 6.................................................................................................................. 6 7 3.4.7 mode 7.................................................................................................................. 6 7 3.5 pin functions in each operating mode............................................................................. 68 3.6 memory map in each operating mode............................................................................. 68 3.6.1 note on reserved areas ....................................................................................... 68 section 4 exception handling ........................................................................................ 75 4.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 75 4.1.1 exception handling types and priority ............................................................... 75 4.1.2 exception handling operation ............................................................................. 75 4.1.3 exception vector table........................................................................................ 76 4.2 reset ...................................................................................................................... ............ 78 4.2.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 78 4.2.2 reset sequence..................................................................................................... 78 4.2.3 interrupts after reset ............................................................................................ 81 4.3 interrupts................................................................................................................. ........... 82 4.4 trap instruction ........................................................................................................... ...... 83 4.5 stack status after exception handling .............................................................................. 84 4.6 notes on stack usage....................................................................................................... .85 iii section 5 interrupt controller ........................................................................................ 87 5.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 87 5.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 8 7 5.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 88 5.1.3 pin configuration ................................................................................................. 89 5.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 89 5.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... ... 90 5.2.1 system control register (syscr) ...................................................................... 90 5.2.2 interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra, iprb) ............................................. 91 5.2.3 irq status register (isr) .................................................................................... 98 5.2.4 irq enable register (ier) .................................................................................. 99 5.2.5 irq sense control register (iscr)..................................................................... 100 5.3 interrupt sources.......................................................................................................... ...... 101 5.3.1 external interrupts................................................................................................ 101 5.3.2 internal interrupts ................................................................................................. 102 5.3.3 interrupt vector table .......................................................................................... 102 5.4 interrupt operation ........................................................................................................ .... 106 5.4.1 interrupt handling process ................................................................................... 106 5.4.2 interrupt sequence................................................................................................ 111 5.4.3 interrupt response time ...................................................................................... 112 5.5 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ....... 113 5.5.1 contention between interrupt and interrupt-disabling instruction...................... 113 5.5.2 instructions that inhibit interrupts........................................................................ 114 5.5.3 interrupts during eepmov instruction execution.............................................. 114 section 6 bus controller .................................................................................................. 115 6.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 115 6.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 1 15 6.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 117 6.1.3 pin configuration ................................................................................................. 118 6.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 119 6.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... ... 120 6.2.1 bus width control register (abwcr) ............................................................... 120 6.2.2 access state control register (astcr).............................................................. 121 6.2.3 wait control registers h and l (wcrh, wcrl).............................................. 121 6.2.4 bus release control register (brcr) ................................................................ 125 6.2.5 bus control register (bcr) ................................................................................ 126 6.2.6 chip select control register (cscr).................................................................. 128 6.2.7 dram control register a (drcra) ................................................................. 129 6.2.8 dram control register b (drcrb).................................................................. 131 6.2.9 refresh timer control/status register (rtmcsr) ............................................ 134 6.2.10 refresh timer counter (rtcnt) ........................................................................ 135 iv 6.2.11 refresh time constant register (rtcor).......................................................... 136 6.2.12 address control register (adrcr) (provided only in flash memory r version and mask rom versions) ............ 137 6.3 operation .................................................................................................................. ......... 138 6.3.1 area division........................................................................................................ 138 6.3.2 bus specifications ................................................................................................ 141 6.3.3 memory interfaces................................................................................................ 142 6.3.4 chip select signals............................................................................................... 142 6.3.5 address output method (function provided only in flash memory r version and mask rom versions) ...................................................................... 144 6.4 basic bus interface........................................................................................................ .... 146 6.4.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 146 6.4.2 data size and data alignment ............................................................................. 146 6.4.3 valid strobes ....................................................................................................... 147 6.4.4 memory areas...................................................................................................... 148 6.4.5 basic bus control signal timing......................................................................... 150 6.4.6 wait control ......................................................................................................... 157 6.5 dram interface............................................................................................................. ... 159 6.5.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 159 6.5.2 dram space and ras output pin settings ....................................................... 159 6.5.3 address multiplexing ........................................................................................... 160 6.5.4 data bus ............................................................................................................... 16 0 6.5.5 pins used for dram interface ............................................................................ 160 6.5.6 basic timing ........................................................................................................ 161 6.5.7 precharge state control........................................................................................ 162 6.5.8 wait control ......................................................................................................... 163 6.5.9 byte access control and cas output pin........................................................... 164 6.5.10 burst operation .................................................................................................... 166 6.5.11 refresh control .................................................................................................... 171 6.5.12 examples of use................................................................................................... 175 6.5.13 usage notes.......................................................................................................... 179 6.6 interval timer............................................................................................................. ....... 182 6.6.1 operation .............................................................................................................. 18 2 6.7 interrupt sources.......................................................................................................... ...... 187 6.8 burst rom interface ........................................................................................................ . 187 6.8.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 187 6.8.2 basic timing ........................................................................................................ 187 6.8.3 wait control ......................................................................................................... 188 6.9 idle cycle................................................................................................................. .......... 189 6.9.1 operation .............................................................................................................. 18 9 6.9.2 pin states in idle cycle ........................................................................................ 192 6.10 bus arbiter ............................................................................................................... ......... 193 6.10.1 operation .............................................................................................................. 1 93 v 6.11 register and pin input timing .......................................................................................... 196 6.11.1 register write timing.......................................................................................... 196 6.11.2 breq pin input timing....................................................................................... 197 section 7 dma controller .............................................................................................. 199 7.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 199 7.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 1 99 7.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 200 7.1.3 functional overview ............................................................................................ 201 7.1.4 input/output pins.................................................................................................. 202 7.1.5 register configuration ......................................................................................... 202 7.2 register descriptions (1) (short address mode) .............................................................. 204 7.2.1 memory address registers (mar)...................................................................... 204 7.2.2 i/o address registers (ioar) ............................................................................. 205 7.2.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr) .......................................................... 205 7.2.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) ............................................................ 207 7.3 register descriptions (2) (full address mode) ................................................................ 210 7.3.1 memory address registers (mar)...................................................................... 210 7.3.2 i/o address registers (ioar) ............................................................................. 210 7.3.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr) .......................................................... 211 7.3.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) ............................................................ 213 7.4 operation .................................................................................................................. ......... 219 7.4.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 219 7.4.2 i/o mode .............................................................................................................. 221 7.4.3 idle mode.............................................................................................................. 22 3 7.4.4 repeat mode ........................................................................................................ 226 7.4.5 normal mode........................................................................................................ 229 7.4.6 block transfer mode............................................................................................ 232 7.4.7 dmac activation ................................................................................................ 237 7.4.8 dmac bus cycle ................................................................................................ 239 7.4.9 multiple-channel operation ................................................................................ 245 7.4.10 external bus requests, dram interface, and dmac........................................ 246 7.4.11 nmi interrupts and dmac.................................................................................. 247 7.4.12 aborting a dmac transfer ................................................................................. 248 7.4.13 exiting full address mode .................................................................................. 249 7.4.14 dmac states in reset state, standby modes, and sleep mode.......................... 250 7.5 interrupts................................................................................................................. ........... 251 7.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ....... 252 7.6.1 note on word data transfer ................................................................................ 252 7.6.2 dmac self-access.............................................................................................. 252 7.6.3 longword access to memory address registers ................................................ 252 7.6.4 note on full address mode setup ....................................................................... 252 7.6.5 note on activating dmac by internal interrupts ............................................... 253 vi 7.6.6 nmi interrupts and block transfer mode............................................................ 254 7.6.7 memory and i/o address register values .......................................................... 254 7.6.8 bus cycle when transfer is aborted.................................................................... 255 7.6.9 transfer requests by a/d converter ................................................................... 255 section 8 i/o ports ............................................................................................................ 257 8.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 257 8.2 port 1..................................................................................................................... ............. 260 8.2.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 260 8.2.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 261 8.3 port 2..................................................................................................................... ............. 263 8.3.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 263 8.3.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 264 8.4 port 3..................................................................................................................... ............. 267 8.4.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 267 8.4.2 register descriptions ........................................................................................... 267 8.5 port 4..................................................................................................................... ............. 269 8.5.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 269 8.5.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 270 8.6 port 5..................................................................................................................... ............. 273 8.6.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 273 8.6.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 273 8.7 port 6..................................................................................................................... ............. 277 8.7.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 277 8.7.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 278 8.8 port 7..................................................................................................................... ............. 281 8.8.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 281 8.8.2 register description ............................................................................................. 282 8.9 port 8..................................................................................................................... ............. 283 8.9.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 283 8.9.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 285 8.10 port 9.................................................................................................................... .............. 289 8.10.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 28 9 8.10.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 290 8.11 port a.................................................................................................................... ............. 294 8.11.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 29 4 8.11.2 register descriptions ........................................................................................... 296 8.12 port b .................................................................................................................... ............. 305 8.12.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 30 5 8.12.2 register descriptions............................................................................................ 307 section 9 16-bit timer ..................................................................................................... 315 9.1 overview................................................................................................................... ......... 315 vii 9.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 3 15 9.1.2 block diagrams.................................................................................................... 318 9.1.3 input/output pins.................................................................................................. 321 9.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 322 9.2 register descriptions...................................................................................................... ... 324 9.2.1 timer start register (tstr)................................................................................ 324 9.2.2 timer synchro register (tsnc).......................................................................... 325 9.2.3 timer mode register (tmdr) ............................................................................ 326 9.2.4 timer interrupt status register a (tisra) ......................................................... 328 9.2.5 timer interrupt status register b (tisrb).......................................................... 331 9.2.6 timer interrupt status register c (tisrc).......................................................... 334 9.2.7 timer counters (tcnt)....................................................................................... 336 9.2.8 general registers (gra, grb) ........................................................................... 337 9.2.9 timer control registers (tcr)............................................................................ 338 9.2.10 timer i/o control register (tior) ..................................................................... 340 9.2.11 timer output level setting register c (tolr).................................................. 342 9.3 cpu interface .............................................................................................................. ...... 345 9.3.1 16-bit accessible registers.................................................................................. 345 9.3.2 8-bit accessible registers.................................................................................... 347 9.4 operation .................................................................................................................. ......... 348 9.4.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 348 9.4.2 basic functions .................................................................................................... 348 9.4.3 synchronization.................................................................................................... 358 9.4.4 pwm mode .......................................................................................................... 360 9.4.5 phase counting mode .......................................................................................... 364 9.4.6 setting initial value of 16-bit timer output ....................................................... 366 9.5 interrupts................................................................................................................. ........... 367 9.5.1 setting of status flags.......................................................................................... 367 9.5.2 timing of clearing of status flags ...................................................................... 369 9.5.3 interrupt sources and dma controller activation.............................................. 370 9.6 usage notes ................................................................................................................ ....... 371 section 10 8-bit timers ..................................................................................................... 383 10.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 383 10.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 383 10.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 385 10.1.3 pin configuration ................................................................................................. 386 10.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 387 10.2 register descriptions..................................................................................................... .... 388 10.2.1 timer counters (tcnt)....................................................................................... 388 10.2.2 time constant registers a (tcora) ................................................................. 389 10.2.3 time constant registers b (tcorb).................................................................. 390 10.2.4 timer control register (tcr) ............................................................................. 390 viii 10.2.5 timer control/status registers (tcsr) .............................................................. 393 10.3 cpu interface ............................................................................................................. ....... 397 10.3.1 8-bit registers...................................................................................................... 397 10.4 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 399 10.4.1 tcnt count timing............................................................................................ 399 10.4.2 compare match timing ....................................................................................... 400 10.4.3 input capture signal timing................................................................................ 401 10.4.4 timing of status flag setting............................................................................... 402 10.4.5 operation with cascaded connection .................................................................. 403 10.4.6 input capture setting............................................................................................ 405 10.5 interrupts................................................................................................................ ............ 407 10.5.1 interrupt sources .................................................................................................. 407 10.5.2 a/d converter activation .................................................................................... 408 10.6 8-bit timer application example ..................................................................................... 408 10.7 usage notes ............................................................................................................... ........ 409 10.7.1 contention between tcnt write and clear........................................................ 409 10.7.2 contention between tcnt write and increment ................................................ 410 10.7.3 contention between tcor write and compare match ...................................... 411 10.7.4 contention between tcor read and input capture ........................................... 412 10.7.5 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment 413 10.7.6 contention between tcor write and input capture .......................................... 414 10.7.7 contention between tcnt byte write and increment in 16-bit count mode (cascaded connection) ........................................................................................ 415 10.7.8 contention between compare matches a and b ................................................. 416 10.7.9 tcnt operation at internal clock source switchover ....................................... 416 section 11 programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) .................................. 419 11.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 419 11.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 419 11.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 420 11.1.3 tpc pins............................................................................................................... 4 21 11.1.4 registers ............................................................................................................... 422 11.2 register descriptions..................................................................................................... .... 423 11.2.1 port a data direction register (paddr) ........................................................... 423 11.2.2 port a data register (padr) .............................................................................. 423 11.2.3 port b data direction register (pbddr)............................................................ 424 11.2.4 port b data register (pbdr)............................................................................... 424 11.2.5 next data register a (ndra) ............................................................................ 425 11.2.6 next data register b (ndrb) ............................................................................. 427 11.2.7 next data enable register a (ndera).............................................................. 429 11.2.8 next data enable register b (nderb) .............................................................. 430 11.2.9 tpc output control register (tpcr) ................................................................. 431 11.2.10 tpc output mode register (tpmr) ................................................................... 434 ix 11.3 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 436 11.3.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 43 6 11.3.2 output timing ...................................................................................................... 437 11.3.3 normal tpc output ............................................................................................. 438 11.3.4 non-overlapping tpc output ............................................................................. 440 11.3.5 tpc output triggering by input capture ............................................................ 442 11.4 usage notes ............................................................................................................... ........ 443 11.4.1 operation of tpc output pins ............................................................................. 443 11.4.2 note on non-overlapping output........................................................................ 443 section 12 watchdog timer ............................................................................................. 445 12.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 445 12.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 445 12.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 446 12.1.3 pin configuration ................................................................................................. 446 12.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 447 12.2 register descriptions..................................................................................................... .... 448 12.2.1 timer counter (tcnt) ........................................................................................ 448 12.2.2 timer control/status register (tcsr) ................................................................ 449 12.2.3 reset control/status register (rstcsr) ............................................................ 451 12.2.4 notes on register access ..................................................................................... 453 12.3 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 455 12.3.1 watchdog timer operation.................................................................................. 455 12.3.2 interval timer operation...................................................................................... 456 12.3.3 timing of setting of overflow flag (ovf) ......................................................... 457 12.3.4 timing of setting of watchdog timer reset bit (wrst) .................................. 458 12.4 interrupts................................................................................................................ ............ 459 12.5 usage notes ............................................................................................................... ........ 459 section 13 serial communication interface ................................................................ 461 13.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 461 13.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 461 13.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 463 13.1.3 input/output pins.................................................................................................. 464 13.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 465 13.2 register descriptions ..................................................................................................... ... 466 13.2.1 receive shift register (rsr)............................................................................... 466 13.2.2 receive data register (rdr) .............................................................................. 466 13.2.3 transmit shift register (tsr).............................................................................. 467 13.2.4 transmit data register (tdr) ............................................................................. 467 13.2.5 serial mode register (smr)................................................................................ 468 13.2.6 serial control register (scr).............................................................................. 472 13.2.7 serial status register (ssr)................................................................................. 476 x 13.2.8 bit rate register (brr)....................................................................................... 483 13.3 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 491 13.3.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 49 1 13.3.2 operation in asynchronous mode........................................................................ 493 13.3.3 multiprocessor communication ........................................................................... 503 13.3.4 synchronous operation ........................................................................................ 509 13.4 sci interrupts ............................................................................................................ ........ 518 13.5 usage notes ............................................................................................................... ........ 518 13.5.1 notes on use of sci ............................................................................................. 518 section 14 smart card interface ...................................................................................... 525 14.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 525 14.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 525 14.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 526 14.1.3 pin configuration ................................................................................................. 526 14.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 527 14.2 register descriptions..................................................................................................... .... 528 14.2.1 smart card mode register (scmr) .................................................................... 528 14.2.2 serial status register (ssr)................................................................................. 529 14.2.3 serial mode register (smr)................................................................................ 531 14.2.4 serial control register (scr).............................................................................. 532 14.3 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 532 14.3.1 overview .............................................................................................................. 53 2 14.3.2 pin connections.................................................................................................... 533 14.3.3 data format.......................................................................................................... 534 14.3.4 register settings................................................................................................... 535 14.3.5 clock ................................................................................................................... . 537 14.3.6 transmitting and receiving data......................................................................... 539 14.4 usage notes ............................................................................................................... ........ 547 section 15 a/d converter ................................................................................................. 551 15.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 551 15.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 551 15.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 552 15.1.3 input pins.............................................................................................................. 553 15.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 554 15.2 register descriptions..................................................................................................... .... 555 15.2.1 a/d data registers a to d (addra to addrd).............................................. 555 15.2.2 a/d control/status register (adcsr)................................................................ 556 15.2.3 a/d control register (adcr)............................................................................. 559 15.3 cpu interface ............................................................................................................. ....... 560 15.4 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 561 15.4.1 single mode (scan = 0) ..................................................................................... 561 xi 15.4.2 scan mode (scan = 1) ....................................................................................... 563 15.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time.......................................................... 565 15.4.4 external trigger input timing ............................................................................. 566 15.5 interrupts................................................................................................................ ............ 567 15.6 usage notes ............................................................................................................... ........ 567 section 16 d/a converter ................................................................................................. 573 16.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 573 16.1.1 features ................................................................................................................ 573 16.1.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 573 16.1.3 input/output pins.................................................................................................. 574 16.1.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 574 16.2 register descriptions..................................................................................................... .... 575 16.2.1 d/a data registers 0 and 1 (dadr0/1).............................................................. 575 16.2.2 d/a control register (dacr)............................................................................. 575 16.2.3 d/a standby control register (dastcr) .......................................................... 577 16.3 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 578 16.4 d/a output control ........................................................................................................ ... 579 section 17 ram ................................................................................................................... 581 17.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 581 17.1.1 block diagram...................................................................................................... 581 17.1.2 register configuration ......................................................................................... 582 17.2 system control register (syscr).................................................................................... 583 17.3 operation ................................................................................................................. .......... 584 section 18 rom ................................................................................................................... 585 18.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 585 18.2 overview of flash memory............................................................................................... 586 18.2.1 features ................................................................................................................ 586 18.2.2 block diagram...................................................................................................... 587 18.2.3 pin configuration ................................................................................................. 588 18.2.4 register configuration ......................................................................................... 588 18.3 register descriptions ..................................................................................................... ... 589 18.3.1 flash memory control register (flmcr).......................................................... 589 18.3.2 erase block register (ebr)................................................................................. 593 18.3.3 ram control register (ramcr) ....................................................................... 594 18.3.4 flash memory status register.............................................................................. 596 18.4 on-board programming modes ........................................................................................ 598 18.4.1 boot mode............................................................................................................ 601 18.4.2 user program mode ............................................................................................. 606 18.5 programming/erasing flash memory................................................................................ 608 18.5.1 program mode...................................................................................................... 609 xii 18.5.2 program-verify mode .......................................................................................... 610 18.5.3 erase mode........................................................................................................... 612 18.5.4 erase-verify mode ............................................................................................... 612 18.6 flash memory protection .................................................................................................. 6 14 18.6.1 hardware protection............................................................................................. 614 18.6.2 software protection.............................................................................................. 616 18.6.3 error protection .................................................................................................... 616 18.6.4 nmi input disable conditions ............................................................................. 618 18.7 flash memory emulation by ram ................................................................................... 619 18.8 flash memory prom mode ............................................................................................. 620 18.8.1 prom mode setting............................................................................................ 620 18.8.2 memory map........................................................................................................ 620 18.8.3 prom mode operation ....................................................................................... 621 18.8.4 memory read mode............................................................................................. 623 18.8.5 auto-program mode ............................................................................................ 626 18.8.6 auto-erase mode.................................................................................................. 628 18.8.7 status read mode................................................................................................. 630 18.8.8 prom mode transition time.............................................................................. 631 18.8.9 notes on memory programming ......................................................................... 632 18.9 notes on flash memory programming/erasing ................................................................ 633 18.10 mask rom overview........................................................................................................ 638 18.10.1 block diagram...................................................................................................... 638 18.11 notes on ordering mask rom version chip ................................................................... 639 section 19 clock pulse generator .................................................................................. 641 19.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 641 19.1.1 block diagram...................................................................................................... 641 19.2 oscillator circuit ........................................................................................................ ....... 642 19.2.1 connecting a crystal resonator ........................................................................... 642 19.2.2 external clock input ............................................................................................ 644 19.3 duty adjustment circuit................................................................................................... . 647 19.4 prescalers ................................................................................................................ ........... 647 19.5 frequency divider ......................................................................................................... .... 647 19.5.1 register configuration ......................................................................................... 647 19.5.2 division control register (divcr) .................................................................... 647 19.5.3 usage notes.......................................................................................................... 648 section 20 power-down state .......................................................................................... 649 20.1 overview.................................................................................................................. .......... 649 20.2 register configuration .................................................................................................... .. 651 20.2.1 system control register (syscr) ...................................................................... 651 20.2.2 module standby control register h (mstcrh)................................................ 653 20.2.3 module standby control register l (mstcrl)................................................. 654 xiii 20.3 sleep mode................................................................................................................ ........ 656 20.3.1 transition to sleep mode ..................................................................................... 656 20.3.2 exit from sleep mode .......................................................................................... 656 20.4 software standby mode .................................................................................................... 6 57 20.4.1 transition to software standby mode.................................................................. 657 20.4.2 exit from software standby mode....................................................................... 657 20.4.3 selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode...................... 658 20.4.4 sample application of software standby mode.................................................. 659 20.4.5 note .................................................................................................................... .. 659 20.4.6 cautions on clearing the software standby mode of f-ztat version.............. 660 20.5 hardware standby mode ................................................................................................... 66 1 20.5.1 transition to hardware standby mode ................................................................ 661 20.5.2 exit from hardware standby mode ..................................................................... 661 20.5.3 timing for hardware standby mode ................................................................... 661 20.6 module standby function.................................................................................................. 6 62 20.6.1 module standby timing....................................................................................... 662 20.6.2 read/write in module standby............................................................................ 662 20.6.3 usage notes.......................................................................................................... 662 20.7 system clock output disabling function ......................................................................... 663 section 21 electrical characteristics .............................................................................. 665 21.1 electrical characteristics of mask rom version ............................................................. 665 21.1.1 absolute maximum ratings................................................................................. 665 21.1.2 dc characteristics................................................................................................ 666 21.1.3 ac characteristics................................................................................................ 677 21.1.4 a/d conversion characteristics ........................................................................... 686 21.1.5 d/a conversion characteristics ........................................................................... 688 21.2 electrical characteristics of flash memory and flash memory r versions .................... 689 21.2.1 absolute maximum ratings................................................................................. 689 21.2.2 dc characteristics................................................................................................ 690 21.2.3 ac characteristics................................................................................................ 698 21.2.4 a/d conversion characteristics ........................................................................... 707 21.2.5 d/a conversion characteristics ........................................................................... 709 21.2.6 flash memory characteristics.............................................................................. 710 21.3 operational timing........................................................................................................ .... 712 21.3.1 clock timing........................................................................................................ 712 21.3.2 control signal timing.......................................................................................... 713 21.3.3 bus timing ........................................................................................................... 715 21.3.4 dram interface bus timing............................................................................... 721 21.3.5 tpc and i/o port timing ..................................................................................... 724 21.3.6 timer input/output timing.................................................................................. 725 21.3.7 sci input/output timing ..................................................................................... 726 21.3.8 dmac timing ..................................................................................................... 727 xiv appendix a instruction set .............................................................................................. 729 a.1 instruction list............................................................................................................ ....... 729 a.2 operation code maps........................................................................................................ 744 a.3 number of states required for execution ........................................................................ 747 appendix b internal i/o registers ................................................................................. 756 b.1 addresses................................................................................................................... ........ 756 b.2 functions................................................................................................................... ......... 767 appendix c i/o port block diagrams .......................................................................... 860 c.1 port 1 block diagram....................................................................................................... . 860 c.2 port 2 block diagram....................................................................................................... . 861 c.3 port 3 block diagram....................................................................................................... . 862 c.4 port 4 block diagram....................................................................................................... . 863 c.5 port 5 block diagram....................................................................................................... . 864 c.6 port 6 block diagrams ...................................................................................................... 865 c.7 port 7 block diagrams ...................................................................................................... 872 c.8 port 8 block diagrams ...................................................................................................... 873 c.9 port 9 block diagrams ...................................................................................................... 878 c.10 port a block diagrams..................................................................................................... . 884 c.11 port b block diagrams..................................................................................................... . 887 appendix d pin states ....................................................................................................... 895 d.1 port states in each mode .................................................................................................. 89 5 d.2 pin states at reset......................................................................................................... ..... 902 appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode .............................................................................................. 905 appendix f product code lineup ................................................................................. 906 appendix g package dimensions .................................................................................. 907 appendix h comparison of h8/300h series product specifications ................. 910 h.1 differences between h8/3067 and h8/3062 series, h8/3048 series, h8/3007 and h8/3006, and h8/3002................................................................................. 910 h.2 comparison of pin functions of 100-pin package products (fp-100b, tfp-100b)........ 913 1 section 1 overview 1.1 overview the h8/3067 series is a series of microcontrollers (mcus) that integrate system supporting functions together with an h8/300h cpu core having an original hitachi architecture. the h8/300h cpu has a 32-bit internal architecture with sixteen 16-bit general registers, and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for speed. it can address a 16-mbyte linear address space. its instruction set is upward-compatible at the object-code level with the h8/300 cpu, enabling easy porting of software from the h8/300 series. the on-chip system supporting functions include rom, ram, a 16-bit timer, an 8-bit timer, a programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), a watchdog timer (wdt), a serial communication interface (sci), an a/d converter, a d/a converter, i/o ports, a direct memory access controller (dmac), and other facilities. the three members of the h8/3067 series are the h8/3067, the h8/3066, and the h8/3065. the h8/3067 has 128 kbytes of rom and 4 kbytes of ram. the h8/3066 has 96 kbytes of rom and 4 kbytes of ram. the h8/3065 has 64 kbytes of rom and 2 kbytes of ram. seven mcu operating modes offer a choice of bus width and address space size. the modes (modes 1 to 7) include two single-chip modes and five expanded modes. in addition to the mask rom versions, the h8/3067 series includes an f-ztat * version with on-chip flash memory that can be programmed on-board. this version enables users to respond quickly and flexibly to changing application specifications, growing production volumes, and other conditions. table 1.1 summarizes the features of the h8/3067 series. note: * f-ztat (flexible ztat) is a trademark of hitachi, ltd. 2 table 1.1 features feature description cpu upward-compatible with the h8/300 cpu at the object-code level general-register machine ? sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) high-speed operation ? maximum clock rate: 20 mhz ? add/subtract: 100 ns ? multiply/divide: 700 ns 16-mbyte address space instruction features ? 8/16/32-bit data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions ? signed and unsigned multiply instructions (8 bits x 8 bits, 16 bits x 16 bits) ? signed and unsigned divide instructions (16 bits ?8 bits, 32 bits ?16 bits) ? bit accumulator function ? bit manipulation instructions with register-indirect specification of bit positions memory h8/3067 ? rom: 128 kbytes ? ram: 4 kbytes h8/3066 ? rom: 96 kbytes ? ram: 4 kbytes h8/3065 ? rom: 64 kbytes ? ram: 2 kbytes interrupt controller ? seven external interrupt pins: nmi, irq 0 to irq 5 ? 36 internal interrupts ? three selectable interrupt priority levels bus controller ? address space can be partitioned into eight areas, with independent bus specifications in each area ? chip select output available for areas 0 to 7 ? 8-bit access or 16-bit access selectable for each area ? two-state or three-state access selectable for each area ? selection of two wait modes ? number of program wait states selectable for each area ? direct connection of burst rom ? direct connection of up to 8-mbyte dram (or dram interface can be used as interval timer) ? bus arbitration function 3 table 1.1 features feature description dma controller (dmac) short address mode ? maximum four channels available ? selection of i/o mode, idle mode, or repeat mode ? can be activated by compare match/input capture a interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, conversion-end interrupts from the a/d converter, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from the sci, or external requests full address mode ? maximum two channels available ? selection of normal mode or block transfer mode ? can be activated by compare match/input capture a interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, conversion-end interrupts from the a/d converter, external requests, or auto-request 16-bit timer, 3 channels ? three 16-bit timer channels, capable of processing up to six pulse outputs or six pulse inputs ? 16-bit timer counter (channels 0 to 2) ? two multiplexed output compare/input capture pins (channels 0 to 2) ? operation can be synchronized (channels 0 to 2) ? pwm mode available (channels 0 to 2) ? phase counting mode available (channel 2) ? dmac can be activated by compare match/input capture a interrupts (channels 0 to 2) 8-bit timer, 4 channels ? 8-bit up-counter (external event count capability) ? two time constant registers ? two channels can be connected programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) ? maximum 16-bit pulse output, using 16-bit timer as time base ? up to four 4-bit pulse output groups (or one 16-bit group, or two 8-bit groups) ? non-overlap mode available ? output data can be transferred by dmac watchdog timer (wdt), 1 channel ? reset signal can be generated by overflow ? reset signal can be output externally (not in the f-ztat version) ? usable as an interval timer serial communication interface (sci), 3 channels ? selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode ? full duplex: can transmit and receive simultaneously ? on-chip baud-rate generator ? smart card interface functions added 4 table 1.1 features (cont) feature description a/d converter ? resolution: 10 bits ? eight channels, with selection of single or scan mode ? variable analog conversion voltage range ? sample-and-hold function ? a/d conversion can be started by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare- match ? dmac can be activated by an a/d conversion end interrupt d/a converter ? resolution: 8 bits ? two channels ? d/a outputs can be sustained in software standby mode i/o ports ? 70 input/output pins ? 9 input-only pins operating modes seven mcu operating modes mode address space address pins initial bus width max. bus width mode 1 1 mbyte a 19 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 2 1 mbyte a 19 to a 0 16 bits 16 bits mode 3 16 mbytes a 23 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 4 16 mbytes a 23 to a 0 16 bits 16 bits mode 5 16 mbytes a 23 to a 0 8 bits 16 bits mode 6 64 kbyte mode 7 1 mbyte ? on-chip rom is disabled in modes 1 to 4 power-down state ? sleep mode ? software standby mode ? hardware standby mode ? module standby function ? programmable system clock frequency division other features ? on-chip clock pulse generator 5 table 1.1 features (cont) feature description product lineup product type product code package h8/3067 on-chip 5 v flash memory HD64F3067f HD64F3067te HD64F3067fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 5 vr HD64F3067rf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) HD64F3067rte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) HD64F3067rfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 vr HD64F3067rvf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) HD64F3067rvte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) HD64F3067rvfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) on-chip 5 v mask rom hd6433067f hd6433067te hd6433067fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 v hd6433067vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433067vte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433067vfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) h8/3066 on-chip 5 v mask rom hd6433066f hd6433066te hd6433066fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 v hd6433066vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433066vte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433066vfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) h8/3065 mask 5 v rom version hd6433065f hd6433065te hd6433065fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 v hd6433065vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433065vte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433065vfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 6 1.2 block diagram figure 1.1 shows an internal block diagram. v v v v v v v v v cc cc cc ss ss ss ss ss ss p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 3 port 4 port 5 port 9 p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a 3 2 1 0 19 18 17 16 p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p9 /sck /irq p9 /sck /irq p9 /rxd p9 /rxd p9 /txd p9 /txd 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 5 4 da 1 /an 7 /p7 7 da 0 /an 6 /p7 6 an 5 /p7 5 an 4 /p7 4 an 3 /p7 3 an 2 /p7 2 an 1 /p7 1 an 0 /p7 0 port 7 a 20 /tiocb 2 /tp 7 /pa 7 a 21 /tioca 2 /tp 6 /pa 6 a 22 /tiocb 1 /tp 5 /pa 5 a 23 /tioca 1 /tp 4 /pa 4 tclkd/tiocb 0 /tp 3 /pa 3 tclkc/tioca 0 /tp 2 /pa 2 tend 1 /tclkb/tp 1 /pa 1 tend 0 /tclka/tp 0 /pa 0 port a rxd 2 /tp 15 /pb 7 txd 2 /tp 14 /pb 6 sck 2 /lcas/tp 13 /pb 5 ucas/tp 12 /pb 4 cs 4 /dreq 1 /tmio 3 /tp 11 /pb 3 cs 5 /tmo 2 /tp 10 /pb 2 cs 6 /dreq 0 /tmio 1 /tp 9 /pb 1 cs 7 /tmo 0 /tp 8 /pb 0 port 8 cs 0 /p8 4 adtrg/cs 1 /irq 3 /p8 3 cs 2 /irq 2 /p8 2 cs 3 /irq 1 /p8 1 rfsh/irq 0 /p8 0 md md md extal xtal stby res fwe*/reso nmi 2 1 0 h8/300h cpu clock pulse generator interrupt controller rom (mask rom or flash memory) dma controller (dmac) serial communication interface (sci) 3 channels figure 1.1 block diagram 7 1.3 pin description 1.3.1 pin arrangement the pin arrangement of the h8/3067 series fp-100b and tfp-100b packages is shown in figure 1.2, and that of the fp-100a package in figure 1.3. v cc cs 7 /tmo 0 /tp 8 /pb 0 cs 6 /dreq 0 /tmio 1 /tp 9 /pb 1 cs 5 /tmo 2 /tp 10 /pb 2 cs 4 /dreq 1 /tmio 3 /tp 11 /pb 3 ucas/tp 12 /pb 4 sck 2 /lcas/tp 13 /pb 5 txd 2 /tp 14 /pb 6 rxd 2 /tp 15 /pb 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 fwe* /reso v ss txd /p9 txd /p9 rxd /p9 rxd /p9 irq /sck /p9 irq /sck /p9 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 d /p4 md md md p6 /lwr p6 /hwr p6 /rd p6 /as v xtal extal v nmi res stby p6 7 / figure 1.2 pin arrangement (fp-100b or tfp-100b, top view) 8 p7 0 /an 0 v ref av cc md 2 md 1 md 0 p6 6 /lwr p6 5 /hwr p6 4 /rd p6 3 /as v cc xtal extal v ss nmi res stby p6 7 / figure 1.3 pin arrangement (fp-100a, top view) 9 1.3.2 pin functions table 1.2 summarizes the pin functions. table 1.2 pin functions pin no. type symbol fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a i/o name and function power v cc 1, 35, 68 3, 37, 70 input power: for connection to the power supply. connect all v cc pins to the system power supply. v ss 11, 22, 44, 57, 65, 92 13, 24, 46, 59, 67, 94 input ground: for connection to ground (0 v). connect all v ss pins to the 0-v system power supply. clock xtal 67 69 input for connection to a crystal resonator. for examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 19, clock pulse generator. extal 66 68 input for connection to a crystal resonator or input of an external clock signal. for examples of crystal resonator and external clock input, see section 19, clock pulse generator. 0 0 1 mode 1 0 1 0 mode 2 0 1 1 mode 3 1 0 0 mode 4 1 0 1 mode 5 1 1 0 mode 6 1 1 1 mode 7 10 table 1.2 pin functions (cont) pin no. type symbol fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a i/o name and function system control res reso stby breq back irq irq cs cs as rd hwr 11 table 1.2 pin functions (cont) pin no. type symbol fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a i/o name and function bus control lwr wait rfsh cs cs ras rd we hwr ucas ucas lwr lcas lcas dreq dreq tend tend 12 table 1.2 pin functions (cont) pin no. type symbol fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a i/o name and function program- mable timing pattern controller (tpc) tp 15 to tp 0 9 to 2, 100 to 93 11 to 4, 2, 1, 100 to 95 output tpc output 15 to 0: pulse output serial communi- txd 2 to txd 0 8, 13, 12 10, 15, 14 output transmit data (channels 0, 1, 2): sci data output cation interface rxd 2 to rxd 0 9, 15, 14 11, 17, 16 input receive data (channels 0, 1, 2): sci data input (sci) sck 2 to sck 0 7, 17, 16 9, 19, 18 input/ output serial clock (channels 0, 1, 2): sci clock input/output a/d converter an 7 to an 0 85 to 78 87 to 80 input analog 7 to 0: analog input pins adtrg 13 table 1.2 pin functions (cont) pin no. type symbol fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a i/o name and function i/o ports p4 7 to p4 0 26 to 23, 21 to 18 28 to 25, 23 to 20 input/ output port 4: eight input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port 4 data direction register (p4ddr). p5 3 to p5 0 56 to 53 58 to 55 input/ output port 5: four input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port 5 data direction register (p5ddr). p6 7 to p6 0 61, 72 to 69, 60 to 58 63, 74 to 71, 62 to 60 input/ output port 6: eight input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port 6 data direction register (p6ddr). p7 7 to p7 0 85 to 78 87 to 80 input port 7: eight input pins p8 4 to p8 0 91 to 87 93 to 89 input/ output port 8: five input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port 8 data direction register (p8ddr). p9 5 to p9 0 17 to 12 19 to 14 input/ output port 9: six input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port 9 data direction register (p9ddr). pa 7 to pa 0 100 to 93 2, 1, 100 to 95 input/ output port a: eight input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port a data direction register (paddr). pb 7 to pb 0 9 to 2 11 to 4 input/ output port b: eight input/output pins. the direction of each pin can be selected in the port b data direction register (pbddr). 14 1.3.3 pin assignments in each mode table 1.3 lists the pin assignments in each mode. table 1.3 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b, fp-100a) pin no. pin name fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 13v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc 24pb 0 /tp 8 / tmo 0 / cs cs cs cs cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq dreq cs cs cs cs cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq cs dreq dreq ucas ucas ucas ucas ucas lcas lcas lcas lcas lcas reso reso reso reso reso reso reso irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq irq reso 15 table 1.3 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b, fp-100a) (cont) pin no. pin name fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 23 25 p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 4 /d 4 * 2 p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 4 /d 4 * 2 p4 4 /d 4 * 1 p4 4 p4 4 24 26 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 5 /d 5 * 2 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 5 /d 5 * 2 p4 5 /d 5 * 1 p4 5 p4 5 25 27 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 6 /d 6 * 2 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 6 /d 6 * 2 p4 6 /d 6 * 1 p4 6 p4 6 26 28 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 p4 7 /d 7 * 2 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 p4 7 /d 7 * 2 p4 7 /d 7 * 1 p4 7 p4 7 27 29 d 8 d 8 d 8 d 8 d 8 p3 0 p3 0 28 30 d 9 d 9 d 9 d 9 d 9 p3 1 p3 1 29 31 d 10 d 10 d 10 d 10 d 10 p3 2 p3 2 30 32 d 11 d 11 d 11 d 11 d 11 p3 3 p3 3 31 33 d 12 d 12 d 12 d 12 d 12 p3 4 p3 4 32 34 d 13 d 13 d 13 d 13 d 13 p3 5 p3 5 33 35 d 14 d 14 d 14 d 14 d 14 p3 6 p3 6 34 36 d 15 d 15 d 15 d 15 d 15 p3 7 p3 7 35 37 v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc v cc 36 38 a 0 a 0 a 0 a 0 p1 0 /a 0 p1 0 p1 0 37 39 a 1 a 1 a 1 a 1 p1 1 /a 1 p1 1 p1 1 38 40 a 2 a 2 a 2 a 2 p1 2 /a 2 p1 2 p1 2 39 41 a 3 a 3 a 3 a 3 p1 3 /a 3 p1 3 p1 3 40 42 a 4 a 4 a 4 a 4 p1 4 /a 4 p1 4 p1 4 41 43 a 5 a 5 a 5 a 5 p1 5 /a 5 p1 5 p1 5 42 44 a 6 a 6 a 6 a 6 p1 6 /a 6 p1 6 p1 6 43 45 a 7 a 7 a 7 a 7 p1 7 /a 7 p1 7 p1 7 44 46 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 45 47 a 8 a 8 a 8 a 8 p2 0 /a 8 p2 0 p2 0 46 48 a 9 a 9 a 9 a 9 p2 1 /a 9 p2 1 p2 1 47 49 a 10 a 10 a 10 a 10 p2 2 /a 10 p2 2 p2 2 48 50 a 11 a 11 a 11 a 11 p2 3 /a 11 p2 3 p2 3 49 51 a 12 a 12 a 12 a 12 p2 4 /a 12 p2 4 p2 4 50 52 a 13 a 13 a 13 a 13 p2 5 /a 13 p2 5 p2 5 51 53 a 14 a 14 a 14 a 14 p2 6 /a 14 p2 6 p2 6 52 54 a 15 a 15 a 15 a 15 p2 7 /a 15 p2 7 p2 7 53 55 a 16 a 16 a 16 a 16 p5 0 /a 16 p5 0 p5 0 54 56 a 17 a 17 a 17 a 17 p5 1 /a 17 p5 1 p5 1 55 57 a 18 a 18 a 18 a 18 p5 2 /a 18 p5 2 p5 2 56 58 a 19 a 19 a 19 a 19 p5 3 /a 19 p5 3 p5 3 notes: 1. in modes 1, 3, 5 the p4 0 to p4 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 2. in modes 2 and 4 the d 0 to d 7 functions of pins p4 0 /d 0 to p4 7 /d 7 are selected after a reset, but they can be changed by software. 16 table 1.3 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b, fp-100a) (cont) pin no. pin name fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 57 59 v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss v ss 58 60 p6 0 / wait wait wait wait wait breq breq breq breq breq back back back back back ??? stby stby stby stby stby stby stby res res res res res res res as as as as as rd rd rd rd rd hwr hwr hwr hwr hwr lwr lwr lwr lwr lwr irq rfsh irq rfsh irq rfsh irq rfsh irq rfsh irq irq 17 table 1.3 pin assignments in each mode (fp-100b or tfp-100b, fp-100a) (cont) pin no. pin name fp-100b tfp-100b fp-100a mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 88 90 p8 1 / irq cs irq cs irq cs irq cs irq cs irq irq irq cs irq cs irq cs irq cs irq cs irq irq irq cs adtrg irq cs adtrg irq cs adtrg irq cs adtrg irq cs adtrg irq adtrg irq adtrg cs cs cs cs cs tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend tend 18 1.4 notes on flash memory r version model there are two models with on-chip flash memory in the h8/3067 series: the flash memory version (HD64F3067) and the flash memory r version (HD64F3067r). points to be noted when using the flash memory r version are given below. 1.4.1 pin arrangement the flash memory r version has the same pin arrangement as the flash memory version and mask rom versions. 1.4.2 product type names and markings table 1.4 shows the product type names and differences in sample markings for the flash memory version and flash memory r version. table 1.4 differences in flash memory version and flash memory r version markings flash memory version flash memory r version tfp-100 product type name HD64F3067te HD64F3067rte sample markings h8/3067 japan hd 64f3067te20 h8/3067 r japan hd 64f3067te20 "r" is printed above the type name fp-100b product type name HD64F3067f HD64F3067rf sample markings h8/3067 japan hd 64f3067f20 h8/3067 r japan hd 64f3067f20 "r" is printed above the type name fp-100a product type name HD64F3067fp HD64F3067rfp sample markings h8/3067 japan hd 64f3067fp20 h8/3067 r japan hd 64f3067fp20 "r" is printed above the type name 19 1.4.3 differences in flash memory r version table 1.5 shows the differences between the flash memory version, flash memory r version, and mask rom versions. table 1.5 differences between flash memory version, flash memory r version, and mask rom versions item flash memory version HD64F3067 flash memory r version HD64F3067r mask rom versions hd6433067 hd6433066 hd6433065 rom 128 kb flash memory 128 kb mask rom 96 kb mask rom 64 kb mask rom address output functions compatible with previous h8/300h series choice of address update mode 1 (compatible with previous h8/300h series) or address update mode 2 see the section on the bus controller for details. adrcr register (h'fee01e) corresponding address consists of reserved bits 7 6 5 4 3 0 adrctl 2 1 see the section on the bus controller for the bit function. 20 21 section 2 cpu 2.1 overview the h8/300h cpu is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with the h8/300 cpu. the h8/300h cpu has sixteen 16-bit general registers, can address a 16-mbyte linear address space, and is ideal for realtime control. 2.1.1 features the h8/300h cpu has the following features. ? upward compatibility with h8/300 cpu can execute h8/300 series object programs ? general-register architecture sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers) ? sixty-two basic instructions ? 8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions ? multiply and divide instructions ? powerful bit-manipulation instructions ? eight addressing modes ? register direct [rn] ? register indirect [@ern] ? register indirect with displacement [@(d:16, ern) or @(d:24, ern)] ? register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ern+ or @?rn] ? absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24] ? immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32] ? program-counter relative [@(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc)] ? memory indirect [@@aa:8] ? 16-mbyte linear address space 22 ? high-speed operation ? all frequently-used instructions execute in two to four states ? maximum clock frequency: 20 mhz ? 8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns ? 8 8-bit register-register multiply: 700 ns ? 16 ?8-bit register-register divide: 700 ns ? 16 16-bit register-register multiply: 1.1 ? ? 32 ?16-bit register-register divide: 1.1 ? ? two cpu operating modes ? normal mode ? advanced mode ? low-power mode transition to power-down state by sleep instruction 2.1.2 differences from h8/300 cpu in comparison to the h8/300 cpu, the h8/300h has the following enhancements. ? more general registers eight 16-bit registers have been added. ? expanded address space ? advanced mode supports a maximum 16-mbyte address space. ? normal mode supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the h8/300 cpu. ? enhanced addressing the addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-mbyte address space. ? enhanced instructions ? data transfer, arithmetic, and logic instructions can operate on 32-bit data. ? signed multiply/divide instructions and other instructions have been added. 23 2.2 cpu operating modes the h8/300h cpu has two operating modes: normal and advanced. normal mode supports a maximum 64-kbyte address space. advanced mode supports up to 16 mbytes. cpu operating modes normal mode advanced mode maximum 64 kbytes, program and data areas combined maximum 16 mbytes, program and data areas combined figure 2.1 cpu operating modes 24 2.3 address space figure 2.2 shows a simple memory map for the h8/3067 series. the h8/300h cpu can address a linear address space with a maximum size of 64 kbytes in normal mode, and 16 mbytes in advanced mode. for further details see section 3.6, memory map in each operating mode. the 1-mbyte operating modes use 20-bit addressing. the upper 4 bits of effective addresses are ignored. h'00000 h'fffff h'000000 h'ffffff a. 1-mbyte mode b. 16-mbyte mode h'0000 h'ffff advanced mode normal mode figure 2.2 memory map 25 2.4 register configuration 2.4.1 overview the h8/300h cpu has the internal registers shown in figure 2.3. there are two types of registers: general registers and control registers. er0 er1 er2 er3 er4 er5 er6 er7 e0 e1 e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 r0h r1h r2h r3h r4h r5h r6h r7h r0l r1l r2l r3l r4l r5l r6l r7l 0 7 0 7 0 15 (sp) 23 0 pc 7 ccr 6543210 iuihunzvc general registers (ern) control registers (cr) legend sp: pc: ccr: i: ui: h: u: n: z: v: c: stack pointer program counter condition code register interrupt mask bit user bit or interrupt mask bit half-carry flag user bit negative flag zero flag overflow flag carry flag figure 2.3 cpu registers 26 2.4.2 general registers the h8/300h cpu has eight 32-bit general registers. these general registers are all functionally alike and can be used without distinction between data registers and address registers. when a general register is used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. when the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or as address registers, they are designated by the letters er (er0 to er7). the er registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters e (e0 to e7) and r (r0 to r7). these registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 16-bit registers. the e registers (e0 to e7) are also referred to as extended registers. the r registers divide into 8-bit general registers designated by the letters rh (r0h to r7h) and rl (r0l to r7l). these registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum sixteen 8-bit registers. figure 2.4 illustrates the usage of the general registers. the usage of each register can be selected independently. ? address registers ? 32-bit registers ? 16-bit registers ? 8-bit registers er registers er0 to er7 e registers (extended registers) e0 to e7 r registers r0 to r7 rh registers r0h to r7h rl registers r0l to r7l figure 2.4 usage of general registers 27 general register er7 has the function of stack pointer (sp) in addition to its general-register function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. figure 2.5 shows the stack. free area stack area sp (er7) figure 2.5 stack 2.4.3 control registers the control registers are the 24-bit program counter (pc) and the 8-bit condition code register (ccr). program counter (pc): this 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the cpu will execute. the length of all cpu instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant pc bit is ignored. when an instruction is fetched, the least significant pc bit is regarded as 0. condition code register (ccr): this 8-bit register contains internal cpu status information, including the interrupt mask bit (i) and half-carry (h), negative (n), zero (z), overflow (v), and carry (c) flags. bit 7?nterrupt mask bit (i): masks interrupts other than nmi when set to 1. nmi is accepted regardless of the i bit setting. the i bit is set to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence. bit 6?ser bit or interrupt mask bit (ui): can be written and read by software using the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. this bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. for details see section 5, interrupt controller. 28 bit 5?alf-carry flag (h): when the add.b, addx.b, sub.b, subx.b, cmp.b, or neg.b instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0 otherwise. when the add.w, sub.w, cmp.w, or neg.w instruction is executed, the h flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. when the add.l, sub.l, cmp.l, or neg.l instruction is executed, the h flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise. bit 4?ser bit (u): can be written and read by software using the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. bit 3?egative flag (n): stores the value of the most significant bit of data, regarded as the sign bit. bit 2?ero flag (z): set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data. bit 1?verflow flag (v): set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0 at other times. bit 0?arry flag (c): set to 1 when a carry is generated by execution of an operation, and cleared to 0 otherwise. used by: ? add instructions, to indicate a carry ? subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow ? shift and rotate instructions the carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit manipulation instructions. some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. operations can be performed on ccr by the ldc, stc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions. the n, z, v, and c flags are used by conditional branch (bcc) instructions. for the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix a.1, instruction list. for the i and ui bits, see section 5, interrupt controller. 2.4.4 initial cpu register values in reset exception handling, pc is initialized to a value loaded from the vector table, and the i bit in ccr is set to 1. the other ccr bits and the general registers are not initialized. in particular, the initial value of the stack pointer (er7) is also undefined. the stack pointer (er7) must therefore be initialized by an mov.l instruction executed immediately after a reset. 29 2.5 data formats the h8/300h cpu can process 1-bit, 4-bit (bcd), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data. bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ? 7) of byte operand data. the daa and das decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit bcd data. 2.5.1 general register data formats figures 2.6 and 2.7 show the data formats in general registers. 7 rnh rnl rnh rnl rnh rnl 1-bit data 1-bit data 4-bit bcd data 4-bit bcd data byte data byte data 6543210 70 don t care 76543210 70 don t care don t care 70 43 lower digit upper digit 7 43 lower digit upper digit don t care 0 70 don t care msb lsb don t care 70 msb lsb data type data format general register rnh: rnl: general register rh general register rl legend figure 2.6 general register data formats 30 rn en ern word data word data longword data 15 0 msb lsb general register data type data format 15 0 msb lsb 31 16 msb 15 0 lsb legend ern: en: rn: msb: lsb: general register general register e general register r most significant bit least significant bit figure 2.7 general register data formats 2.5.2 memory data formats figure 2.8 shows the data formats on memory. the h8/300h cpu can access word data and longword data on memory, but word or longword data must begin at an even address. if an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access starts at the preceding address. this also applies to instruction fetches. 31 76543210 address l address l lsb msb msb lsb 70 msb lsb 1-bit data byte data word data longword data address data type data format address 2m address 2m + 1 address 2n address 2n + 1 address 2n + 2 address 2n + 3 figure 2.8 memory data formats when er7 (sp) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word size or longword size. 32 2.6 instruction set 2.6.1 instruction set overview the h8/300h cpu has 62 types of instructions, which are classified in table 2.1. table 2.1 instruction classification function instruction types data transfer mov, push* 1 , pop* 1 , movtpe* 2 , movfpe* 2 3 arithmetic operations add, sub, addx, subx, inc, dec, adds, subs, daa, das, mulxu, mulxs, divxu, divxs, cmp, neg, exts, extu 18 logic operations and, or, xor, not 4 shift operations shal, shar, shll, shlr, rotl, rotr, rotxl, rotxr 8 bit manipulation bset, bclr, bnot, btst, band, biand, bor, bior, bxor, bixor, bld, bild, bst, bist 14 branch bcc* 3 , jmp, bsr, jsr, rts 5 system control trapa, rte, sleep, ldc, stc, andc, orc, xorc, nop 9 block data transfer eepmov 1 total 62 types notes: 1. pop.w rn is identical to mov.w @sp+, rn. push.w rn is identical to mov.w rn, @ sp. pop.l ern is identical to mov.l @sp+, rn. push.l ern is identical to mov.l rn, @ sp. 2. not available in the h8/3067 series. 3. bcc is a generic branching instruction. 33 2.6.2 instructions and addressing modes table 2.2 indicates the instructions available in the h8/300h cpu. table 2.2 instructions and addressing modes addressing modes function instruction #xx rn @ern @ (d:16, ern) @ (d:24, ern) @ern+/ @?rn @ aa:8 @ aa:16 @ aa:24 @ (d:8, pc) @ (d:16, pc) @@ aa:8 data mov bwl bwl bwl bwl bwl bwl b bwl bwl transfer pop, push wl movfpe, movtpe arithmetic add, cmp bwl bwl operations sub wl bwl addx, subx b b adds, subs l inc, dec bwl daa, das b mulxu, bw mulxs, divxu, divxs neg bwl extu, exts wl logic operations and, or, xor bwl not bwl shift instructions bwl bit manipulation bb b branch bcc, bsr jmp, jsr rts system trapa control rte sleep ldc b b w w w w ww stc bwwww ww andc, orc, xorc b nop block data transfer bw 34 2.6.3 tables of instructions classified by function tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the instructions in each functional category. the operation notation used in these tables is defined next. operation notation rd general register (destination)* rs general register (source)* rn general register* ern general register (32-bit register or address register) (ead) destination operand (eas) source operand ccr condition code register n n (negative) flag of ccr z z (zero) flag of ccr v v (overflow) flag of ccr c c (carry) flag of ccr pc program counter sp stack pointer #imm immediate data disp displacement + addition subtraction multiplication division and logical or logical exclusive or logical move not (logical complement) :3/:8/:16/:24 3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length note: * general registers include 8-bit registers (r0h to r7h, r0l to r7l), 16-bit registers (r0 to r7, e0 to e7), and 32-bit data or address registers (er0 to er7). 35 table 2.3 data transfer instructions instruction size* function mov b/w/l (eas) rd, rs (ead) moves data between two general registers or between a general register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register. movfpe b (eas) rd cannot be used in this lsi. movtpe b rs (eas) cannot be used in this lsi. pop w/l @sp+ rn pops a general register from the stack. pop.w rn is identical to mov.w @sp+, rn. similarly, pop.l ern is identical to mov.l @sp+, ern. push w/l rn @ sp pushes a general register onto the stack. push.w rn is identical to mov.w rn, @ sp. similarly, push.l ern is identical to mov.l ern, @ sp. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword 36 table 2.4 arithmetic operation instructions instruction size* function add,sub b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. (immediate byte data cannot be subtracted from data in a general register. use the subx or add instruction.) addx, subx b rd rs c rd, rd #imm c rd performs addition or subtraction with carry or borrow on data in two general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register. inc, dec b/w/l rd 1 rd, rd 2 rd increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (byte operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.) adds, subs l rd 1 rd, rd 2 rd, rd 4 rd adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register. daa, das b rd decimal adjust rd decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by referring to ccr to produce 4-bit bcd data. mulxu b/w rd rs rd performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits 16 bits 32 bits. mulxs b/w rd rs rd performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8 bits 8 bits 16 bits or 16 bits 16 bits 32 bits. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword 37 table 2.4 arithmetic operation instructions (cont) instruction size* function divxu b/w rd rs rd performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder divxs b/w rd rs rd performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits 8 bits 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder, or 32 bits 16 bits 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder cmp b/w/l rd rs, rd #imm compares data in a general register with data in another general register or with immediate data, and sets ccr according to the result. neg b/w/l 0 rd rd takes the two s complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a general register. exts w/l rd (sign extension) rd extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by extending the sign bit. extu w/l rd (zero extension) rd extends byte data in the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word data, or extends word data in the lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword data, by padding with zeros. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword 38 table 2.5 logic operation instructions instruction size* function and b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs a logical and operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. or b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs a logical or operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. xor b/w/l rd rs rd, rd #imm rd performs a logical exclusive or operation on a general register and another general register or immediate data. not b/w/l rd rd takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register contents. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword table 2.6 shift instructions instruction size* function shal, shar b/w/l rd (shift) rd performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents. shll, shlr b/w/l rd (shift) rd performs a logical shift on general register contents. rotl, rotr b/w/l rd (rotate) rd rotates general register contents. rotxl, rotxr b/w/l rd (rotate) rd rotates general register contents, including the carry bit. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word l: longword 39 table 2.7 bit manipulation instructions instruction size* function bset b 1 ( 40 table 2.7 bit manipulation instructions (cont) instruction size* function bor b c ( 41 table 2.8 branching instructions instruction size function bcc branches to a specified address if address specified condition is met. the branching conditions are listed below. mnemonic description condition bra (bt) always (true) always brn (bf) never (false) never bhi high c z = 0 bls low or same c z = 1 bcc (bhs) carry clear (high or same) c = 0 bcs (blo) carry set (low) c = 1 bne not equal z = 0 beq equal z = 1 bvc overflow clear v = 0 bvs overflow set v = 1 bpl plus n = 0 bmi minus n = 1 bge greater or equal n v = 0 blt less than n v = 1 bgt greater than z (n v) = 0 ble less or equal z (n v) = 1 jmp branches unconditionally to a specified address bsr branches to a subroutine at a specified address jsr branches to a subroutine at a specified address rts returns from a subroutine 42 table 2.9 system control instructions instruction size* function trapa starts trap-instruction exception handling rte returns from an exception-handling routine sleep causes a transition to the power-down state ldc b/w (eas) ccr moves the source operand contents to the condition code register. the condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access. stc b/w ccr (ead) transfers the ccr contents to a destination location. the condition code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written by word access. andc b ccr #imm ccr logically ands the condition code register with immediate data. orc b ccr #imm ccr logically ors the condition code register with immediate data. xorc b ccr #imm ccr logically exclusive-ors the condition code register with immediate data. nop pc + 2 pc only increments the program counter. note: * size refers to the operand size. b: byte w: word 43 table 2.10 block transfer instruction instruction size function eepmov.b if r4l 0 then repeat @er5+ @er6+, r4l 1 r4l until r4l = 0 else next; eepmov.w if r4 0 then repeat @er5+ @er6+, r4 1 r4 until r4 = 0 else next; block transfer instruction. this instruction transfers the number of data bytes specified by r4l or r4, starting from the address indicated by er5, to the location starting at the address indicated by er6. at the end of the transfer, the next instruction is executed. 2.6.4 basic instruction formats the h8/300h instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. an instruction consists of an operation field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (ea field), and a condition field (cc). operation field: indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out on the operand. the operation field always includes the first 4 bits of the instruction. some instructions have two operation fields. register field: specifies a general register. address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4 bits. some instructions have two register fields. some have no register field. effective address extension: eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. a 24-bit address or displacement is treated as 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (h'00). condition field: specifies the branching condition of bcc instructions. figure 2.9 shows examples of instruction formats. 44 op nop, rts, etc. op rn rm op rn rm ea (disp) operation field only add.b rn, rm, etc. operation field and register fields mov.b @(d:16, rn), rm operation field, register fields, and effective address extension bra d:8 operation field, effective address extension, and condition field op cc ea (disp) figure 2.9 instruction formats 45 2.6.5 notes on use of bit manipulation instructions the bset, bclr, bnot, bst, and bist instructions read a byte of data, modify a bit in the byte, then write the byte back. care is required when these instructions are used to access registers with write-only bits, or to access ports. step description 1 read read one data byte at the specified address 2 modify modify one bit in the data byte 3 write write the modified data byte back to the specified address example 1: bclr is executed to clear bit 0 in the port 4 data direction register (p4ddr) under the following conditions. p4 7 , p4 6 : input pins p4 5 ?p4 0 : output pins the intended purpose of this bclr instruction is to switch p4 0 from output to input. before execution of bclr instruction p4 7 p4 6 p4 5 p4 4 p4 3 p4 2 p4 1 p4 0 input/output input input output output output output output output ddr 00111111 execution of bclr instruction bclr #0, @p4ddr ;clear bit 0 in data direction register 46 after execution of bclr instruction p4 7 p4 6 p4 5 p4 4 p4 3 p4 2 p4 1 p4 0 input/output output output output output output output output input ddr 11111110 explanation: to execute the bclr instruction, the cpu begins by reading p4ddr. since p4ddr is a write-only register, it is read as h'ff, even though its true value is h'3f. next the cpu clears bit 0 of the read data, changing the value to h'fe. finally, the cpu writes this value (h'fe) back to p4ddr to complete the bclr instruction. as a result, p4 0 ddr is cleared to 0, making p4 0 an input pin. in addition, p4 7 ddr and p4 6 ddr are set to 1, making p4 7 and p4 6 output pins. the bclr instruction can be used to clear flags in the on-chip registers to 0. in an interrupt- handling routine, for example, if it is known that the flag is set to 1, it is not necessary to read the flag ahead of time. 47 2.7 addressing modes and effective address calculation 2.7.1 addressing modes the h8/300h cpu supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. each instruction uses a subset of these addressing modes. arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program- counter relative and memory indirect. bit manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or absolute (@aa:8) addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (bset, bclr, bnot, and btst instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand. table 2.11 addressing modes no. addressing mode symbol 1 register direct rn 2 register indirect @ern 3 register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ern)/@(d:24, ern) 4 register indirect with post-increment register indirect with pre-decrement @ern+ @ ern 5 absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24 6 immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32 7 program-counter relative @(d:8, pc)/@(d:16, pc) 8 memory indirect @@aa:8 1 register direct?n: the register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit register containing the operand. r0h to r7h and r0l to r7l can be specified as 8-bit registers. r0 to r7 and e0 to e7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. er0 to er7 can be specified as 32-bit registers. 2 register indirect?ern: the register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ern), the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of the operand. 3 register indirect with displacement?(d:16, ern) or @(d:24, ern): a 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is added to the contents of an address register (ern) specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum specify the address of a memory operand. a 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added. 48 4 register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement?ern+ or @?rn: ? register indirect with post-increment?ern+ the register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ern) the lower 24 bits of which contain the address of a memory operand. after the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register. the value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. for word or longword access, the register value should be even. ? register indirect with pre-decrement??rn the value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ern) specified by the register field in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result become the address of a memory operand. the result is also stored in the address register. the value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. for word or longword access, the resulting register value should be even. 5 absolute address?aa:8, @aa:16, or @aa:24: the instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. the absolute address may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), or 24 bits long (@aa:24). for an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (h'ffff). for a 16-bit absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. a 24-bit absolute address can access the entire address space. table 2.12 indicates the accessible address ranges. table 2.12 absolute address access ranges absolute address 1-mbyte modes 16-mbyte modes 8 bits (@aa:8) h'fff00 to h'fffff (1048320 to 1048575) h'ffff00 to h'ffffff (16776960 to 16777215) 16 bits (@aa:16) h'00000 to h'07fff, h'f8000 to h'fffff (0 to 32767, 1015808 to 1048575) h'000000 to h'007fff, h'ff8000 to h'ffffff (0 to 32767, 16744448 to 16777215) 24 bits (@aa:24) h'00000 to h'fffff (0 to 1048575) h'000000 to h'ffffff (0 to 16777215) 6 immediate?xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32: the instruction code contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an operand. the instruction codes of the adds, subs, inc, and dec instructions contain immediate data implicitly. the instruction codes of some bit manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data specifying a bit number. the trapa instruction code contains 2-bit immediate data specifying a vector address. 7 program-counter relative?(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc): this mode is used in the bcc and bsr instructions. an 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the instruction code is sign- 49 extended to 24 bits and added to the 24-bit pc contents to generate a 24-bit branch address. the pc value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction, so the possible branching range is ?26 to +128 bytes (?3 to +64 words) or ?2766 to +32768 bytes (?6383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. the resulting value should be an even number. 8 memory indirect?@aa:8: this mode can be used by the jmp and jsr instructions. the instruction code contains an 8-bit absolute address specifying a memory operand. this memory operand contains a branch address. the memory operand is accessed by longword access. the first byte of the memory operand is ignored, generating a 24-bit branch address. see figure 2.10. the upper bits of the 8-bit absolute address are assumed to be 0 (h'0000), so the address range is 0 to 255 (h'000000 to h'0000ff). note that the first part of this range is also the exception vector area. for further details see section 5, interrupt controller. specified by @aa:8 reserved branch address figure 2.10 memory-indirect branch address specification when a word-size or longword-size memory operand is specified, or when a branch address is specified, if the specified memory address is odd, the least significant bit is regarded as 0. the accessed data or instruction code therefore begins at the preceding address. see section 2.5.2, memory data formats. 2.7.2 effective address calculation table 2.13 explains how an effective address is calculated in each addressing mode. in the 1-mbyte operating modes the upper 4 bits of the calculated address are ignored in order to generate a 20-bit effective address. 50 table 2.13 effective address calculation addressing mode and instruction format no. effective address calculation effective address register indirect (rn) 1 operand is general register contents op rm rn register indirect (@ern) 2 op r general register contents 31 0 23 0 register indirect with displacement @(d:16, ern)/@(d:24, ern) 3 op r general register contents 31 0 23 0 sign extension disp register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement 4 general register contents 31 0 23 0 1, 2, or 4 op r general register contents 31 0 23 0 1, 2, or 4 op r register indirect with post-increment @ern+ register indirect with pre-decrement @ ern 1 for a byte operand, 2 for a word operand, 4 for a longword operand 51 table 2.13 effective address calculation (cont) addressing mode and instruction format no. effective address calculation effective address absolute address @aa:8 5 op program-counter relative @(d:8, pc) or @(d:16, pc) 7 0 23 0 abs 23 0 87 @aa:16 @aa:24 op abs 23 0 16 15 h'ffff sign extension op 23 0 abs immediate #xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32 6 operand is immediate data op disp 23 0 pc contents disp op imm sign extension 52 table 2.13 effective address calculation (cont) addressing mode and instruction format no. effective address calculation effective address 8 legend r, rm, rn: op: disp: imm: abs: register field operation field displacement immediate data absolute address memory indirect @@aa:8 8 op 23 0 abs 23 0 87 h'0000 15 0 abs 16 15 normal mode op 23 0 abs 23 0 87 h'0000 0 abs advanced mode 31 h'00 memory contents memory contents 53 2.8 processing states 2.8.1 overview the h8/300h cpu has five processing states: the program execution state, exception-handling state, power-down state, reset state, and bus-released state. the power-down state includes sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. figure 2.11 classifies the processing states. figure 2.13 indicates the state transitions. processing states program execution state bus-released state reset state power-down state the cpu executes program instructions in sequence a transient state in which the cpu executes a hardware sequence (saving pc and ccr, fetching a vector, etc.) in response to a reset, interrupt, or other exception the external bus has been released in response to a bus request signal from a bus master other than the cpu the cpu and all on-chip supporting modules are initialized and halted the cpu is halted to conserve power sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode exception-handling state figure 2.11 processing states 54 2.8.2 program execution state in this state the cpu executes program instructions in normal sequence. 2.8.3 exception-handling state the exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the cpu alters the normal program flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. the cpu fetches a starting address from the exception vector table and branches to that address. in interrupt and trap exception handling the cpu references the stack pointer (er7) and saves the program counter and condition code register. types of exception handling and their priority: exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. table 2.14 indicates the types of exception handling and their priority. trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. table 2.14 exception handling types and priority priority type of exception detection timing start of exception handling high reset synchronized with clock exception handling starts immediately when res changes from low to high interrupt end of instruction execution or end of exception handling* when an interrupt is requested, exception handling starts at the end of the current instruction or current exception-handling sequence low trap instruction when trapa instruction is executed exception handling starts when a trap (trapa) instruction is executed note: * interrupts are not detected at the end of the andc, orc, xorc, and ldc instructions, or immediately after reset exception handling. figure 2.12 classifies the exception sources. for further details about exception sources, vector numbers, and vector addresses, see section 4, exception handling, and section 5, interrupt controller. 55 exception sources reset interrupt trap instruction external interrupts internal interrupts (from on-chip supporting modules) figure 2.12 classification of exception sources bus-released state exception-handling state reset state program execution state sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode power-down state bus request end of bus release end of bus release bus request end of exception handling exception handling source interrupt source sleep instruction with ssby = 0 sleep instruction with ssby = 1 nmi, irq , irq , or irq interrupt stby="high", res ="low" res = "high" 01 2 *1 *2 notes: 1. 2. from any state except hardware standby mode, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever goes low. from any state, a transition to hardware standby mode occurs when goes low. res stby figure 2.13 state transitions 56 2.8.4 exception-handling sequences reset exception handling: reset exception handling has the highest priority. the reset state is entered when the res signal goes low. reset exception handling starts after that, when res changes from low to high. when reset exception handling starts the cpu fetches a start address from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address. all interrupts, including nmi, are disabled during the reset exception-handling sequence and immediately after it ends. interrupt exception handling and trap instruction exception handling: when these exception-handling sequences begin, the cpu references the stack pointer (er7) and pushes the program counter and condition code register on the stack. next, if the ue bit in the system control register (syscr) is set to 1, the cpu sets the i bit in the condition code register to 1. if the ue bit is cleared to 0, the cpu sets both the i bit and the ui bit in the condition code register to 1. then the cpu fetches a start address from the exception vector table and execution branches to that address. figure 2.14 shows the stack after the exception-handling sequence. sp 4 sp 3 sp 2 sp 1 sp (er7) before exception handling starts sp (er7) sp+1 sp+2 sp+3 sp+4 after exception handling ends stack area ccr pc even address pushed on stack legend ccr: sp: condition code register stack pointer notes: 1. 2. pc is the address of the first instruction executed after the return from the exception-handling routine. registers must be saved and restored by word access or longword access, starting at an even address. figure 2.14 stack structure after exception handling 57 2.8.5 bus-released state in this state the bus is released to a bus master other than the cpu, in response to a bus request. the bus masters other than the cpu are the dma controller, the dram interface, and an external bus master. while the bus is released, the cpu halts except for internal operations. interrupt requests are not accepted. for details see section 6.11, bus arbiter. 2.8.6 reset state when the res input goes low all current processing stops and the cpu enters the reset state. the i bit in the condition code register is set to 1 by a reset. all interrupts are masked in the reset state. reset exception handling starts when the res signal changes from low to high. the reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. for details see section 12, watchdog timer. 2.8.7 power-down state in the power-down state the cpu stops operating to conserve power. there are three modes: sleep mode, software standby mode, and hardware standby mode. sleep mode: a transition to sleep mode is made if the sleep instruction is executed while the ssby bit is cleared to 0 in the system control register (syscr). cpu operations stop immediately after execution of the sleep instruction, but the contents of cpu registers are retained. software standby mode: a transition to software standby mode is made if the sleep instruction is executed while the ssby bit is set to 1 in syscr. the cpu and clock halt and all on-chip supporting modules stop operating. the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied the contents of cpu registers and on-chip ram are retained. the i/o ports also remain in their existing states. hardware standby mode: a transition to hardware standby mode is made when the stby input goes low. as in software standby mode, the cpu and all clocks halt and the on-chip supporting modules are reset, but as long as a specified voltage is supplied, on-chip ram contents are retained. for further information see section 20, power-down state. 58 2.9 basic operational timing 2.9.1 overview the h8/300h cpu operates according to the system clock (?. the interval from one rise of the system clock to the next rise is referred to as a ?tate.? a memory cycle or bus cycle consists of two or three states. the cpu uses different methods to access on-chip memory, the on-chip supporting modules, and the external address space. access to the external address space can be controlled by the bus controller. 2.9.2 on-chip memory access timing on-chip memory is accessed in two states. the data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and word access. figure 2.15 shows the on-chip memory access cycle. figure 2.16 indicates the pin states. t state bus cycle internal address bus internal read signal internal data bus (read access) internal write signal internal data bus (write access) 1 t state 2 read data address write data figure 2.15 on-chip memory access cycle 59 t , , , as 1 t 2 address bus d to d 15 0 rd hwr lwr high address high impedance figure 2.16 pin states during on-chip memory access 2.9.3 on-chip supporting module access timing the on-chip supporting modules are accessed in three states. the data bus is 8 or 16 bits wide, depending on the internal i/o register being accessed. figure 2.17 shows the on-chip supporting module access timing. figure 2.18 indicates the pin states. address bus internal read signal internal data bus internal write signal address internal data bus t state bus cycle 1 t state 2 t state 3 read access write access write data read data figure 2.17 access cycle for on-chip supporting modules 60 t , , , as 1 t 2 address bus d to d 15 0 rd hwr lwr high high impedance t 3 address figure 2.18 pin states during access to on-chip supporting modules 2.9.4 access to external address space the external address space is divided into eight areas (areas 0 to 7). bus-controller settings determine whether each area is accessed via an 8-bit or 16-bit bus, and whether it is accessed in two or three states. for details see section 6, bus controller. 61 section 3 mcu operating modes 3.1 overview 3.1.1 operating mode selection the h8/3067 series has seven operating modes (modes 1 to 7) that are selected by the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) as indicated in table 3.1. the input at these pins determines the size of the address space and the initial bus mode. table 3.1 operating mode selection description operating mode pins initial bus on-chip on-chip mode md 2 md 1 md 0 address space mode* 1 rom ram ?00 mode 1 0 0 1 expanded mode 8 bits disabled enabled* 2 mode 2 0 1 0 expanded mode 16 bits disabled enabled* 2 mode 3 0 1 1 expanded mode 8 bits disabled enabled* 2 mode 4 1 0 0 expanded mode 16 bits disabled enabled* 2 mode 5 1 0 1 expanded mode 8 bits enabled enabled* 2 mode 6 1 1 0 single-chip normal mode enabled enabled mode 7 1 1 1 single-chip advanced mode enabled enabled notes: 1. in modes 1 to 5, an 8-bit or 16-bit data bus can be selected on a per-area basis by settings made in the area bus width control register (abwcr). for details see section 6, bus controller. 2. if the rame bit in syscr is cleared to 0, these addresses become external addresses. for the address space size there are three choices: 64 kbytes, 1 mbyte, or 16 mbyte.the external data bus is either 8 or 16 bits wide depending on abwcr settings. if 8-bit access is selected for all areas, 8-bit bus mode is used. for details see section 6, bus controller. modes 1 to 4 are externally expanded modes that enable access to external memory and peripheral devices and disable access to the on-chip rom. modes 1 and 2 support a maximum address space of 1 mbyte. modes 3 and 4 support a maximum address space of 16 mbytes. 62 mode 5 is an externally expanded mode that enables access to external memory and peripheral devices and also enables access to the on-chip rom. mode 5 supports a maximum address space of 16 mbytes. modes 6 and 7 are single-chip modes that operate using the on-chip rom, ram, and registers, and makes all i/o ports available. mode 6 supports a maximum address space of 64 kbytes. mode 7 supports a maximum address space of 1 mbyte. the h8/3067 series can be used only in modes 1 to 7. the inputs at the mode pins must select one of these seven modes. the inputs at the mode pins must not be changed during operation. 3.1.2 register configuration the h8/3067 series has a mode control register (mdcr) that indicates the inputs at the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ), and a system control register (syscr). table 3.2 summarizes these registers. table 3.2 registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee011 mode control register mdcr r undetermined h'ee012 system control register syscr r/w h'09 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 63 3.2 mode control register (mdcr) mdcr is an 8-bit read-only register that indicates the current operating mode of the h8/3067 series. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 0 4 0 3 0 0 mds0 r * 2 mds2 r 1 mds1 r ** reserved bits mode select 2 to 0 bits indicating the current operating mode reserved bits note: determined by pins md to md . * 20 bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits can not be modified and are always read as 1. bits 5 to 3?eserved: these bits can not be modified and are always read as 0. bits 2 to 0?ode select 2 to 0 (mds2 to mds0): these bits indicate the logic levels at pins md 2 to md 0 (the current operating mode). mds2 to mds0 correspond to md 2 to md 0 . mds2 to mds0 are read-only bits. the mode pin (md 2 to md 0 ) levels are latched into these bits when mdcr is read. 64 3.3 system control register (syscr) syscr is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the h8/3067 series. bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 ssoe 0 r/w software standby enables transition to software standby mode user bit enable selects whether to use the ui bit in ccr as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit nmi edge select selects the valid edge of the nmi input ram enable enables or disables on-chip ram standby timer select 2 to 0 these bits select the waiting time at recovery from software standby mode selects the output state of the address bus and bus control signals in software standby mode software standby output port enable bit 7?oftware standby (ssby): enables transition to software standby mode. (for further information about software standby mode see section 20, power-down state.) when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1. to clear this bit, write 0. bit 7 ssby description 0 sleep instruction causes transition to sleep mode (initial value) 1 sleep instruction causes transition to software standby mode 65 bits 6 to 4?tandby timer select 2 to 0 (sts2 to sts0): these bits select the length of time the cpu and on-chip supporting modules wait for the internal clock oscillator to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. when using a crystal oscillator, set these bits so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms at the system clock rate. for further information about waiting time selection, see section 20.4.3, selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode. bit 6 sts2 bit 5 sts1 bit 4 sts0 description 0 0 0 waiting time = 8,192 states (initial value) 0 0 1 waiting time = 16,384 states 0 1 0 waiting time = 32,768 states 0 1 1 waiting time = 65,536 states 1 0 0 waiting time = 131,072 states 1 0 1 waiting time = 262,144 states 1 1 0 waiting time = 1,024 states 1 1 1 illegal setting bit 3?ser bit enable (ue): selects whether to use the ui bit in the condition code register as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. bit 3 ue description 0 ui bit in ccr is used as an interrupt mask bit 1 ui bit in ccr is used as a user bit (initial value) bit 2?mi edge select (nmieg): selects the valid edge of the nmi input. bit 2 nmieg description 0 an interrupt is requested at the falling edge of nmi (initial value) 1 an interrupt is requested at the rising edge of nmi 66 bit 1?oftware standby output port enable (ssoe): specifies whether the address bus and bus control signals ( cs 0 to cs 7 , as , rd , hwr , lwr , ucas , lcas , and rfsh ) are kept as outputs or fixed high, or placed in the high-impedance state in software standby mode. bit 1 ssoe description 0 in software standby mode, the address bus and bus control signals are all high- impedance (initial value) 1 in software standby mode, the address bus retains its output state and bus control signals are fixed high bit 0?am enable (rame): enables or disables the on-chip ram. the rame bit is initialized by the rising edge of the res signal. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0 rame description 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled (initial value) 3.4 operating mode descriptions 3.4.1 mode 1 ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins a 19 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 1-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 3.4.2 mode 2 ports 1, 2, and 5 function as address pins a 19 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 1-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. if all areas are designated for 8-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. 3.4.3 mode 3 ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port a function as address pins a 23 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 16-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. a 23 to a 21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of the bus release control register (brcr). (in this mode a 20 is always used for address output.) 67 3.4.4 mode 4 ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port a function as address pins a 23 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 16-mbyte address space. the initial bus mode after a reset is 16 bits, with 16-bit access to all areas. if all areas are designated for 8-bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 8 bits. a 23 to a 21 are valid when 0 is written in bits 7 to 5 of brcr. (in this mode a 20 is always used for address output.) 3.4.5 mode 5 ports 1, 2, and 5 and part of port a can function as address pins a 23 to a 0 , permitting access to a maximum 16-mbyte address space, but following a reset they are input ports. to use ports 1, 2, and 5 as an address bus, the corresponding bits in their data direction registers (p1ddr, p2ddr, and p5ddr) must be set to 1. for a 23 to a 20 output, write 0 in bits 7 to 4 of brcr. the initial bus mode after a reset is 8 bits, with 8-bit access to all areas. if at least one area is designated for 16- bit access in abwcr, the bus mode switches to 16 bits. 3.4.6 mode 6 this mode operates using the on-chip rom, ram, and registers. all i/o ports are available. mode 6 supports a maximum address space of 64 kbytes. 3.4.7 mode 7 this mode operates using the on-chip rom, ram, and registers. all i/o ports are available. mode 7 supports a 1-mbyte address space. 68 3.5 pin functions in each operating mode the pin functions of ports 1 to 5 and port a vary depending on the operating mode. table 3.3 indicates their functions in each operating mode. table 3.3 pin functions in each mode port mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port 1 a 7 to a 0 a 7 to a 0 a 7 to a 0 a 7 to a 0 p1 7 to p1 0 * 2 p1 7 to p1 0 p1 7 to p1 0 port 2 a 15 to a 8 a 15 to a 8 a 15 to a 8 a 15 to a 8 p2 7 to p2 0 * 2 p2 7 to p2 0 p2 7 to p2 0 port 3 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 d 15 to d 8 p3 7 to p3 0 p3 7 to p3 0 port 4 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 d 7 to d 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 d 7 to d 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 * 1 p4 7 to p4 0 p4 7 to p4 0 port 5 a 19 to a 16 a 19 to a 16 a 19 to a 16 a 19 to a 16 p5 3 to p5 0 * 2 p5 3 to p5 0 p5 3 to p5 0 port a pa 7 to pa 4 pa 7 to pa 4 pa 6 to pa 4 , a 20 * 3 pa 6 to pa 4 , a 20 * 3 pa 7 to pa 4 * 4 pa 7 to pa 4 pa 7 to pa 4 notes: 1. initial state. the bus mode can be switched by settings in abwcr. these pins function as p4 7 to p4 0 in 8-bit bus mode, and as d 7 to d 0 in 16-bit bus mode. 2. initial state. these pins become address output pins when the corresponding bits in the data direction registers (p1ddr, p2ddr, p5ddr) are set to 1. 3. initial state. a 20 is always an address output pin. pa 6 to pa 4 are switched over to a 23 to a 21 output by writing 0 in bits 7 to 5 of brcr. 4. initial state. pa 7 to pa 4 are switched over to a 23 to a 20 output by writing 0 in bits 7 to 4 of brcr. 3.6 memory map in each operating mode figure 3.1 to 3.3 show a memory maps of the h8/3067, h8/3066, and h8/3065. the address space is divided into eight areas. the initial bus mode differs between modes 1 and 2, and also between modes 3 and 4. the address locations of the on-chip ram and on-chip registers differ between the 64-kbyte mode (mode 6), the 1-mbyte modes (modes 1, 2, and 7), and the 16-mbyte modes (modes 3, 4, and 5). the address range specifiable by the cpu in the 8- and 16-bit absolute addressing modes (@aa:8 and @aa:16) also differs. 3.6.1 note on reserved areas the h8/3067 series memory map includes reserved areas to which read/write access is prohibited. note that normal operation is not guaranteed if the following reserved areas are accessed. (1) the reserved area in the internal i/o register space the h8/3067 series internal i/o register space includes a reserved area to which access is prohibited. for details see appendix b, internal i/o registers. 69 (2) other reserved areas in mode 5 in the h8/3066 and h8/3065, there is a reserved area in area 0 as shown in figures 3.2 and 3.3. in modes 1 to 5 in the h8/3065, there is a reserved area in area 7 as shown in figure 3.3. h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space external address space vector area on-chip ram* on-chip ram* 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef1f h'fef20 h'fff00 h'fff1f h'fff20 h'fffe9 h'fffea h'fffff modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area external address space 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffff00 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'fee000 h'fee0ff note: * external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (2) on-chip i/o registers (2) external address space h'ee000 h'ee0ff external address space figure 3.1 h8/3067 memory map in each operating mode (1) 70 h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'01ffff h'020000 h'1fffff h'200000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space external address space vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram* external address space on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (2) 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'fee000 h'fee0ff h'ff8000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'ffff00 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff h'00000 h'000ff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram on-chip i/o registers(2) 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ee000 h'ee0ff h'fff1f h'fff20 h'fef20 h'fffe9 h'fffff h'fff00 h'07fff h'1ffff h'f8000 note: * external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. h'0000 h'00ff h'dfff h'e000 memory-indirect branch addresses vector area on-chip i/o registers (2) on-chip i/o registers (1) 8-bit absolute addresses h'ef20 h'e0ff h'ff00 h'ff1f h'ff20 h'ffff h'ffe9 on-chip ram on-chip rom figure 3.1 h8/3067 memory map in each operating mode (2) 71 h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space external address space external address space vector area on-chip ram* on-chip ram* 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef1f h'fef20 h'fff00 h'fff1f h'fff20 h'fffe9 h'fffea h'fffff modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area external address space 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffff00 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'fee000 h'fee0ff note: * external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (2) on-chip i/o registers (2) external address space h'ee000 h'ee0ff figure 3.2 h8/3066 memory map in each operating mode (1) 72 h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff h'017fff h'018000 memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'01ffff h'020000 h'1fffff h'200000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space external address space vector area on-chip rom reserved *1 on-chip ram *2 external address space on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (2) 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'fee000 h'fee0ff h'ff8000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'ffff00 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff h'00000 h'000ff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram on-chip i/o registers(2) 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ee000 h'ee0ff h'fff1f h'fff20 h'fef20 h'fffe9 h'fffff h'fff00 h'07fff h'17fff h'f8000 h'0000 h'00ff h'dfff h'e000 memory-indirect branch addresses vector area on-chip i/o registers (2) on-chip i/o registers (1) 8-bit absolute addresses h'ef20 h'e0ff h'ff00 h'ff1f h'ff20 h'ffff h'ffe9 on-chip ram on-chip rom notes: 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. figure 3.2 h8/3066 memory map in each operating mode (2) 73 h'00000 h'000ff h'07fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses modes 1 and 2 (1-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'1ffff h'20000 h'3ffff h'40000 h'5ffff h'60000 h'7ffff h'80000 h'9ffff h'a0000 h'bffff h'c0000 h'dffff h'e0000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space external address space external address space vector area on-chip ram *2 reserved *1 reserved *1 on-chip ram *2 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'f8000 h'fef1f h'fef20 h'ff71f h'ff720 h'fff00 h'fff1f h'fff20 h'fffe9 h'fffea h'fffff modes 3 and 4 (16-mbyte expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled) h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'1fffff h'200000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space vector area external address space 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ff8000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'fff71f h'fff720 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffff00 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'fee000 h'fee0ff on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (2) on-chip i/o registers (2) external address space h'ee000 h'ee0ff notes: 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. figure 3.3 h8/3065 memory map in each operating mode (1) 74 h'000000 h'0000ff h'007fff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses mode 5 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) h'00ffff h'010000 h'01ffff h'020000 h'1fffff h'200000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 area 0 area 1 area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 area 6 area 7 external address space external address space vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram *2 reserved *1 external address space on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (1) on-chip i/o registers (2) 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'fee000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'fee0ff h'ff8000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'fff71f h'fff720 h'ffff00 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff h'00000 h'000ff memory-indirect branch addresses 16-bit absolute addresses vector area on-chip rom on-chip ram on-chip i/o registers(2) 8-bit absolute addresses 16-bit absolute addresses h'ee000 h'ee0ff h'fff1f h'fff20 h'ff720 h'fffe9 h'fffff h'fff00 h'07fff h'0ffff h'f8000 h'0000 h'00ff h'dfff h'e000 memory-indirect branch addresses vector area on-chip i/o registers (2) on-chip i/o registers (1) 8-bit absolute addresses h'f720 h'e0ff h'ff00 h'ff1f h'ff20 h'ffff h'ffe9 on-chip ram on-chip rom notes: 1. 2. do not access the reserved area. external addresses can be accessed by disabling on-chip ram. reserved *1 figure 3.3 h8/3065 memory map in each operating mode (2) 75 section 4 exception handling 4.1 overview 4.1.1 exception handling types and priority as table 4.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt. exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 4.1. if two or more exceptions occur simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in priority order. trap instruction exceptions are accepted at all times in the program execution state. table 4.1 exception types and priority priority exception type start of exception handling high reset starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the res pin interrupt interrupt requests are handled when execution of the current instruction or handling of the current exception is completed low trap instruction (trapa) started by execution of a trap instruction (trapa) 4.1.2 exception handling operation exceptions originate from various sources. trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows. 1. the program counter (pc) and condition code register (ccr) are pushed onto the stack. 2. the ccr interrupt mask bit is set to 1. 3. a vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution starts from that address. for a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out. 76 4.1.3 exception vector table the exception sources are classified as shown in figure 4.1. different vectors are assigned to different exception sources. table 4.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses. exception sources ? reset ? interrupts ? trap instruction external interrupts: internal interrupts: nmi, irq to irq 36 interrupts from on-chip supporting modules 0 5 figure 4.1 exception sources 77 table 4.2 exception vector table vector address* 1 exception source vector number advanced mode normal mode reset 0 h'0000 to h'0003 h'0000 to h'0001 reserved for system use 1 h'0004 to h'0007 h'0002 to h'0003 2 h'0008 to h'000b h'0004 to h'0005 3 h'000c to h'000f h'0006 to h'0007 4 h'0010 to h'0013 h'0008 to h'0009 5 h'0014 to h'0017 h'000a to h'000b 6 h'0018 to h'001b h'000c to h'000d external interrupt (nmi) 7 h'001c to h'001f h'000e to h'000f trap instruction (4 sources) 8 h'0020 to h'0023 h'0010 to h'0011 9 h'0024 to h'0027 h'0012 to h'0013 10 h'0028 to h'002b h'0014 to h'0015 11 h'002c to h'002f h'0016 to h'0017 external interrupt irq 0 12 h'0030 to h'0033 h'0018 to h'0019 external interrupt irq 1 13 h'0034 to h'0037 h'001a to h'001b external interrupt irq 2 14 h'0038 to h'003b h'001c to h'001d external interrupt irq 3 15 h'003c to h'003f h'001e to h'001f external interrupt irq 4 16 h'0040 to h'0043 h'0020 to h'0021 external interrupt irq 5 17 h'0044 to h'0047 h'0022 to h'0023 reserved for system use 18 h'0048 to h'004b h'0024 to h'0025 19 h'004c to h'004f h'0026 to h'0027 internal interrupts* 2 20 to 63 h'0050 to h'0053 to h'00fc to h'00ff h'0028 to h'0029 to h'007e to h'007f notes: 1. lower 16 bits of the address. 2. for the internal interrupt vectors, see section 5.3.3, interrupt vector table. 78 4.2 reset 4.2.1 overview a reset is the highest-priority exception. when the res pin goes low, all processing halts and the chip enters the reset state. a reset initializes the internal state of the cpu and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules. reset exception handling begins when the res pin changes from low to high. the chip can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. for details see section 12, watchdog timer. 4.2.2 reset sequence the chip enters the reset state when the res pin goes low. to ensure that the chip is reset, hold the res pin low for at least 20 ms at power-up. to reset the chip during operation, hold the res pin low for at least 10 system clock ( ) cycles. when the flash memory and flash memory r versions are used, the res pin must be held low for at least 20 system clock cycles. see appendix d.2, pin states at reset, for the states of the pins in the reset state. when the res pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset exception handling as follows. ? the internal state of the cpu and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are initialized, and the i bit is set to 1 in ccr. ? the contents of the reset vector address (h'0000 to h'0003 in advanced mode, h'0000 to h'0001 in normal mode) are read, and program execution starts from the address indicated in the vector address. figure 4.2 shows the reset sequence in modes 1 and 3. figure 4.3 shows the reset sequence in modes 2 and 4. figure 4.4 shows the reset sequence in mode 6. 79 address bus res rd hwr d to d 15 8 vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction (1), (3), (5), (7) (2), (4), (6), (8) (9) (10) note: after a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. address of reset vector: (1) = h'000000, (3) = h'000001, (5) = h'000002, (7) = h'000003 start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) start address first instruction of program high (1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) lwr , figure 4.2 reset sequence (modes 1 and 3) 80 address bus res rd hwr d to d 15 0 vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction (1), (3) (2), (4) (5) (6) note: after a reset, the wait-state controller inserts three wait states in every bus cycle. high lwr , address of reset vector: (1) = h'000000, (3) = h'000002 start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) start address first instruction of program (2) (4) (3) (1) (5) (6) figure 4.3 reset sequence (modes 2 and 4) 81 vector fetch internal processing prefetch of first program instruction internal address bus res internal read signal internal write signal internal data bus (16 bits wide) (1) (2) (2) (3) (1) address of reset vector (h'0000) (2) start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address) (3) first instruction of program figure 4.4 reset sequence (mode 6) 4.2.3 interrupts after reset if an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (sp) is initialized, pc and ccr will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. to prevent this, all interrupt requests, including nmi, are disabled immediately after a reset. the first instruction of the program is always executed immediately after the reset state ends. this instruction should initialize the stack pointer (example: mov.l #xx:32, sp). 82 4.3 interrupts interrupt exception handling can be requested by seven external sources (nmi, irq 0 to irq 5 ), and 36 internal sources in the on-chip supporting modules. figure 4.5 classifies the interrupt sources and indicates the number of interrupts of each type. the on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts are the watchdog timer (wdt), dram interface, 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, dma controller (dmac), serial communication interface (sci), and a/d converter. each interrupt source has a separate vector address. nmi is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted*. interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. the interrupt controller can assign interrupts other than nmi to two priority levels, and arbitrate between simultaneous interrupts. interrupt priorities are assigned in interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra and iprb) in the interrupt controller. note: in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, nmi input is sometimes disabled. for details see 18.6.4, nmi input disable conditions. for details on interrupts see section 5, interrupt controller. interrupts external interrupts internal interrupts nmi (1) irq to irq (6) wdt (1) dram interface * 2 (1) 16-bit timer (9) 8-bit timer (8) dmac (4) sci (12) a/d converter (1) *1 notes: numbers in parentheses are the number of interrupt sources. 1. 2. when the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at every counter overflow. when the dram interface is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt request at compare match. 0 5 figure 4.5 interrupt sources and number of interrupts 83 4.4 trap instruction trap instruction exception handling starts when a trapa instruction is executed. if the ue bit is set to 1 in the system control register (syscr), the exception handling sequence sets the i bit to 1 in ccr. if the ue bit is 0, the i and ui bits are both set to 1. the trapa instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector number from 0 to 3, which is specified in the instruction code. 84 4.5 stack status after exception handling figure 4.6 shows the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and interrupt exception handling. sp 4 sp 3 sp 2 sp 1 sp (er7) sp (er7) sp+1 sp+2 sp+3 sp+4 sp 4 sp 3 sp 2 sp 1 sp (er7) sp (er7) sp+1 sp+2 sp+3 sp+4 before exception handling before exception handling after exception handling stack area stack area ccr ccr pc pc ccr pc pc pc h l e h l * after exception handling even address even address pushed on stack pushed on stack a. normal mode b. advanced mode legend pce: pch: pcl: ccr: sp: notes: pc indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after return. registers must be saved in word or longword size at even addresses. ignored at return. 1. 2. * bits 23 to 16 of program counter (pc) bits 15 to 8 of program counter (pc) bits 7 to 0 of program counter (pc) condition code register stack pointer figure 4.6 stack after completion of exception handling 85 4.6 notes on stack usage when accessing word data or longword data, the h8/3067 series regards the lowest address bit as 0. the stack should always be accessed by word access or longword access, and the value of the stack pointer (sp, er7) should always be kept even. use the following instructions to save registers: push.w rn (or mov.w rn, @?p) push.l ern (or mov.l ern, @?p) use the following instructions to restore registers: pop.w rn (or mov.w @sp+, rn) pop.l ern (or mov.l @sp+, ern) setting sp to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. figure 4.7 shows an example of what happens when the sp value is odd. trapa instruction executed ccr legend ccr: pc: r1l: sp: sp pc r1l pc sp sp mov. b r1l, @-er7 sp set to h'fffeff data saved above sp ccr contents lost condition code register program counter general register r1l stack pointer note: the diagram illustrates modes 3 and 4. h'fffefa h'fffefb h'fffefc h'fffefd h'fffeff figure 4.7 operation when sp value is odd 86 87 section 5 interrupt controller 5.1 overview 5.1.1 features the interrupt controller has the following features: ? interrupt priority registers (iprs) for setting interrupt priorities interrupts other than nmi can be assigned to two priority levels on a module-by-module basis in interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra and iprb). ? three-level masking by the i and ui bits in the cpu condition code register (ccr) ? seven external interrupt pins nmi has the highest priority and is always accepted*; either the rising or falling edge can be selected. for each of irq 0 to irq 5 , sensing of the falling edge or level sensing can be selected independently. note: in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, nmi input is sometimes disabled. for details see 18.6.4, nmi input disable conditions. 88 5.1.2 block diagram figure 5.1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller. iscr ier ipra, iprb . . . ovf tme tei teie . . . . . . . cpu ccr i ui ue syscr iscr: ier: isr: ipra: iprb: syscr: nmi input irq input irq input section isr interrupt controller priority decision logic interrupt request vector number irq sense control register irq enable register irq status register interrupt priority register a interrupt priority register b system control register legend figure 5.1 interrupt controller block diagram 89 5.1.3 pin configuration table 5.1 lists the interrupt pins. table 5.1 interrupt pins name abbreviation i/o function nonmaskable interrupt nmi input nonmaskable interrupt * , rising edge or falling edge selectable external interrupt request 5 to 0 irq 5 to irq 0 input maskable interrupts, falling edge or level sensing selectable note: in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, nmi input is sometimes disabled. for details see 18.6.4, nmi input disable conditions. 5.1.4 register configuration table 5.2 lists the registers of the interrupt controller. table 5.2 interrupt controller registers address* 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee012 system control register syscr r/w h'09 h'ee014 irq sense control register iscr r/w h'00 h'ee015 irq enable register ier r/w h'00 h'ee016 irq status register isr r/(w)* 2 h'00 h'ee018 interrupt priority register a ipra r/w h'00 h'ee019 interrupt priority register b iprb r/w h'00 notes: 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 90 5.2 register descriptions 5.2.1 system control register (syscr) syscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls software standby mode, selects the action of the ui bit in ccr, selects the nmi edge, and enables or disables the on-chip ram. only bits 3 and 2 are described here. for the other bits, see section 3.3, system control register (syscr). syscr is initialized to h'09 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 ssoe 0 r/w software standby standby timer select 2 to 0 user bit enable selects whether to use the ui bit in ccr as a user bit or interrupt mask bit nmi edge select selects the nmi input edge software standby output port enable ram enable 91 bit 3?ser bit enable (ue): selects whether to use the ui bit in ccr as a user bit or an interrupt mask bit. bit 3 ue description 0 ui bit in ccr is used as interrupt mask bit 1 ui bit in ccr is used as user bit (initial value) bit 2?mi edge select (nmieg): selects the nmi input edge. bit 2 nmieg description 0 interrupt is requested at falling edge of nmi input (initial value) 1 interrupt is requested at rising edge of nmi input 5.2.2 interrupt priority registers a and b (ipra, iprb) ipra and iprb are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control interrupt priority. 92 interrupt priority register a (ipra): ipra is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. bit initial value read/write 7 ipra7 0 r/w 6 ipra6 0 r/w 5 ipra5 0 r/w 4 ipra4 0 r/w 3 ipra3 0 r/w 0 ipra0 0 r/w 2 ipra2 0 r/w 1 ipra1 0 r/w priority level a7 selects the priority level of irq interrupt requests priority level a3 selects the priority level of wdt, dram interface, and a/d converter interrupt requests priority level a2 selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests priority level a1 selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests priority level a0 selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests selects the priority level of irq interrupt requests priority level a6 selects the priority level of irq and irq interrupt requests priority level a5 selects the priority level of irq and irq interrupt requests priority level a4 0 1 23 45 ipra is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 93 bit 7?riority level a7 (ipra7): selects the priority level of irq 0 interrupt requests. bit 7 ipra7 description 0 irq 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 6?riority level a6 (ipra6): selects the priority level of irq 1 interrupt requests. bit 6 ipra6 description 0 irq 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 5?riority level a5 (ipra5): selects the priority level of irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests. bit 5 ipra5 description 0 irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 4?riority level a4 (ipra4): selects the priority level of irq 4 and irq 5 interrupt requests. bit 4 ipra4 description 0 irq 4 and irq 5 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 irq 4 and irq 5 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) 94 bit 3?riority level a3 (ipra3): selects the priority level of wdt, dram interface, and a/d converter interrupt requests. bit 3 ipra3 description 0 wdt, dram interface, and a/d converter interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 wdt, dram interface, and a/d converter interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 2?riority level a2 (ipra2): selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests. bit 2 ipra2 description 0 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 16-bit timer channel 0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 1?riority level a1 (ipra1): selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests. bit 1 ipra1 description 0 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 16-bit timer channel 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 0?riority level a0 (ipra0): selects the priority level of 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests. bit 0 ipra0 description 0 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 16-bit timer channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) 95 interrupt priority register b (iprb): iprb is an 8-bit readable/writable register in which interrupt priority levels can be set. bit initial value read/write 7 iprb7 0 r/w 6 iprb6 0 r/w 5 iprb5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 iprb3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 iprb2 0 r/w 1 iprb1 0 r/w priority level b7 selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests priority level b3 selects the priority level of sci channel 0 interrupt requests priority level b2 selects the priority level of sci channel 1 interrupt requests priority level b1 selects the priority level of sci channel 2 interrupt requests reserved bit selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests priority level b6 selects the priority level of dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) priority level b5 reserved bit iprb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. 96 bit 7?riority level b7 (iprb7): selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests. bit 7 iprb7 description 0 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority)(initial value) 1 8-bit timer channel 0, 1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 6?riority level b6 (iprb6): selects the priority level of 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests. bit 6 iprb6 description 0 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority)(initial value) 1 8-bit timer channel 2, 3 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 5?riority level b5 (iprb5): selects the priority level of dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1). bit 5 iprb5 description 0 dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 0 (initial value) (low priority) 1 dmac interrupt requests (channels 0 and 1) have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 4?eserved: this bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. 97 bit 3?riority level b3 (iprb3): selects the priority level of sci channel 0 interrupt requests. bit 3 iprb3 description 0 sci0 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 sci0 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 2?riority level b2 (iprb2): selects the priority level of sci channel 1 interrupt requests. bit 2 iprb2 description 0 sci1 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 sci1 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 1?riority level b1 (iprb1): selects the priority level of sci channel 2 interrupt requests. bit 1 iprb1 description 0 sci channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 0 (low priority) (initial value) 1 sci channel 2 interrupt requests have priority level 1 (high priority) bit 0?eserved: this bit can be written and read, but it does not affect interrupt priority. 98 5.2.3 irq status register (isr) isr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of irq 0 to irq 5 interrupt requests. bit initial value read/write 7 0 these bits indicate irq to irq interrupt request status note: only 0 can be written, to clear flags. * 6 0 5 irq5f 0 r/(w) * 4 irq4f 0 r/(w) * 3 irq3f 0 r/(w) * 2 irq2f 0 r/(w) * 1 irq1f 0 r/(w) * 0 irq0f 0 r/(w) * 50 irq to irq flags 50 reserved bits isr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits can not be modified and are always read as 0. bits 5 to 0?rq 5 to irq 0 flags (irq5f to irq0f): these bits indicate the status of irq 5 to irq 0 interrupt requests. bits 5 to 0 irq5f to irq0f description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) 0 is written in irqnf after reading the irqnf flag when irqnf = 1. irqnsc = 0, irqn irqn irqn 99 5.2.4 irq enable register (ier) ier is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables irq 5 to irq 0 interrupt requests. bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w these bits enable or disable irq to irq interrupts 6 0 r/w 5 irq5e 0 r/w 4 irq4e 0 r/w 3 irq3e 0 r/w 2 irq2e 0 r/w 1 irq1e 0 r/w 0 irq0e 0 r/w 50 irq to irq enable 50 reserved bits ier is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits can be written and read, but they do not enable or disable interrupts. bits 5 to 0?rq 5 to irq 0 enable (irq5e to irq0e): these bits enable or disable irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts. bits 5 to 0 irq5e to irq0e description 0 irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts are disabled (initial value) 1 irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts are enabled 100 5.2.5 irq sense control register (iscr) iscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects level sensing or falling-edge sensing of the inputs at pins irq 5 to irq 0 . bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w these bits select level sensing or falling-edge sensing for irq to irq interrupts 6 0 r/w 5 irq5sc 0 r/w 4 irq4sc 0 r/w 3 irq3sc 0 r/w 2 irq2sc 0 r/w 1 irq1sc 0 r/w 0 irq0sc 0 r/w 50 irq to irq sense control 50 reserved bits iscr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits can be written and read, but they do not select level or falling-edge sensing. bits 5 to 0?rq 5 to irq 0 sense control (irq5sc to irq0sc): these bits select whether interrupts irq 5 to irq 0 are requested by level sensing of pins irq 5 to irq 0 , or by falling-edge sensing. bits 5 to 0 irq5sc to irq0sc description 0 interrupts are requested when irq irq irq irq 101 5.3 interrupt sources the interrupt sources include external interrupts (nmi, irq 0 to irq 5 ) and 36 internal interrupts. 5.3.1 external interrupts there are seven external interrupts: nmi, and irq 0 to irq 5 . of these, nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , and irq 2 can be used to exit software standby mode. nmi: nmi is the highest-priority interrupt and is always accepted, regardless of the states of the i and ui bits in ccr*. the nmieg bit in syscr selects whether an interrupt is requested by the rising or falling edge of the input at the nmi pin. nmi interrupt exception handling has vector number 7. note: in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, nmi input is sometimes disabled. for details see 18.6.4, nmi input disable conditions. irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts: these interrupts are requested by input signals at pins irq 0 to irq 5 . the irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts have the following features. ? iscr settings can select whether an interrupt is requested by the low level of the input at pins irq 0 to irq 5 , or by the falling edge. ? ier settings can enable or disable the irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts. interrupt priority levels can be assigned by four bits in ipra (ipra7 to ipra4). ? the status of irq 0 to irq 5 interrupt requests is indicated in isr. the isr flags can be cleared to 0 by software. figure 5.2 shows a block diagram of interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 . input edge/level sense circuit irqnsc irqnf s r q irqne irqn interrupt request clear signal irqn figure 5.2 block diagram of interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 102 figure 5.3 shows the timing of the setting of the interrupt flags (irqnf). irqn figure 5.3 timing of setting of irqnf interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 have vector numbers 12 to 17. these interrupts are detected regardless of whether the corresponding pin is set for input or output. when using a pin for external interrupt input, clear its ddr bit to 0 and do not use the pin for chip select output, refresh output, sci input/output, or a/d external trigger input. 5.3.2 internal interrupts thirty-six internal interrupts are requested from the on-chip supporting modules. ? each on-chip supporting module has status flags for indicating interrupt status, and enable bits for enabling or disabling interrupts. ? interrupt priority levels can be assigned in ipra and iprb. ? 16-bit timer, sci, and a/d converter interrupt requests can activate the dmac, in which case no interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller, and the i and ui bits are disregarded. 5.3.3 interrupt vector table table 5.3 lists the interrupt sources, their vector addresses, and their default priority order. in the default priority order, smaller vector numbers have higher priority. the priority of interrupts other than nmi can be changed in ipra and iprb. the priority order after a reset is the default order shown in table 5.3. 103 table 5.3 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and priority vector vector address* interrupt source origin number advanced mode normal mode ipr priority nmi external 7 h'001c to h'001f h'000e to h'000f high irq 0 pins 12 h'0030 to h'0033 h'0018 to h'0019 ipra7 irq 1 13 h'0034 to h0037 h'001a to h'001b ipra6 irq 2 irq 3 14 15 h'0038 to h'003b h'003c to h'003f h'001c to h'001d h'001e to h'001f ipra5 irq 4 irq 5 16 17 h'0040 to h'0043 h'0044 to h'0047 h'0020 to h'0021 h'0022 to h'0023 ipra4 reserved 18 19 h'0048 to h'004b h'004c to h'004f h'0024 to h'0025 h'0026 to h'0027 wovi (interval timer) watchdog timer 20 h'0050 to h'0053 h'0028 to h'0029 ipra3 cmi (compare match) dram interface 21 h'0054 to h'0057 h'002a to h'002b reserved 22 h'0058 to h'005b h'002c to h'002d adi (a/d end) a/d 23 h'005c to h'005f h'002e to h'002f imia0 (compare match/ input capture a0) imib0 (compare match/ input capture b0) ovi0 (overflow 0) 16-bit timer channel 0 24 25 26 h'0060 to h'0063 h'0064 to h'0067 h'0068 to h'006b h'0030 to h'0031 h'0032 to h'0033 h'0034 to h'0035 ipra2 reserved 27 h'006c to h'006f h'0036 to h'0037 imia1 (compare match/ inputcapture a1) imib1 (compare match/ input capture b1) ovi1 (overflow 1) 16-bit timer channel 1 28 29 30 h'0070 to h'0073 h'0074 to h'0077 h'0078 to h'007b h'0038 to h'0039 h'003a to h'003b h'003c to h'003d ipra1 reserved 31 h'007c to h'007f h'003e to h'003f low note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 104 table 5.3 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and priority (cont) vector vector address* interrupt source origin number advanced mode normal mode ipr priority imia2 (compare match/ input capture a2) imib2 (compare match/ input capture b2) ovi2 (overflow 2) 16-bit timer channel 2 32 33 34 h'0080 to h'0083 h'0084 to h'0087 h'0088 to h'008b h'0040 to h'0041 h'0042 to h'0043 h'0044 to h'0045 ipra0 high reserved 35 h'008c to h'008f h'0046 to h'0047 cmia0 (compare match a0) cmib0 (compare match b0) cmia1/cmib1 (compare match a1/b1) tovi0/tovi1 (overflow 0/1) 8-bit timer channel 0/1 36 37 38 39 h'0090 to h'0093 h'0094 to h'0097 h'0098 to h'009b h'009c to h'009f h'0048 to h'0049 h'004a to h'004b h'004c to h'004d h'004e to h'004f iprb7 cmia2 (compare match a2) cmib2 (compare match b2) cmia3/cmib3 (compare match a3/b3) tovi2/tovi3 (overflow 2/3) 8-bit timer channel 2/3 40 41 42 43 h'00a0 to h'00a3 h'00a4 to h'00a7 h'00a8 to h'00ab h'00ac to h'00af h'0050 to h'0051 h'0052 to h'0053 h'0054 to h'0055 h'0056 to h'0057 iprb6 dend0a dend0b dend1a dend1b dmac 44 45 46 47 h'00b0 to h'00b3 h'00b4 to h'00b7 h'00b8 to h'00bb h'00bc to h'00bf h'0058 to h'0059 h'005a to h'005b h'005c to h'005d h'005e to h'005f iprb5 reserved 48 49 50 51 h'00c0 to h'00c3 h'00c4 to h'00c7 h'00c8 to h'00cb h'00cc to h'00cf h'0060 to h'0061 h'0062 to h'0063 h'0064 to h'0065 h'0066 to h'0067 low note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 105 table 5.3 interrupt sources, vector addresses, and priority (cont) vector vector address* interrupt source origin number advanced mode normal mode ipr priority eri0 (receive error 0) rxi0 (receive data full 0) txi0 (transmit data empty 0) tei0 (transmit end 0) sci channel 0 52 53 54 55 h'00d0 to h'00d3 h'00d4 to h'00d7 h'00d8 to h'00db h'00dc to h'00df h'0068 to h'0069 h'006a to h'006b h'006c to h'006d h'006e to h'006f iprb3 high eri1 (receive error 1) rxi1 (receive data full 1) txi1 (transmit data empty 1) tei1 (transmit end 1) sci channel 1 56 57 58 59 h'00e0 to h'00e3 h'00e4 to h'00e7 h'00e8 to h'00eb h'00ec to h'00ef h'0070 to h'0071 h'0072 to h'0073 h'0074 to h'0075 h'0076 to h'0077 iprb2 eri2 (receive error 2) rxi2 (receive data full 2) txi2 (transmit data empty 2) tei2 (transmit end 2) sci channel 2 60 61 62 63 h'00f0 to h'00f3 h'00f4 to h'00f7 h'00f8 to h'00fb h'00fc to h'00ff h'0078 to h'0079 h'007a to h'007b h'007c to h'007d h'007e to h'007f iprb1 low note: * lower 16 bits of the address. 106 5.4 interrupt operation 5.4.1 interrupt handling process the h8/3067 series handles interrupts differently depending on the setting of the ue bit. when ue = 1, interrupts are controlled by the i bit. when ue = 0, interrupts are controlled by the i and ui bits. table 5.4 indicates how interrupts are handled for all setting combinations of the ue, i, and ui bits. nmi interrupts are always accepted except in the reset and hardware standby states*. irq interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules have their own enable bits. interrupt requests are ignored when the enable bits are cleared to 0. note: in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, nmi input is sometimes disabled. for details see 18.6.4, nmi input disable conditions. table 5.4 ue, i, and ui bit settings and interrupt handling syscr ccr ue i ui description 10 all interrupts are accepted. interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. 1 no interrupts are accepted except nmi. 00 all interrupts are accepted. interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. 1 0 nmi and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted. 1 no interrupts are accepted except nmi. ue = 1: interrupts irq 0 to irq 5 and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules can all be masked by the i bit in the cpu? ccr. interrupts are masked when the i bit is set to 1, and unmasked when the i bit is cleared to 0. interrupts with priority level 1 have higher priority. figure 5.4 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when ue = 1. 107 program execution state interrupt requested? nmi no yes no yes no priority level 1? no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes tei2 yes no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes tei2 yes no i = 0 yes save pc and ccr i 1 branch to interrupt service routine figure 5.4 process up to interrupt acceptance when ue = 1 108 ? if an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. ? when the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highest- priority request, following the ipr interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. if two or more interrupts with the same ipr setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5.3. ? the interrupt controller checks the i bit. if the i bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted. if the i bit is set to 1, only nmi is accepted; other interrupt requests are held pending. ? when an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. ? in interrupt exception handling, pc and ccr are saved to the stack area. the pc value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. ? next the i bit is set to 1 in ccr, masking all interrupts except nmi. ? the vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. ue = 0: the i and ui bits in the cpu? ccr and the ipr bits enable three-level masking of irq 0 to irq 5 interrupts and interrupts from the on-chip supporting modules. ? interrupt requests with priority level 0 are masked when the i bit is set to 1, and are unmasked when the i bit is cleared to 0. ? interrupt requests with priority level 1 are masked when the i and ui bits are both set to 1, and are unmasked when either the i bit or the ui bit is cleared to 0. for example, if the interrupt enable bits of all interrupt requests are set to 1, ipra is set to h'20, and iprb is set to h'00 (giving irq 2 and irq 3 interrupt requests priority over other interrupts), interrupts are masked as follows: a. if i = 0, all interrupts are unmasked (priority order: nmi > irq 2 > irq 3 >irq 0 ?. b. if i = 1 and ui = 0, only nmi, irq 2 , and irq 3 are unmasked. c. if i = 1 and ui = 1, all interrupts are masked except nmi. 109 figure 5.5 shows the transitions among the above states. all interrupts are unmasked only nmi, irq , and irq are unmasked exception handling, or i 1, ui 1 a. b. 2 3 all interrupts are masked except nmi c. ui 0 i 0 exception handling, or ui 1 i 0 i 1, ui 0 figure 5.5 interrupt masking state transitions (example) figure 5.6 is a flowchart showing how interrupts are accepted when ue = 0. ? if an interrupt condition occurs and the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller. ? when the interrupt controller receives one or more interrupt requests, it selects the highest- priority request, following the ipr interrupt priority settings, and holds other requests pending. if two or more interrupts with the same ipr setting are requested simultaneously, the interrupt controller follows the priority order shown in table 5.3. ? the interrupt controller checks the i bit. if the i bit is cleared to 0, the selected interrupt request is accepted regardless of its ipr setting, and regardless of the ui bit. if the i bit is set to 1 and the ui bit is cleared to 0, only nmi and interrupts with priority level 1 are accepted; interrupt requests with priority level 0 are held pending. if the i bit and ui bit are both set to 1, only nmi is accepted; all other interrupt requests are held pending. ? when an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the current instruction has been completed. ? in interrupt exception handling, pc and ccr are saved to the stack area. the pc value that is saved indicates the address of the first instruction that will be executed after the return from the interrupt service routine. ? the i and ui bits are set to 1 in ccr, masking all interrupts except nmi. ? the vector address of the accepted interrupt is generated, and the interrupt service routine starts executing from the address indicated by the contents of the vector address. 110 program execution state interrupt requested? nmi no yes no yes no priority level 1? no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes tei2 yes no irq 0 yes no irq 1 yes tei2 yes no i = 0 yes no i = 0 yes ui = 0 yes no save pc and ccr i 1, ui 1 figure 5.6 process up to interrupt acceptance when ue = 0 111 5.4.2 interrupt sequence figure 5.7 shows the interrupt sequence in mode 2 when the program code and stack are in an external memory area accessed in two states via a 16-bit bus. rd hwr lwr 2 sp 4 (6), (8) (9), (11) (10), (12) (13) (14) pc and ccr saved to stack vector address starting address of interrupt service routine (contents of vector address) starting address of interrupt service routine; (13) = (10), (12) first instruction of interrupt service routine (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) figure 5.7 interrupt sequence 112 5.4.3 interrupt response time table 5.5 indicates the interrupt response time from the occurrence of an interrupt request until the first instruction of the interrupt service routine is executed. table 5.5 interrupt response time external memory on-chip 8-bit bus 16-bit bus no. item memory 2 states 3 states 2 states 3 states 1 interrupt priority decision 2* 1 2* 1 2* 1 2* 1 2* 1 2 maximum number of states until end of current instruction 1 to 23 1 to 27 1 to 31* 4 1 to 23 1 to 25* 4 3 saving pc and ccr to stack 4 8 12* 4 46* 4 4 vector fetch 4 8 12* 4 46* 4 5 instruction prefetch* 2 4 8 12* 4 46* 4 6 internal processing* 3 44 4 4 4 total 19 to 41 31 to 57 43 to 73 19 to 41 25 to 49 notes: 1. 1 state for internal interrupts. 2. prefetch after the interrupt is accepted and prefetch of the first instruction in the interrupt service routine. 3. internal processing after the interrupt is accepted and internal processing after vector fetch. 4. the number of states increases if wait states are inserted in external memory access. 113 5.5 usage notes 5.5.1 contention between interrupt and interrupt-disabling instruction when an instruction clears an interrupt enable bit to 0 to disable the interrupt, the interrupt is not disabled until after execution of the instruction is completed. if an interrupt occurs while a bclr, mov, or other instruction is being executed to clear its interrupt enable bit to 0, at the instant when execution of the instruction ends the interrupt is still enabled, so its interrupt exception handling is carried out. if a higher-priority interrupt is also requested, however, interrupt exception handling for the higher-priority interrupt is carried out, and the lower-priority interrupt is ignored. this also applies to the clearing of an interrupt flag to 0. figure 5.8 shows an example in which an imiea bit is cleared to 0 in the 16-bit timer's tisra register. imia exception handling tisra write cycle by cpu figure 5.8 contention between interrupt and interrupt-disabling instruction this type of contention will not occur if the interrupt is masked when the interrupt enable bit or flag is cleared to 0. 114 5.5.2 instructions that inhibit interrupts the ldc, andc, orc, and xorc instructions inhibit interrupts. when an interrupt occurs, after determining the interrupt priority, the interrupt controller requests a cpu interrupt. if the cpu is currently executing one of these interrupt-inhibiting instructions, however, when the instruction is completed the cpu always continues by executing the next instruction. 5.5.3 interrupts during eepmov instruction execution the eepmov.b and eepmov.w instructions differ in their reaction to interrupt requests. when the eepmov.b instruction is executing a transfer, no interrupts are accepted until the transfer is completed, not even nmi. when the eepmov.w instruction is executing a transfer, interrupt requests other than nmi are not accepted until the transfer is completed. if nmi is requested, nmi exception handling starts at a transfer cycle boundary. the pc value saved on the stack is the address of the next instruction. programs should be coded as follows to allow for nmi interrupts during eepmov.w execution: l1: eepmov.w mov.w r4,r4 bne l1 115 section 6 bus controller 6.1 overview the h8/3067 series has an on-chip bus controller (bsc) that manages the external address space divided into eight areas. the bus specifications, such as bus width and number of access states, can be set independently for each area, enabling multiple memories to be connected easily. the bus controller also has a bus arbitration function that controls the operation of the internal bus masters-the cpu, dma controller (dmac), and dram interface and can release the bus to an external device. 6.1.1 features the features of the bus controller are listed below. ? manages external address space in area units ? manages the external space as eight areas (0 to 7) of 128 kbytes in 1m-byte modes, or 2 mbytes in 16-mbyte modes ? bus specifications can be set independently for each area ? dram/burst rom interfaces can be set ? basic bus interface ? chip select ( cs 0 to cs 7 ) can be output for areas 0 to 7 ? 8-bit access or 16-bit access can be selected for each area ? two-state access or three-state access can be selected for each area ? program wait states can be inserted for each area ? pin wait insertion capability is provided ? dram interface ? dram interface can be set for areas 2 to 5 ? row address/column address multiplexed output (8/9/10 bits) ? 2-cas byte access mode ? burst operation (fast page mode) ? t p cycle insertion to secure ras precharging time ? choice of cas-before-ras refreshing or self-refreshing ? burst rom interface ? burst rom interface can be set for area 0 ? selection of two- or three-state burst access 116 ? idle cycle insertion ? an idle cycle can be inserted in case of an external read cycle between different areas ? an idle cycle can be inserted when an external read cycle is immediately followed by an external write cycle ? bus arbitration function ? a built-in bus arbiter grants the bus right to the cpu, dmac, dram interface, or an external bus master ? other features ? refresh counter (refresh timer) can be used as interval timer ? choice of two address update modes (in flash memory r version and mask rom versions) 117 6.1.2 block diagram figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the bus controller. internal address bus abwcr astcr bcr cscr adrcr area decoder chip select control signals cs 0 to cs 7 bus control circuit wcrh wcrl brcr dram control legend dram interface wait state controller wait back breq internal data bus cpu bus request signal dmac bus request signal dram interface bus request signal cpu bus acknowledge signal dmac bus acknowledge signal dram interface bus acknowledge signal bus arbiter bus mode control signal internal signals internal signals bus size control signal access state control signal wait request signal : bus width control register : access state control register : dram control register a : dram control register b : wait control register h : wait control register l : bus release control register : chip select control register : refresh timer control/status register : refresh timer counter : refresh time constant register astcr drcra drcrb wcrh wcrl brcr cscr rtmcsr rtcnt rtcor adrcr* : address control register abwcr drcra drcrb rtmcsr rtcnt rtcor bcr : bus control register note: * this register is provided only in the flash memory r version and mask rom versions. figure 6.1 block diagram of bus controller 118 6.1.3 pin configuration table 6.1 summarizes the input/output pins of the bus controller. table 6.1 bus controller pins name abbreviation i/o function chip select 0 to 7 cs 0 to cs 7 output strobe signals selecting areas 0 to 7 address strobe as output strobe signal indicating valid address output on the address bus read rd output strobe signal indicating reading from the external address space high write hwr output strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) low write lwr output strobe signal indicating writing to the external address space, with valid data on the lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) wait wait input wait request signal for access to external three-state access areas bus request breq input request signal for releasing the bus to an external device bus acknowledge back output acknowledge signal indicating release of the bus to an external device 119 6.1.4 register configuration table 6.2 summarizes the bus controller's registers. table 6.2 bus controller registers address* 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee020 bus width control register abwcr r/w h'ff* 2 h'ee021 access state control register astcr r/w h'ff h'ee022 wait control register h wcrh r/w h'ff h'ee023 wait control register l wcrl r/w h'ff h'ee013 bus release control register brcr r/w h'fe* 3 h'ee01f chip select control register cscr r/w h'0f h'ee01e address control register* 4 adrcr r/w h'ff h'ee024 bus control register bcr r/w h'c6 h'ee026 dram control register a drcra r/w h'10 h'ee027 dram control register b drcrb r/w h'08 h'ee028 refresh timer control/status register rtmcsr r(w)* 5 h'07 h'ee029 refresh timer counter rtcnt r/w h'00 h'ee02a refresh time constant register rtcor r/w h'ff notes: 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. in modes 2 and 4, the initial value is h'00. 3. in modes 3 and 4, the initial value is h'ee. 4. this register is provided only in the flash memory r version and mask rom versions. 5. for bit 7, only 0 can be written to clear the flag. 120 6.2 register descriptions 6.2.1 bus width control register (abwcr) abwcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects 8-bit or 16-bit access for each area. 7 abw7 1 r/w 0 r/w 6 abw6 1 r/w 0 r/w 5 abw5 1 r/w 0 r/w 4 abw4 1 r/w 0 r/w 3 abw3 1 r/w 0 r/w 2 abw2 1 r/w 0 r/w 1 abw1 1 r/w 0 r/w 0 abw0 1 r/w 0 r/w bit modes 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 2 and 4 when abwcr contains h'ff (selecting 8-bit access for all areas), the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode: the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is valid, and port 4 is an input/output port. when at least one bit is cleared to 0 in abwcr, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode with a 16-bit data bus (d 15 to d 0 ). in modes 1, 3, 5, 6, and 7, abwcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in modes 2 and 4, abwcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?rea 7 to 0 bus width control (abw7 to abw0): these bits select 8-bit access or 16-bit access for the corresponding areas. bits 7 to 0 abw7 to abw0 description 0 areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas 1 areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas abwcr specifies the data bus width of external memory areas. the data bus width of on-chip memory and registers is fixed, and does not depend on abwcr settings. these settings are therefore meaningless in the single-chip modes (modes 6 and 7). 121 6.2.2 access state control register (astcr) astcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether each area is accessed in two states or three states. ast3 ast2 ast1 ast0 1 initial value 1111111 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 bits selecting number of states for access to each area ast7 ast6 ast5 ast4 bit astcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?rea 7 to 0 access state control (ast7 to ast0): these bits select whether the corresponding area is accessed in two or three states. bits 7 to 0 ast7 to ast0 description 0 areas 7 to 0 are accessed in two states 1 areas 7 to 0 are accessed in three states (initial value) astcr specifies the number of states in which external areas are accessed. on-chip memory and registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on astcr settings. these settings are therefore meaningless in the single-chip modes (modes 6 and 7). when the corresponding area is designated as dram space by bits dras2 to dras0 in dram control register a (drcra), the number of access states does not depend on the ast bit setting. when an ast bit is cleared to 0, programmable wait insertion is not performed. 6.2.3 wait control registers h and l (wcrh, wcrl) wcrh and wcrl are 8-bit readable/writable registers that select the number of program wait states for each area. on-chip memory and registers are accessed in a fixed number of states that does not depend on wcrh/wcrl settings. wcrh and wcrl are initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. they are not initialized in software standby mode. 122 wcrh w51 w50 w41 w40 1 initial value 1111111 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 w71 w70 w61 w60 bit bits 7 and 6?rea 7 wait control 1 and 0 (w71, w70): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 7 in external space is accessed while the ast7 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 7 w71 bit 6 w70 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 7 is accessed (initial value) bits 5 and 4?rea 6 wait control 1 and 0 (w61, w60): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 6 in external space is accessed while the ast6 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 5 w61 bit 4 w60 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 6 is accessed (initial value) bits 3 and 2?rea 5 wait control 1 and 0 (w51, w50): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 5 in external space is accessed while the ast5 bit in astcr is set to 1. 123 bit 3 w51 bit 2 w50 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 5 is accessed (initial value) bits 1 and 0?rea 4 wait control 1 and 0 (w41, w40): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 4 in external space is accessed while the ast4 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 1 w41 bit 0 w40 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 4 is accessed (initial value) wcrl w11 w10 w01 w00 1 initial value 1111111 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 w31 w30 w21 w20 bit bits 7 and 6?rea 3 wait control 1 and 0 (w31, w30): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 3 in external space is accessed while the ast3 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 7 w31 bit 6 w30 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 3 is accessed (initial value) 124 bits 5 and 4?rea 2 wait control 1 and 0 (w21, w20): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 2 in external space is accessed while the ast2 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 5 w21 bit 4 w20 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 2 is accessed (initial value) bits 3 and 2?rea 1 wait control 1 and 0 (w11, w10): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 1 in external space is accessed while the ast1 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 3 w11 bit 2 w10 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 1 is accessed (initial value) bits 1 and 0?rea 0 wait control 1 and 0 (w01, w00): these bits select the number of program wait states when area 0 in external space is accessed while the ast0 bit in astcr is set to 1. bit 1 w01 bit 0 w00 description 0 0 program wait not inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 1 program wait state inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 0 2 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed 1 3 program wait states inserted when external space area 0 is accessed (initial value) 125 6.2.4 bus release control register (brcr) brcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables address output on bus lines a 23 to a 20 and enables or disables release of the bus to an external device. 7 a23e 1 1 r/w 1 r/w address 23 to 20 enable these bits enable pa 7 to pa 4 to be used for a 23 to a 20 address output 6 a22e 1 1 r/w 1 r/w 5 a21e 1 1 r/w 1 r/w 4 a20e 1 0 1 r/w 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 brle 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w bit modes 1, 2, 6, and 7 initial value read/write initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 3 and 4 mode 5 reserved bits bus release enable enables or disables release of the bus to an external device brcr is initialized to h'fe in modes 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7, and to h'ee in modes 3 and 4, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7?ddress 23 enable (a23e): enables pa 4 to be used as the a 23 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 23 output from pa 4 . in modes other than 3, 4, and 5, this bit cannot be modified and pa 4 has its ordinary port functions. bit 7 a23e description 0pa 4 is the a 23 address output pin 1pa 4 is an input/output pin (initial value) bit 6?ddress 22 enable (a22e): enables pa 5 to be used as the a 22 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 22 output from pa 5 . in modes other than 3, 4, and 5, this bit cannot be modified and pa 5 has its ordinary port functions. bit 6 a22e description 0pa 5 is the a 22 address output pin 1pa 5 is an input/output pin (initial value) 126 bit 5?ddress 21 enable (a21e): enables pa 6 to be used as the a 21 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 21 output from pa 6 . in modes other than 3, 4, and 5, this bit cannot be modified and pa 6 has its ordinary port functions. bit 5 a21e description 0pa 6 is the a 21 address output pin 1pa 6 is an input/output pin (initial value) bit 4?ddress 20 enable (a20e): enables pa 7 to be used as the a 20 address output pin. writing 0 in this bit enables a 20 output from pa 7 . this bit can only be modified in mode 5. bit 4 a20e description 0pa 7 is the a 20 address output pin (initial value when in mode 3 or 4) 1pa 7 is an input/output pin (initial value when in mode 1, 2, 5, 6 or 7) bits 3 to 1?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 0?us release enable (brle): enables or disables release of the bus to an external device. bit 0 brle description 0 the bus cannot be released to an external device breq and back can be used as input/output pins (initial value) 1 the bus can be released to an external device 6.2.5 bus control register (bcr) brsts0 rdea waite 1 initial value 1000110 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 icis1 icis0 brome brsts1 bit bcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables idle cycle insertion, selects the area division unit, and enables or disables wait pin input. bcr is initialized to h'c6 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. 127 bit 7?dle cycle insertion 1 (icis1): selects whether one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas. bit 7 icis1 description 0 no idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas 1 idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas (initial value) bit 6?dle cycle insertion 0 (icis0): selects whether one idle cycle state is to be inserted between bus cycles in case of consecutive external read and write cycles. bit 6 icis0 description 0 no idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles 1 idle cycle inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles (initial value) bit 5?urst rom enable (brome): selects whether area 0 is a burst rom interface area. bit 5 brome description 0 area 0 is a basic bus interface area (initial value) 1 area 0 is a burst rom interface area bit 4?urst cycle select 1 (brsts1): selects the number of burst cycle states for the burst rom interface. bit 4 brsts1 description 0 burst access cycle comprises 2 states (initial value) 1 burst access cycle comprises 3 states 128 bit 3?urst cycle select 0 (brsts0): selects the number of words that can be accessed in a burst rom interface burst access. bit 3 brsts0 description 0 max. 4 words in burst access (burst access on match of address bits above a3) (initial value) 1 max. 8 words in burst access (burst access on match of address bits above a4) bit 2?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 1?rea division unit select (rdea): selects the memory map area division units. this bit is valid in modes 3, 4, and 5, and is invalid in modes 1, 2, 6, and 7. bit 1 rdea description 0 area divisions are as follows: area 0: 2 mb area 4: 1.93 mb area 1: 2 mb area 5: 4 kb area 2: 8 mb area 6: 23.75 kb area 3: 2 mb area 7: 22 b 1 areas 0 to 7 are the same size (2 mb) (initial value) bit 0?ait pin enable (waite): enables or disables wait insertion by means of the wait pin. bit 0 waite description 0 wait wait wait 6.2.6 chip select control register (cscr) cscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables output of chip select signals ( cs 7 to cs 4 ). if output of a chip select signal is enabled by a setting in this register, the corresponding pin functions as a chip select signal ( cs 7 to cs 4 ) output regardless of any other settings. cscr cannot be modified in single-chip mode. 129 0 initial value 0001111 read/write : r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 reserved bits cs7e cs6e cs5e cs4e chip select 7 to 4 enable these bits enable or disable chip select signal output bit cscr is initialized to h'0f by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 4?hip select 7 to 4 enable (cs7e to cs4e): these bits enable or disable output of the corresponding chip select signal. bit n csne description 0 output of chip select signal csn csn bits 3 to 0?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 6.2.7 dram control register a (drcra) be rdm srfmd rfshe 0 initial value 0010000 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 dras2 dras1 dras0 bit drcra is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the areas that have a dram interface function, and the access mode, and enables or disables self-refreshing and refresh pin output. drcra is initialized to h'10 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 5?ram area select (dras2 to dras0): these bits select which of areas 2 to 5 are to function as dram interface areas (dram space) in expanded mode, and at the same time select the ras output pin corresponding to each dram space. 130 description bit 7 dras2 bit 6 dras1 bit 5 dras0 area 5 area 4 area 3 area 2 0 0 0 normal normal normal normal 1 normal normal normal dram space ( cs cs cs cs * 1 0 0 normal dram space ( cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs * dram space ( cs * 1 dram space ( cs * note: a single csn ras csn when any of bits dras2 to dras0 is set to 1 in expanded mode, it is not possible to write to drcrb, rtmcsr, rtcnt, or rtcor. however, 0 can be written to the cmf flag in rtmcsr to clear the flag. when an arbitrary value has been set in dras2 to dras0, a write of a different value other than 000 must not be performed. bit 4?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 3?urst access enable (be): enables or disables burst access to dram space. dram space burst access is performed in fast page mode. bit 3 be description 0 burst disabled (always full access) (initial value) 1 dram space access performed in fast page mode bit 2?as down mode (rdm): selects whether to wait for the next dram access with the ras signal held low (ras down mode), or to drive the ras signal high again (ras up mode), when burst access is enabled for dram space (be = 1), and access to dram is interrupted. caution is required when the hwr and lwr are used as the ucas and lcas output pins. for details, see ras down mode and ras up mode in section 6.5.10, burst operation. 131 bit 2 rdm description 0 dram interface: ras up mode selected (initial value) 1 dram interface: ras down mode selected bit 1?elf-refresh mode (srfmd): specifies dram self-refreshing in software standby mode. when any of areas 2 to 5 is designated as dram space, dram self-refreshing is possible when a transition is made to software standby mode after the srfmd bit has been set to 1. the normal access state is restored when software standby mode is exited, regardless of the srfmd setting. bit 1 srfmd description 0 dram self-refreshing disabled in software standby mode (initial value) 1 dram self-refreshing enabled in software standby mode bit 0?efresh pin enable (rfshe): enables or disables rfsh pin refresh signal output. if areas 2 to 5 are not designated as dram space, this bit should not be set to 1. bit 0 rfshe description 0 rfsh rfsh rfsh 6.2.8 dram control register b (drcrb) tpc rcw rlw 0 initial value 0001000 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 mxc1 mxc0 csel rcyce bit drcrb is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the number of address multiplex column address bits for the dram interface, the column address strobe output pin, enabling or disabling of refresh cycle insertion, the number of precharge cycles, enabling or disabling of wait state insertion between ras and cas , and enabling or disabling of wait state insertion in refresh cycles. 132 drcrb is initialized to h'08 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. the settings in this register are invalid when bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra are all 0. bits 7 and 6?ultiplex control 1 and 0 (mxc1, mxc0): these bits select the row address/column address multiplexing method used on the dram interface. in burst operation, the row address used for comparison is determined by the setting of these bits and the bus width of the relevant area set in abwcr. bit 7 mxc1 bit 6 mxc0 description 0 0 column address: 8 bits compared address: modes 1, 2 8-bit access space a 19 to a 8 16-bit access space a 19 to a 9 modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space a 23 to a 8 16-bit access space a 23 to a 9 1 column address: 9 bits compared address: modes 1, 2 8-bit access space a 19 to a 9 16-bit access space a 19 to a 10 modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space a 23 to a 9 16-bit access space a 23 to a 10 1 0 column address: 10 bits compared address: modes 1, 2 8-bit access space a 19 to a 10 16-bit access space a 19 to a 11 modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space a 23 to a 10 16-bit access space a 23 to a 11 1 illegal setting bit 5 cas output pin select (csel): selects the ucas and lcas output pins when areas 2 to 5 are designated as dram space. bit 5 csel description 0 pb4 and pb5 selected as ucas lcas hwr lwr ucas lcas 133 bit 4?efresh cycle enable (rcyce): enables or disables cas-before-ras refresh cycle insertion. when none of areas 2 to 5 has been designated as dram space, refresh cycles are not inserted regardless of the setting of this bit. bit 4 rcyce description 0 refresh cycles disabled (initial value) 1 dram refresh cycles enabled bit 3?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 2?p cycle control (tpc): selects whether a 1-state or two-state precharge cycle (tp) is to be used for dram read/write cycles and cas-before-ras refresh cycles. the setting of this bit does not affect the self-refresh function. bit 2 tpc description 0 1-state precharge cycle inserted (initial value) 1 2-state precharge cycle inserted bit 1 ras - cas wait (rcw): controls wait state (trw) insertion between t r and t c1 in dram read/write cycles. the setting of this bit does not affect refresh cycles. bit 1 rcw description 0 wait state (trw) insertion disabled (initial value) 1 one wait state (trw) inserted bit 0?efresh cycle wait control (rlw): controls wait state (t rw ) insertion for cas-before- ras refresh cycles. the setting of this bit does not affect dram read/write cycles. bit 0 rlw description 0 wait state (t rw ) insertion disabled (initial value) 1 one wait state (t rw ) inserted 134 6.2.9 refresh timer control/status register (rtmcsr) cks0 0 initial value 0000111 read/write r/w r(w)* r/w r/w r/w 76543210 cmf cmie cks2 cks1 bit rtmcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the refresh timer counter clock. when the refresh timer is used as an interval timer, rtmcsr also enables or disables interrupt requests. bits 7 and 6 of rtmcsr are initialized to 0 by a reset and in the standby modes. bits 5 to 3 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode; they are not initialized in software standby mode. note: only 0 can be written to clear the flag. bit 7?ompare match flag (cmf): status flag that indicates a match between the values of rtcnt and rtcor. bit 7 cmf description 0 clearing conditions when the chip is reset and in standby mode read cmf when cmf = 1, then write 0 in cmf (initial value) 1 setting condition when rtcnt = rtcor bit 6?ompare match interrupt enable (cmie): enables or disables the cmi interrupt requested when the cmf flag is set to 1 in rtmcsr. the cmie bit is always cleared to 0 when any of areas 2 to 5 is designated as dram space. bit 6 cmie description 0 the cmi interrupt requested by cmf is disabled (initial value) 1 the cmi interrupt requested by cmf is enabled bits 5 to 3?efresh counter clock select (cks2 to cks0): these bits select the clock to be input to rtcnt from among 7 clocks obtained by dividing the system clock ( ). when the input clock is selected with bits cks2 to cks0, rtcnt begins counting up. 135 bit 5 cks2 bit 4 cks1 bit 3 cks0 description 0 0 0 count operation halted (initial value) 1 bits 2 to 0?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 6.2.10 refresh timer counter (rtcnt) 0 initial value 0000000 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 bit rtcnt is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. rtcnt is incremented by an internal clock selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr. when rtcnt matches rtcor (compare match), the cmf flag in rtmcsr is set to 1 and rtcnt is cleared to h'00. if the rcyce bit in drcrb is set to 1 at this time, a refresh cycle is started. also, if the cmie bit in rtmcsr is set to 1, a compare match interrupt (cmi) is generated. rtcnt is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 136 6.2.11 refresh time constant register (rtcor) 1 initial value 1111111 read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 bit rtcor is an 8-bit readable/writable register that determines the interval at which rtcnt is cleared. rtcor and rtcnt are constantly compared. when their values match, the cmf flag is set to 1 in rtmcsr, and rtcnt is simultaneously cleared to h'00. rtcor is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. note: only byte access can be used on this register. 137 6.2.12 address control register (adrcr) (provided only in flash memory r version and mask rom versions) adrcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects either address update mode 1 or address update mode 2 as the address output method. 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 adrctl 1 r/w bit initial value r/w : : : reserved bits address control selects address update mode 1 or address update mode 2 adrcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 1?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 0?ddress control (adrctl): selects the address output method. bit 0 adrctl description 0 address update mode 2 is selected 1 address update mode 1 is selected (initial value) this register is provided only in the flash memory r version and mask rom versions; it is not present in the flash memory version (HD64F3067). if this space is accessed in the flash memory version (HD64F3067), a write access will be invalid and a read access will return h'ff. 138 6.3 operation 6.3.1 area division the external address space is divided into areas 0 to 7. each area has a size of 128 kbytes in the 1- mbyte modes, or 2-mbytes in the 16-mbyte modes. figure 6.2 shows a general view of the memory map. h' 00000 h' 1ffff h' 20000 h' 3ffff h' 40000 h' 5ffff h' 60000 h' 7ffff h' 80000 h' 9ffff h' a0000 h' bffff h' c0000 h' dffff h' e0000 h' fffff area 0 (128 kbytes) area 1 (128 kbytes) area 2 (128 kbytes) area 3 (128 kbytes) area 4 (128 kbytes) area 5 (128 kbytes) area 6 (128 kbytes) area 7 (128 mbytes) h' 000000 h' 1fffff h' 200000 h' 3fffff h' 400000 h' 5fffff h' 600000 h' 7fffff h' 800000 h' 9fffff h' a00000 h' bfffff h' c00000 h' dfffff h' e00000 h' ffffff area 0 (2 mbytes) area 1 (2 mbytes) area 2 (2 mbytes) area 3 (2 mbytes) area 4 (2 mbytes) area 5 (2 mbytes) area 6 (2 mbytes) area 7 (2 mbytes) (a) 1-mbyte modes (modes 1, and 2) (b) 16-mbyte modes (modes 3, 4, and 5) figure 6.2 access area map for each operating mode 139 chip select signals ( cs 0 to cs 7 ) can be output for areas 0 to 7. the bus specifications for each area are selected in abwcr, astcr, wcrh, and wcrl. in 16-mbyte mode, the area division units can be selected with the rdea bit in bcr. 140 h'000000 h'1fffff h'200000 h'3fffff h'400000 h'5fffff h'600000 h'7fffff h'800000 h'9fffff h'a00000 h'bfffff h'c00000 h'dfffff h'e00000 h'fee000 h'fee0ff h'fee100 h'ff7fff h'ff8000 h'ff8fff h'ff9000 h'ffef1f h'ffef20 h'fffeff h'ffff00 h'ffff1f h'ffff20 h'ffffe9 h'ffffea h'ffffff area 0 2 mbytes area 1 2 mbytes area 2 2 mbytes area 3 2 mbytes area 4 2 mbytes area 5 2 mbytes area 6 2 mbytes area 7 1.93 mbytes on-chip registers (1) area 7 67.5 kbytes on-chip ram 4 kbytes on-chip registers (2) area 7 22 bytes area 0 2 mbytes area 1 2 mbytes area 2 8 mbytes area 3 2 mbytes area 4 1.93 mbytes area 5 4 kbytes on-chip ram 4 kbytes * on-chip registers (2) area 7 22 bytes area 6 23.75 kbytes on-chip registers (1) 2 mbytes 2 mbytes 2 mbytes 2 mbytes 2 mbytes 2 mbytes 2 mbytes 2 mbytes absolute address 16 bits absolute address 8 bits (a) memory map when rdea = 1 (b) memory map when rdea = 0 reserved 39.75 kbytes note: * area 6 when the rame bit is cleared. figure 6.3 memory map in 16-mbyte mode (h8/3067, h8/3066) 141 6.3.2 bus specifications the external space bus specifications consist of three elements: (1) bus width, (2) number of access states, and (3) number of program wait states. the bus width and number of access states for on-chip memory and registers are fixed, and are not affected by the bus controller. bus width: a bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected with abwcr. an area for which an 8-bit bus is selected functions as an 8-bit access space, and an area for which a 16-bit bus is selected functions as a16-bit access space. if all areas are designated for 8-bit access, 8-bit bus mode is set; if any area is designated for 16- bit access, 16-bit bus mode is set. number of access states: two or three access states can be selected with astcr. an area for which two-state access is selected functions as a two-state access space, and an area for which three-state access is selected functions as a three-state access space. dram space is accessed in four states regardless of the astcr settings. when two-state access space is designated, wait insertion is disabled. number of program wait states: when three-state access space is designated in astcr, the number of program wait states to be inserted automatically is selected with wcrh and wcrl. from 0 to 3 program wait states can be selected. when astcr is cleared to 0 for dram space, a program wait (t c1 -t c2 wait) is not inserted. also, no program wait is inserted in burst rom space burst cycles. table 6.3 shows the bus specifications for each basic bus interface area. 142 table 6.3 bus specifications for each area (basic bus interface) abwcr astcr wcrh/wcrl bus specifications (basic bus interface) abwn astn wn1 wn0 bus width access states program wait states 00 16 2 0 10 0 3 0 11 10 2 13 10 82 0 10 0 3 0 11 10 2 13 note: n = 7 to 0 6.3.3 memory interfaces the h8/3067 series memory interfaces comprise a basic bus interface that allows direct connection of rom, sram, and so on; a dram interface that allows direct connection of dram; and a burst rom interface that allows direct connection of burst rom. the interface can be selected independently for each area. an area for which the basic bus interface is designated functions as normal space, an area for which the dram interface is designated functions as dram space, and area 0 for which the burst rom interface is designated functions as burst rom space. 6.3.4 chip select signals for each of areas 0 to 7, the h8/3067 series can output a chip select signal ( cs 0 to cs 7 ) that goes low when the corresponding area is selected in expanded mode. figure 6.4 shows the output timing of a cs n signal. output of cs 0 to cs 3 : output of cs 0 to cs 3 is enabled or disabled in the data direction register (ddr) of the corresponding port. in the expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled, a reset leaves pin cs 0 in the output state and pins cs 1 to cs 3 in the input state. to output chip select signals cs 1 to cs 3 , the corresponding ddr bits must be set to 1. in the expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled, a reset leaves pins 143 cs 0 to cs 3 in the input state. to output chip select signals cs 0 to cs 3 , the corresponding ddr bits must be set to 1. for details, see section 8, i/o ports. output of cs 4 to cs 7 : output of cs 4 to cs 7 is enabled or disabled in the chip select control register (cscr). a reset leaves pins cs 4 to cs 7 in the input state. to output chip select signals cs 4 to cs 7 , the corresponding cscr bits must be set to 1. for details, see section 8, i/o ports. cs figure 6.4 cs n signal output timing (n = 0 to 7) when the on-chip rom, on-chip ram, and on-chip registers are accessed, cs 0 to cs 7 remain high. the cs n signals are decoded from the address signals. they can be used as chip select signals for sram and other devices. 144 6.3.5 address output method (function provided only in flash memory r version and mask rom versions) the h8/3067 series provides a choice of two address update methods: either the same method as in the previous h8/300h series (address update mode 1), or a method in which address update is restricted to external space accesses or self-refresh cycles (address update mode 2). figure 6.5 shows examples of address output in these two update modes. on-chip memory cycle on-chip memory cycle external read cycle on-chip memory cycle external read cycle address update mode 1 address update mode 2 rd figure 6.5 sample address output in each address update mode (basic bus interface, 3-state space) address update mode 1: address update mode 1 is compatible with the previous h8/300h series. addresses are always updated between bus cycles. address update mode 2: in address update mode 2, address updating is performed only in external space accesses or self-refresh cycles. in this mode, the address can be retained between an external space read cycle and an instruction fetch cycle (on-chip memory) by placing the program in on-chip memory. address update mode 2 is therefore useful when connecting a device that requires address hold time with respect to the rise of the rd strobe. switching between address update modes 1 and 2 is performed by means of the adrctl bit in adrcr. the initial value of adrcr is the address update mode 1 setting, providing compatibility with the previous h8/300h series. cautions: the address output methods are designed so that the initial state with the bit selection method is compatible with the flash memory version (HD64F3067) (i.e. address update mode 1), and so there is basically no problem if this version is replaced with the flash memory r version or a mask rom version. however, the following points should be noted. 145 ? adrcr is allocated to address h'fee01e. in the flash memory version, the corresponding address is empty space, but it is necessary to confirm that no accesses are made to h'fee01e in the program. ? when address update mode 2 is selected, the address in an internal space (on-chip memory or internal i/o) access cycle is not output externally. ? in order to secure address holding with respect to the rise of rd , when address update mode 2 is used an external space read access must be completed within a single access cycle. for example, in a word access to 8-bit access space, the bus cycle is split into two as shown in figure 6.6., and so there is not a single access cycle. in this case, address holding is not guaranteed at the rise of rd between the first (even address) and second (odd address) access cycles (area inside the ellipse in the figure). on-chip memory cycle on-chip memory cycle external read cycle (8-bit space word access) address update mode 2 rd even address odd address figure 6.6 example of consecutive external space accesses in address update mode 2 ? when address update mode 2 is selected, in a dram space cas-before-ras (cbr) refresh cycle the previous address is retained (the area 2 start address is not output). 146 6.4 basic bus interface 6.4.1 overview the basic bus interface enables direct connection of rom, sram, and so on. the bus specifications can be selected with abwcr, astcr, wcrh, and wcrl (see table 6.3). 6.4.2 data size and data alignment data sizes for the cpu and other internal bus masters are byte, word, and longword. the bus controller has a data alignment function, and when accessing external space, controls whether the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) or lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) is used according to the bus specifications for the area being accessed (8-bit access area or 16-bit access area) and the data size. 8-bit access areas: figure 6.7 illustrates data alignment control for 8-bit access space. with 8- bit access space, the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is always used for accesses. the amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte: a word access is performed as two byte accesses, and a longword access, as four byte accesses. d 15 d 8 d 7 d 0 upper data bus lower data bus 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle 3rd bus cycle 4th bus cycle byte size word size longword size figure 6.7 access sizes and data alignment control (8-bit access area) 16-bit access areas: figure 6.8 illustrates data alignment control for 16-bit access areas. with 16-bit access areas, the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) and lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) are used for accesses. the amount of data that can be accessed at one time is one byte or one word, and a longword access is executed as two word accesses. 147 in byte access, whether the upper or lower data bus is used is determined by whether the address is even or odd. the upper data bus is used for an even address, and the lower data bus for an odd address. d 15 d 8 d 7 d 0 upper data bus lower data bus 1st bus cycle 2nd bus cycle byte size longword size even address odd address word size byte size figure 6.8 access sizes and data alignment control (16-bit access area) 6.4.3 valid strobes table 6.4 shows the data buses used, and the valid strobes, for the access spaces. in a read, the rd signal is valid for both the upper and the lower half of the data bus. in a write, the hwr signal is valid for the upper half of the data bus, and the lwr signal for the lower half. 148 table 6.4 data buses used and valid strobes area access size read/write address valid strobe upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) 8-bit byte read rd hwr rd hwr lwr rd hwr lwr 6.4.4 memory areas the initial state of each area is basic bus interface, three-state access space. the initial bus width is selected according to the operating mode. the bus specifications described here cover basic items only, and the following sections should be referred to for further details: 6.4, basic bus interface, 6.5, dram interface, 6.8, burst rom interface. area 0: area 0 includes on-chip rom, and in rom-disabled expansion mode, all of area 0 is external space. in rom-enabled expansion mode, the space excluding on-chip rom is external space. when area 0 external space is accessed, the cs 0 signal can be output. either basic bus interface or burst rom interface can be selected for area 0. the size of area 0 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. areas 1 and 6: in external expansion mode, areas 1 and 6 are entirely external space. when area 1 and 6 external space is accessed, the cs 1 and cs 6 pin signals respectively can be output. only the basic bus interface can be used for areas 1 and 6. the size of areas 1 and 6 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. 149 areas 2 to 5: in external expansion mode, areas 2 to 5 are entirely external space. when area 2 to 5 external space is accessed, signals cs 2 to cs 5 can be output. basic bus interface or dram interface can be selected for areas 2 to 5. with the dram interface, signals cs 2 to cs 5 are used as ras signals. the size of areas 2 to 5 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. area 7: area 7 includes the on-chip ram and registers. in external expansion mode, the space excluding the on-chip ram and registers is external space. the on-chip ram is enabled when the rame bit in the system control register (syscr) is set to 1; when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip ram is disabled and the corresponding space becomes external space . when area 7 external space is accessed, the cs 7 signal can be output. only the basic bus interface can be used for the area 7 memory interface. the size of area 7 is 128 kbytes in modes 1 and 2, and 2 mbytes in modes 3, 4, and 5. 150 6.4.5 basic bus control signal timing 8-bit, three-state-access areas figure 6.9 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, three-state-access area. the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used in accesses to these areas. the lwr pin is always high. wait states can be inserted. bus cycle external address in area n valid invalid valid undetermined data high cs as rd hwr lwr figure 6.9 bus control signal timing for 8-bit, three-state-access area 151 8-bit, two-state-access areas figure 6.10 shows the timing of bus control signals for an 8-bit, two-state-access area. the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used in accesses to these areas. the lwr pin is always high. wait states cannot be inserted. bus cycle external address in area n valid invalid valid undetermined data high cs as rd hwr lwr figure 6.10 bus control signal timing for 8-bit, two-state-access area 152 16-bit, three-state-access areas figures 6.11 to 6.13 show the timing of bus control signals for a 16-bit, three-state-access area. in these areas, the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used in accesses to even addresses and the lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) in accesses to odd addresses. wait states can be inserted. bus cycle even external address in area n valid invalid valid high figure 6.11 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, three-state-access area (1) (byte access to even address) 153 bus cycle odd external address in area n valid invalid valid figure 6.12 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, three-state-access area (2) (byte access to odd address) 154 bus cycle external address in area n valid valid figure 6.13 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, three-state-access area (3) (word access) 155 16-bit, two-state-access areas: figures 6.14 to 6.16 show the timing of bus control signals for a 16-bit, two-state-access area. in these areas, the upper data bus (d 15 to d 8 ) is used in accesses to even addresses and the lower data bus (d 7 to d 0 ) in accesses to odd addresses. wait states cannot be inserted. bus cycle even external address in area n valid invalid valid high figure 6.14 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, two-state-access area (1) (byte access to even address) 156 bus cycle odd external address in area n valid invalid valid high figure 6.15 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, two-state-access area (2) (byte access to odd address) 157 bus cycle external address in area n valid valid figure 6.16 bus control signal timing for 16-bit, two-state-access area (3) (word access) 6.4.6 wait control when accessing external space, the h8/3067 series can extend the bus cycle by inserting one or more wait states (t w ). there are two ways of inserting wait states: (1) program wait insertion and (2) pin wait insertion using the wait pin. program wait insertion: from 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted automatically between the t 2 state and t 3 state on an individual area basis in three-state access space, according to the settings of wcrh and wcrl. pin wait insertion: setting the waite bit in bcr to 1 enables wait insertion by means of the wait pin. when external space is accessed in this state, a program wait is first inserted. if the wait pin is low at the falling edge of in the last t 2 or t w state, another t w state is inserted. if the wait pin is held low, t w states are inserted until it goes high. 158 this is useful when inserting four or more t w states, or when changing the number of t w states for different external devices. the waite bit setting applies to all areas. pin waits cannot be inserted in dram space. figure 6.17 shows an example of the timing for insertion of one program wait state in 3-state space. wait as rd hwr lwr wait wait figure 6.17 example of wait state insertion timing 159 6.5 dram interface 6.5.1 overview the h8/3067 series is provided with a dram interface with functions for dram control signal ( ras , ucas , lcas , we ) output, address multiplexing, and refreshing, that direct connection of dram. in the expanded modes, external address space areas 2 to 5 can be designated as dram space accessed via the dram interface. a data bus width of 8 or 16 bits can be selected for dram space by means of a setting in abwcr. when a 16-bit data bus width is selected, cas is used for byte access control. in the case of 16-bit organization dram, therefore, the 2-cas type can be connected. a fast page mode is supported in addition to the normal read and write access modes. 6.5.2 dram space and ras output pin settings designation of areas 2 to 5 as dram space, and selection of the ras output pin for each area designated as dram space, is performed by setting bits in drcra. table 6.5 shows the correspondence between the settings of bits dras2 to dras0 and the selected dram space and ras output pin. when an arbitrary value has been set in dras2 to dras0, a write of a different value other than 000 must not be performed. table 6.5 settings of bits dras2 to dras0 and corresponding dram space ( ras output pin) dras2 dras1 dras0 area 5 area 4 area 3 area 2 0 0 0 normal space normal space normal space normal space 1 normal space normal space normal space dram space ( cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs cs ras cs 160 6.5.3 address multiplexing when dram space is accessed, the row address and column address are multiplexed. the address multiplexing method is selected with bits mxc1 and mxc0 in drcrb according to the number of bits in the dram column address. table 6.6 shows the correspondence between the settings of mxc1 and mxc0 and the address multiplexing method. table 6.6 settings of bits mxc1 and mxc0 and address multiplexing method drcrb column address address pins mxc1 mxc0 bits a 23 to a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 row address 0 0 8 bits a 23 to a 13 a 20 *a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 1 9 bits a 23 to a 13 a 12 a 20 *a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 1 0 10 bits a 23 to a 13 a 12 a 11 a 20 *a 19 a 18 a 17 a 16 a 15 a 14 a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 1 illegal setting column address a 23 to a 13 a 12 a 11 a 10 a 9 a 8 a 7 a 6 a 5 a 4 a 3 a 2 a 1 a 0 note: * row address bit a 20 is not multiplexed in 1-mbyte mode. 6.5.4 data bus if the bit in abwcr corresponding to an area designated as dram space is set to 1, that area is designated as 8-bit dram space; if the bit is cleared to 0, the area is designated as 16-bit dram space. in 16-bit dram space, 16-bit organization dram can be connected directly. in 8-bit dram space the upper half of the data bus, d 15 to d 8 , is enabled, while in 16-bit dram space both the upper and lower halves of the data bus, d 15 to d 0 , are enabled. access sizes and data alignment are the same as for the basic bus interface: see section 6.4.2, data size and data alignment. 6.5.5 pins used for dram interface table 6.7 shows the pins used for dram interfacing and their functions. 161 table 6.7 dram interface pins pin with dram designated name i/o function pb4 ucas lcas hwr ucas lwr lcas cs ras cs ras cs ras cs ras rd we rfsh 6.5.6 basic timing figure 6.18 shows the basic access timing for dram space. the basic dram access timing is four states: one precharge cycle (t p ) state, one row address output cycle (t r ) state, and two column address output cycle (t c1 , t c2 ) states. unlike the basic bus interface, the corresponding bits in astcr control only enabling or disabling of wait insertion between t c1 and t c2 , and do not affect the number of access states. when the corresponding bit in astcr is cleared to 0, wait states cannot be inserted between t c1 and t c2 in the dram access cycle. if a dram read/write cycle is followed by an access cycle for an external area other than dram space when hwr and lwr are selected as the ucas and lcas output pins, an idle cycle (ti) is inserted unconditionally immediately after the dram access cycle. see section 6.9, idle cycle, for details. 162 a 23 to a 0 csn ras (ucas lcas as rd we rd we ucas lcas figure 6.18 basic access timing (csel = 0 in drcrb) 6.5.7 precharge state control in the h8/3067 series, provision is made for the dram ras precharge time by always inserting one ras precharge state (t p ) when dram space is accessed. this can be changed to two t p states by setting the tpc bit to 1 in drcrb. the optimum number of t p cycles should be set according to the dram connected and the operating frequency of the h8/3067 series chip. figure 6.19 shows the timing when two t p states are inserted. when the tcp bit is set to 1, two t p states are also used for cas-before-ras refresh cycles. 163 csn ras as ucas lcas rd we rd we ucas lcas figure 6.19 timing with two precharge states (csel = 0 in drcrb) 6.5.8 wait control in a dram access cycle, wait states can be inserted (1) between the t r state and t c1 state, and (2) between the t c1 state and t c2 state. insertion of t rw wait state between t r and t c1 : one t rw state can be inserted between t r and t c1 by setting the rcw bit to 1 in drcrb. insertion of t w wait state(s) between t c1 and t c2 : when the bit in astcr corresponding to an area designated as dram space is set to 1, from 0 to 3 wait states can be inserted between the t c1 state and t c2 state by means of settings in wcrh and wcrl. figure 6.20 shows an example of the timing for wait state insertion. 164 the settings of the rcw bit in drcrb and of astcr, wcrh, and wcrl do not affect refresh cycles. wait states cannot be inserted in a dram space access cycle by means of the wait pin. t p tr t c1 t c2 ( ucas lcas rd we csn ras as rd we ucas lcas figure 6.20 example of wait state insertion timing (csel = 0) 6.5.9 byte access control and cas output pin when an access is made to dram space designated as a 16-bit-access area in abwcr, column address strobes ( ucas and lcas ) corresponding to the upper and lower halves of the external data bus are output. in the case of 16-bit organization dram, the 2-cas type can be connected. either pb4 and pb5, or hwr and lwr , can be used as the ucas and lcas output pins, the selection being made with the csel bit in drcrb. table 6.8 shows the csel bit settings and corresponding output pin selections. 165 when an access is made to dram space designated as an 8-bit-access area in abwcr, only ucas is output. when the entire dram space is designated as 8-bit-access space and csel = 0, pb5 can be used as an input/output port. note that ras down mode cannot be used when a device other than dram is connected to external space and hwr and lwr are used as write strobes. in this case, also, an idle cycle (ti) is always inserted when an external access to other than dram space occurs after a dram space access. for details, see section 6.9, idle cycle. table 6.8 csel settings and ucas and lcas output pins csel ucas lcas hwr lwr figure 6.21 shows the control timing. a 23 to a 0 csn ras ucas lcas rd we figure 6.21 control timing (upper-byte write access when csel = 0) 166 6.5.10 burst operation with dram, in addition to full access (normal access) in which data is accessed by outputting a row address for each access, a fast page mode is also provided which can be used when making a number of consecutive accesses to the same row address. this mode enables fast (burst) access of data by simply changing the column address after the row address has been output. burst access can be selected by setting the be bit to 1 in drcra. burst access (fast page mode) operation timing: figure 6.22 shows the operation timing for burst access. when there are consecutive access cycles for dram space, the column address and cas signal output cycles (two states) continue as long as the row address is the same for consecutive access cycles. in burst access, too, the bus cycle can be extended by inserting wait states between t c1 and t c2 . the wait state insertion method and timing are the same as for full access: see section 6.5.8, wait control, for details. the row address used for the comparison is determined by the bus width of the relevant area set in bits mxc1 and mxc0 in brcrb, and in abwcr. table 6.9 shows the compared row addresses corresponding to the various settings of bits mxc1 and mxc0, and abwcr. a 23 to a 0 cs ras as ucas lcas rd we ucas lcas rd we figure 6.22 operation timing in fast page mode 167 table 6.9 correspondence between settings of mxc1 and mxc0 bits and abwcr, and row address compared in burst access drcrb abwcr operating mode mxc1 mxc0 abwn bus width compared row address modes 1 and 2 0 0 0 16 bits a19 to a9 (1-mbyte) 1 8 bits a19 to a8 1 0 16 bits a19 to a10 1 8 bits a19 to a9 1 0 0 16 bits a19 to a11 1 8 bits a19 to a10 1 illegal setting modes 3, 4, and 5 0 0 0 16 bits a23 to a9 (16-mbyte) 1 8 bits a23 to a8 1 0 16 bits a23 to a10 1 8 bits a23 to a9 1 0 0 16 bits a23 to a11 1 8 bits a23 to a10 1 illegal setting note: n = 2 to 5 ras down mode and ras up mode: with dram provided with fast page mode, as long as accesses are to the same row address, burst operation can be continued without interruption even if accesses are not consecutive by holding the ras signal low. ? ras down mode to select ras down mode, set the be and rdm bits to 1 in drcra. if access to dram space is interrupted and another space is accessed, the ras signal is held low during the access to the other space, and burst access is performed if the row address of the next dram space access is the same as the row address of the previous dram space access. figure 6.23 shows an example of the timing in ras down mode. 168 a 23 to a 0 csn ras ucas lcas as figure 6.23 example of operation timing in ras down mode (csel = 0) when ras down mode is selected, the conditions for an asserted ras n signal to return to the high level are as shown below. the timing in these cases is shown in figure 6.24. ? when dram space with a different row address is accessed ? immediately before a cas-before-ras refresh cycle ? when the be bit or rdm bit is cleared to 0 in drcra ? immediately before release of the external bus 169 ras ras ras ras figure 6.24 ras n negation timing when ras down mode is selected 170 when ras down mode is selected, the cas-before-ras refresh function provided with this dram interface must always be used as the dram refreshing method. when a refresh operation is performed, the ras signal goes high immediately beforehand. the refresh interval setting must be made so that the maximum dram ras pulse width specification is observed. when the self-refresh function is used, the rdm bit must be cleared to 0, and ras up mode selected, before executing a sleep instruction in order to enter software standby mode. select ras down mode again after exiting software standby mode. note that ras down mode cannot be used when hwr and lwr are selected for ucas and lcas , a device other than dram is connected to external space, and hwr and lwr are used as write strobes. ? ras up mode to select ras up mode, clear the rdm bit to 0 in drcra. each time access to dram space is interrupted and another space is accessed, the ras signal returns to the high level. burst operation is only performed if dram space is continuous. figure 6.25 shows an example of the timing in ras up mode. a 23 to a 0 csn ras as ucas lcas figure 6.25 example of operation timing in ras up mode 171 6.5.11 refresh control the h8/3067 series is provided with a cas-before-ras (cbr) function and self-refresh function as dram refresh control functions. cas-before-ras (cbr) refreshing: to select cbr refreshing, set the rcyce bit to 1 in drcrb. with cbr refreshing, rtcnt counts up using the input clock selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr, and a refresh request is generated when the count matches the value set in rtcor (compare match). at the same time, rtcnt is reset and starts counting up again from h'00. refreshing is thus repeated at fixed intervals determined by rtcor and bits cks2 to cks0. a refresh cycle is executed after this refresh request has been accepted and the dram interface has acquired the bus. set a value in bits cks2 to cks0 in rtcor that will meet the refresh interval specification for the dram used. when ras down mode is used, set the refresh interval so that the maximum ras pulse width specification is met. rtcnt starts counting up when bits cks2 to cks0 are set. rtcnt and rtcor settings should therefore be completed before setting bits cks2 to cks0. also note that a repeat refresh request generated during a bus request, or a refresh request during refresh cycle execution, will be ignored. rtcnt operation is shown in figure 6.26, compare match timing in figure 6.27, and cbr refresh timing in figures 6.28 and 6.29. rtcnt rtcor h'00 refresh request figure 6.26 rtcnt operation 172 n n h'00 figure 6.27 compare match timing t rp t r1 t r2 cs ras ucas lcas rd we rfsh as figure 6.28 cbr refresh timing (csel = 0, tpc = 0, rlw = 0) the basic cbs refresh cycle timing comprises three states: one ras precharge cycle (t rp ) state, and two ras output cycle (t r1 , t r2 ) states. either one or two states can be selected for the ras precharge cycle. when the tpc bit is set to 1 in drcrb, ras signal output is delayed by one cycle. this does not affect the timing of ucas and lcas output. 173 use the rlw bit in drcrb to adjust the ras signal width. a single refresh wait state (t rw ) can be inserted between the t r1 state and t r2 state by setting the rlw bit to 1. the rlw bit setting is valid only for cbr refresh cycles, and does not affect dram read/write cycles. the number of states in the cbr refresh cycle is not affected by the settings in astcr, wcrh, or wcrl, or by the state of the wait pin. figure 6.29 shows the timing when the tpc bit and rlw bit are both set to 1. t rp1 t rp2 t r1 t rw rd we cs ras ucas lcas rfsh as figure 6.29 cbr refresh timing (csel = 0, tpc = 1, rlw = 1) dram must be refreshed immediately after powering on in order to stabilize its internal state. when using the h8/3067 series cas-before-ras refresh function, therefore, a dram stabilization period should be provided by means of interrupts by another timer module, or by counting the number of times bit 7 (cmf) of rtmcsr is set, for instance, immediately after bits dras2 to dras0 have been set in drcra. self-refreshing: a self-refresh mode (battery backup mode) is provided for dram as a kind of standby mode. in this mode, refresh timing and refresh addresses are generated within the dram. the h8/3067 series has a function that places the dram in self-refresh mode when the chip enters software standby mode. 174 to use the self-refresh function, set the srfmd bit to 1 in drcra. when a sleep instruction is subsequently executed in order to enter software standby mode, the cas and ras signals are output and the dram enters self-refresh mode, as shown in figure 6.30. when the chip exits software standby mode, cas and ras outputs go high. the following conditions must be observed when the self-refresh function is used: ? when burst access is selected, ras up mode must be selected before executing a sleep instruction in order to enter software standby mode. therefore, if ras down mode has been selected, the rdm bit in drcra must be cleared to 0 and ras up mode selected before executing the sleep instruction. select ras down mode again after exiting software standby mode. ? the instruction immediately following a sleep instruction must not be located in an area designated as dram space. the self-refresh function will not work properly unless the above conditions are observed. figure 6.30 self-refresh timing (csel = 0) refresh signal ( rfsh ): a refresh signal ( rfsh ) that transmits a refresh cycle off-chip can be output by setting the rfshe bit to 1 in drcra. rfsh output timing is shown in figures 6.28, 6.29, and 6.30. 175 6.5.12 examples of use examples of dram connection and program setup procedures are shown below. when the dram interface is used, check the dram device characteristics and choose the most appropriate method of use for that device. connection examples ? figure 6.31 shows typical interconnections when using two 2-cas type 16-mbit drams using a 16-bit organization, and the corresponding address map. the drams used in this example are of the 10-bit row address 10-bit column address type. up to four drams can be connected by designating areas 2 to 5 as dram space. 176 cs 2 (ras 2 ) cs 3 (ras 3 ) rd (we) a 10 -a 1 d 15 -d 0 a 9 -a 0 d 15 -d 0 pb 4 (ucas) pb 5 (lcas) ras we ucas lcas a 9 -a 0 d 15 -d 0 ras we ucas lcas no.1 no.2 oe oe dram (no.1) h'400000 h'5ffffe h'600000 h'7ffffe h'800000 h'9ffffe h'a00000 h'bffffe dram (no.2) normal normal cs 2 (ras 2 ) cs 3 (ras 3 ) cs 4 cs 5 pb 4 (ucas) pb 5 (lcas) 15 0 7 8 h8/3067 series chip 2-cas 16-mbit dram 10-bit row address x 10-bit column address x16-bit organization (a) interconnections (example) (b) address map area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 figure 6.31 interconnections and address map for 2-cas 16-mbit drams with 16- bit organization 177 ? figure 6.32 shows typical interconnections when using two 16-mbit drams using a 8-bit organization, and the corresponding address map. the drams used in this example are of the 11-bit row address 10-bit column address type. the cs 2 pin is used as the common ras output pin for areas 2 and 3. when the dram address space spans a number of contiguous areas, as in this example, the appropriate setting of bits dras2 to dras0 enables a single cs pin to be used as the common ras output pin for a number of areas, and makes it possible to directly connect large-capacity dram with address space that spans a maximum of four areas. any unused cs pins (in this example, the cs 3 pin) can be used as input/output ports. cs 2 (ras 2 ) rd (we) a 21 , a 10 -a 1 d 15 -d 8 d 7 -d 0 a 10 -a 0 d 7 -d 0 pb 4 (ucas) pb 5 (lcas) ras we cas a 10 -a 0 d 7 -d 0 ras we cas no.1 no.2 oe oe dram (no.1) h'400000 h'5ffffe h'600000 h'7ffffe h'800000 h'9ffffe h'a00000 h'bffffe dram (no.2) cs 2 (ras 2 ) cs 4 cs 5 pb 4 (ucas) pb 5 (lcas) 15 0 7 8 h8/3067 series chip 2-cas 16-mbit dram 11-bit row address x 10-bit column address x8-bit organization (a) interconnections (example) (b) address map 16-mbyte mode area 2 area 3 area 4 area 5 normal normal figure 6.32 interconnections and address map for 16-mbit drams with 8-bit organization 178 ? figure 6.33 shows typical interconnections when using two 4-mbit drams, and the corresponding address map. the drams used in this example are of the 9-bit row address 10-bit column address type. in this example, upper address decoding allows multiple drams to be connected to a single area. the rfsh pin is used in this case, since both drams must be refreshed simultaneously. however, note that ras down mode cannot be used in this interconnection example. cs 2 (ras 2 ) rd (we) a 9 -a 1 d 15 -d 0 a 8 -a 0 d 15 -d 0 pb 4 (ucas) pb 5 (lcas) ras we ucas lcas a 8 -a 0 d 15 -d 0 ras we ucas lcas no.1 no.2 oe oe dram (no.1) h'400000 h'47fffe h'480000 h'4ffffe h'500000 h'5ffffe dram (no.2) not used (a) interconnections (example) cs 2 (ras 2 ) pb 4 (ucas) pb 5 (lcas) 15 0 7 8 area 2 16-mbyte mode (b) address map h8/3067 series chip 2-cas 4-mbit dram 9-bit row address x 9-bit column address x16-bit organization rfsh a 19 figure 6.33 interconnections and address map for 2-cas 4-mbit drams with 16-bit organization 179 example of program setup procedure: figure 6.34 shows an example of the program setup procedure. set abwcr set rtcor set bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr set drcrb set drcra wait for dram stabilization time dram can be accessed figure 6.34 example of setup procedure when using dram interface 6.5.13 usage notes note the following points when using the dram refresh function. ? refresh cycles will not be executed when the external bus released state, software standby mode, or a bus cycle is extended by means of wait state insertion. refreshing must therefore be performed by other means in these cases. ? if a refresh request is generated internally while the external bus is released, the first request is retained and a single refresh cycle will be executed after the bus-released state is cleared. figure 6.35 shows the bus cycle in this case. ? when a bus cycle is extended by means of wait state insertion, the first request is retained in the same way as when the external bus has been released. ? in the event of contention with a bus request from an external bus master when a transition is made to software standby mode, the back and strobe states may be indeterminate after the transition to software standby mode (see figure 6.36). 180 when software standby mode is used, the brle bit should be cleared to 0 in brcr before executing the sleep instruction. similar contention in a transition to self-refresh mode may prevent dependable strobe waveform output. this can also be avoided by clearing the brlw bit to 0 in brcr. ? immediately after self-refreshing is cleared, external bus release is possible during a given period until the start of a cpu cycle. attention must be paid to the ras state to ensure that the specification for the ras precharge time immediately after self-refreshing is met. rfsh back figure 6.35 bus-released state and refresh cycles breq back figure 6.36 bus-released state and software standby mode 181 @sp ras cas figure 6.37 self-refresh clearing 182 6.6 interval timer 6.6.1 operation when dram is not connected to the h8/3067 series chip, the refresh timer can be used as an interval timer by clearing bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra to 0. after setting rtcor, selection a clock source with bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr, and set the cmie bit to 1. timing of setting of compare match flag and clearing by compare match: the cmf flag in rtmcsr is set to 1 by a compare match output when the rtcor and rtcnt values match. the compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when rtcnt is updated from the matching value to a new value). accordingly, when rtcnt and rtcor match, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. figure 6.38 shows the timing. n n h'00 figure 6.38 timing of cmf flag setting operation in power-down state: the interval timer operates in sleep mode. it does not operate in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode, rtcnt and rtmcsr bits 7 and 6 are initialized, but rtmcsr bits 5 to 3 and rtcor retain their settings prior to the transition to software standby mode. contention between rtcnt write and counter clear: if a counter clear signal occurs in the t 3 state of an rtcnt write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. see figure 6.39. 183 h'00 figure 6.39 contention between rtcnt write and clear contention between rtcnt write and increment: if an increment pulse occurs in the t 3 state of an rtcnt write cycle, writing takes priority and rtcnt is not incremented. see figure 6.40. m figure 6.40 contention between rtcnt write and increment 184 contention between rtcor write and compare match: if a compare match occurs in the t 3 state of an rtcor write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. see figure 6.41. m figure 6.41 contention between rtcor write and compare match rtcnt operation at internal clock source switchover: switching internal clock sources may cause rtcnt to increment, depending on the switchover timing. table 6.10 shows the relation between the time of the switchover (by writing to bits cks2 to cks0) and the operation of rtcnt. the rtcnt input clock is generated from the internal clock source by detecting the falling edge of the internal clock. if a switchover is made from a high clock source to a low clock source, as in case no. 3 in table 6.10, the switchover will be regarded as a falling edge, an rtcnt clock pulse will be generated, and rtcnt will be incremented. 185 table 6.10 internal clock switchover and rtcnt operation (1) n n+1 no. 1 n n+1 2 n+2 1. including switchovers from a low clock source to the halted state, and from the halted state to a low clock source. 2. including switchover from the halted state to a high clock source. notes: cks2 to cks0 write timing rtcnt operation "low" "low" switchover* 1 "low" "high" switchover* 2 old clock source new clock source rtcnt clock rtcnt old clock source new clock source rtcnt clock rtcnt cks bits rewritten cks bits rewritten 186 table 6.10 internal clock switchover and rtcnt operation (2) n n+1 no. 3 n n+1 rtcnt 4 n+2 n+2 * 4 3. including switchover from a high clock source to the halted state. 4. the switchover is regarded as a falling edge, causing rtcnt to increment. notes: cks2 to cks0 write timing rtcnt operation "high" "low" switchover* 3 "high" "high" switchover* 4 old clock source new clock source rtcnt clock rtcnt old clock source new clock source rtcnt clock cks bits rewritten cks bits rewritten 187 6.7 interrupt sources compare match interrupts (cmi) can be generated when the refresh timer is used as an interval timer. compare match interrupt requests are masked/unmasked with the cmie bit in rtmcsr. 6.8 burst rom interface 6.8.1 overview with the h8/3067 series, external space area 0 can be designated as burst rom space, and burst rom space interfacing can be performed. the burst rom space interface enables 16-bit organization rom with burst access capability to be accessed at high speed. area 0 is designated as burst rom space by means of the brome bit in bcr. continuous burst access of a maximum or four or eight words can be performed on external space area 0. two or three states can be selected for burst access. 6.8.2 basic timing the number of states in the initial cycle (full access) and a burst cycle of the burst rom interface is determined by the setting of the ast0 bit in astcr. when the ast0 bit is set to 1, wait states can also be inserted in the initial cycle. wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. burst access of up to four words is performed when the brsts0 bit is cleared to 0 in bcr, and burst access of up to eight words when the brsts0 bit is set to 1. the number of burst access states is two when the brsts1 bit is cleared to 0, and three when the brsts1 bit is set to 1. the basic access timing for burst rom space is shown in figure 6.42. 188 rd as cs figure 6.42 example of burst rom access timing 6.8.3 wait control as with the basic bus interface, either program wait insertion or pin wait insertion using the wait pin can be used in the initial cycle (full access) of the burst rom interface. wait states cannot be inserted in a burst cycle. 189 6.9 idle cycle 6.9.1 operation when the h8/3067 series chip accesses external space, it can insert a 1-state idle cycle (t i ) between bus cycles in the following cases: (1) when read accesses between different areas occur consecutively, (2) when a write cycle occurs immediately after a read cycle, and (3) immediately after a dram space access. by inserting an idle cycle it is possible, for example, to avoid data collisions between rom, which has a long output floating time, and high-speed memory, i/o interfaces, and so on. the icis1 and icis0 bits in bcr both have an initial value of 1, so that an idle cycle is inserted in the initial state. if there are no data collisions, the icis bits can be cleared. consecutive reads between different areas: if consecutive reads between different areas occur while the icis1 bit is set to 1 in bcr, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the second read cycle. figure 6.43 shows an example of the operation in this case. in this example, bus cycle a is a read cycle from rom with a long output floating time, and bus cycle b is a read cycle from sram, each being located in a different area. in (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle b between the read data from rom and that from sram. in (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. rd rd figure 6.43 example of idle cycle operation (1) (icis1 = 1) write after read: if an external write occurs after an external read while the icis0 bit is set to 1 in bcr, an idle cycle is inserted at the start of the write cycle. figure 6.44 shows an example of the operation in this case. in this example, bus cycle a is a read cycle from rom with a long output floating time, and bus cycle b is a cpu write cycle. 190 in (a), an idle cycle is not inserted, and a collision occurs in cycle b between the read data from rom and the cpu write data. in (b), an idle cycle is inserted, and a data collision is prevented. rd hwr rd hwr figure 6.44 example of idle cycle operation (2) (icis0 = 1) external address space access immediately after dram space access: if a dram space access is followed by a non-dram external access when hwr and lwr have been selected as the ucas and lcas output pins by means of the csel bit in drcrb, a ti cycle is inserted regardless of the settings of bits icis0 and icis1 in bcr. figure 6.45 shows an example of the operation. this is done to prevent simultaneous changing of the hwr and lwr signals used as ucas and lcas in dram space and cs n for the space in the next cycle, and so avoid an erroneous write to the external device in the next cycle. a t i cycle is not inserted when pb4 and pb5 have been selected as the ucas and lcas output pins. in the case of consecutive dram space access precharge cycles (t p ), the icis0 and icis1 bit settings are invalid. in the case of consecutive reads between different areas, for example, if the second access is a dram access, only a t p cycle is inserted, and a t i cycle is not. the timing in this case is shown in figure 6.46. 191 hwr lwr csn hwr lwr ucas lcas csn hwr lwr ucas lcas csn figure 6.45 example of idle cycle operation (3) ( hwr / lwr used as ucas / lcas ) ucas lcas rd figure 6.46 example of idle cycle operation (4) (consecutive precharge cycles) usage notes: when non-insertion of idle cycles is set, the rise (negation) of rd and the fall (assertion) of csn may occur simultaneously. an example of the operation is shown in figure 6.47. if consecutive reads between different external areas occur while the icis1 bit is cleared to 0 in bcr, or if a write cycle to a different external area occurs after an external read while the icis0 bit is cleared to 0, the rd negation in the first read cycle and the csn assertion in the following bus cycle will occur simultaneously. therefore, depending on the output delay time of each signal, it is possible that the low-level output of rd in the preceding read cycle and the low-level output of csn in the following bus cycle will overlap. a setting whereby idle cycle insertion is not performed can be made only when rd and csn do not change simultaneously, or when it does not matter if they do. 192 rd rd csn csn rd csn figure 6.47 example of idle cycle operation (5) 6.9.2 pin states in idle cycle table 6.11 shows the pin states in an idle cycle. table 6.11 pin states in idle cycle pins pin state a 23 to a 0 next cycle address value d 15 to d 0 high impedance cs ucas lcas as rd hwr lwr 193 6.10 bus arbiter the bus controller has a built-in bus arbiter that arbitrates between different bus masters. there are four bus masters: the cpu, dma controller (dmac), dram interface, and an external bus master. when a bus master has the bus right it can carry out read, write, or refresh access. each bus master uses a bus request signal to request the bus right. at fixed times the bus arbiter determines priority and uses a bus acknowledge signal to grant the bus to a bus master, which can the operate using the bus. the bus arbiter checks whether the bus request signal from a bus master is active or inactive, and returns an acknowledge signal to the bus master. when two or more bus masters request the bus, the highest-priority bus master receives an acknowledge signal. the bus master that receives an acknowledge signal can continue to use the bus until the acknowledge signal is deactivated. the bus master priority order is: (high) external bus master > dram interface > dmac > cpu (low) the bus arbiter samples the bus request signals and determines priority at all times, but it does not always grant the bus immediately, even when it receives a bus request from a bus master with higher priority than the current bus master. each bus master has certain times at which it can release the bus to a higher-priority bus master. 6.10.1 operation cpu: the cpu is the lowest-priority bus master. if the dmac, dram interface, or an external bus master requests the bus while the cpu has the bus right, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right to the bus master that requested it. the bus right is transferred at the following times: ? the bus right is transferred at the boundary of a bus cycle. if word data is accessed by two consecutive byte accesses, however, the bus right is not transferred between the two byte accesses. ? if another bus master requests the bus while the cpu is performing internal operations, such as executing a multiply or divide instruction, the bus right is transferred immediately. the cpu continues its internal operations. ? if another bus master requests the bus while the cpu is in sleep mode, the bus right is transferred immediately. dmac: when the dmac receives an activation request, it requests the bus right from the bus arbiter. if the dmac is bus master and the dram interface or an external bus master requests the bus, the bus arbiter transfers the bus right from the dmac to the bus master that requested the bus. the bus right is transferred at the following times. 194 the bus right is transferred when the dmac finishes transferring one byte or one word. a dmac transfer cycle consists of a read cycle and a write cycle. the bus right is not transferred between the read cycle and the write cycle. there is a priority order among the dmac channels. for details see section 7.4.9, multiple- channel operation. dram interface: the dram interface requests the bus right from the bus arbiter when a refresh cycle request is issued, and releases the bus at the end of the refresh cycle. for details see section 6.5, dram interface. external bus master: when the brle bit is set to 1 in brcr, the bus can be released to an external bus master. the external bus master has highest priority, and requests the bus right from the bus arbiter y driving the breq signal low. once the external bus master acquires the bus, it keeps the bus until the breq signal goes high. while the bus is released to an external bus master, the h8/3067 series chip holds the address bus, data bus, bus control signals ( as , rd , hwr , and lwr ), and chip select signals ( cs n: n = 7 to 0) in the high-impedance state, and holds the back pin in the low output state. the bus arbiter samples the breq pin at the rise of the system clock ( ). if breq is low, the bus is released to the external bus master at the appropriate opportunity. the breq signal should be held low until the back signal goes low. when the breq pin is high in two consecutive samples, the back pin is driven high to end the bus-release cycle. figure 6.48 shows the timing when the bus right is requested by an external bus master during a read cycle in a two-state access area. there is a minimum interval of three states from when the breq signal goes low until the bus is released. 195 rd back breq hwr lwr as figure 6.48 example of external bus master operation in the event of contention with a bus request from an external bus master when a transition is made to software standby mode, the back and strobe states may be indeterminate after the transition to software standby mode (see figure 6.36). when software standby mode is used, the brle bit should be cleared to 0 in brcr before executing the sleep instruction. 196 6.11 register and pin input timing 6.11.1 register write timing abwcr, astcr, wcrh, and wcrl write timing: data written to abwcr, astcr, wcrh, and wcrl takes effect starting from the next bus cycle. figure 6.49 shows the timing when an instruction fetched from area 0 changes area 0 from three-state access to two-state access. figure 6.49 astcr write timing ddr and cscr write timing: data written to ddr or cscr for the port corresponding to the cs n pin to switch between cs n output and generic input takes effect starting from the t 3 state of the ddr write cycle. figure 6.50 shows the timing when the cs 1 pin is changed from generic input to cs 1 output. cs figure 6.50 ddr write timing 197 brcr write timing: data written to brcr to switch between a 23 , a 22 , a 21 , or a 20 output and generic input or output takes effect starting from the t 3 state of the brcr write cycle. figure 6.51 shows the timing when a pin is changed from generic input to a 23 , a 22 , a 21 , or a 20 output. figure 6.51 brcr write timing 6.11.2 breq pin input timing after driving the breq pin low, hold it low until back goes low. if breq returns to the high level before back goes lows, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly. to terminate the external-bus-released state, hold the breq signal high for at least three states. if breq is high for too short an interval, the bus arbiter may operate incorrectly. 198 199 section 7 dma controller 7.1 overview the h8/3067 series has an on-chip dma controller (dmac) that can transfer data on up to four channels. when the dma controller is not used, it can be independently halted to conserve power. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. 7.1.1 features dmac features are listed below. ? selection of short address mode or full address mode short address mode ? 8-bit source address and 24-bit destination address, or vice versa ? maximum four channels available ? selection of i/o mode, idle mode, or repeat mode full address mode ? 24-bit source and destination addresses ? maximum two channels available ? selection of normal mode or block transfer mode ? directly addressable 16-mbyte address space ? selection of byte or word transfer ? activation by internal interrupts, external requests, or auto-request (depending on transfer mode) ? 16-bit timer compare match/input capture interrupts ( 3) ? serial communication interface (sci channel 0) transmit-data-empty/receive-data-full interrupts ? external requests ? auto-request ? a/d converter conversion-end interrupt 200 7.1.2 block diagram figure 7.1 shows a dmac block diagram. imia0 imia1 imia2 adi txi0 rxi0 dreq 0 dreq 1 tend 0 tend 1 dend0a dend0b dend1a dend1b dtcr0a dtcr0b dtcr1a dtcr1b control logic data buffer address buffer arithmetic-logic unit mar0a mar0b mar1a mar1b ioar0a ioar0b ioar1a ioar1b etcr0a etcr0b etcr1a etcr1b internal address bus internal interrupts interrupt signals internal data bus module data bus legend dtcr: mar: ioar: etcr: data transfer control register memory address register i/o address register execute transfer count register channel 0a channel 0b channel 1a channel 1b channel 0 channel 1 figure 7.1 block diagram of dmac 201 7.1.3 functional overview table 7.1 gives an overview of the dmac functions. table 7.1 dmac functional overview address reg. length transfer mode activation source destina- tion short address mode i/o mode ? transfers one byte or one word per request ? increments or decrements the memory address by 1 or 2 ? executes 1 to 65,536 transfers ? compare match/input capture a interrupts from 16- bit timer channels 0 to 2 ? transmit-data-empty interrupt from sci channel 0 24 8 idle mode ? transfers one byte or one word per request ? holds the memory address fixed ? conversion-end interrupt from a/d converter ? receive-data-full interrupt from sci channel 0 824 ? executes 1 to 65,536 transfers repeat mode ? transfers one byte or one word per request ? increments or decrements the memory address by 1 or 2 ? executes a specified number (1 to 255) of transfers, then returns to the initial state and continues ? external request 24 8 full address mode normal mode ? auto-request ? retains the transfer request internally ? executes a specified number(1 to 65,536) of transfers continuously ? selection of burst mode or cycle- steal mode ? external request ? transfers one byte or one word per request ? executes 1 to 65,536 transfers ? auto-request ? external request 24 24 block transfer ? transfers one block of a specified size per request ? executes 1 to 65,536 transfers ? allows either the source or destination to be a fixed block area ? block size can be 1 to 255 bytes or words ? compare match/ input capture a interrupts from 16- bit timer channels 0 to 2 ? external request ? conversion-end interrupt from a/d converter 24 24 202 7.1.4 input/output pins table 7.2 lists the dmac pins. table 7.2 dmac pins channel name abbrevia- tion input/ output function 0 dma request 0 dreq 0 input external request for dmac channel 0 transfer end 0 tend 0 output transfer end on dmac channel 0 1 dma request 1 dreq 1 input external request for dmac channel 1 transfer end 1 tend 1 output transfer end on dmac channel 1 note: external requests cannot be made to channel a in short address mode. 7.1.5 register configuration table 7.3 lists the dmac registers. 203 table 7.3 dmac registers channel address* name abbreviation r/w initial value 0 h'fff20 memory address register 0ar mar0ar r/w undetermined h'fff21 memory address register 0ae mar0ae r/w undetermined h'fff22 memory address register 0ah mar0ah r/w undetermined h'fff23 memory address register 0al mar0al r/w undetermined h'fff26 i/o address register 0a ioar0a r/w undetermined h'fff24 execute transfer count register 0ah etcr0ah r/w undetermined h'fff25 execute transfer count register 0al etcr0al r/w undetermined h'fff27 data transfer control register 0a dtcr0a r/w h'00 h'fff28 memory address register 0br mar0br r/w undetermined h'fff29 memory address register 0be mar0be r/w undetermined h'fff2a memory address register 0bh mar0bh r/w undetermined h'fff2b memory address register 0bl mar0bl r/w undetermined h'fff2e i/o address register 0b ioar0b r/w undetermined h'fff2c execute transfer count register 0bh etcr0bh r/w undetermined h'fff2d execute transfer count register 0bl etcr0bl r/w undetermined h'fff2f data transfer control register 0b dtcr0b r/w h'00 1 h'fff30 memory address register 1ar mar1ar r/w undetermined h'fff31 memory address register 1ae mar1ae r/w undetermined h'fff32 memory address register 1ah mar1ah r/w undetermined h'fff33 memory address register 1al mar1al r/w undetermined h'fff36 i/o address register 1a ioar1a r/w undetermined h'fff34 execute transfer count register 1ah etcr1ah r/w undetermined h'fff35 execute transfer count register 1al etcr1al r/w undetermined h'fff37 data transfer control register 1a dtcr1a r/w h'00 h'fff38 memory address register 1br mar1br r/w undetermined h'fff39 memory address register 1be mar1be r/w undetermined h'fff3a memory address register 1bh mar1bh r/w undetermined h'fff3b memory address register 1bl mar1bl r/w undetermined h'fff3e i/o address register 1b ioar1b r/w undetermined h'fff3c execute transfer count register 1bh etcr1bh r/w undetermined h'fff3d execute transfer count register 1bl etcr1bl r/w undetermined h'fff3f data transfer control register 1b dtcr1b r/w h'00 note: * the lower 20 bits of the address are indicated. 204 7.2 register descriptions (1) (short address mode) in short address mode, transfers can be carried out independently on channels a and b. short address mode is selected by bits dts2a and dts1a in data transfer control register a (dtcra) as indicated in table 7.4. table 7.4 selection of short and full address modes channel bit 2 dts2a bit 1 dts1a description 0 1 1 dmac channel 0 operates as one channel in full address mode other than above dmac channels 0a and 0b operate as two independent channels in short address mode 1 1 1 dmac channel 1 operates as one channel in full address mode other than above dmac channels 1a and 1b operate as two independent channels in short address mode 7.2.1 memory address registers (mar) a memory address register (mar) is a 32-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or destination address. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. an mar consists of four 8-bit registers designated marr, mare, marh, and marl. all bits of marr are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit initial value read/write 31 1 source or destination address 30 1 29 1 28 1 27 1 26 1 25 1 24 1 23 r/w 22 r/w 21 r/w 20 r/w 19 r/w 18 r/w 17 r/w 16 r/w 15 r/w 14 r/w 13 r/w 12 r/w 11 undetermined r/w 10 r/w 9 r/w 8 r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 r/w marr mare marh marl an mar functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the dmac is activated: as a destination address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from serial communication interface (sci) channel 0 or by an a/d converter conversion-end interrupt, and as a source address register otherwise. the mar value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred, automatically updating the source or destination memory address. for details, see section 7.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). the mars are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 205 7.2.2 i/o address registers (ioar) an i/o address register (ioar) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies a source or destination address. the ioar value is the lower 8 bits of the address. the upper 16 address bits are all 1 (h'ffff). bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w source or destination address undetermined an ioar functions as a source or destination address register depending on how the dmac is activated: as a destination address register if activation is by a receive-data-full interrupt from serial communication interface (sci) channel 0 or by an a/d converter conversion-end interrupt, and as a source address register otherwise. the ioar value is held fixed. it is not incremented or decremented when a transfer is executed. the ioars are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 7.2.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr) an execute transfer count register (etcr) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers to be executed. these registers function in one way in i/o mode and idle mode, and another way in repeat mode. ? i/o mode and idle mode bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w in i/o mode and idle mode, etcr functions as a 16-bit counter. the count is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. the transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. 206 ? repeat mode bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined transfer counter etcrh bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial count etcrl in repeat mode, etcrh functions as an 8-bit transfer counter and etcrl holds the initial transfer count. etcrh is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. when etcrh reaches h'00, the value in etcrl is reloaded into etcrh and the same operation is repeated. the etcrs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 207 7.2.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) a data transfer control register (dtcr) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of one dmac channel. bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w data transfer enable enables or disables data transfer data transfer interrupt enable enables or disables the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer data transfer select these bits select the data transfer activation source data transfer size selects byte or word size data transfer increment/decrement selects whether to increment or decrement the memory address register repeat enable selects repeat mode the dtcrs are initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ata transfer enable (dte): enables or disables data transfer on a channel. when the dte bit is set to 1, the channel waits for a transfer to be requested, and executes the transfer when activated as specified by bits dts2 to dts0. when dte is 0, the channel is disabled and does not accept transfer requests. dte is set to 1 by reading the register when dte is 0, then writing 1. bit 7 dte description 0 data transfer is disabled. in i/o mode or idle mode, dte is cleared to 0 (initial value) when the specified number of transfers have been completed 1 data transfer is enabled if dtie is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested when dtie is cleared to 0. 208 bit 6?ata transfer size (dtsz): selects the data size of each transfer. bit 6 dtsz description 0 byte-size transfer (initial value) 1 word-size transfer bit 5?ata transfer increment/decrement (dtid): selects whether to increment or decrement the memory address register (mar) after a data transfer in i/o mode or repeat mode. bit 5 dtid description 0 mar is incremented after each data transfer (initial value) ? if dtsz = 0, mar is incremented by 1 after each transfer ? if dtsz = 1, mar is incremented by 2 after each transfer 1 mar is decremented after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 0, mar is decremented by 1 after each transfer ? if dtsz = 1, mar is decremented by 2 after each transfer mar is not incremented or decremented in idle mode. bit 4?epeat enable (rpe): selects whether to transfer data in i/o mode, idle mode, or repeat mode. bit 4 rpe bit 3 dtie description 0 0 i/o mode (initial value) 1 1 0 repeat mode 1 idle mode operations in these modes are described in sections 7.4.2, i/o mode, 7.4.3, idle mode, and 7.4.4, repeat mode. 209 bit 3?ata transfer interrupt enable (dtie): enables or disables the cpu interrupt (dend) requested when the dte bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 dtie description 0 the dend interrupt requested by dte is disabled (initial value) 1 the dend interrupt requested by dte is enabled bits 2 to 0?ata transfer select (dts2, dts1, dts0): these bits select the data transfer activation source. some of the selectable sources differ between channels a and b. bit 2 dts2 bit 1 dts1 bit 0 dts0 description 0 0 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer (initial value) channel 0 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 1 conversion-end interrupt from a/d converter 1 0 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt from sci channel 0 1 receive-data-full interrupt from sci channel 0 1 0 falling edge of dreq input (channel b) transfer in full address mode (channel a) 1 low level of dreq input (channel b) transfer in full address mode (channel a) note: * see section 7.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). the same internal interrupt can be selected as an activation source for two or more channels at once. in that case the channels are activated in a priority order, highest-priority channel first. for the priority order, see section 7.4.9, multiple-channel operation. when a channel is enabled (dte = 1), its selected dmac activation source cannot generate a cpu interrupt. 210 7.3 register descriptions (2) (full address mode) in full address mode the a and b channels operate together. full address mode is selected as indicated in table 7.4. 7.3.1 memory address registers (mar) a memory address register (mar) is a 32-bit readable/writable register. mara functions as the source address register of the transfer, and marb as the destination address register. an mar consists of four 8-bit registers designated marr, mare, marh, and marl. all bits of marr are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. (write is invalid.) bit initial value read/write 31 1 source or destination address 30 1 29 1 28 1 27 1 26 1 25 1 24 1 23 r/w 22 r/w 21 r/w 20 r/w 19 r/w 18 r/w 17 r/w 16 r/w 15 r/w 14 r/w 13 r/w 12 r/w 11 r/w 10 r/w 9 r/w 8 r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 r/w marr mare marh marl undetermined the mar value is incremented or decremented each time one byte or word is transferred, automatically updating the source or destination memory address. for details, see section 7.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). the mars are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 7.3.2 i/o address registers (ioar) the i/o address registers (ioars) are not used in full address mode. 211 7.3.3 execute transfer count registers (etcr) an execute transfer count register (etcr) is a 16-bit readable/writable register that specifies the number of transfers to be executed. the functions of these registers differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. ? normal mode etcra bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w etcrb: is not used in normal mode. in normal mode etcra functions as a 16-bit transfer counter. the count is decremented by 1 each time one transfer is executed. the transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. etcrb is not used. 212 ? block transfer mode etcra bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined block size counter etcrah bit initial value read/write 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 0 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w undetermined initial block size etcral etcrb bit initial value read/write 14 r/w 12 r/w 10 r/w 8 r/w 6 r/w 0 r/w 4 r/w 2 r/w block transfer counter undetermined 15 r/w 13 r/w 11 r/w 9 r/w 7 r/w 1 r/w 5 r/w 3 r/w in block transfer mode, etcrah functions as an 8-bit block size counter. etcral holds the initial block size. etcrah is decremented by 1 each time one byte or word is transferred. when the count reaches h'00, etcrah is reloaded from etcral. blocks consisting of an arbitrary number of bytes or words can be transferred repeatedly by setting the same initial block size value in etcrah and etcral. in block transfer mode etcrb functions as a 16-bit block transfer counter. etcrb is decremented by 1 each time one block is transferred. the transfer ends when the count reaches h'0000. the etcrs are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. 213 7.3.4 data transfer control registers (dtcr) the data transfer control registers (dtcrs) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that control the operation of the dmac channels. a channel operates in full address mode when bits dts2a and dts1a are both set to 1 in dtcra. dtcra and dtcrb have different functions in full address mode. dtcra bit initial value read/write 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 said 0 r/w 4 saide 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 0 dts0a 0 r/w 2 dts2a 0 r/w 1 dts1a 0 r/w data transfer enable enables or disables data transfer enables or disables the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer data transfer size selects byte or word size source address increment/decrement data transfer select 2a and 1a these bits must both be set to 1 data transfer interrupt enable source address increment/ decrement enable these bits select whether the source address register (mara) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer selects block transfer mode data transfer select 0a dtcra is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 214 bit 7?ata transfer enable (dte): together with the dtme bit in dtcrb, this bit enables or disables data transfer on the channel. when the dtme and dte bits are both set to 1, the channel is enabled. if auto-request is specified, data transfer begins immediately. otherwise, the channel waits for transfers to be requested. when the specified number of transfers have been completed, the dte bit is automatically cleared to 0. when dte is 0, the channel is disabled and does not accept transfer requests. dte is set to 1 by reading the register when dte is 0, then writing 1. bit 7 dte description 0 data transfer is disabled (dte is cleared to 0 when the specified number (initial value) of transfers have been completed) 1 data transfer is enabled if dtie is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested when dte is cleared to 0. bit 6?ata transfer size (dtsz): selects the data size of each transfer. bit 6 dtsz description 0 byte-size transfer (initial value) 1 word-size transfer bit 5?ource address increment/decrement (said) and, bit 4?ource address increment/decrement enable (saide): these bits select whether the source address register (mara) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer. bit 5 said bit 4 saide description 0 0 mara is held fixed (initial value) 1 mara is incremented after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 0, mara is incremented by 1 after each transfer ? if dtsz = 1, mara is incremented by 2 after each transfer 1 0 mara is held fixed 1 mara is decremented after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 0, mara is decremented by 1 after each transfer ? if dtsz = 1, mara is decremented by 2 after each transfer 215 bit 3?ata transfer interrupt enable (dtie): enables or disables the cpu interrupt (dend) requested when the dte bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 dtie description 0 the dend interrupt requested by dte is disabled (initial value) 1 the dend interrupt requested by dte is enabled bits 2 and 1?ata transfer select 2a and 1a (dts2a, dts1a): a channel operates in full address mode when dts2a and dts1a are both set to 1. bit 0?ata transfer select 0a (dts0a): selects normal mode or block transfer mode. bit 0 dts0a description 0 normal mode (initial value) 1 block transfer mode operations in these modes are described in sections 7.4.5, normal mode, and 7.4.6, block transfer mode. 216 dtcrb bit initial value read/write 7 dtme 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 daid 0 r/w 4 daide 0 r/w 3 tms 0 r/w 0 dts0b 0 r/w 2 dts2b 0 r/w 1 dts1b 0 r/w data transfer master enable enables or disables data transfer, together with the dte bit, and is cleared to 0 by an interrupt reserved bit destination address increment/decrement data transfer select 2b to 0b these bits select the data transfer activation source transfer mode select destination address increment/decrement enable these bits select whether the destination address register (marb) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer selects whether the block area is the source or destination in block transfer mode dtcrb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ata transfer master enable (dtme): together with the dte bit in dtcra, this bit enables or disables data transfer. when the dtme and dte bits are both set to 1, the channel is enabled. when an nmi interrupt occurs dtme is cleared to 0, suspending the transfer so that the cpu can use the bus. the suspended transfer resumes when dtme is set to 1 again. for further information on operation in block transfer mode, see section 7.6.6, nmi interrupts and block transfer mode. dtme is set to 1 by reading the register while dtme = 0, then writing 1. bit 7 dtme description 0 data transfer is disabled (dtme is cleared to 0 when an nmi interrupt (initial value) occurs) 1 data transfer is enabled 217 bit 6?eserved: although reserved, this bit can be written and read. bit 5?estination address increment/decrement (daid) and, bit 4?estination address increment/decrement enable (daide): these bits select whether the destination address register (marb) is incremented, decremented, or held fixed during the data transfer. bit 5 daid bit 4 daide description 0 0 marb is held fixed (initial value) 1 marb is incremented after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 0, marb is incremented by 1 after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 1, marb is incremented by 2 after each data transfer 1 0 marb is held fixed 1 marb is decremented after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 0, marb is decremented by 1 after each data transfer ? if dtsz = 1, marb is decremented by 2 after each data transfer bit 3?ransfer mode select (tms): selects whether the source or destination is the block area in block transfer mode. bit 3 tms description 0 destination is the block area in block transfer mode (initial value) 1 source is the block area in block transfer mode 218 bits 2 to 0?ata transfer select 2b to 0b (dts2b, dts1b, dts0b): these bits select the data transfer activation source. the selectable activation sources differ between normal mode and block transfer mode. normal mode bit 2 dts2b bit 1 dts1b bit 0 dts0b description 0 0 0 auto-request (burst mode) (initial value) 1 cannot be used 1 0 auto-request (cycle-steal mode) 1 cannot be used 1 0 0 cannot be used 1 cannot be used 1 0 falling edge of dreq 1 low level input at dreq block transfer mode bit 2 dts2b bit 1 dts1b bit 0 dts0b description 0 0 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 (initial value) 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 1 conversion-end interrupt from a/d converter 1 0 0 cannot be used 1 cannot be used 1 0 falling edge of dreq 1 cannot be used the same internal interrupt can be selected to activate two or more channels. the channels are activated in a priority order, highest priority first. for the priority order, see section 7.4.9, multiple-channel operation. 219 7.4 operation 7.4.1 overview table 7.5 summarizes the dmac modes. table 7.5 dmac modes transfer mode activation notes short address mode i/o mode idle mode repeat mode compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 ? up to four channels can operate independently transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0 ? only the b channels support external requests conversion-end interrupt from a/d converter external request full address mode normal mode auto-request ? a and b channels are paired; up to two channels are available external request block transfer mode compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 ? burst mode transfer or cycle-steal mode transfer can be selected for auto- requests conversion-end interrupt from a/d converter external request a summary of operations in these modes follows. i/o mode: one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. one 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. idle mode: one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of 220 transfers. one 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. the addresses are held fixed. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. repeat mode: one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. when the designated number of transfers are completed, the initial address and counter value are restored and operation continues. no cpu interrupt is requested. one 24-bit address and one 8-bit address are specified. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. normal mode ? auto-request the dmac is activated by register setup alone, and continues executing transfers until the designated number of transfers have been completed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the transfers. both addresses are 24-bit addresses. ? cycle-steal mode the bus is released to another bus master after each byte or word is transferred. ? burst mode unless requested by a higher-priority bus master, the bus is not released until the designated number of transfers have been completed. ? external request one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. a cpu interrupt can be requested at completion of the designated number of transfers. both addresses are 24-bit addresses. block transfer mode: one block of a specified size is transferred per request. a designated number of block transfers are executed. at the end of each block transfer, one address is restored to its initial value. when the designated number of blocks have been transferred, a cpu interrupt can be requested. both addresses are 24-bit addresses. 221 7.4.2 i/o mode i/o mode can be selected independently for each channel. one byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in i/o mode. a designated number of these transfers are executed. one address is specified in the memory address register (mar), the other in the i/o address register (ioar). the direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. the transfer is from the address specified in ioar to the address specified in mar if activated by an sci channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the address specified in mar to the address specified in ioar otherwise. table 7.6 indicates the register functions in i/o mode. table 7.6 register functions in i/o mode function register activated by sci 0 receive- data-full interrupt other activation initial setting operation 23 0 mar destination address register source address register destination or source start address incremented or decremented once per transfer all 1s ioar 23 0 7 source address register destination address register source or destination address held fixed 15 0 etcr transfer counter number of transfers decremented once per transfer until h'0000 is reached and transfer ends legend mar: memory address register ioar: i/o address register etcr: execute transfer count register mar and ioar specify the source and destination addresses. mar specifies a 24-bit source or destination address, which is incremented or decremented as each byte or word is transferred. ioar specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. the upper 16 bits are all 1s. ioar is not incremented or decremented. figure 7.2 illustrates how i/o mode operates. 222 address t address b transfer legend l = initial setting of mar n = initial setting of etcr address t = l address b = l + ( 1) (2 n 1) dtid ioar 1 byte or word is transferred per request dtsz figure 7.2 operation in i/o mode the transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in etcr. the etcr value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. when the etcr value reaches h'0000, the dte bit is cleared and the transfer ends. if the dtie bit is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. the maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting etcr to h'0000. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, conversion-end interrupts from the a/d converter, and external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 7.2.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). 223 figure 7.3 shows a sample setup procedure for i/o mode. set source and destination addresses set transfer count read dtcr set dtcr i/o mode i/o mode setup 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. set the source and destination addresses in mar and ioar. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. set the transfer count in etcr. read dtcr while the dte bit is cleared to 0. set the dtcr bits as follows. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2 to dts0. set or clear the dtie bit to enable or disable the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer. clear the rpe bit to 0 to select i/o mode. select mar increment or decrement with the dtid bit. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the dte bit to 1 to enable the transfer. figure 7.3 i/o mode setup procedure (example) 7.4.3 idle mode idle mode can be selected independently for each channel. one byte or word is transferred at each transfer request in idle mode. a designated number of these transfers are executed. one address is specified in the memory address register (mar), the other in the i/o address register (ioar). the direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. the transfer is from the address specified in ioar to the address specified in mar if activated by an sci channel 0 receive-data-full interrupt, and from the address specified in mar to the address specified in ioar otherwise. table 7.7 indicates the register functions in idle mode. 224 table 7.7 register functions in idle mode function register activated by sci 0 receive- data-full interrupt other activation initial setting operation 23 0 mar destination address register source address register destination or source address held fixed all 1s ioar 23 0 7 source address register destination address register source or destination address held fixed 15 0 etcr transfer counter number of transfers decremented once per transfer until h'0000 is reached and transfer ends legend mar: memory address register ioar: i/o address register etcr: execute transfer count register mar and ioar specify the source and destination addresses. mar specifies a 24-bit source or destination address. ioar specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. the upper 16 bits are all 1s. mar and ioar are not incremented or decremented. figure 7.4 illustrates how idle mode operates. transfer 1 byte or word is transferred per request ioar mar figure 7.4 operation in idle mode 225 the transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in etcr. the etcr value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. when the etcr value reaches h'0000, the dte bit is cleared, the transfer ends, and a cpu interrupt is requested. the maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting etcr to h'0000. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, conversion-end interrupts from the a/d converter, and external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 7.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). figure 7.5 shows a sample setup procedure for idle mode. set source and destination addresses set transfer count read dtcr set dtcr idle mode idle mode setup 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. set the source and destination addresses in mar and ioar. the transfer direction is deter- mined automatically from the activation source. set the transfer count in etcr. read dtcr while the dte bit is cleared to 0. set the dtcr bits as follows. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2 to dts0. set the dtie and rpe bits to 1 to select idle mode. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the dte bit to 1 to enable the transfer. figure 7.5 idle mode setup procedure (example) 226 7.4.4 repeat mode repeat mode is useful for cyclically transferring a bit pattern from a table to the programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) in synchronization, for example, with 16-bit timer compare match. repeat mode can be selected for each channel independently. one byte or word is transferred per request in repeat mode, as in i/o mode. a designated number of these transfers are executed. one address is specified in the memory address register (mar), the other in the i/o address register (ioar). at the end of the designated number of transfers, mar and etcrh are restored to their original values and operation continues. the direction of transfer is determined automatically from the activation source. the transfer is from the address specified in ioar to the address specified in mar if activated by an sci channel 0 receive-data- full interrupt, and from the address specified in mar to the address specified in ioar otherwise. table 7.8 indicates the register functions in repeat mode. table 7.8 register functions in repeat mode function register activated by sci 0 receive- data-full interrupt other activation initial setting operation destination address register source address register destination or source start address incremented or decremented at each transfer until etcrh reaches h'0000, then restored to initial value source address register destination address register source or destination address held fixed transfer counter number of transfers decremented once per transfer until h'0000 is reached, then reloaded from etcrl initial transfer count number of transfers held fixed legend mar: memory address register ioar: i/o address register etcr: execute transfer count register 23 0 mar all 1s ioar 23 0 70 etcrh 7 70 etcrl 227 in repeat mode etcrh is used as the transfer counter while etcrl holds the initial transfer count. etcrh is decremented by 1 at each transfer until it reaches h'00, then is reloaded from etcrl. mar is also restored to its initial value, which is calculated from the dtsz and dtid bits in dtcr. specifically, mar is restored as follows: mar mar ?(?) dtid ?2 dtsz ?etcrl etcrh and etcrl should be initially set to the same value. in repeat mode transfers continue until the cpu clears the dte bit to 0. after dte is cleared to 0, if the cpu sets dte to 1 again, transfers resume from the state at which dte was cleared. no cpu interrupt is requested. as in i/o mode, mar and ioar specify the source and destination addresses. mar specifies a 24-bit source or destination address. ioar specifies the lower 8 bits of a fixed address. the upper 16 bits are all 1s. ioar is not incremented or decremented. figure 7.6 illustrates how repeat mode operates. address t address b transfer 1 byte or word is transferred per request legend l = initial setting of mar n = initial setting of etcrh and etcrl address t = l address b = l + ( 1) (2 n 1) dtid dtsz ioar figure 7.6 operation in repeat mode 228 the transfer count is specified as an 8-bit value in etcrh and etcrl. the maximum transfer count is 255, obtained by setting both etcrh and etcrl to h'ff. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2, transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci channel 0, conversion-end interrupts from the a/d converter, and external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 7.2.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). figure 7.7 shows a sample setup procedure for repeat mode. set source and destination addresses set transfer count read dtcr set dtcr repeat mode repeat mode 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. set the source and destination addresses in mar and ioar. the transfer direction is determined automatically from the activation source. set the transfer count in both etcrh and etcrl. read dtcr while the dte bit is cleared to 0. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the dte bit to 1 to enable the transfer. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2 to dts0. clear the dtie bit to 0 and set the rpe bit to 1 to select repeat mode. select mar increment or decrement with the dtid bit. set the dtcr bits as follows. figure 7.7 repeat mode setup procedure (example) 229 7.4.5 normal mode in normal mode the a and b channels are combined. one byte or word is transferred per request. a designated number of these transfers are executed. addresses are specified in mara and marb. table 7.9 indicates the register functions in i/o mode. table 7.9 register functions in normal mode register function initial setting operation 23 0 mara source address register source start address incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed 23 0 marb destination address register destination start address incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed 15 0 etcra transfer counter number of transfers decremented once per transfer legend mara: memory address register a marb: memory address register b etcra: execute transfer count register a the source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. mara specifies the source address. marb specifies the destination address. mara and marb can be independently incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. the transfer count is specified as a 16-bit value in etcra. the etcra value is decremented by 1 at each transfer. when the etcra value reaches h'0000, the dte bit is cleared and the transfer ends. if the dtie bit is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. the maximum transfer count is 65,536, obtained by setting etcra to h'0000. 230 figure 7.8 illustrates how normal mode operates. address t address b transfer legend l l n t b t b said daid address t address b a b a a b b = initial setting of mara = initial setting of marb = initial setting of etcra = l = l + saide ( 1) (2 n 1) = l = l + daide ( 1) (2 n 1) a a b b dtsz dtsz a a b b figure 7.8 operation in normal mode transfers can be requested (activated) by an external request or auto-request. an auto-requested transfer is activated by the register settings alone. the designated number of transfers are executed automatically. either cycle-steal or burst mode can be selected. in cycle-steal mode the dmac releases the bus temporarily after each transfer. in burst mode the dmac keeps the bus until the transfers are completed, unless there is a bus request from a higher-priority bus master. for the detailed settings see section 7.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). 231 figure 7.9 shows a sample setup procedure for normal mode. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. set the initial source address in mara. set the initial destination address in marb. set the transfer count in etcra. set the dtcrb bits as follows. set the dtcra bits as follows. read dtcrb with dtme cleared to 0. normal mode normal mode set initial source address set initial destination address set transfer count set dtcrb (1) set dtcra (1) read dtcrb set dtcrb (2) read dtcra set dtcra (2) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 clear the dtme bit to 0. set the daid and daide bits to select whether marb is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2b to dts0b. clear the dte bit to 0. select byte or word size with the dtsz bit. set the said and saide bits to select whether mara is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. set or clear the dtie bit to enable or disable the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer. clear the dts0a bit to 0 and set the dts2a and dts1a bits to 1 to select normal mode. set the dtme bit to 1 in dtcrb. read dtcra with dte cleared to 0. set the dte bit to 1 in dtcra to enable the transfer. note: carry out settings 1 to 9 with the dend interrupt masked in the cpu. if an nmi interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the dtme bit to 0, in which case the transfer will not start. figure 7.9 normal mode setup procedure (example) 232 7.4.6 block transfer mode in block transfer mode the a and b channels are combined. one block of a specified size is transferred per request. a designated number of block transfers are executed. addresses are specified in mara and marb. the block area address can be either held fixed or cycled. table 7.10 indicates the register functions in block transfer mode. table 7.10 register functions in block transfer mode register function initial setting operation source address register source start address incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed destination address register destination start address incremented or decremented once per transfer, or held fixed block size counter block size decremented once per transfer until h'00 is reached, then reloaded from etcrl initial block size block size held fixed block transfer counter number of block transfers decremented once per block transfer until h'0000 is reached and the transfer ends legend mara: memory address register a marb: memory address register b etcra: execute transfer count register a etcrb: execute transfer count register b 23 0 mara 70 etcrah 70 etcral 23 0 marb 15 0 etcrb the source and destination addresses are both 24-bit addresses. mara specifies the source address. marb specifies the destination address. mara and marb can be independently incremented, decremented, or held fixed as data is transferred. one of these registers operates as a block area register: even if it is incremented or decremented, it is restored to its initial value at the end of each block transfer. the tms bit in dtcrb selects whether the block area is the source or destination. 233 if m (1 to 255) is the size of the block transferred at each request and n (1 to 65,536) is the number of blocks to be transferred, then etcrah and etcral should initially be set to m and etcrb should initially be set to n. figure 7.10 illustrates how block transfer mode operates. in this figure, bit tms is cleared to 0, meaning the block area is the destination. t b transfer legend l l m n t b t b address t m bytes or words are transferred per request address b a a block 1 block n b b block area block 2 = initial setting of mara = initial setting of marb = initial setting of etcrah and etcral = initial setting of etcrb = l = l + saide ( 1) (2 m 1) = l = l + daide ( 1) (2 m 1) a a b b a b a a b b said daid dtsz dtsz figure 7.10 operation in block transfer mode 234 when activated by a transfer request, the dmac executes a burst transfer. during the transfer mara and marb are updated according to the dtcr settings, and etcrah is decremented. when etcrah reaches h'00, it is reloaded from etcral to restore the initial value. the memory address register of the block area is also restored to its initial value, and etcrb is decremented. if etcrb is not h'0000, the dmac then waits for the next transfer request. etcrah and etcral should be initially set to the same value. the above operation is repeated until etcrb reaches h'0000, at which point the dte bit is cleared to 0 and the transfer ends. if the dtie bit is set to 1, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. figure 7.11 shows examples of a block transfer with byte data size when the block area is the destination. in (a) the block area address is cycled. in (b) the block area address is held fixed. transfers can be requested (activated) by compare match/input capture a interrupts from itu channels 0 to 2, by an a/d converter conversion-end interrupt, and by external request signals. for the detailed settings see section 7.3.4, data transfer control registers (dtcr). 235 start (dte = dtme = 1) transfer requested? get bus mara = mara + 1 read from mara address write to marb address marb = marb + 1 etcrah = etcrah 1 etcrah = h'00 release bus clear dte to 0 and end transfer etcrah = etcral marb = marb etcral etcrb = etcrb 1 etcrb = h'0000 start (dte = dtme = 1) transfer requested? get bus mara = mara + 1 read from mara address write to marb address etcrah = etcrah 1 etcrah = h'00 release bus clear dte to 0 and end transfer etcrb = etcrb 1 etcrb = h'0000 etcrah = etcral no no no yes yes yes no no no yes yes yes a. dtsz = tms = 0 said = daid = 0 saide = daide = 1 b. dtsz = tms = 0 said = 0 saide = 1 daide = 0 figure 7.11 block transfer mode flowcharts (examples) 236 figure 7.12 shows a sample setup procedure for block transfer mode. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. block transfer mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 set source address set destination address set block transfer count set block size set dtcrb (1) set dtcra (1) read dtcrb set dtcrb (2) read dtcra set dtcra (2) block transfer mode set the source address in mara. set the destination address in marb. set the block transfer count in etcrb. set the block size (number of bytes or words) in both etcrah and etcral. set the dtcrb bits as follows. set the dtcra bits as follows. clear the dtme bit to 0. set the daid and daide bits to select whether marb is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. set or clear the tms bit to make the block area the source or destination. select the dmac activation source with bits dts2b to dts0b. clear the dte to 0. select byte size or word size with the dtsz bit. set the said and saide bits to select whether mara is incremented, decremented, or held fixed. set or clear the dtie bit to enable or disable the cpu interrupt at the end of the transfer. set bits dts2a to dts0a all to 1 to select block transfer mode. read dtcrb with dtme cleared to 0. set the dtme bit to 1 in dtcrb. read dtcra with dte cleared to 0. set the dte bit to 1 in dtcra to enable the transfer. note: carry out settings 1 to 10 with the dend interrupt masked in the cpu. if an nmi interrupt occurs during the setup procedure, it may clear the dtme bit to 0, in which case the transfer will not start. figure 7.12 block transfer mode setup procedure (example) 237 7.4.7 dmac activation the dmac can be activated by an internal interrupt, external request, or auto-request. the available activation sources differ depending on the transfer mode and channel as indicated in table 7.11. table 7.11 dmac activation sources short address mode channels channels full address mode activation source 0a and 1a 0b and 1b normal block internal imia0 dreq dreq activation by internal interrupts: when an interrupt request is selected as a dmac activation source and the dte bit is set to 1, that interrupt request is not sent to the cpu. it is not possible for an interrupt request to activate the dmac and simultaneously generate a cpu interrupt. when the dmac is activated by an interrupt request, the interrupt request flag is cleared automatically. if the same interrupt is selected to activate two or more channels, the interrupt request flag is cleared when the highest-priority channel is activated, but the transfer request is held pending on the other channels in the dmac, which are activated in their priority order. 238 activation by external request: if an external request ( dreq pin) is selected as an activation source, the dreq pin becomes an input pin and the corresponding tend pin becomes an output pin, regardless of the port data direction register (ddr) settings. the dreq input can be level- sensitive or edge-sensitive. in short address mode and normal mode, an external request operates as follows. if edge sensing is selected, one byte or word is transferred each time a high-to-low transition of the dreq input is detected. if the next edge is input before the transfer is completed, the next transfer may not be executed. if level sensing is selected, the transfer continues while dreq is low, until the transfer is completed. the bus is released temporarily after each byte or word has been transferred, however. if the dreq input goes high during a transfer, the transfer is suspended after the current byte or word has been transferred. when dreq goes low, the request is held internally until one byte or word has been transferred. the tend signal goes low during the last write cycle. in block transfer mode, an external request operates as follows. only edge-sensitive transfer requests are possible in block transfer mode. each time a high-to-low transition of the dreq input is detected, a block of the specified size is transferred. the tend signal goes low during the last write cycle in each block. activation by auto-request: the transfer starts as soon as enabled by register setup, and continues until completed. cycle-steal mode or burst mode can be selected. in cycle-steal mode the dmac releases the bus temporarily after transferring each byte or word. normally, dmac cycles alternate with cpu cycles. in burst mode the dmac keeps the bus until the transfer is completed, unless there is a higher- priority bus request. if there is a higher-priority bus request, the bus is released after the current byte or word has been transferred. 239 7.4.8 dmac bus cycle figure 7.13 shows an example of the timing of the basic dmac bus cycle. this example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to an 8-bit three-state access area. when the dmac gets the bus from the cpu, after one dead cycle (t d ), it reads from the source address and writes to the destination address. during these read and write operations the bus is not released even if there is another bus request. dmac cycles comply with bus controller settings in the same way as cpu cycles. r d h wr l wr figure 7.13 dma transfer bus timing (example) 240 figure 7.14 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by low input at a dreq pin. this example shows a word-size transfer from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area. the dmac continues the transfer while the dreq pin is held low. dreq rd hwr tend lwr figure 7.14 bus timing of dma transfer requested by low dreq input 241 figure 7.15 shows an auto-requested burst-mode transfer. this example shows a transfer of three words from a 16-bit two-state access area to another 16-bit two-state access area. t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 t 1 t 2 rd hwr lwr figure 7.15 burst dma bus timing when the dmac is activated from a dreq pin there is a minimum interval of four states from when the transfer is requested until the dmac starts operating. the dreq pin is not sampled during the time between the transfer request and the start of the transfer. in short address mode and normal mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of the read cycle. in block transfer mode, the pin is next sampled at the end of one block transfer. 242 figure 7.16 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by the falling edge of dreq in normal mode. dreq rd hwr lwr figure 7.16 timing of dmac activation by falling edge of dreq in normal mode 243 figure 7.17 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by level-sensitive low dreq input in normal mode. dreq rd hwr lwr figure 7.17 timing of dmac activation by low dreq level in normal mode 244 figure 7.18 shows the timing when the dmac is activated by the falling edge of dreq in block transfer mode. dreq rd hwr tend lwr figure 7.18 timing of dmac activation by falling edge of dreq in block transfer mode 245 7.4.9 multiple-channel operation the dmac channel priority order is: channel 0 > channel 1 and channel a > channel b. table 7.12 shows the complete priority order. table 7.12 channel priority order short address mode full address mode priority channel 0a channel 0 high channel 0b channel 1a channel 1 channel 1b low if transfers are requested on two or more channels simultaneously, or if a transfer on one channel is requested during a transfer on another channel, the dmac operates as follows. ? when a transfer is requested, the dmac requests the bus right. when it gets the bus right, it starts a transfer on the highest-priority channel at that time. ? once a transfer starts on one channel, requests to other channels are held pending until that channel releases the bus. ? after each transfer in short address mode, and each externally-requested or cycle-steal transfer in normal mode, the dmac releases the bus and returns to step 1. after releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the dmac requests the bus again. ? after completion of a burst-mode transfer, or after transfer of one block in block transfer mode, the dmac releases the bus and returns to step 1. if there is a transfer request for a higher-priority channel or a bus request from a higher-priority bus master, however, the dmac releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. after releasing the bus, if there is a transfer request for another channel, the dmac requests the bus again. figure 7.19 shows the timing when channel 0a is set up for i/o mode and channel 1 for burst mode, and a transfer request for channel 0a is received while channel 1 is active. 246 rd hwr lwr figure 7.19 timing of multiple-channel operations 7.4.10 external bus requests, dram interface, and dmac during a dmac transfer, if the bus right is requested by an external bus request signal ( breq ) or by the dram interface (refresh cycle), the dmac releases the bus after completing the transfer of the current byte or word. if there is a transfer request at this point, the dmac requests the bus right again. figure 7.20 shows an example of the timing of insertion of a refresh cycle during a burst transfer on channel 0. rd hwr lwr figure 7.20 bus timing of dram interface, and dmac 247 7.4.11 nmi interrupts and dmac nmi interrupts do not affect dmac operations in short address mode. if an nmi interrupt occurs during a transfer in full address mode, the dmac suspends operations. in full address mode, a channel is enabled when its dte and dtme bits are both set to 1. nmi input clears the dtme bit to 0. after transferring the current byte or word, the dmac releases the bus to the cpu. in normal mode, the suspended transfer resumes when the cpu sets the dtme bit to 1 again. check that the dte bit is set to 1 and the dtme bit is cleared to 0 before setting the dtme bit to 1. figure 7.21 shows the procedure for resuming a dmac transfer in normal mode on channel 0 after the transfer was halted by nmi input. resuming dmac transfer in normal mode dte = 1 dtme = 0 set dtme to 1 dma transfer continues end 1. 2. check that dte = 1 and dtme = 0. read dtcrb while dtme = 0, then write 1 in the dtme bit. 2 no yes 1 figure 7.21 procedure for resuming a dmac transfer halted by nmi (example) for information about nmi interrupts in block transfer mode, see section 7.6.6, nmi interrupts and block transfer mode. 248 7.4.12 aborting a dmac transfer when the dte bit in an active channel is cleared to 0, the dmac halts after transferring the current byte or word. the dmac starts again when the dte bit is set to 1. in full address mode, the dtme bit can be used for the same purpose. figure 7.22 shows the procedure for aborting a dmac transfer by software. dmac transfer abort set dtcr dmac transfer aborted 1 1. clear the dte bit to 0 in dtcr. to avoid generating an interrupt when aborting a dma transfer, clear the dtie bit to 0 simultaneously. figure 7.22 procedure for aborting a dmac transfer 249 7.4.13 exiting full address mode figure 7.23 shows the procedure for exiting full address mode and initializing the pair of channels. to set the channels up in another mode after exiting full address mode, follow the setup procedure for the relevant mode. exiting full address mode halt the channel initialize dtcrb initialize dtcra initialized and halted 1 2 3 1. 2. 3. clear the dte bit to 0 in dtcra, or wait for the transfer to end and the dte bit to be cleared to 0. clear all dtcrb bits to 0. clear all dtcra bits to 0. figure 7.23 procedure for exiting full address mode (example) 250 7.4.14 dmac states in reset state, standby modes, and sleep mode when the chip is reset or enters software standby mode, the dmac is initialized and halts. dmac operations continue in sleep mode. figure 7.24 shows the timing of a cycle-steal transfer in sleep mode. rd hwr lwr figure 7.24 timing of cycle-steal transfer in sleep mode 251 7.5 interrupts the dmac generates only dma-end interrupts. table 7.13 lists the interrupts and their priority. table 7.13 dmac interrupts description interrupt short address mode full address mode interrupt priority dend0a end of transfer on channel 0a end of transfer on channel 0 high dend0b end of transfer on channel 0b dend1a end of transfer on channel 1a end of transfer on channel 1 dend1b end of transfer on channel 1b low each interrupt is enabled or disabled by the dtie bit in the corresponding data transfer control register (dtcr). separate interrupt signals are sent to the interrupt controller. the interrupt priority order among channels is channel 0 > channel 1 and channel a > channel b. figure 7.25 shows the dma-end interrupt logic. an interrupt is requested whenever dte = 0 and dtie = 1. dte dtie dma-end interrupt figure 7.25 dma-end interrupt logic the dma-end interrupt for the b channels (dendb) is unavailable in full address mode. the dtme bit does not affect interrupt operations. 252 7.6 usage notes 7.6.1 note on word data transfer word data cannot be accessed starting at an odd address. when word-size transfer is selected, set even values in the memory and i/o address registers (mar and ioar). 7.6.2 dmac self-access the dmac itself cannot be accessed during a dmac cycle. dmac registers cannot be specified as source or destination addresses. 7.6.3 longword access to memory address registers a memory address register can be accessed as longword data at the marr address. example mov.l #lbl, er0 mov.l er0, @marr four byte accesses are performed. note that the cpu may release the bus between the second byte (mare) and third byte (marh). memory address registers should be written and read only when the dmac is halted. 7.6.4 note on full address mode setup full address mode is controlled by two registers: dtcra and dtcrb. care must be taken to prevent the b channel from operating in short address mode during the register setup. the enable bits (dte and dtme) should not be set to 1 until the end of the setup procedure. 253 7.6.5 note on activating dmac by internal interrupts when using an internal interrupt to activate the dmac, make sure that the interrupt selected as the activating source does not occur during the interval after it has been selected but before the dmac has been enabled. the on-chip supporting module that will generate the interrupt should not be activated until the dmac has been enabled. if the dmac must be enabled while the on- chip supporting module is active, follow the procedure in figure 7.26. enabling of dmac selected interrupt requested? interrupt hand- ling by cpu clear selected interrupt s enable bit to 0 enable dmac set selected interrupt s enable bit to 1 1 2 3 4 1. 2. 3. 4. while the dte bit is cleared to 0, interrupt requests are sent to the cpu. clear the interrupt enable bit to 0 in the interrupt-generating on-chip supporting module. enable the dmac. enable the dmac-activating interrupt. dmac operates yes no figure 7.26 procedure for enabling dmac while on-chip supporting module is operating (example) if the dte bit is set to 1 but the dtme bit is cleared to 0, the dmac is halted and the selected activating source cannot generate a cpu interrupt. if the dmac is halted by an nmi interrupt, for example, the selected activating source cannot generate cpu interrupts. to terminate dmac operations in this state, clear the dte bit to 0 to allow cpu interrupts to be requested. to continue dmac operations, carry out steps 2 and 4 in figure 7.26 before and after setting the dtme bit to 1. 254 when 16-bit timer interrupt activates the dmac, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before the dma transfer ends. if one 16-bit timer interrupt activates two or more channels, make sure the next interrupt does not occur before the dma transfers end on all the activated channels. if the next interrupt occurs before a transfer ends, the channel or channels for which that interrupt was selected may fail to accept further activation requests. 7.6.6 nmi interrupts and block transfer mode if an nmi interrupt occurs in block transfer mode, the dmac operates as follows. ? when the nmi interrupt occurs, the dmac finishes transferring the current byte or word, then clears the dtme bit to 0 and halts. the halt may occur in the middle of a block. it is possible to find whether a transfer was halted in the middle of a block by checking the block size counter. if the block size counter does not have its initial value, the transfer was halted in the middle of a block. ? if the transfer is halted in the middle of a block, the activating interrupt flag is cleared to 0. the activation request is not held pending. ? while the dte bit is set to 1 and the dtme bit is cleared to 0, the dmac is halted and does not accept activating interrupt requests. if an activating interrupt occurs in this state, the dmac does not operate and does not hold the transfer request pending internally. neither is a cpu interrupt requested. for this reason, before setting the dtme bit to 1, first clear the enable bit of the activating interrupt to 0. then, after setting the dtme bit to 1, set the interrupt enable bit to 1 again. see section 7.6.5, note on activating dmac by internal interrupts. ? when the dtme bit is set to 1, the dmac waits for the next transfer request. if it was halted in the middle of a block transfer, the rest of the block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs. otherwise, the next block is transferred when the next transfer request occurs. 7.6.7 memory and i/o address register values table 7.14 indicates the address ranges that can be specified in the memory and i/o address registers (mar and ioar). 255 table 7.14 address ranges specifiable in mar and ioar 1-mbyte mode 16-mbyte mode mar h'00000 to h'fffff (0 to 1048575) h'000000 to h'ffffff (0 to 16777215) ioar h'fff00 to h'fffff (1048320 to 1048575) h'ffff00 to h'ffffff (16776960 to 16777215) mar bits 23 to 20 are ignored in 1-mbyte mode. 7.6.8 bus cycle when transfer is aborted when a transfer is aborted by clearing the dte bit or suspended by an nmi that clears the dtme bit, if this halts a channel for which the dmac has a transfer request pending internally, a dead cycle may occur. this dead cycle does not update the halted channel? address register or counter value. figure 7.27 shows an example in which an auto-requested transfer in cycle-steal mode on channel 0 is aborted by clearing the dte bit in channel 0. rd hwr lwr figure 7.27 bus timing at abort of dma transfer in cycle-steal mode 7.6.9 transfer requests by a/d converter when the a/d converter is set to scan mode and conversion is performed on more than one channel, the a/d converter generates a transfer request when all conversions are completed. the converted data is stored in the appropriate addr registers. block transfer mode and full address mode should therefore be used to transfer all the conversion results at one time. 256 257 section 8 i/o ports 8.1 overview the h8/3067 series has 11 input/output ports (ports 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, a, and b). table 8.1 summarizes the port functions. the pins in each port are multiplexed as shown in table 8.1. each port has a data direction register (ddr) for selecting input or output, and a data register (dr) for storing output data. in addition to these registers, ports 2, 4, and 5 have an input pull-up control register (pcr) for switching input pull-up transistors on and off. ports 1 to 6 and port 8 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. ports 9, a, and b can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. ports 1 to 6 and 8 to b can drive a darlington pair. ports 1, 2, and 5 can drive leds (with 10-ma current sink). pins p8 2 to p8 0 , pa 7 to pa 0 have schmitt-trigger input circuits. for block diagrams of the ports see appendix c, i/o port block diagrams. 258 table 8.1 port functions (1) expanded modes single-chip modes port description pins mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port 1 ? 8-bit i/o port ? can drive leds p1 7 to p1 0 / a 7 to a 0 address output pins (a 7 to a 0 ) address output (a 7 to a 0 ) and generic input ddr = 0: generic input ddr = 1: address output generic input/output port 2 ? 8-bit i/o port ? built-in input pull- up transistors ? can drive leds p2 7 to p2 0 / a 15 to a 8 address output pins (a 15 to a 8 ) address output (a 15 to a 8 ) and generic input ddr = 0: generic input ddr = 1: address output generic input/output port 3 ? 8-bit i/o port p3 7 to p3 0 / d 15 to d 8 data input/output (d 15 to d 8 ) generic input/output port 4 ? 8-bit i/o port ? built-in input pull- up transistors p4 7 to p4 0 / d 7 to d 0 data input/output (d 7 to d 0 ) and 8-bit generic input/output 8-bit bus mode: generic input/output 16-bit bus mode: data input/output generic input/output port 5 ? 4-bit i/o port ? built-in input pull- up transistors ? can drive leds p5 3 to p5 0 / a 19 to a 16 address output (a 19 to a 16 ) address output (a 19 to a 16 ) and 4-bit generic input ddr = 0: generic input ddr = 1: address output generic input/output port 6 ? 8-bit i/o port p6 7 / clock output ( ) and generic input p6 6 / lwr p6 5 / hwr p6 4 / rd p6 3 / as bus control signal output ( lwr , hwr , rd , as ) generic input/output p6 2 / back p6 1 / breq p6 0 / wait bus control signal input/output ( back , breq , wait ) and 3-bit generic input/output port 7 ? 8-bit i/o port p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 analog input (an 7 , an 6 ) to a/d converter, analog output (da 1 , da 0 ) from d/a converter, and generic input p7 5 to p7 0 / an 5 to an 0 analog input (an 5 to an 0 ) to a/d converter, and generic input port 8 ? 5-bit i/o port ? p8 2 to p8 0 have schmitt inputs p8 4 / cs 0 ddr = 0: generic input ddr = 1 (reset value): cs 0 output ddr = 0 (reset value): generic input ddr = 1: cs 0 output generic input/output p8 3 / irq 3 / cs 1 / adtrg irq 3 input, cs 1 output, external trigger input ( adtrg ) to a/d converter, and generic input ddr = 0 (after reset): generic input ddr = 1: cs 1 output irq 3 input, external trigger input ( adtrg ) to a/d converter, and generic input/output p8 2 / irq 2 / cs 2 p8 1 / irq 1 / cs 3 irq 2 and irq 1 input, cs 2 and cs 3 output, and generic input * ddr = 0 (reset value): generic input ddr = 1: cs 2 and cs 3 output irq 2 and irq 1 input and generic input/output p8 0 / irq 0 / rfsh irq 0 input, rfsh output, and generic input/output irq 0 input and generic input/output note: * p8 1 can be used as an output port by making a setting in drcra. 259 table 8.1 port functions (1) (cont) expanded modes single-chip modes port description pins mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 port 9 ? 6-bit i/o port p9 5 / irq 5 /sck 1 p9 4 / irq 4 /sck 0 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 0 /txd 0 input and output (sck 1 , sck 0 , rxd 1 , rxd 0 , txd 1 , txd 0 ) for serial communication interfaces 1 and 0 (sci1/0), irq 5 and irq 4 input, and 6-bit generic input/output port a ? 8-bit i/o port ? schmitt inputs pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 output (tp 7 ) from pro- grammable timing pattern controller (tpc), input or output (tiocb 2 ) for 16-bit timer and generic input/output address output (a 20 ) address output (a 20 ), tpc output (tp 7 ), input or output (tiocb 2 ) for 16-bit timer, and generic input/output tpc output (tp 7 ), 16-bit timer input or output (tiocb 2 ), and generic input/output pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 tpc output (tp 6 to tp 4 ), 16-bit timer input and output (tioca 2 , tiocb 1 , tioca 1 ) , and generic input/output tpc output (tp 6 to tp 4 ), 16-bit timer input and output (tioca 2 , tiocb 1 , tioca 1 ), address output (a 23 to a 21 ), and generic input/output tpc output (tp 6 to tp 4 ), 16-bit timer input and output (tioca 2 , tiocb 1 , tioca 1 ) and generic input/output pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 / tclkd pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 / tclkc pa 1 /tp 1 / tclkb / tend 1 pa 0 /tp 0 / tclka / tend 0 tpc output (tp 3 to tp 0 ), 16-bit timer input and output (tiocb 0 , tioca 0 , tclkd, tclkc, tclkb, tclka), 8-bit timer input (tclkd, tclkc, tclkb, tclka), output ( tend 1 , tend 0 ) from dma controller (dmac), and generic input/output port b ? 8-bit i/o port pb 7 /tp 15 / rxd 2 pb 6 /tp 14 / txd 2 pb 5 /tp 13 / sck 2 / lcas pb 4 /tp 12 / ucas tpc output (tp 15 to tp 12 ), sci2 input and output (sck 2 , rxd 2 , txd 2 ), dram interface output ( lcas , ucas ), and generic input/output tpc output (tp 15 to tp 12 ), sci2 input and output (sck 2 , rxd 2 , txd 2 ), and generic input/output pb 3 /tp 11 / tmio 3 / dreq 1 / cs 4 pb 2 /tp 10 / tmo 2 / cs 5 pb 1 /tp 9 / tmio 1 / dreq 0 / cs 6 pb 0 /tp 8 / tmo 0 / cs 7 tpc output (tp 11 to tp 8 ), 8-bit timer input and output (tmio 3 , tmo 2 , tmio 1 , tmo 0 ), dmac input ( dreq 1 , dreq 0 ), cs 7 to cs 4 output, and generic input/output tpc output (tp 11 to tp 8 ), 8-bit timer input and output (tmio 3 , tmo 2 , tmio 1 , tmo 0 ), dmac input ( dreq 1 , dreq 0 ), and generic input/output 260 8.2 port 1 8.2.1 overview port 1 is an 8-bit input/output port also used for address output, with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.1. the pin functions differ between the expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled, expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled, and single-chip mode. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), they are address bus output pins (a 7 to a 0 ). in modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), settings in the port 1 data direction register (p1ddr) can designate pins for address bus output (a 7 to a 0 ) or generic input. in mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode), port 1 is a generic input/output port. when dram is connected to area 2, 3, 4, 5, a 7 to a 0 output row and column addresses in read and write cycles. for details see section 6.5, dram interface. pins in port 1 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive an led or a darlington transistor pair. port 1 p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a p1 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) p1 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 1 pins mode 6 and 7 modes 1 to 4 p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) p1 (input)/a (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 modes 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 figure 8.1 port 1 pin configuration 261 8.2.2 register descriptions table 8.2 summarizes the registers of port 1. table 8.2 port 1 registers initial value address* name abbreviation r/w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 h'ee000 port 1 data direction register p1ddr w h'ff h'00 h'fffd0 port 1 data register p1dr r/w h'00 h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 1 data direction register (p1ddr): p1ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 1. bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 p1 ddr 1 0 w 7 6 p1 ddr 1 0 w 6 5 p1 ddr 1 0 w 5 4 p1 ddr 1 0 w 4 3 p1 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p1 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p1 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p1 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 1 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 1 pins modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled): p1ddr values are fixed at 1. port 1 functions as an address bus. modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled): after a reset, port 1 functions as an input port.a pin in port 1 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding p1ddr bit is set to 1, and a generic input pin if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): port 1 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 1 becomes an output port if the corresponding p1ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. 262 in modes 1 to 4, p1ddr bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. in modes 5 to 7, p1ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p1ddr is initialized to h'ff in modes 1 to 4, and to h'00 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 1 is functioning as an input/output port and a p1ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port 1 data register (p1dr): p1dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores port 1 output data. when port 1 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when this register is read, the pin logic level is read for bits for which the p1ddr setting is 0, and the p1dr value is read for bits for which the p1ddr setting is 1. bit initial value read/write 7 p1 0 r/w port 1 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 1 pins 7 6 p1 0 r/w 6 5 p1 0 r/w 5 4 p1 0 r/w 4 3 p1 0 r/w 3 2 p1 0 r/w 2 1 p1 0 r/w 1 0 p1 0 r/w 0 p1dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 263 8.3 port 2 8.3.1 overview port 2 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.2. the pin functions differ according to the operating mode. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), port 2 consists of address bus output pins (a 15 to a 8 ). in modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), settings in the port 2 data direction register (p2ddr) can designate pins for address bus output (a 15 to a 8 ) or generic input. in mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode), port 2 is a generic input/output port. when dram is connected to areas 2 to 5, a 12 to a 8 output row and column addresses in read and write cycles. for details see section 6.5, dram interface. port 2 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. pins in port 2 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive an led or a darlington transistor pair. port 2 p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a p2 /a 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) p2 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 port 2 pins mode 6 and 7 modes 1 to 4 p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) p2 (input)/a (output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 modes 5 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 figure 8.2 port 2 pin configuration 264 8.3.2 register descriptions table 8.3 summarizes the registers of port 2. table 8.3 port 2 registers initial value address* name abbreviation r/w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 h'ee001 port 2 data direction register p2ddr w h'ff h'00 h'fffd1 port 2 data register p2dr r/w h'00 h'00 h'ee03c port 2 input pull-up mos control register p2pcr r/w h'00 h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 2 data direction register (p2ddr): p2ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 2. bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 p2 ddr 1 0 w 7 6 p2 ddr 1 0 w 6 5 p2 ddr 1 0 w 5 4 p2 ddr 1 0 w 4 3 p2 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p2 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p2 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p2 ddr 1 0 w 0 port 2 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 2 pins modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled): p2ddr values are fixed at 1. port 2 functions as an address bus. modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled): following a reset, port 2 is an input port. a pin in port 2 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding p2ddr bit is set to 1, and a generic input port if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): port 2 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 2 becomes an output port if the corresponding p2ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. 265 in modes 1 to 4, p2ddr bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. in modes 5 to 7, p2ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p2ddr is initialized to h'ff in modes 1 to 4, and to h'00 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 2 is functioning as an input/output port and a p2ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port 2 data register (p2dr): p2dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 2. when port 2 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in p2ddr is set to 1, if port 2 is read the value of the corresponding p2dr bit is returned. when a bit in p2ddr is cleared to 0, if port 2 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bit initial value read/write 7 p2 0 r/w port 2 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 2 pins 7 6 p2 0 r/w 6 5 p2 0 r/w 5 4 p2 0 r/w 4 3 p2 0 r/w 3 2 p2 0 r/w 2 1 p2 0 r/w 1 0 p2 0 r/w 0 p2dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. port 2 input pull-up mos control register (p2pcr): p2pcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up transistors in port 2. bit initial value read/write 7 p2 pcr 0 r/w port 2 input pull-up mos control 7 to 0 these bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 2 7 6 p2 pcr 0 r/w 6 5 p2 pcr 0 r/w 5 4 p2 pcr 0 r/w 4 3 p2 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p2 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p2 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p2 pcr 0 r/w 0 in modes 5 to 7, when a p2ddr bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit in p2pcr is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. p2pcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 266 table 8.4 input pull-up transistor states (port 2) mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode other modes 1 2 3 4 off off off off 5 6 7 off off on/off on/off legend off: the input pull-up transistor is always off. on/off: the input pull-up transistor is on if p2pcr = 1 and p2ddr = 0. otherwise, it is off. 267 8.4 port 3 8.4.1 overview port 3 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.3. port 3 is a data bus in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes) and a generic input/output port in mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode). pins in port 3 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. port 3 p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d p3 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) p3 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) d (input/output) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 port 3 pins mode 6 and 7 modes 1 to 5 figure 8.3 port 3 pin configuration 8.4.2 register descriptions table 8.5 summarizes the registers of port 3. table 8.5 port 3 registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee002 port 3 data direction register p3ddr w h'00 h'fffd2 port 3 data register p3dr r/w h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 268 port 3 data direction register (p3ddr): p3ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 3. bit initial value read/write 7 p3 ddr 0 w port 3 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 3 pins 7 6 p3 ddr 0 w 6 5 p3 ddr 0 w 5 4 p3 ddr 0 w 4 3 p3 ddr 0 w 3 2 p3 ddr 0 w 2 1 p3 ddr 0 w 1 0 p3 ddr 0 w 0 modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes): port 3 functions as a data bus, regardless of the p3ddr settings. mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): port 3 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 3 becomes an output port if the corresponding p3ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p3ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p3ddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 3 is functioning as an input/output port and a p3ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port 3 data register (p3dr): p3dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 3. when port 3 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in p3ddr is set to 1, if port 3 is read the value of the corresponding p3dr bit is returned. when a bit in p3ddr is cleared to 0, if port 3 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bit initial value read/write 7 p3 0 r/w port 3 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 3 pins 7 6 p3 0 r/w 6 5 p3 0 r/w 5 4 p3 0 r/w 4 3 p3 0 r/w 3 2 p3 0 r/w 2 1 p3 0 r/w 1 0 p3 0 r/w 0 p3dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 269 8.5 port 4 8.5.1 overview port 4 is an 8-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.4. the pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), when the bus width control register (abwcr) designates areas 0 to 7 all as 8-bit-access areas, the chip operates in 8-bit bus mode and port 4 is a generic input/output port. when at least one of areas 0 to 7 is designated as a 16-bit-access area, the chip operates in 16-bit bus mode and port 4 becomes part of the data bus. in mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode), port 4 is a generic input/output port. port 4 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. pins in port 4 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. port 4 p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d p4 /d 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 p4 (input/output)/d 7 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 6 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 5 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 4 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 3 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 2 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 1 (input/output) p4 (input/output)/d 0 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 4 pins modes 1 to 5 p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) p4 (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mode 6 and 7 figure 8.4 port 4 pin configuration 270 8.5.2 register descriptions table 8.6 summarizes the registers of port 4. table 8.6 port 4 registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee003 port 4 data direction register p4ddr w h'00 h'fffd3 port 4 data register p4dr r/w h'00 h'ee03e port 4 input pull-up control register p4pcr r/w h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 4 data direction register (p4ddr): p4ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 4. bit initial value read/write 7 p4 ddr 0 w port 4 data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 4 pins 7 6 p4 ddr 0 w 6 5 p4 ddr 0 w 5 4 p4 ddr 0 w 4 3 p4 ddr 0 w 3 2 p4 ddr 0 w 2 1 p4 ddr 0 w 1 0 p4 ddr 0 w 0 modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes): when all areas are designated as 8-bit-access areas by the bus controller? bus width control register (abwcr), selecting 8-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as an input/output port. in this case, a pin in port 4 becomes an output port if the corresponding p4ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. when at least one area is designated as a 16-bit-access area, selecting 16-bit bus mode, port 4 functions as part of the data bus, regardless of the p4ddr settings. mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): port 4 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 4 becomes an output port if the corresponding p4ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p4ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p4ddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 271 abwcr and p4ddr are not initialized in software standby mode. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 4 is functioning as an input/output port and a p4ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port 4 data register (p4dr): p4dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 4. when port 4 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in p4ddr is set to 1, if port 4 is read the value of the corresponding p4dr bit is returned. when a bit in p4ddr is cleared to 0, if port 4 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bit initial value read/write 7 p4 0 r/w port 4 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 4 pins 7 6 p4 0 r/w 6 5 p4 0 r/w 5 4 p4 0 r/w 4 3 p4 0 r/w 3 2 p4 0 r/w 2 1 p4 0 r/w 1 0 p4 0 r/w 0 p4dr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. port 4 input pull-up mos control register (p4pcr): p4pcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up transistors in port 4. bit initial value read/write 7 p4 pcr 0 r/w port 4 input pull-up control 7 to 0 these bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 4 7 6 p4 pcr 0 r/w 6 5 p4 pcr 0 r/w 5 4 p4 pcr 0 r/w 4 3 p4 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p4 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p4 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p4 pcr 0 r/w 0 in mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode), and in 8-bit bus mode in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), when a p4ddr bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding p4pcr bit is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. p4pcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 272 table 8.7 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups in each operating mode. table 8.7 input pull-up transistor states (port 4) mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode other modes 1 to 5 8-bit bus mode off off on/off on/off 16-bit bus mode off off 6 and 7 on/off on/off legend off: the input pull-up transistor is always off. on/off: the input pull-up transistor is on if p4pcr = 1 and p4ddr = 0. otherwise, it is off. 273 8.6 port 5 8.6.1 overview port 5 is a 4-bit input/output port with the pin configuration shown in figure 8.5. the pin functions differ depending on the operating mode. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), port 5 consists of address output pins (a 19 to a 16 ). in modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled), settings in the port 5 data direction register (p5ddr) designate pins for address bus output (a 19 to a 16 ) or generic input. in mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode), port 5 is a generic input/output port. port 5 has software-programmable built-in pull-up transistors. pins in port 5 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive an led or a darlington transistor pair. port 5 p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a p5 /a 3 2 1 0 19 18 17 16 a (output) a (output) a (output) a (output) 19 18 17 16 p5 (input)/a (output) p5 (input)/a (output) p5 (input)/a (output) p5 (input)/a (output) 3 2 1 0 port 5 pins modes 1 to 4 mode 5 p5 (input/output) p5 (input/output) p5 (input/output) p5 (input/output) 3 2 1 0 mode 6 and 7 19 18 17 16 figure 8.5 port 5 pin configuration 8.6.2 register descriptions table 8.8 summarizes the registers of port 5. table 8.8 port 5 registers initial value address* name abbreviation r/w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 h'ee004 port 5 data direction register p5ddr w h'ff h'f0 h'fffd4 port 5 data register p5dr r/w h'f0 h'f0 h'ee03f port 5 input pull-up control register p5pcr r/w h'f0 h'f0 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 274 port 5 data direction register (p5ddr): p5ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 5. bits 7 to 4 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 p5 ddr 1 0 w 3 2 p5 ddr 1 0 w 2 1 p5 ddr 1 0 w 1 0 p5 ddr 1 0 w 0 reserved bits port 5 data direction 3 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 5 pins modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled): p5ddr values are fixed at 1. port 5 functions as an address bus. modes 5 (expanded modes with on-chip rom enabled): following a reset, port 5 is an input port. a pin in port 5 becomes an address output pin if the corresponding p5ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): port 5 functions as an input/output port. a pin in port 5 becomes an output port if the corresponding p5ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. in modes 1 to 4, p5ddr bits are always read as 1, and cannot be modified. in modes 5 to 7, p5ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p5ddr is initialized to h'ff in modes 1 to 4, and to h'f0 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 5 is functioning as an input/output port and a p5ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. 275 port 5 data register (p5dr): p5dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 5. when port 5 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in p5ddr is set to 1, if port 5 is read the value of the corresponding p5dr bit is returned. when a bit in p5ddr is cleared to 0, if port 5 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bits 7 to 4 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 p5 0 r/w 3 2 p5 0 r/w 2 1 p5 0 r/w 1 0 p5 0 r/w 0 reserved bits these bits store data for port 5 pins port 5 data 3 to 0 p5dr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. port 5 input pull-up mos control register (p5pcr): p5pcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the mos input pull-up transistors in port 5. bits 7 to 4 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 p5 pcr 0 r/w 3 2 p5 pcr 0 r/w 2 1 p5 pcr 0 r/w 1 0 p5 pcr 0 r/w 0 reserved bits these bits control input pull-up transistors built into port 5 port 5 input pull-up control 3 to 0 in modes 5 to 7, when a p5ddr bit is cleared to 0 (selecting generic input), if the corresponding bit in p5pcr is set to 1, the input pull-up transistor is turned on. p5pcr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. table 8.9 summarizes the states of the input pull-ups in each mode. 276 table 8.9 input pull-up transistor states (port 5) mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode other modes 1 2 3 4 off off off off 5 6 7 off off on/off on/off legend off: the input pull-up transistor is always off. on/off: the input pull-up transistor is on if p5pcr = 1 and p5ddr = 0. otherwise, it is off. 277 8.7 port 6 8.7.1 overview port 6 is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output of bus control signals ( lwr , hwr , rd , as , back , breq , wait ) and for clock ( ) output. in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), the pin functions are p6 7 (generic input)/ , lwr , hwr , rd , as , p6 2 / back , p6 1 / breq , and p6 0 / wait ). see table 8.11 for the selection of the pin functions. in modes 6 and 7 (single-chip modes), p6 7 functions as a generic input port or ?output, and p6 6 to p6 0 function as generic input/output ports. when dram is connected to areas 2 to 5, lwr , hwr , and rd also function as lcas , ucas , and we , respectively. for details see section 6.5, dram interface. pins in port 6 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. port 6 p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / p6 / 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 lwr hwr rd as back breq wait port 6 pins lwr hwr rd as back breq wait modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (output) (input) (input) p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 p6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode) (input) / (output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) (input/output) p6 7 (input)/ p6 2 (input/output) p6 1 (input/output)/ p6 0 (input/output)/ figure 8.6 port 6 pin configuration 278 8.7.2 register descriptions table 8.10 summarizes the registers of port 6. table 8.10 port 6 registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee005 port 6 data direction register p6ddr w h'80 h'fffd5 port 6 data register p6dr r/w h'80 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 6 data direction register (p6ddr): p6ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 6. bit 7 is reserved. it is fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 p6 ddr 0 w 6 5 p6 ddr 0 w 5 4 p6 ddr 0 w 4 3 p6 ddr 0 w 3 2 p6 ddr 0 w 2 1 p6 ddr 0 w 1 0 p6 ddr 0 w 0 port 6 data direction 6 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 6 pins reserved bit modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes): p6 7 functions as the clock output pin ( ) or an input port. p6 7 is the clock output pin (? if the pstop bit in mstrch is cleared to 0 (initial value), and an input port if this bit is set to 1. p6 6 to p6 3 function as bus control output pins ( lwr , hwr , rd , and as ), regardless of the settings of bits p6 6 ddr to p6 3 ddr. p6 2 to p6 0 function as bus control input/output pins ( back , breq , and wait ) or input/output ports. for the method of selecting the pin functions, see table 8.11. when p6 2 to p6 0 function as input/output ports, the pin becomes an output port if the corresponding p6ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): p6 7 functions as the clock output pin ( ) or an input port. p6 6 to p6 0 function as generic input/output ports. p6 7 is the clock output pin ( ) if the pstop bit in mstcrh is cleared to 0 (initial value), and an input port if this bit is set to 1. a pin in port 6 becomes an output port if the corresponding bit of p6 6 ddr to p6 0 ddr is set to 1, and an input port if this pin is cleared to 0. 279 p6ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p6ddr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 6 is functioning as an input/output port and a p6ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port 6 data register (p6dr): p6dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 6. when port 6 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. for bit 7, a value of 1 is returned if the bit is read while the pstop bit in mstcrh is cleared to 0, and the p6 7 pin logic level is returned if the bit is read while the pstop bit is set to 1. bit 7 cannot be modified. for bits 6 to 0, the pin logic level is returned if the bit is read while the corresponding bit in p6ddr is cleared to 0, and the p6dr value is returned if the bit is read while the corresponding bit in p6ddr is set to 1. bit initial value read/write 7 p6 7 1 r 6 p6 0 r/w 6 5 p6 0 r/w 5 4 p6 0 r/w 4 3 p6 0 r/w 3 2 p6 0 r/w 2 1 p6 0 r/w 1 0 p6 0 r/w 0 port 6 data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port 6 pins p6dr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 280 table 8.11 port 6 pin functions in modes 1 to 5 pin pin functions and selection method p6 7 / bit pstop in mstcrh selects the pin function. pstop 0 1 pin function output p6 7 input lwr functions as lwr regardless of the setting of bit p6 6 ddr p6 6 ddr 0 1 pin function lwr output* note: * if any of bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra is 1 and bit csel in drcrb is 1, lwr output functions as lcas . hwr functions as hwr regardless of the setting of bit p6 5 ddr p6 5 ddr 0 1 pin function hwr output* note: * if any of bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra is 1 and bit csel in drcrb is 1, hwr output functions as ucas . rd functions as rd regardless of the setting of bit p6 4 ddr p6 4 ddr 0 1 pin function rd output* note: * if any of bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra is 1, rd output functions as we . as functions as as regardless of the setting of bit p6 3 ddr p6 3 ddr 0 1 pin function as output p6 2 / back bit brle in brcr and bit p6 2 ddr select the pin function as follows brle 0 1 p6 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p6 2 input p6 2 output back output p6 1 / breq bit brle in brcr and bit p6 1 ddr select the pin function as follows brle 0 1 p6 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p6 1 input p6 1 output breq input p6 0 / wait bit waite in bcr and bit p6 0 ddr select the pin function as follows. waite 0 1 p6 0 ddr 0 1 0* pin function p6 0 input p6 0 output wait input note: * do not set bit p6 0 ddr to 1. 281 8.8 port 7 8.8.1 overview port 7 is an 8-bit input port that is also used for analog input to the a/d converter and analog output from the d/a converter. the pin functions are the same in all operating modes. figure 8.7 shows the pin configuration of port 7. see section 15, a/d converter, for details of the a/d converter analog input pins, and section 16, d/a converter, for details of the d/a converter analog output pins. port 7 p7 (input)/an (input)/da (output) p7 (input)/an (input)/da (output) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) p7 (input)/an (input) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 7 pins 1 0 figure 8.7 port 7 pin configuration 282 8.8.2 register description table 8.12 summarizes the port 7 register. port 7 is an input port, and port 7 has no data direction register. table 8.12 port 7 data register address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fffd6 port 7 data register p7dr r undetermined note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 7 data register (p7dr) bit initial value read/write 0 p7 r * note: * 0 1 p7 r * 1 2 p7 r * 2 3 p7 r * 3 4 p7 r * 4 5 p7 r * 5 6 p7 r * 6 7 p7 r * 7 70 determined by pins p7 to p7 . when port 7 is read, the pin logic levels are always read. p7dr cannot be modified. 283 8.9 port 8 8.9.1 overview port 8 is a 5-bit input/output port that is also used for cs 3 to cs 0 output, rfsh output, irq 3 to irq 0 input, and a/d converter adtrg input. figure 8.8 shows the pin configuration of port 8. in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), port 8 can provide cs 3 to cs 0 output, rfsh output, irq 3 to irq 0 input, and adtrg input. see table 8.14 for the selection of pin functions in expanded modes. in modes 6 and 7 (single-chip modes), port 8 can provide irq 3 to irq 0 input and adtrg input. see table 8.15 for the selection of pin functions in single-chip mode. see section 15, a/d converter, for a description of the a/d converter's adtrg input pin. the irq 3 to irq 0 functions are selected by ier settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for input or output. caution is therefore required. for details see section 5.3.1, external interrupts. when dram is connected to areas 2 to 5, the cs 3 and cs 2 output pins function as ras output pins for each area. for details see section 6.5, dram interface. pins in port 8 can drive one ttl load and a 90-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. pins p8 2 to p8 0 have schmitt-trigger inputs. 284 port 8 p8 / p8 / / p8 / / p8 / / p8 / / 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 2 3 port 8 pins cs cs cs cs rfsh 3 2 1 irq / adtrg irq irq irq 0 p8 (input)/ (output) p8 (input)/ (output)/ (input) / adtrg (input) p8 (input)/ (output)/ (input) p8 (input/output)/ cs 3 (output)/irq 1 (input) p8 (input/output)/ (output)/ (input) 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes) 0 1 2 cs cs cs rfsh 3 2 irq irq irq 0 p8 /(input/output) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) / p8 /(input/output)/ (input) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) p8 /(input/output)/ (input) 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode) irq irq irq irq adtrg (input) 3 2 1 0 figure 8.8 port 8 pin configuration 285 8.9.2 register descriptions table 8.13 summarizes the registers of port 8. table 8.13 port 8 registers initial value address* name abbreviation r/w mode 1 to 4 mode 5 to 7 h'ee007 port 8 data direction register p8ddr w h'f0 h'e0 h'fffd7 port 8 data register p8dr r/w h'e0 h'e0 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 8 data direction register (p8ddr): p8ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 8. bits 7 to 5 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. 7 1 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 p8 ddr 1 w 0 w 4 3 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 3 2 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 2 1 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 1 0 p8 ddr 0 w 0 w 0 reserved bits port 8 data direction 4 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 8 pins bit modes 1 to 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 5 to 7 modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes): when bits in p8ddr bit are set to 1, p8 4 to p8 1 become cs 0 to cs 3 output pins. when bits in p8ddr are cleared to 0, the corresponding pins become input ports. however, p8 1 can also be used as an output port, depending on the setting of bits dras2 to dras0 in dram control register a (drcra). for details see section 6.5.2, dram space and ras output pin settings. in modes 1 to 4 (expanded modes with on-chip rom disabled), following a reset p8 4 functions as the cs 0 output, while cs 1 to cs 3 are input ports. in mode 5 (expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled), following a reset cs 0 to cs 3 are all input ports. when the refresh enable bit (rfshe) in drcra is set to 1, p8 0 is used for rfsh output. when rfshe is cleared to 0, p8 0 becomes an input/output port according to the p8ddr setting. for details see table 8.14. 286 mode 6 and 7 (single-chip mode): port 8 is a generic input/output port. a pin in port 8 becomes an output port if the corresponding p8ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. p8ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p8ddr is initialized to h'f0 in modes 1 to 4, and to h'e0 in modes 5 to 7, by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode p8ddr retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 8 is functioning as an input/output port and a p8ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port 8 data register (p8dr): p8dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 8. when port 8 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in p8ddr is set to 1, if port 8 is read the value of the corresponding p8dr bit is returned. when a bit in p8ddr is cleared to 0, if port 8 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bits 7 to 5 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 p8 0 r/w 4 3 p8 0 r/w 3 2 p8 0 r/w 2 1 p8 0 r/w 1 0 p8 0 r/w 0 reserved bits port 8 data 4 to 0 these bits store data for port 8 pins p8dr is initialized to h'e0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 287 table 8.14 port 8 pin functions in modes 1 to 5 pin pin functions and selection method p8 4 / cs 0 bit p8 4 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 4 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 4 input cs 0 output p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 / adtrg bit p8 3 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 3 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 3 input cs 1 output irq 3 input adtrg input p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 the dram interface settings by bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra, and bit p8 2 ddr, select the pin function as follows. dram interface settings (1) in table below |(2) in table below p8 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 2 input cs 2 output cs 2 output * irq 3 input note: * cs 2 is output as ras 2 . dram interface setting (1) (2) dras2 0 1 dras1 0101 dras0 01010101 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 the dram interface settings by bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra, and bit p8 1 ddr, select the pin function as follows. dram interface settings (1) in table below (2) in table below (3) in table below p8 1 ddr 0 1 0 1 pin function p8 1 input pin cs 3 output pin p8 1 input pin p8 1 output pin cs 3 output pin * irq 1 input pin note: * cs 3 is output as ras 3 . dram interface setting (1) (3) (2) (3) (2) dras2 0 1 dras1 0101 dras0 01010101 p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 bit rfshe in drcra and bit p8 0 ddr select the pin function as follows. rfshe 0 1 * p8 0 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 0 input p8 0 output rfsh output irq 0 input note: * if areas 2 to 5 are not designated as dram space, this bit should not be set to 1. 288 table 8.15 port 8 pin functions in mode 6 and 7 pin pin functions and selection method p8 4 bit p8 4 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 4 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 4 input p8 4 output p8 3 / irq 3 / adtrg bit p8 3 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 3 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 3 input p8 3 output irq 3 input adtrg input p8 2 / irq 2 bit p8 2 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 2 input p8 2 output irq 2 input p8 1 / irq 1 bit p8 1 ddr selects the pin function as follows p8 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 1 input p8 1 output irq 1 input p8 0 / irq 0 bit p8 0 ddr select the pin function as follows p8 0 ddr 0 1 pin function p8 0 input p8 0 output irq 0 input 289 8.10 port 9 8.10.1 overview port 9 is a 6-bit input/output port that is also used for input and output (txd 0 , txd 1 , rxd 0 , rxd 1 , sck 0 , sck 1 ) by serial communication interface channels 0 and 1 (sci0 and sci1), and for irq 5 and irq 4 input. see table 8.17 for the selection of pin functions. the irq 5 and irq 4 functions are selected by ier settings, regardless of whether the pin is used for input or output. caution is therefore required. for details see section 5.3.1, external interrupts. port 9 has the same set of pin functions in all operating modes. figure 8.9 shows the pin configuration of port 9. pins in port 9 can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. port 9 p9 (input/output)/sck p9 (input/output)/sck p9 (input/output)/rxd (input) p9 (input/output)/rxd (input) p9 (input/output)/txd (output) p9 (input/output)/txd (output) 5 4 3 2 1 0 port 9 pins 1 0 (input/output)/irq (input) (input/output)/irq (input) 5 4 1 0 1 0 figure 8.9 port 9 pin configuration 290 8.10.2 register descriptions table 8.16 summarizes the registers of port 9. table 8.16 port 9 registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee008 port 9 data direction register p9ddr w h'c0 h'fffd8 port 9 data register p9dr r/w h'c0 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port 9 data direction register (p9ddr): p9ddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port 9. bits 7 and 6 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 p9 ddr 0 w 5 4 p9 ddr 0 w 4 3 p9 ddr 0 w 3 2 p9 ddr 0 w 2 1 p9 ddr 0 w 1 0 p9 ddr 0 w 0 reserved bits port 9 data direction 5 to 0 these bits select input or output for port 9 pins when port 9 functions as an input/output port, a pin in port 9 becomes an output port if the corresponding p9ddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. for the method of selecting the pin functions, see table 8.17. p9ddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. p9ddr is initialized to h'c0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port 9 is functioning as an input/output port and a p9ddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. 291 port 9 data register (p9dr): p9dr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port 9. when port 9 functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in p9ddr is set to 1, if port 9 is read the value of the corresponding p9dr bit is returned. when a bit in p9ddr is cleared to 0, if port 9 is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bits 7 and 6 are reserved. they are fixed at 1, and cannot be modified. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 p9 0 r/w 4 p9 0 r/w 4 3 p9 0 r/w 3 2 p9 0 r/w 2 1 p9 0 r/w 1 0 p9 0 r/w 0 reserved bits port 9 data 5 to 0 these bits store data for port 9 pins 5 p9dr is initialized to h'c0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 292 table 8.17 port 9 pin functions pin pin functions and selection method p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 bit c/ a in smr of sci1, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr, and bit p9 5 ddr select the pin function as follows cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 cke0 0 1 p9 5 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 5 input p9 5 output sck 1 output sck 1 output sck 1 input irq 5 input p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 bit c/ a in smr of sci0, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr, and bit p9 4 ddr select the pin function as follows cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 cke0 0 1 p9 4 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 4 input p9 4 output sck 0 output sck 0 output sck 0 input irq 4 input p9 3 /rxd 1 bit re in scr of sci1, bit smif in scmr, and bit p9 3 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 re 0 1 p9 3 ddr 0 pin function p9 3 input p9 3 output rxd 1 input rxd 1 input p9 2 /rxd 0 bit re in scr of sci0, bit smif in scmr, and bit p9 2 ddr select the pin function as follows smif 0 1 re 0 1 p9 2 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 2 input p9 2 output rxd 0 input rxd 0 input 293 table 8.17 port 9 pin functions (cont) pin pin functions and selection method p9 1 /txd 1 bit te in scr of sci1, bit smif in scmr, and bit p9 1 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 te 0 1 p9 1 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 1 input p9 1 output txd 1 output txd 1 output* note: * functions as the txd 1 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance. p9 0 /txd 0 bit te in scr of sci0, bit smif in scmr, and bit p9 0 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 te 0 1 p9 0 ddr 0 1 pin function p9 0 input p9 0 output txd 0 output txd 0 output* note: * functions as the txd 0 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at highimpedance. 294 8.11 port a 8.11.1 overview port a is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (tp 7 to tp 0 ) from the programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), input and output, (tiocb 2 , tioca 2 , tiocb 1 , tioca 1 , tiocb 0 , tioca 0 , tclkd, tclkc, tclkb, tclka) by the 16-bit timer, input (tclkd, tclkc, tclkb, tclka) to the 8-bit timer, output ( tend 1 , tend 0 ) from the dma controller (dmac), and address output (a 23 to a 20 ). a reset or hardware standby transition leaves port a as an input port, except that in modes 3 and 4, one pin is always used for a 20 output. see table 8.19 to 8.21 for the selection of pin functions. usage of pins for tpc, 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, and dmac input and output is described in the sections on those modules. for output of address bits a 23 to a 20 in modes 3, 4, and 5, see section 6.2.4, bus release control register (brcr). pins not assigned to any of these functions are available for generic input/output. figure 8.10 shows the pin configuration of port a. pins in port a can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive a darlington transistor pair. port a has schmitt-trigger inputs. 295 port a pa /tp /tiocb /a pa /tp /tioca /a 21 pa /tp /tiocb /a 22 pa /tp /tioca /a 23 pa /tp /tiocb /tclkd pa /tp /tioca /tclkc pa /tp / tend /tclkb pa /tp / tend /tclka 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 port a pins 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 2 1 1 1 0 0 0 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in modes 1, 2, 6 and 7 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/tclkd (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/tclkc (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/ tend (output)/tclkb (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/ tend (output)/tclka (input) pin functions in mode 5 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 2 1 1 0 0 1 0 a (output) 20 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/a (output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/a (output) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/a (output) 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 pin functions in modes 3, 4 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 2 1 1 0 0 pa (input/output)/tp (output)/ tend (output)/tclka (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tiocb (input/output)/tclkd (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/tioca (input/output)/tclkc (input) pa (input/output)/tp (output)/ tend (output)/tclkb (input) pa 7 (input/output)/tp 7 (output)/tiocb 2 (input/output)/a (output) pa 6 (input/output)/tp 6 (output)/tioca 2 (input/output)/a (output) pa 5 (input/output)/tp 5 (output)/tiocb 1 (input/output)/a (output) pa 4 (input/output)/tp 4 (output)/tioca 1 (input/output)/a (output) pa 3 (input/output)/tp 3 (output)/tiocb 0 (input/output)/tclkd (input) pa 2 (input/output)/tp 2 (output)/tioca 0 (input/output)/tclkc (input) pa 1 (input/output)/tp 1 (output)/ tend 1 (output)/tclkb (input) pa 0 (input/output)/tp 0 (output)/ tend 0 (output)/tclka (input) 1 0 20 21 22 23 20 21 22 23 figure 8.10 port a pin configuration 296 8.11.2 register descriptions table 8.18 summarizes the registers of port a. table 8.18 port a registers initial value address* name r/w modes 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7 modes 3, 4 h'ee009 port a data direction register paddr w h'00 h'80 h'fffd9 port a data register padr r/w h'00 h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port a data direction register (paddr): paddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port a. when pins are used for tpc output, the corresponding paddr bits must also be set. 7 pa ddr 1 0 w port a data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port a pins 7 6 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 6 5 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 5 4 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 4 3 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 3 2 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 2 1 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 1 0 pa ddr 0 w 0 w 0 bit modes 3, 4 initial value read/write initial value read/write modes 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7 the pin functions that can be selected for pins pa 7 to pa 4 differ between modes 1, 2, 6, and 7, and modes 3 to 5. for the method of selecting the pin functions, see tables 8.19 and 8.20. the pin functions that can be selected for pins pa 3 to pa 0 are the same in modes 1 to 7. for the method of selecting the pin functions, see table 8.21. when port a functions as an input/output port, a pin in port a becomes an output port if the corresponding paddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. in modes 3 and 4, pa 7 ddr is fixed at 1 and pa 7 functions as the a 20 address output pin. paddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. paddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 1, 2, 5, 6, and 7. it is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in hardware standby mode in modes 3 and 4. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby 297 mode while port a is functioning as an input/output port and a paddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. port a data register (padr): padr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for port a. when port a functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in paddr is set to 1, if port a is read the value of the corresponding padr bit is returned. when a bit in paddr is cleared to 0, if port a is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bit initial value read/write 0 pa 0 r/w 0 1 pa 0 r/w 1 2 pa 0 r/w 2 3 pa 0 r/w 3 4 pa 0 r/w 4 5 pa 0 r/w 5 6 pa 0 r/w 6 7 pa 0 r/w 7 port a data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port a pins padr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. table 8.19 port a pin functions (modes 1, 2, 6, 7) pin pin functions and selection method pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 bit pwm2 in tmdr, bits iob2 to iob0 in tior2, bit nder7 in ndera, and bit pa 7 ddr select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 7 ddr 011 nder7 01 pin function tiocb 2 output pa 7 input pa 7 output tp 7 output tiocb 2 input* note: * tiocb 2 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm2 = 0. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 298 table 8.19 port a pin functions (modes 1, 2, 6, 7) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 bit pwm2 in tmdr, bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior2, bit nder6 in ndera, and bit pa 6 ddr select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 6 ddr 011 nder6 01 pin function tioca 2 output pa 6 input pa 6 output tp 6 output tioca 2 input* note: * tioca 2 input when ioa2 = 1. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm2 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 bit pwm1 in tmdr, bits iob2 to iob0 in tior1, bit nder5 in ndera, and bit pa 5 ddr select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 5 ddr 011 nder5 01 pin function tiocb 1 output pa 5 input pa 5 output tp 5 output tiocb 1 input* note: * tiocb 1 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm1 = 0. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 299 table 8.19 port a pin functions (modes 1, 2, 6, 7) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 bit pwm1 in tmdr, bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior1, bit nder4 in ndera, and bit pa 4 ddr select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 4 ddr 011 nder4 01 pin function tioca 1 output pa 4 input pa 4 output tp 4 output tioca 1 input* note: * tioca 1 input when ioa2 = 1. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm1 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 300 table 8.20 port a pin functions (modes 3, 4, 5) pin pin functions and selection method pa 7 /tp 7 / modes 3 and 4: always used as a 20 output. tiocb 2 / a 20 pin function a 20 output mode 5: bit pwm2 in tmdr, bits iob2 to iob0 in tior2, bit nder7 in ndera, bit a20e in brcr, and bit pa 7 ddr select the pin function as follows. a20e 1 0 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 7 ddr 011 nder7 01 pin function tiocb 2 output pa 7 input pa 7 output tp 7 output a 20 output tiocb 2 input* note: * tiocb 2 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm2 = 0. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 bit pwm2 in tmdr, bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior2, bit nder6 in ndera, bit a21e in brcr, and bit pa 6 ddr select the pin function as follows. a21e 1 0 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 6 ddr 011 nder6 01 pin function tioca 2 output pa 6 input pa 6 output tp 6 output a 21 output tioca 2 input* note: * tioca 2 input when ioa2 = 1. 16-bit timer channel 2 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm2 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 301 table 8.20 port a pin functions (modes 3, 4, 5) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 bit pwm1 in tmdr, bits iob2 to iob0 in tior1, bit nder5 in ndera, bit a22e in brcr, and bit pa 5 ddr select the pin function as follows. a22e 1 0 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 5 ddr 011 nder5 01 pin function tiocb 1 output pa 5 input pa 5 output tp 5 output a 22 output tiocb 1 input* note: * tiocb 1 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm1 = 0. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 bit pwm1 in tmdr, bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior1, bit nder4 in ndera, bit a23e in brcr, and bit pa 4 ddr select the pin function as follows. a23e 1 0 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 4 ddr 011 nder4 01 pin function tioca 1 output pa 4 input pa 4 output tp 4 output a 23 output tioca 1 input* note: * tioca 1 input when ioa2 = 1. 16-bit timer channel 1 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm1 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 302 table 8.21 port a pin functions (modes 1 to 7) pin pin functions and selection method pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 / tclkd bit pwm0 in tmdr, bits iob2 to iob0 in tior0, bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 to tcr0 of the 16-bit timer, bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr3 of the 8-bit timer, bit nder3 in ndera, and bit pa 3 ddr select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 0 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 3 ddr 011 nder3 01 pin function tiocb 0 output pa 3 input pa 3 output tp 3 output tiocb 0 input* 1 tclkd input* 2 notes: 1. tiocb 0 input when iob2 = 1 and pwm0 = 0. 2. tclkd input when tpsc2 = tpsc1 = tpsc0 = 1 in any of tcr2 to tcr0, or bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr3 are as shown in (3) in the table below. 16-bit timer channel 0 settings (2) (1) (2) iob2 0 1 iob1 0 0 1 iob0 0 1 8-bit timer channel 0 settings (4) (3) cks2 0 1 cks1 01 cks0 01 303 table 8.21 port a pin functions (modes 1 to 7) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 / tclkc bit pwm0 in tmdr, bits ioa2 to ioa0 in tior0, bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 to tcr0 of the 16-bit timer, bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr1 of the 8-bit timer, bit nder2 in ndera, and bit pa 2 ddr select the pin function as follows. 16-bit timer channel 0 settings (1) in table below (2) in table below pa 2 ddr 011 nder2 01 pin function tioca 0 output pa 2 input pa 2 output tp 2 output tioca 0 input* 1 tclkc input* 2 notes: 1. tioca 0 input when ioa2 = 1. 2. tclkc input when tpsc2 = tpsc1 = 1 and tpsc0 = 0 in any of tcr2 to tcr0, or bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr1 are as shown in (3) in the table below. 16-bit timer channel 0 settings (2) (1) (2) (1) pwm0 0 1 ioa2 0 1 ioa1 0 0 1 ioa0 0 1 8-bit timer channel 1 settings (4) (3) cks2 0 1 cks1 01 cks0 01 304 table 8.21 port a pin functions (modes 1 to 7) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pa 1 /tp 1 / tclkb/ tend 1 bit mdf in tmdr, bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 to tcr0 of the 16-bit timer, bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr2 of the 8-bit timer, bit nder1 in ndera, and bit pa 1 ddr select the pin function as follows. pa 1 ddr 0 1 1 nder1 01 pin function pa 1 input pa 1 output tp 1 output tclkb input* 1 tend 1 output* 2 notes: 1. tclkb input when mdf = 1 in tmdr, or tpsc2 = 1, tpsc1 = 0, and tpsc0 = 1 in any of tcr2 to tcr0, or bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr2 are as shown in (1) in the table below. 2. when an external request is specified as a dmac activation source, tend 1 output regardless of bits pa 1 ddr and nder1. 8-bit timer channel 1 settings (2) (1) cks2 0 1 cks1 01 cks0 01 pa 0 /tp 0 / tclka/ tend 0 bit mdf in tmdr, bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 to tcr0 of the 16-bit timer, bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr0 of the 8-bit timer, bit nder0 in ndera, and bit pa 0 ddr select the pin function as follows. pa 0 ddr 0 1 nder0 01 pin function pa 0 input pa 0 output tp 0 output tclka input* 1 tend 0 output* 2 notes: 1. tclka input when mdf = 1 in tmdr, or tpsc2 = 1, tpsc1 = 0 and tpsc0 = 0 in any of tcr2 to tcr0, or bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr0 are as shown in (1) in the table below. 2. when an external request is specified as a dmac activation source, tend 0 output regardless of bits pa 0 ddr and nder0. 8-bit timer channel 0 settings (2) (1) cks2 0 1 cks1 01 cks0 01 305 8.12 port b 8.12.1 overview port b is an 8-bit input/output port that is also used for output (tp 15 to tp 8 ) from the programmable timing pattern controller (tpc), input/output (tmio 3 , tmo 2 , tmio 1 , tmo 0 ) by the 8-bit timer, cs 7 to cs 4 output, input ( dreq 1 , dreq 0 ) to the dma controller (dmac), input and output (txd 2 , rxd 2 , sck 2 ) by serial communication interface channel 2 (sci2), and output ( ucas , lcas ) by the dram interface. see table 8.23 to 8.24 for the selection of pin functions. a reset or hardware standby transition leaves port b as an input port. for output of cs 7 to cs 4 in modes 1 to 5, see section 6.3.4, chip select signals. when dram is connected to areas 2, 3, 4, and 5, the cs 4 and cs 5 output pins become ras output pins for these areas. for details see 6.5, dram interface. pins not assigned to any of these functions are available for generic input/output. figure 8.11 shows the pin configuration of port b. when dram is connected to areas 2, 3, 4, and 5, the cs 4 and cs 5 output pins become ras output pins for these areas. for details see 6.5, dram interface. pins in port b can drive one ttl load and a 30-pf capacitive load. they can also drive darlington transistor pair. 306 port b pb 7 /tp /rxd 2 15 pb 6 /tp /txd 2 14 pb 5 /tp /sck 2 / lcas 13 pb 4 /tp / ucas 12 pb 3 /tp /tmio 3 / dreq 1 / cs 4 11 pb 2 /tp /tmo 2 / cs 5 10 pb 1 /tp /tmio 1 / dreq 0 / cs 6 9 pb 0 /tp /tmo 0 / cs 7 8 port b pins pb 7 (input/output)/tp 15 (output) /rxd 2 (input) pb 6 (input/output)/tp 14 (output) /txd 2 (output) pb 5 (input/output)/tp 13 (output) /sck 2 (input/output) / lcas (output) pb 4 (input/output)/tp 12 (output) / ucas (output) pb 3 (input/output)/tp 11 (output) /tmio 3 (input/output) / dreq 1 (input) cs 4 (output) pb 2 (input/output)/tp 10 (output) /tmo 2 (output) / cs 5 (output) pb 1 (input/output)/tp 9 (output) /tmio 1 (input/output) / dreq 0 (input) / cs 6 (output) pb 0 (input/output)/tp 8 (output) /tmo 0 (output) / cs 7 (output) pin functions in modes 1 to 5 pb 7 (input/output)/tp 15 (output) /rxd 2 (input) pb 6 (input/output)/tp 14 (output) /txd 2 (output) pb 5 (input/output)/tp 13 (output) /sck 2 (input/output) pb 4 (input/output)/tp 12 (output) pb 3 (input/output)/tp 11 (output) /tmio 3 (input/output) / dreq 1 (input) pb 2 (input/output)/tp 10 (output) /tmo 2 (output) pb 1 (input/output)/tp 9 (output) /tmio 1 (input/output) / dreq 0 (input) pb 0 (input/output)/tp 8 (output) /tmo 0 (output) pin functions in mode 6 and 7 figure 8.11 port b pin configuration 307 8.12.2 register descriptions table 8.22 summarizes the registers of port b. table 8.22 port b registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee00a port b data direction register pbddr w h'00 h'fffda port b data register pbdr r/w h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. port b data direction register (pbddr): pbddr is an 8-bit write-only register that can select input or output for each pin in port b. when pins are used for tpc output, the corresponding pbddr bits must also be set. bit initial value read/write 7 pb ddr 0 w port b data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port b pins 7 6 pb ddr 0 w 6 5 pb ddr 0 w 5 4 pb ddr 0 w 4 3 pb ddr 0 w 3 2 pb ddr 0 w 2 1 pb ddr 0 w 1 0 pb ddr 0 w 0 the pin functions that can be selected for port b differ between modes 1 to 5, and modes 6 and 7. for the method of selecting the pin functions, see tables 8.23 and 8.24. when port b functions as an input/output port, a pin in port b becomes an output port if the corresponding pbddr bit is set to 1, and an input port if this bit is cleared to 0. pbddr is a write-only register. its value cannot be read. all bits return 1 when read. pbddr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. therefore, if a transition is made to software standby mode while port b is functioning as an input/output port and a pbddr bit is set to 1, the corresponding pin maintains its output state. 308 port b data register (pbdr): pbdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores output data for pins port b. when port b functions as an output port, the value of this register is output. when a bit in pbddr is set to 1, if port b is read the value of the corresponding pbdr bit is returned. when a bit in pbddr is cleared to 0, if port b is read the corresponding pin logic level is read. bit initial value read/write 0 pb 0 r/w 0 1 pb 0 r/w 1 2 pb 0 r/w 2 3 pb 0 r/w 3 4 pb 0 r/w 4 5 pb 0 r/w 5 6 pb 0 r/w 6 7 pb 0 r/w 7 port b data 7 to 0 these bits store data for port b pins pbdr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. in software standby mode it retains its previous setting. 309 table 8.23 port b pin functions (modes 1 to 5) pin pin functions and selection method pb 7 /tp 15 / rxd 2 bit re in scr of sci2, bit smif in scmr, bit nder15 in nderb, and bit pb 7 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 re 0 1 pb 7 ddr 0 1 1 nder15 01 pin function pb 7 input pb 7 output tp 15 output rxd 2 input rxd 2 input pb 6 /tp 14 / txd 2 bit te in scr of sci2, bit smif in scmr, bit nder14 in nderb, and bit pb 6 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 te 0 1 pb 6 ddr 0 1 1 nder14 01 pin function pb 6 input pb 6 output tp 14 output txd 2 output txd 2 output* note: * functions as the txd 2 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance. pb 5 /tp 13 / sck 2 / lcas bit c/ a in smr of sci2, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr, bit nder13 in nderb, and bit pb 5 ddr select the pin function as follows. cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 cke0 0 1 pb 5 ddr 0 1 1 nder13 01 pin function pb 5 input pb 5 output tp 13 output sck 2 output sck 2 output sck 2 input lcas output* note: * lcas output depending on bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra and bit csel in drcrb, and regardless of bits c/ a , cke0 and cke1, nder13, and pb 5 ddr. for details, see section 6, bus controller . pb 4 /tp 12 / bit nder12 in nderb and bit pb 4 ddr select the pin function as follows. ucas pb 4 ddr 0 1 1 nder12 01 pin function pb 4 input pb 4 output tp 12 output ucas output* note: * ucas output depending on bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra and bit csel in drcrb, and regardless of bits nder12 and pb 4 ddr. for details, see section 6, bus controller. 310 table 8.23 port b pin functions (modes 1 to 5) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pb 3 /tp 11 / tmio 3 / dreq 1 / cs 4 the dram interface settings by bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra, bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr3, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr3, bit cs4e in cscr, bit nder11 in nderb, and bit pb 3 ddr select the pin function as follows. dram interface settings (1) in table below (2) in table below ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 cs4e 0 1 pb 3 ddr 0 1 1 nder11 01 pin function pb 3 input pb 3 output tp 11 output cs 4 output tmio 3 output cs 4 output* 3 tmio 3 input* 1 dreq 1 input* 2 notes: 1. tmio 3 input when cclr1 = cclr0 = 1. 2. when an external request is specified as a dmac activation source, dreq 1 input regardless of bits ois3 and ois2, os1 and os0, cclr1 and cclr0, cs4e, nder11, and pb 3 ddr. 3. cs 4 is output as ras 4 . dram interface settings (1) (2) (1) dras2 0 1 dras1 0101 dras0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 pb 2 /tp 10 / tmo 2 / cs 5 the dram interface settings by bits dras2 to dras0 in drcra, bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr2, bit cs5e in cscr, bit nder10 in nderb, and bit pb 2 ddr select the pin function as follows. dram interface settings (1) in table below (2) in table below ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 cs5e 0 1 pb 2 ddr 0 1 1 nder10 01 pin function pb 2 input pb 2 output tp 10 output cs 5 output tmio 2 output cs 5 output* note: * cs 5 is output as ras 5 . dram interface settings (1) (2) (1) dras2 0 1 dras1 0101 dras0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 311 table 8.23 port b pin functions (modes 1 to 5) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pb 1 /tp 9 / tmio 1 / dreq 0 / cs 6 bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr1, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr1, bit cs6e in cscr, bit nder9 in nderb, and bit pb 1 ddr select the pin function as follows. ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 cs6e 0 1 pb 1 ddr 0 1 1 nder9 01 pin function pb 1 input pb 1 output tp 9 output cs 6 output tmio 1 output tmio 1 input* 1 dreq 0 input* 2 notes: 1. tmio 1 input when cclr1 = cclr0 = 1. 2. when an external request is specified as a dmac activation source, dreq 0 input regardless of bits ois3/2 and os1/0, bits cclr1/0, bit cs6e, bit nder9, and bit pb 1 ddr. pb 0 /tp 8 / tmo 0 / cs 7 bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr0, bit cs7e in cscr, bit nder8 in nderb, and bit pb 0 ddr select the pin function as follows. ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 cs7e 0 1 pb 0 ddr 0 1 1 nder8 01 pin function pb 0 input pb 0 output tp 8 output cs 7 output tmo 0 output 312 table 8.24 port b pin functions (modes 6 to 7) pin pin functions and selection method pb 7 /tp 15 / rxd 2 bit re in scr of sci2, bit smif in scmr, bit nder15 in nderb, and bit pb 7 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 re 0 1 pb 7 ddr 0 1 1 nder15 01 pin function pb 7 input pb 7 output tp 15 output rxd 2 input rxd 2 input pb 6 /tp 14 / txd 2 bit te in scr of sci2, bit smif in scmr, bit nder14 in nderb, and bit pb 6 ddr select the pin function as follows. smif 0 1 te 0 1 pb 6 ddr 0 1 1 nder14 01 pin function pb 6 input pb 6 output tp 14 output txd 2 output txd 2 output* note: * functions as the txd2 output pin, but there are two states: one in which the pin is driven, and another in which the pin is at high-impedance . pb 5 /tp 13 / sck 2 bit c/ a in smr of sci2, bits cke0 and cke1 in scr, bit nder13 in nderb, and bit pb 5 ddr select the pin function as follows. cke1 0 1 c/ a 01 cke0 0 1 pb 5 ddr 0 1 1 nder13 01 pin function pb 5 input pb 5 output tp 13 output sck 2 output sck 2 output sck 2 input pb 4 /tp 12 bit nder12 in nderb and bit pb 4 ddr select the pin function as follows. pb 4 ddr 0 1 1 nder12 01 pin function pb 4 input pb 4 output tp 12 output 313 table 8.24 port b pin functions (modes 6 to 7) (cont) pin pin functions and selection method pb 3 /tp 11 / tmio 3 / bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr3, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr3, bit nder11 in nderb, and bit pb 3 ddr select the pin function as follows. dreq 1 ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 pb 3 ddr 0 1 1 nder11 01 pin function pb 3 input pb 3 output tp 11 output tmio 3 output tmio 3 input* 1 dreq 1 input* 2 notes: 1. tmio 3 input when cclr1 = cclr0 = 1. 2. when an external request is specified as a dmac activation source, dreq 1 input regardless of bits ois3/2 and os1/0, bit nder11, and bit pb 3 ddr. pb 2 /tp 10 / tmo 2 bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr2, bit nder10 in nderb, and bit pb 2 ddr select the pin function as follows. ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 pb 2 ddr 0 1 1 nder10 01 pin function pb 2 input pb 2 output tp 10 output tmo 2 output pb 1 /tp 9 / tmio 1 / bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr1, bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr1, bit nder9 in nderb, and bit pb 1 ddr select the pin function as follows. dreq 0 ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 pb 1 ddr 0 1 1 nder9 01 pin function pb 1 input pb 1 output tp 9 output tmio 1 output tmio 1 input* 1 dreq 0 input* 2 notes: 1. tmio 1 input when cclr1 = cclr0 = 1. 2. when an external request is specified as a dmac activation source, dreq 0 input regardless of bits ois3/2 and os1/0, bit nder9, and bit pb 1 ddr. pb 0 /tp 8 / bits ois3/2 and os1/0 in tcsr0, bit nder8 in nderb, and bit pb 0 ddr select the pin function as follows. tmo 0 ois3/2 and os1/0 all 0 not all 0 pb 0 ddr 0 1 1 nder8 01 pin function pb 0 input pb 0 output tp 8 output tmo 0 output 314 315 section 9 16-bit timer 9.1 overview the h8/3067 series has built-in 16-bit timer module with three 16-bit counter channels. 9.1.1 features 16-bit timer features are listed below. ? capability to process up to 6 pulse outputs or 6 pulse inputs ? six general registers (grs, two per channel) with independently-assignable output compare or input capture functions ? selection of eight counter clock sources for each channel: internal clocks: , /2, /4, /8 external clocks: tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd ? five operating modes selectable in all channels: ? waveform output by compare match selection of 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output (only 0 or 1 output in channel 2) ? input capture function rising edge, falling edge, or both edges (selectable) ? counter clearing function counters can be cleared by compare match or input capture ? synchronization two or more timer counters (tcnts) can be preset simultaneously, or cleared simultaneously by compare match or input capture. counter synchronization enables synchronous register input and output. ? pwm mode pwm output can be provided with an arbitrary duty cycle. with synchronization, up to three-phase pwm output is possible 316 ? phase counting mode selectable in channel 2 two-phase encoder output can be counted automatically. ? high-speed access via internal 16-bit bus the tcnts and grs can be accessed at high speed via a 16-bit bus. ? any initial timer output value can be set ? nine interrupt sources each channel has two compare match/input capture interrupts and an overflow interrupt. all interrupts can be requested independently. ? output triggering of programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) compare match/input capture signals from channels 0 to 2 can be used as tpc output triggers. 317 table 9.1 summarizes the 16-bit timer functions. table 9.1 16-bit timer functions item channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 clock sources internal clocks: , /2, /4, /8 external clocks: tclka, tclkb, tclkc, tclkd, selectable independently general registers (output compare/input capture registers) gra0, grb0 gra1, grb1 gra2, grb2 input/output pins tioca 0 , tiocb 0 tioca 1 , tiocb 1 tioca 2 , tiocb 2 counter clearing function gra0/grb0 compare match or input capture gra1/grb1 compare match or input capture gra2/grb2 compare match or input capture initial output value setting function compare 0 match output 1 toggle input capture function synchronization pwm mode phase counting mode interrupt sources three sources ? compare match/input capture a0 ? compare match/input capture b0 ? overflow three sources ? compare match/input capture a1 ? compare match/input capture b1 ? overflow three sources ? compare match/input capture a2 ? compare match/input capture b2 ? overflow legend : available ? not available 318 9.1.2 block diagrams 16-bit timer block diagram (overall): figure 9.1 is a block diagram of the 16-bit timer. 16-bit timer channel 2 16-bit timer channel 1 16-bit timer channel 0 module data bus bus interface on-chip data bus imia0 to imia2 imib0 to imib2 ovi0 to ovi2 t clka to tclkd , /2, /4, /8 clock selector control logic t ioca 0 to tioca 2 t iocb 0 to tiocb 2 tstr tsnc tmdr tolr tisra tisrb tisrc t str: timer start register (8 bits) t snc: timer synchro register (8 bits) t mdr: timer mode register (8 bits) t olr: timer output level setting register (8 bits) t isra: timer interrupt status register a (8 bits) t isrb: timer interrupt status register b (8 bits) t isrc: timer interrupt status register c (8 bits) l egend figure 9.1 16-bit timer block diagram (overall) 319 block diagram of channels 0 and 1: 16-bit timer channels 0 and 1 are functionally identical. both have the structure shown in figure 9.2. clock selector comparator control logic tclka to tclkd , /2, /4, /8 tioca 0 tiocb 0 imia0 imib0 ovi0 tcnt gra grb tcr tior module data bus legend tcnt: gra, grb: tcr: tior: timer counter (16 bits) general registers a and b (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2) timer control register (8 bits) timer i/o control register (8 bits) figure 9.2 block diagram of channels 0 and 1 320 block diagram of channel 2: figure 9.3 is a block diagram of channel 2 clock selector comparator control logic tclka to tclkd , /2, /4, /8 tioca 2 tiocb 2 imia2 imib2 ovi2 tcnt2 gra2 grb2 tcr2 tior2 module data bus legend tcnt2: gra2, grb2: tcr2: tior2: timer counter 2 (16 bits) general registers a2 and b2 (input capture/output compare registers) (16 bits 2) timer control register 2 (8 bits) timer i/o control register 2 (8 bits) figure 9.3 block diagram of channel 2 321 9.1.3 input/output pins table 9.2 summarizes the 16-bit timer pins. table 9.2 16-bit timer pins channel name abbre- viation input/ output function common clock input a tclka input external clock a input pin (phase-a input pin in phase counting mode) clock input b tclkb input external clock b input pin (phase-b input pin in phase counting mode) clock input c tclkc input external clock c input pin clock input d tclkd input external clock d input pin 0 input capture/output compare a0 tioca 0 input/ output gra0 output compare or input capture pin pwm output pin in pwm mode input capture/output compare b0 tiocb 0 input/ output grb0 output compare or input capture pin 1 input capture/output compare a1 tioca 1 input/ output gra1 output compare or input capture pin pwm output pin in pwm mode input capture/output compare b1 tiocb 1 input/ output grb1 output compare or input capture pin 2 input capture/output compare a2 tioca 2 input/ output gra2 output compare or input capture pin pwm output pin in pwm mode input capture/output compare b2 tiocb 2 input/ output grb2 output compare or input capture pin 322 9.1.4 register configuration table 9.3 summarizes the 16-bit timer registers. table 9.3 16-bit timer registers channel address* 1 name abbre- viation r/w initial value common h'fff60 timer start register tstr r/w h'f8 h'fff61 timer synchro register tsnc r/w h'f8 h'fff62 timer mode register tmdr r/w h'98 h'fff63 timer output level setting register tolr w h'c0 h'fff64 timer interrupt status register a tisra r/(w) * 2 h'80 h'fff65 timer interrupt status register b tisrb r/(w) * 2 h'88 h'fff66 timer interrupt status register c tisrc r/(w) * 2 h'88 0 h'fff68 timer control register 0 tcr0 r/w h'80 h'fff69 timer i/o control register 0 tior0 r/w h'88 h'fff6a timer counter 0h tcnt0h r/w h'00 h'fff6b timer counter 0l tcnt0l r/w h'00 h'fff6c general register a0h gra0h r/w h'ff h'fff6d general register a0l gra0l r/w h'ff h'fff6e general register b0h grb0h r/w h'ff h'fff6f general register b0l grb0l r/w h'ff 1 h'fff70 timer control register 1 tcr1 r/w h'80 h'fff71 timer i/o control register 1 tior1 r/w h'88 h'fff72 timer counter 1h tcnt1h r/w h'00 h'fff73 timer counter 1l tcnt1l r/w h'00 h'fff74 general register a1h gra1h r/w h'ff h'fff75 general register a1l gra1l r/w h'ff h'fff76 general register b1h grb1h r/w h'ff h'fff77 general register b1l grb1l r/w h'ff notes: 1. the lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode are indicated. 2. only 0 can be written in bits 3 to 0, to clear the flags. 323 table 9.3 16-bit timer registers (cont) channel address* 1 name abbre- viation r/w initial value 2 h'fff78 timer control register 2 tcr2 r/w h'80 h'fff79 timer i/o control register 2 tior2 r/w h'88 h'fff7a timer counter 2h tcnt2h r/w h'00 h'fff7b timer counter 2l tcnt2l r/w h'00 h'fff7c general register a2h gra2h r/w h'ff h'fff7d general register a2l gra2l r/w h'ff h'fff7e general register b2h grb2h r/w h'ff h'fff7f general register b2l grb2l r/w h'ff notes: 1. the lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode are indicated. 324 9.2 register descriptions 9.2.1 timer start register (tstr) tstr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that starts and stops the timer counter (tcnt) in channels 0 to 2. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 str2 0 r/w 1 str1 0 r/w 0 str0 0 r/w reserved bits counter start 2 to 0 these bits start and stop tcnt2 to tcnt0 tstr is initialized to h'f8 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 3?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 2?ounter start 2 (str2): starts and stops timer counter 2 (tcnt2). bit 2 str2 description 0 tcnt2 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt2 is counting bit 1?ounter start 1 (str1): starts and stops timer counter 1 (tcnt1). bit 1 str1 description 0 tcnt1 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt1 is counting bit 0?ounter start 0 (str0): starts and stops timer counter 0 (tcnt0). bit 0 str0 description 0 tcnt0 is halted (initial value) 1 tcnt0 is counting 325 9.2.2 timer synchro register (tsnc) tsnc is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether channels 0 to 2 operate independently or synchronously. channels are synchronized by setting the corresponding bits to 1. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 sync2 0 r/w 1 sync1 0 r/w 0 sync0 0 r/w reserved bits timer sync 2 to 0 these bits synchronize channels 2 to 0 tsnc is initialized to h'f8 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 3?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 2?imer sync 2 (sync2): selects whether channel 2 operates independently or synchronously. bit 2 sync2 description 0 channel 2 s timer counter (tcnt2) operates independently (initial value) tcnt2 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 2 operates synchronously tcnt2 can be synchronously preset and cleared bit 1?imer sync 1 (sync1): selects whether channel 1 operates independently or synchronously. bit 1 sync1 description 0 channel 1 s timer counter (tcnt1) operates independently (initial value) tcnt1 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 1 operates synchronously tcnt1 can be synchronously preset and cleared 326 bit 0?imer sync 0 (sync0): selects whether channel 0 operates independently or synchronously. bit 0 sync0 description 0 channel 0 s timer counter (tcnt0) operates independently (initial value) tcnt0 is preset and cleared independently of other channels 1 channel 0 operates synchronously tcnt0 can be synchronously preset and cleared 9.2.3 timer mode register (tmdr) tmdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects pwm mode for channels 0 to 2. it also selects phase counting mode and the overflow flag (ovf) setting conditions for channel 2. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 mdf 0 r/w 5 fdir 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 0 pwm0 0 r/w 2 pwm2 0 r/w 1 pwm1 0 r/w reserved bit reserved bit pwm mode 2 to 0 these bits select pwm mode for channels 2 to 0 phase counting mode flag selects phase counting mode for channel 2 flag direction selects the setting condition for the overflow flag (ovf) in tisrc tmdr is initialized to h'98 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 6?hase counting mode flag (mdf): selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in phase counting mode. bit 6 mdf description 0 channel 2 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 2 operates in phase counting mode 327 when mdf is set to 1 to select phase counting mode, tcnt2 operates as an up/down-counter and pins tclka and tclkb become counter clock input pins. tcnt2 counts both rising and falling edges of tclka and tclkb, and counts up or down as follows. counting direction down-counting up-counting tclka pin high low low high tclkb pin low high high low in phase counting mode channel 2 operates as above regardless of the external clock edges selected by bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 and the clock source selected by bits tpsc2 to tpsc0. phase counting mode takes precedence over these settings. the counter clearing condition selected by the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr2 and the compare match/input capture settings and interrupt functions of tior2, tisra, tisrb, tisrc remain effective in phase counting mode. bit 5?lag direction (fdir): designates the setting condition for the ovf flag in tisrc. the fdir designation is valid in all modes in channel 2. bit 5 fdir description 0 ovf is set to 1 in tisrc when tcnt2 overflows or underflows (initial value) 1 ovf is set to 1 in tisrc when tcnt2 overflows bits 4 and 3?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 2?wm mode 2 (pwm2): selects whether channel 2 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 2 pwm2 description 0 channel 2 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 2 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm2 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 2 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra2, and to 0 at compare match with grb2. 328 bit 1?wm mode 1 (pwm1): selects whether channel 1 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 1 pwm1 description 0 channel 1 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 1 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm1 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 1 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra1, and to 0 at compare match with grb1. bit 0?wm mode 0 (pwm0): selects whether channel 0 operates normally or in pwm mode. bit 0 pwm0 description 0 channel 0 operates normally (initial value) 1 channel 0 operates in pwm mode when bit pwm0 is set to 1 to select pwm mode, pin tioca 0 becomes a pwm output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra0, and to 0 at compare match with grb0. 9.2.4 timer interrupt status register a (tisra) tisra is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates gra compare match or input capture and enables or disables general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests. 329 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 imiea2 0 r/w 5 imiea1 0 r/w 4 imiea0 0 r/w 3 1 2 imfa2 0 r/(w)* 1 imfa1 0 r/(w)* 0 imfa0 0 r/(w)* reserved bit reserved bit input capture/compare match interrupt enable a2 to a0 these bits enable or disable interrupts by the imfa flags input capture/compare match flags a2 to a0 status flags indicating gra compare match or input capture note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. tisra is initialized to h'88 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 6?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable a2 (imiea2): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfa2 flag when imfa2 is set to 1. bit 6 imiea2 description 0 imia2 interrupt requested by imfa2 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 imia2 interrupt requested by imfa2 flag is enabled bit 5?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable a1 (imiea1): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfa1 flag when imfa1 is set to 1. bit 5 imiea1 description 0 imia1 interrupt requested by imfa1 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 imia1 interrupt requested by imfa1 flag is enabled 330 bit 4?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable a0 (imiea0): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfa0 flag when imfa0 is set to 1. bit 4 imiea0 description 0 imia0 interrupt requested by imfa0 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 imia0 interrupt requested by imfa0 flag is enabled bit 3?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 2?nput capture/compare match flag a2 (imfa2): this status flag indicates gra2 compare match or input capture events. bit 2 imfa2 description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) read imfa2 when imfa2 =1, then write 0 in imfa2. dmac activated by imia2 interrupt. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt2 = gra2 when gra2 functions as an output compare register. tcnt2 value is transferred to gra2 by an input capture signal when gra2 functions as an input capture register. bit 1?nput capture/compare match flag a1 (imfa1): this status flag indicates gra1 compare match or input capture events. bit 1 imfa1 description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) read imfa1 when imfa1 =1, then write 0 in imfa1. dmac activated by imia1 interrupt. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt1 = gra1 when gra1 functions as an output compare register. tcnt1 value is transferred to gra1 by an input capture signal when gra1 functions as an input capture register. 331 bit 0?nput capture/compare match flag a0 (imfa0): this status flag indicates gra0 compare match or input capture events. bit 0 imfa0 description 0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) read imfa0 when imfa0 =1, then write 0 in imfa0. dmac activated by imia0 interrupt. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt0 = gra0 when gra0 functions as an output compare register. tcnt0 value is transferred to gra0 by an input capture signal when gra0 functions as an input capture register. 9.2.5 timer interrupt status register b (tisrb) tisrb is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates grb compare match or input capture and enables or disables general register compare match and input capture interrupt requests. 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 imieb2 0 r/w 5 imieb1 0 r/w 4 imieb0 0 r/w 3 1 2 imfb2 0 r/(w)* 1 imfb1 0 r/(w)* 0 imfb0 0 r/(w)* reserved bit reserved bit input capture/compare match interrupt enable b2 to b0 these bits enable or disable interrupts by the imfb flags input capture/compare match flags b2 to b0 status flags indicating grb compare match or input capture note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. tisrb is initialized to h'88 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. 332 bit 6?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable b2 (imieb2): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfb2 flag when imfb2 is set to 1. bit 6 imieb2 description 0 imib2 interrupt requested by imfb2 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 imib2 interrupt requested by imfb2 flag is enabled bit 5?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable b1 (imieb1): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfb1 flag when imfb1 is set to 1. bit 5 imieb1 description 0 imib1 interrupt requested by imfb1 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 imib1 interrupt requested by imfb1 flag is enabled bit 4?nput capture/compare match interrupt enable b0 (imieb0): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the imfb0 flag when imfb0 is set to 1. bit 4 imieb0 description 0 imib0 interrupt requested by imfb0 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 imib0 interrupt requested by imfb0 flag is enabled bit 3?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 2?nput capture/compare match flag b2 (imfb2): this status flag indicates grb2 compare match or input capture events. bit 2 imfb2 description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb2 when imfb2 =1, then write 0 in imfb2. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt2 = grb2 when grb2 functions as an output compare register. tcnt2 value is transferred to grb2 by an input capture signal when grb2 functions as an input capture register. 333 bit 1?nput capture/compare match flag b1 (imfb1): this status flag indicates grb1 compare match or input capture events. bit 1 imfb1 description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb1 when imfb1 =1, then write 0 in imfb1. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt1 = grb1 when grb1 functions as an output compare register. tcnt1 value is transferred to grb1 by an input capture signal when grb1 functions as an input capture register. bit 0?nput capture/compare match flag b0 (imfb0): this status flag indicates grb0 compare match or input capture events. bit 0 imfb0 description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb0 when imfb0 =1, then write 0 in imfb0. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt0 = grb0 when grb0 functions as an output compare register. tcnt0 value is transferred to grb0 by an input capture signal when grb0 functions as an input capture register. 334 9.2.6 timer interrupt status register c (tisrc) tisrc is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates tcnt overflow or underflow and enables or disables overflow interrupt requests. 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 ovie2 0 r/w 5 ovie1 0 r/w 4 ovie0 0 r/w 3 1 2 ovf2 0 r/(w)* 1 ovf1 0 r/(w)* 0 ovf0 0 r/(w)* reserved bit reserved bit overflow interrupt enable 2 to 0 these bits enable or disable interrupts by the ovf flags overflow flags 2 to 0 status flags indicating overflow or underflow note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. tisrc is initialized to h'88 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 6?verflow interrupt enable 2 (ovie2): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the ovf2 flag when ovf2 is set to 1. bit 6 ovie2 description 0 ovi2 interrupt requested by ovf2 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 ovi2 interrupt requested by ovf2 flag is enabled bit 5?verflow interrupt enable 1 (ovie1): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the ovf1 flag when ovf1 is set to 1. bit 5 ovie1 description 0 ovi1 interrupt requested by ovf1 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 ovi1 interrupt requested by ovf1 flag is enabled 335 bit 4?verflow interrupt enable 0 (ovie0): enables or disables the interrupt requested by the ovf0 flag when ovf0 is set to 1. bit 4 ovie0 description 0 ovi0 interrupt requested by ovf0 flag is disabled (initial value) 1 ovi0 interrupt requested by ovf0 flag is enabled bit 3?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bit 2?verflow flag 2 (ovf2): this status flag indicates tcnt2 overflow or underflow. bit 2 ovf2 description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf2 when ovf2 =1, then write 0 in ovf2. 1 [setting condition] tcnt2 overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000, or underflowed from h'0000 to h'ffff. note: tcnt underflow occurs when tcnt operates as an up/down-counter. underflow occurs only when channel 2 operates in phase counting mode (mdf = 1 in tmdr). bit 1?verflow flag 1 (ovf1): this status flag indicates tcnt1 overflow. bit 1 ovf1 description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf1 when ovf1 =1, then write 0 in ovf1. 1 [setting condition] tcnt1 overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000. bit 0?verflow flag 0 (ovf0): this status flag indicates tcnt0 overflow. bit 0 ovf0 description 0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf0 when ovf0 =1, then write 0 in ovf0. 1 [setting condition] tcnt0 overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000. 336 9.2.7 timer counters (tcnt) tcnt is a 16-bit counter. the 16-bit timer has three tcnts, one for each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tcnt0 up-counter 1 tcnt1 2 tcnt2 phase counting mode: up/down-counter other modes: up-counter bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 15 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 3 0 r/w each tcnt is a 16-bit readable/writable register that counts pulse inputs from a clock source. the clock source is selected by bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. tcnt0 and tcnt1 are up-counters. tcnt2 is an up/down-counter in phase counting mode and an up-counter in other modes. tcnt can be cleared to h'0000 by compare match with gra or grb or by input capture to gra or grb (counter clearing function). when tcnt overflows (changes from h'ffff to h'0000), the ovf flag is set to 1 in tisrc of the corresponding channel. when tcnt underflows (changes from h'0000 to h'ffff), the ovf flag is set to 1 in tisrc of the corresponding channel. the tcnts are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. each tcnt is initialized to h'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. 337 9.2.8 general registers (gra, grb) the general registers are 16-bit registers. the 16-bit timer has 6 general registers, two in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 gra0, grb0 output compare/input capture register 1 gra1, grb1 2 gra2, grb2 bit initial value read/write 14 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 0 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 15 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 3 1 r/w a general register is a 16-bit readable/writable register that can function as either an output compare register or an input capture register. the function is selected by settings in tior. when a general register is used as an output compare register, its value is constantly compared with the tcnt value. when the two values match (compare match), the imfa or imfb flag is set to 1 in tisra/tisrb. compare match output can be selected in tior. when a general register is used as an input capture register, rising edges, falling edges, or both edges of an external input capture signal are detected and the current tcnt value is stored in the general register. the corresponding imfa or imfb flag in tisra/tisrb is set to 1 at the same time. the valid edge or edges of the input capture signal are selected in tior. tior settings are ignored in pwm mode. general registers are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit bus and can be written or read by either word access or byte access. general registers are initialized to the output compare function (with no output signal) by a reset and in standby mode. the initial value is h'ffff. 338 9.2.9 timer control registers (tcr) tcr is an 8-bit register. the 16-bit timer has three tcrs, one in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 1 2 tcr0 tcr1 tcr2 cr controls the timer counter. the tcrs in all channels are functionally identical. when phase counting mode is selected in channel 2, the settings of bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 and tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 are ignored. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w timer prescaler 2 to 0 these bits select the counter clock reserved bit clock edge 1/0 these bits select external clock edges counter clear 1/0 these bits select the counter clear source each tcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the timer counter clock source, selects the edge or edges of external clock sources, and selects how the counter is cleared. tcr is initialized to h'80 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. 339 bits 6 and 5?ounter clear 1/0 (cclr1, cclr0): these bits select how tcnt is cleared. bit 6 cclr1 bit 5 cclr0 description 0 0 tcnt is not cleared (initial value) 1 tcnt is cleared by gra compare match or input capture* 1 1 0 tcnt is cleared by grb compare match or input capture* 1 1 synchronous clear: tcnt is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers* 2 notes: 1. tcnt is cleared by compare match when the general register functions as an output compare register, and by input capture when the general register functions as an input capture register. 2. selected in tsnc. bits 4 and 3?lock edge 1/0 (ckeg1, ckeg0): these bits select external clock input edges when an external clock source is used. bit 4 ckeg1 bit 3 ckeg0 description 0 0 count rising edges (initial value) 1 count falling edges 1 count both edges when channel 2 is set to phase counting mode, bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr2 are ignored. phase counting takes precedence. 340 bits 2 to 0?imer prescaler 2 to 0 (tpsc2 to tpsc0): these bits select the counter clock source. bit 2 tpsc2 bit 1 tpsc1 bit 0 tpsc0 function 0 0 0 internal clock: (initial value) 1 internal clock: /2 1 0 internal clock: /4 1 internal clock: /8 1 0 0 external clock a: tclka input 1 external clock b: tclkb input 1 0 external clock c: tclkc input 1 external clock d: tclkd input when bit tpsc2 is cleared to 0 an internal clock source is selected, and the timer counts only falling edges. when bit tpsc2 is set to 1 an external clock source is selected, and the timer counts the edge or edges selected by bits ckeg1 and ckeg0. when channel 2 is set to phase counting mode (mdf = 1 in tmdr), the settings of bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 are ignored. phase counting takes precedence. 9.2.10 timer i/o control register (tior) tior is an 8-bit register. the 16-bit timer has three tiors, one in each channel. channel abbreviation function 0 tior0 tior controls the general registers. some functions differ in pwm 1 tior1 mode. 2 tior2 341 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 0 ioa0 0 r/w 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w i/o control a2 to a0 these bits select gra functions reserved bit i/o control b2 to b0 these bits select grb functions reserved bit each tior is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the output compare or input capture function for gra and grb, and specifies the functions of the tiora and tiorc pins. if the output compare function is selected, tior also selects the type of output. if input capture is selected, tior also selects the edge or edges of the input capture signal. tior is initialized to h'88 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bits 6 to 4?/o control b2 to b0 (iob2 to iob0): these bits select the grb function. bit 6 iob2 bit 5 iob1 bit 4 iob0 function 0 0 0 grb is an output no output at compare match (initial value) 1 compare register 0 output at grb compare match* 1 1 0 1 output at grb compare match* 1 1 output toggles at grb compare match (1 output in channel 2)* 1 , * 2 1 0 0 grb is an input grb captures rising edge of input 1 compare register grb captures falling edge of input 1 0 grb captures both edges of input 1 notes: 1. after a reset, the output conforms to the tolr setting until the first compare match. 2. channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. this setting selects 1 output instead. 342 bit 3?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. bits 2 to 0?/o control a2 to a0 (ioa2 to ioa0): these bits select the gra function. bit 2 ioa2 bit 1 ioa1 bit 0 ioa0 function 0 0 0 gra is an output no output at compare match (initial value) 1 compare register 0 output at gra compare match* 1 1 0 1 output at gra compare match* 1 1 output toggles at gra compare match (1 output in channel 2)* 1 , * 2 1 0 0 gra is an input gra captures rising edge of input 1 compare register gra captures falling edge of input 1 0 gra captures both edges of input 1 notes: 1. after a reset, the output conforms to the tolr setting until the first compare match. 2. channel 2 output cannot be toggled by compare match. this setting selects 1 output instead. 9.2.11 timer output level setting register c (tolr) tolr is an 8-bit write-only register that selects the timer output level for channels 0 to 2. 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 1 5 tob2 0 w 4 toa2 0 w 3 tob1 0 w 2 toa1 0 w 1 tob0 0 w 0 toa0 0 w reserved bits output level setting a2 to a0, b2 to b0 these bits set the levels of the timer outputs (tioca 2 to tioca 0 , and tiocb 2 to tiocb 0 ) a tolr setting can only be made when the corresponding bit in tstr is 0. tolr is a write-only register; if read, a value of 1 will be returned. tolr is initialized to h'c0 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 and 6?eserved: these bits cannot be modified. 343 bit 5?utput level setting b2 (tob2): sets the value of timer output tiocb 2 . bit 5 tob2 description 0 tiocb 2 is 0 (initial value) 1 tiocb 2 is 1 bit 4?utput level setting a2 (toa2): sets the value of timer output tioca 2 . bit 4 toa2 description 0 tioca 2 is 0 (initial value) 1 tioca 2 is 1 bit 3?utput level setting b1 (tob1): sets the value of timer output tiocb 1 . bit 3 tob1 description 0 tiocb 1 is 0 (initial value) 1 tiocb 1 is 1 bit 2?utput level setting a1 (toa1): sets the value of timer output tioca 1 . bit 2 toa1 description 0 tioca 1 is 0 (initial value) 1 tioca 1 is 1 bit 1?utput level setting b0 (tob0): sets the value of timer output tiocb 0 . bit 0 tob0 description 0 tiocb 0 is 0 (initial value) 1 tiocb 0 is 1 344 bit 0?utput level setting a0 (toa0): sets the value of timer output tioca 0 . bit 0 toa0 description 0 tioca 0 is 0 (initial value) 1 tioca 0 is 1 345 9.3 cpu interface 9.3.1 16-bit accessible registers the timer counters (tcnts), general registers a and b (gras and grbs) are 16-bit registers, and are linked to the cpu by an internal 16-bit data bus. these registers can be written or read a word at a time, or a byte at a time. figures 9.4 and 9.5 show examples of word read/write access to a timer counter (tcnt). figures 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, and 9.9 show examples of byte read/write access to tcnth and tcntl. on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.4 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcnt, word) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.5 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcnt, word) 346 on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.6 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcnt, upper byte) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.7 access to timer counter (cpu writes to tcnt, lower byte) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.8 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcnt, upper byte) 347 on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcnth tcntl figure 9.9 access to timer counter (cpu reads tcnt, lower byte) 9.3.2 8-bit accessible registers the registers other than the timer counters, general registers, and buffer registers are 8-bit registers. these registers are linked to the cpu by an internal 8-bit data bus. figures 9.10 and 9.11 show examples of byte read and write access to a tcr. if a word-size data transfer instruction is executed, two byte transfers are performed. on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcr figure 9.10 tcr access (cpu writes to tcr) on-chip data bus cpu h l bus interface h l module data bus tcr figure 9.11 tcr access (cpu reads tcr) 348 9.4 operation 9.4.1 overview a summary of operations in the various modes is given below. normal operation: each channel has a timer counter and general registers. the timer counter counts up, and can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, or external event counter. general registers a and b can be used for input capture or output compare. synchronous operation: the timer counters in designated channels are preset synchronously. data written to the timer counter in any one of these channels is simultaneously written to the timer counters in the other channels as well. the timer counters can also be cleared synchronously if so designated by the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in the tcrs. pwm mode: a pwm waveform is output from the tioca pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match a and to 0 at compare match b. the duty cycle can be varied from 0% to 100% depending on the settings of gra and grb. when a channel is set to pwm mode, its gra and grb automatically become output compare registers. phase counting mode: the phase relationship between two clock signals input at tclka and tclkb is detected and tcnt2 counts up or down accordingly. when phase counting mode is selected tclka and tclkb become clock input pins and tcnt2 operates as an up/down- counter. 9.4.2 basic functions counter operation: when one of bits str0 to str2 is set to 1 in the timer start register (tstr), the timer counter (tcnt) in the corresponding channel starts counting. the counting can be free- running or periodic. ? sample setup procedure for counter figure 9.12 shows a sample procedure for setting up a counter. 349 counter setup select counter clock type of counting? periodic counting select counter clear source select output compare register function set period start counter free-running counting start counter periodic counter free-running counter 1 ye s no 2 3 4 55 figure 9.12 counter setup procedure (example) 1. set bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr to select the counter clock source. if an external clock source is selected, set bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. 2. for periodic counting, set cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr to have tcnt cleared at gra compare match or grb compare match. 3. set tior to select the output compare function of gra or grb, whichever was selected in step 2. 4. write the count period in gra or grb, whichever was selected in step 2. 5. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 350 ? free-running and periodic counter operation a reset leaves the counters (tcnts) in 16-bit timer channels 0 to 2 all set as free-running counters. a free-running counter starts counting up when the corresponding bit in tstr is set to 1. when the count overflows from h'ffff to h'0000, the ovf flag is set to 1 in tisrc. after the overflow, the counter continues counting up from h'0000. figure 9.13 illustrates free-running counting. tcnt value h'ffff h'0000 str0 to str2 bit ovf time figure 9.13 free-running counter operation when a channel is set to have its counter cleared by compare match, in that channel tcnt operates as a periodic counter. select the output compare function of gra or grb, set bit cclr1 or cclr0 in tcr to have the counter cleared by compare match, and set the count period in gra or grb. after these settings, the counter starts counting up as a periodic counter when the corresponding bit is set to 1 in tstr. when the count matches gra or grb, the imfa or imfb flag is set to 1 in tisra/tisrb and the counter is cleared to h'0000. if the corresponding imiea or imieb bit is set to 1 in tisra/tisrb, a cpu interrupt is requested at this time. after the compare match, tcnt continues counting up from h'0000. figure 9.14 illustrates periodic counting. 351 tcnt value gr h'0000 str bit imf time counter cleared by general register compare match figure 9.14 periodic counter operation ? tcnt count timing ? internal clock source bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr select the system clock ( ) or one of three internal clock sources obtained by prescaling the system clock ( /2, /4, /8). figure 9.15 shows the timing. tcnt input tcnt internal clock n 1 n n + 1 figure 9.15 count timing for internal clock sources 352 ? external clock source bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr select an external clock input pin (tclka to tclkd), and its valid edge or edges are selected by bits ckeg1 and ckeg0. the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected. the pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. shorter pulses will not be counted correctly. figure 9.16 shows the timing when both edges are detected. tcnt input tcnt external clock input n 1 n n + 1 figure 9.16 count timing for external clock sources (when both edges are detected) 353 waveform output by compare match: in 16-bit timer channels 0, 1 compare match a or b can cause the output at the tioca or tiocb pin to go to 0, go to 1, or toggle. in channel 2 the output can only go to 0 or go to 1. ? sample setup procedure for waveform output by compare match figure 9.17 shows the timing for detection of both rising and falling edges. output setup select waveform output mode set output timing start counter waveform output select the compare match output mode (0, 1, or toggle) in tior. when a waveform output mode is selected, the pin switches from its generic input/ output function to the output compare function (tioca or tiocb). an output compare pin outputs the value set in tolr until the first compare match occurs. set a value in gra or grb to designate the compare match timing. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 1 2 3 1. 2. 3. figure 9.17 setup procedure for waveform output by compare match (example) ? examples of waveform output figure 9.18 shows examples of 0 and 1 output. tcnt operates as a free-running counter, 0 output is selected for compare match a, and 1 output is selected for compare match b. when the pin is already at the selected output level, the pin level does not change. 354 time h 'ffff g rb t iocb t ioca g ra no change no change no change no change 1 output 0 output tcnt value h'0000 figure 9.18 0 and 1 output (toa = 1, tob = 0) figure 9.19 shows examples of toggle output. tcnt operates as a periodic counter, cleared by compare match b. toggle output is selected for both compare match a and b. grb tiocb tioca gra tcnt value time counter cleared by compare match with grb toggle output toggle output h'0000 figure 9.19 toggle output (toa = 1, tob = 0) 355 ? output compare output timing the compare match signal is generated in the last state in which tcnt and the general register match (when tcnt changes from the matching value to the next value). when the compare match signal is generated, the output value selected in tior is output at the output compare pin (tioca or tiocb). when tcnt matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next counter clock pulse. figure 9.20 shows the output compare timing. n + 1 n n tcnt input clock tcnt gr compare match signal tioca, tiocb figure 9.20 output compare output timing input capture function: the tcnt value can be captured into a general register when a transition occurs at an input capture/output compare pin (tioca or tiocb). capture can take place on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges. the input capture function can be used to measure pulse width or period. ? sample setup procedure for input capture figure 9.21 shows a sample procedure for setting up input capture. 356 input selection select input-capture input start counter input capture set tior to select the input capture function of a general register and the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture signal. clear the ddr bit to 0 before making these tior settings. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. 1 2 1. 2. figure 9.21 setup procedure for input capture (example) ? examples of input capture figure 9.22 illustrates input capture when the falling edge of tiocb and both edges of tioca are selected as capture edges. tcnt is cleared by input capture into grb. h'0005 h'0180 h'0180 h'0160 h'0005 h'0000 tiocb tioca gra grb tcnt value h'0160 figure 9.22 input capture (example) 357 ? input capture signal timing input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in tior. figure 9.23 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. the pulse width of the input capture signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks for single-edge capture, and 2.5 system clocks for capture of both edges. n n input-capture input input capture signal tcnt gra, grb figure 9.23 input capture signal timing 358 9.4.3 synchronization the synchronization function enables two or more timer counters to be synchronized by writing the same data to them simultaneously (synchronous preset). with appropriate tcr settings, two or more timer counters can also be cleared simultaneously (synchronous clear). synchronization enables additional general registers to be associated with a single time base. synchronization can be selected for all channels (0 to 2). sample setup procedure for synchronization: figure 9.24 shows a sample procedure for setting up synchronization. setup for synchronization synchronous preset set the sync bits to 1 in tsnc for the channels to be synchronized. when a value is written in tcnt in one of the synchronized channels, the same value is simultaneously written in tcnt in the other channels (synchronized preset). 1. 2. 2 3 1 5 4 5 select synchronization synchronous preset write to tcnt synchronous clear clearing synchronized to this channel? select counter clear source start counter counter clear synchronous clear start counter select counter clear source ye s no set the cclr1 or cclr0 bit in tcr to have the counter cleared by compare match or input capture. set the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr to have the counter cleared synchronously. set the str bits in tstr to 1 to start the synchronized counters. 3. 4. 5. figure 9.24 setup procedure for synchronization (example) 359 example of synchronization: figure 9.25 shows an example of synchronization. channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronized, and are set to operate in pwm mode. channel 0 is set for counter clearing by compare match with grb0. channels 1 and 2 are set for synchronous counter clearing. the timer counters in channels 0, 1, and 2 are synchronously preset, and are synchronously cleared by compare match with grb0. a three-phase pwm waveform is output from pins tioca 0 , tioca 1 , and tioca 2 . for further information on pwm mode, see section 9.4.4, pwm mode. tioca 2 tioca 1 tioca 0 gra2 gra1 grb2 gra0 grb1 grb0 value of tcnt0 to tcnt2 cleared by compare match with grb0 h'0000 figure 9.25 synchronization (example) 360 9.4.4 pwm mode in pwm mode gra and grb are paired and a pwm waveform is output from the tioca pin. gra specifies the time at which the pwm output changes to 1. grb specifies the time at which the pwm output changes to 0. if either gra or grb is selected as the counter clear source, a pwm waveform with a duty cycle from 0% to 100% is output at the tioca pin. pwm mode can be selected in all channels (0 to 2). table 9.4 summarizes the pwm output pins and corresponding registers. if the same value is set in gra and grb, the output does not change when compare match occurs. table 9.4 pwm output pins and registers channel output pin 1 output 0 output 0 tioca 0 gra0 grb0 1 tioca 1 gra1 grb1 2 tioca 2 gra2 grb2 361 sample setup procedure for pwm mode: figure 9.26 shows a sample procedure for setting up pwm mode. pwm mode 1. set bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr to select the counter clock source. if an external clock source is selected, set bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 in tcr to select the desired edge(s) of the external clock signal. pwm mode select counter clock 1 select counter clear source 2 set gra 3 set grb 4 select pwm mode 5 start counter 6 2. set bits cclr1 and cclr0 in tcr to select the counter clear source. 3. set the time at which the pwm waveform should go to 1 in gra. 4. set the time at which the pwm waveform should go to 0 in grb. 5. set the pwm bit in tmdr to select pwm mode. when pwm mode is selected, regardless of the tior contents, gra and grb become output compare registers specifying the times at which the pwm output goes to 1 and 0. the tioca pin automatically becomes the pwm output pin. the tiocb pin conforms to the settings of bits iob1 and iob0 in tior. if tiocb output is not desired, clear both iob1 and iob0 to 0. 6. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. figure 9.26 setup procedure for pwm mode (example) 362 examples of pwm mode: figure 9.27 shows examples of operation in pwm mode. in pwm mode tioca becomes an output pin. the output goes to 1 at compare match with gra, and to 0 at compare match with grb. in the examples shown, tcnt is cleared by compare match with gra or grb. synchronized operation and free-running counting are also possible. tcnt value counter cleared by compare match a time gra grb tioca a. counter cleared by gra (toa = 1) tcnt value counter cleared by compare match b time grb gra tioca b. counter cleared by grb (toa = 0) h'0000 h'0000 figure 9.27 pwm mode (example 1) 363 figure 9.28 shows examples of the output of pwm waveforms with duty cycles of 0% and 100%. if the counter is cleared by compare match with grb, and gra is set to a higher value than grb, the duty cycle is 0%. if the counter is cleared by compare match with gra, and grb is set to a higher value than gra, the duty cycle is 100%. tcnt value counter cleared by compare match b time grb gra tioca a. 0% duty cycle (toa=0) tcnt value counter cleared by compare match a time gra grb tioca b. 100% duty cycle (toa=1) write to gra write to gra write to grb write to grb h'0000 h'0000 figure 9.28 pwm mode (example 2) 364 9.4.5 phase counting mode in phase counting mode the phase difference between two external clock inputs (at the tclka and tclkb pins) is detected, and tcnt2 counts up or down accordingly. in phase counting mode, the tclka and tclkb pins automatically function as external clock input pins and tcnt2 becomes an up/down-counter, regardless of the settings of bits tpsc2 to tpsc0, ckeg1, and ckeg0 in tcr2. settings of bits cclr1, cclr0 in tcr2, and settings in tior2, tisra, tisrb, tisrc, str2 in tstr, gra2, and grb2 are valid. the input capture and output compare functions can be used, and interrupts can be generated. phase counting is available only in channel 2. sample setup procedure for phase counting mode: figure 9.29 shows a sample procedure for setting up phase counting mode. phase counting mode select phase counting mode select flag setting condition start counter 1 2 3 phase counting mode 1. 2. 3. set the mdf bit in tmdr to 1 to select phase counting mode. select the flag setting condition with the fdir bit in tmdr. set the str2 bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. figure 9.29 setup procedure for phase counting mode (example) 365 example of phase counting mode: figure 9.30 shows an example of operations in phase counting mode. table 9.5 lists the up-counting and down-counting conditions for tcnt2. in phase counting mode both the rising and falling edges of tclka and tclkb are counted. the phase difference between tclka and tclkb must be at least 1.5 states, the phase overlap must also be at least 1.5 states, and the pulse width must be at least 2.5 states. tcnt2 value counting up counting down time tclkb tclka figure 9.30 operation in phase counting mode (example) table 9.5 up/down counting conditions counting direction up-counting down-counting tclkb pin high high low low tclka pin low high high low tclka tclkb phase difference phase difference pulse width pulse width overlap overlap phase difference and overlap: pulse width: at least 1.5 states at least 2.5 states figure 9.31 phase difference, overlap, and pulse width in phase counting mode 366 9.4.6 setting initial value of 16-bit timer output any desired value can be specified for the initial 16-bit timer output value when a timer count operation is started by making a setting in tolr. figure 9.32 shows the timing for setting the initial output value with tolr. only write to tolr when the corresponding bit in tstr is cleared to 0. t 1 tolr address n n t 2 t 3 address bus tolr 16-bit timer output pin figure 9.32 example of timing for setting initial value of 16-bit timer output by writing to tolr 367 9.5 interrupts the 16-bit timer has two types of interrupts: input capture/compare match interrupts, and overflow interrupts. 9.5.1 setting of status flags timing of setting of imfa and imfb at compare match: imfa and imfb are set to 1 by a compare match signal generated when tcnt matches a general register (gr). the compare match signal is generated in the last state in which the values match (when tcnt is updated from the matching count to the next count). therefore, when tcnt matches a general register, the compare match signal is not generated until the next tcnt clock input. figure 9.33 shows the timing of the setting of imfa and imfb. tcnt gr imf imi tcnt input clock compare match signal n n + 1 n figure 9.33 timing of setting of imfa and imfb by compare match 368 timing of setting of imfa and imfb by input capture: imfa and imfb are set to 1 by an input capture signal. the tcnt contents are simultaneously transferred to the corresponding general register. figure 9.34 shows the timing. input capture signal n n i mf t cnt g r i mi figure 9.34 timing of setting of imfa and imfb by input capture timing of setting of overflow flag (ovf): ovf is set to 1 when tcnt overflows from h'ffff to h'0000 or underflows from h'0000 to h'ffff. figure 9.35 shows the timing. 369 overflow signal tcnt ovf ovi figure 9.35 timing of setting of ovf 9.5.2 timing of clearing of status flags if the cpu reads a status flag while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the status flag, the status flag is cleared. figure 9.36 shows the timing. address imf, ovf tisr write cycle tisr address t 1 t 2 t 3 figure 9.36 timing of clearing of status flags 370 9.5.3 interrupt sources and dma controller activation each 16-bit timer channel can generate a compare match/input capture a interrupt, a compare match/input capture b interrupt, and an overflow interrupt. in total there are nine interrupt sources of three kinds, all independently vectored. an interrupt is requested when the interrupt request flag are set to 1. the priority order of the channels can be modified in interrupt priority register a (ipra). for details see section 5, interrupt controller. compare match/input capture a interrupts in channels 0 to 2 can activate the dma controller (dmac). when the dmac is activated a cpu interrupt is not requested. table 9.6 lists the interrupt sources. table 9.6 16-bit timer interrupt sources channel interrupt source description dmac activatable priority* 0 imia0 imib0 ovi0 compare match/input capture a0 compare match/input capture b0 overflow 0 yes no no high 1 imia1 imib1 ovi1 compare match/input capture a1 compare match/input capture b1 overflow 1 yes no no 2 imia2 imib2 ovi2 compare match/input capture a2 compare match/input capture b2 overflow 2 yes no no low note: * the priority immediately after a reset is indicated. inter-channel priorities can be changed by settings in ipra. 371 9.6 usage notes this section describes contention and other matters requiring special attention during 16-bit timer operations. contention between tcnt write and clear: if a counter clear signal occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. see figure 9.37. address bus internal write signal counter clear signal tcnt tcnt write cycle tcnt address n h'0000 t 1 t 2 t 3 figure 9.37 contention between tcnt write and clear 372 contention between tcnt word write and increment: if an increment pulse occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt word write cycle, writing takes priority and tcnt is not incremented. figure 9.38 shows the timing in this case. address bus internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnt n tcnt address m tcnt write data tcnt word write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 figure 9.38 contention between tcnt word write and increment 373 contention between tcnt byte write and increment: if an increment pulse occurs in the t 2 or t 3 state of a tcnt byte write cycle, writing takes priority and tcnt is not incremented. the tcnt byte that was not written retains its previous value. see figure 9.39, which shows an increment pulse occurring in the t 2 state of a byte write to tcnth. address bus internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnth tcntl tcnth byte write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 n tcnth address m tcnt write data xx x + 1 figure 9.39 contention between tcnt byte write and increment 374 contention between general register write and compare match: if a compare match occurs in the t 3 state of a general register write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. see figure 9.40. address bus internal write signal tcnt gr compare match signal general register write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 n gr address m n n + 1 general register write data inhibited figure 9.40 contention between general register write and compare match 375 contention between tcnt write and overflow or underflow: if an overflow occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt write cycle, writing takes priority and the counter is not incremented. ovf is set to 1.the same holds for underflow. see figure 9.41. address bus internal write signal tcnt input clock overflow signal tcnt ovf h'ffff tcnt address m tcnt write data tcnt write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 figure 9.41 contention between tcnt write and overflow 376 contention between general register read and input capture: if an input capture signal occurs during the t 3 state of a general register read cycle, the value before input capture is read. see figure 9.42. address bus internal read signal input capture signal gr internal data bus gr address x general register read cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 xm figure 9.42 contention between general register read and input capture 377 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment: if an input capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, the counter is cleared according to the input capture signal. the counter is not incremented by the increment signal.the counter is not incremented by the increment signal. the value before the counter is cleared is transferred to the general register. see figure 9.43. input capture signal counter clear signal tcnt input clock tcnt gr n n h'0000 figure 9.43 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment 378 contention between general register write and input capture: if an input capture signal occurs in the t 3 state of a general register write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to the general register is not performed. see figure 9.44. address bus internal write signal input capture signal tcnt gr m gr address general register write cycle t 1 t 2 t 3 m figure 9.44 contention between general register write and input capture note on waveform period setting: when a counter is cleared by compare match, the counter is cleared in the last state at which the tcnt value matches the general register value, at the time when this value would normally be updated to the next count. the actual counter frequency is therefore given by the following formula: f = (n+1) (f: counter frequency. : system clock frequency. n: value set in general register.) 379 note on writes in synchronized operation: when channels are synchronized, if a tcnt value is modified by byte write access, all 16 bits of all synchronized counters assume the same value as the counter that was addressed. (example) when channels 1 and 2 are synchronized byte write to channel 1 or byte write to channel 2 tcnt1 tcnt2 w y x z tcnt1 tcnt2 a a x x tcnt1 tcnt2 y y a a tcnt1 tcnt2 w y x z tcnt1 tcnt2 a a b b word write to channel 1 or word write to channel 2 upper byte lower byte upper byte lower byte upper byte lower byte upper byte lower byte upper byte lower byte write a to upper byte of channel 1 write a to lower byte of channel 2 write ab word to channel 1 or 2 380 16-bit timer operating modes: table 9.7 (a) 16-bit timer operating modes (channel 0) register settings tsnc tmdr tior0 tcr0 synchro- clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync0 = 1 pwm mode pwm0 = 1 * output compare a pwm0 = 0 ioa2 = 0 other bits unrestricted output compare b iob2 = 0 other bits unrestricted input capture a pwm0 = 0 ioa2 = 1 other bits unrestricted input capture b pwm0 = 0 iob2 = 1 other bits unrestricted counter by compare cclr1 = 0 clearing match/input cclr0 = 1 capture a by compare cclr1 = 1 match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync0 = 1 cclr1 = 1 chronous cclr0 = 1 clear legend: setting available (valid). setting does not affect this mode. note: * the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 381 table 9.7 (b) 16-bit timer operating modes (channel 1) register settings tsnc tmdr tior1 tcr1 synchro- clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync1 = 1 pwm mode pwm1 = 1 output compare a pwm1 = 0 ioa2 = 0 other bits unrestricted output compare b iob2 = 0 other bits unrestricted input capture a pwm1 = 0 ioa2 = 1 other bits unrestricted input capture b pwm1 = 0 iob2 = 1 other bits unrestricted counter by compare cclr1 = 0 clearing match/input cclr0 = 1 capture a by compare cclr1 = 1 match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync1 = 1 cclr1 = 1 chronous cclr0 = 1 clear legend: setting available (valid). setting does not affect this mode. notes: the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. * * 382 table 9.7 (c) 16-bit timer operating modes (channel 2) register settings tsnc tmdr tior2 tcr2 synchro- clear clock operating mode nization mdf fdir pwm ioa iob select select synchronous preset sync2 = 1 pwm mode pwm2 = 1 * output compare a pwm2 = 0 ioa2 = 0 other bits unrestricted output compare b iob2 = 0 other bits unrestricted input capture a pwm2 = 0 ioa2 = 1 other bits unrestricted input capture b pwm2 = 0 iob2 = 1 other bits unrestricted counter by compare cclr1 = 0 clearing match/input cclr0 = 1 capture a by compare cclr1 = 1 match/input cclr0 = 0 capture b syn- sync2 = 1 cclr1 = 1 chronous cclr0 = 1 clear phase counting mdf = 1 mode legend: setting available (valid). setting does not affect this mode. note: * the input capture function cannot be used in pwm mode. if compare match a and compare match b occur simultaneously, the compare match signal is inhibited. 383 section 10 8-bit timers 10.1 overview the h8/3067 series has a built-in 8-bit timer module with four channels (tmr0, tmr1, tmr2, and tmr3), based on 8-bit counters. each channel has an 8-bit timer counter (tcnt) and two 8- bit time constant registers (tcora and tcorb) that are constantly compared with the tcnt value to detect compare match events. the timers can be used as multifunctional timers in a variety of applications, including the generation of a rectangular-wave output with an arbitrary duty cycle. 10.1.1 features the features of the 8-bit timer module are listed below. ? selection of four clock sources the counters can be driven by one of three internal clock signals ( /8, /64, or /8192) or an external clock input (enabling use as an external event counter). ? selection of three ways to clear the counters the counters can be cleared on compare match a or b, or input capture b. ? timer output controlled by two compare match signals the timer output signal in each channel is controlled by two independent compare match signals, enabling the timer to generate output waveforms with an arbitrary duty cycle or pwm output. ? a/d converter can be activated by a compare match ? two channels can be cascaded ? channels 0 and 1 can be operated as the upper and lower halves of a 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode). ? channels 2 and 3 can be operated as the upper and lower halves of a 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode). ? channel 1 can count channel 0 compare match events (compare match count mode). ? channel 3 can count channel 2 compare match events (compare match count mode). ? input capture function can be set 8-bit or 16-bit input capture operation is available. ? twelve interrupt sources there are twelve interrupt sources: four compare match sources, four compare match/input capture sources, four overflow sources. 384 two of the compare match sources and two of the combined compare match/input capture sources each have an independent interrupt vector. the remaining compare match interrupts, combined compare match/input capture interrupts, and overflow interrupts have one interrupt vector for two sources. 385 10.1.2 block diagram the 8-bit timers are divided into two groups of two channels each: group 0 comprising channels 0 and 1, and group 1 comprising channels 2 and 3. figure 10.1 shows a block diagram of 8-bit timer group 0. /8 /64 /8192 cmia0 cmib0 cmia1/cmib1 ovi0/ovi1 interrupt signals tmo 0 tmio 1 tcora0 tcorb0 tcsr0 tcr0 tcora1 tcnt1 tcorb1 tcsr1 tcr1 tclka tclkc tcnt0 legend tcora : timer constant register a tcorb : timer constant register b tcnt : timer counter tcsr : timer control/status register tcr : timer control register external clock sources internal clock sources clock select control logic clock 1 clock 0 compare match a1 compare match a0 overflow 1 overflow 0 compare match b1 compare match b0 input capture b1 comparator a0 comparator a1 comparator b0 comparator b1 internal bus figure 10.1 block diagram of 8-bit timer unit (two channels: group 0) 386 10.1.3 pin configuration table 10.1 summarizes the input/output pins of the 8-bit timer module. table 10.1 8-bit timer pins group channel name abbreviation i/o input/output 0 0 timer output tmo 0 output compare match output timer clock input tclkc input counter external clock input 1 timer input/output tmio 1 i/o compare match output/input capture input timer clock input tclka input counter external clock input 1 2 timer output tmo 2 output compare match output timer clock input tclkd input counter external clock input 3 timer input/output tmio 3 i/o compare match output/input capture input timer clock input tclkb input counter external clock input 387 10.1.4 register configuration table 10.2 summarizes the registers of the 8-bit timer module. table 10.2 8-bit timer registers channel address*1 name abbreviation r/w initial value 0 h?ff80 timer control register 0 tcr0 r/w h?0 h?ff82 timer control/status register 0 tcsr0 r/(w)* 2 h?0 h?ff84 timer constant register a0 tcora0 r/w h?f h?ff86 timer constant register b0 tcorb0 r/w h?f h?ff88 timer counter 0 tcnt0 r/w h?0 1 h?ff81 timer control register 1 tcr1 r/w h?0 h?ff83 timer control/status register 1 tcsr1 r/(w)* 2 h?0 h?ff85 timer constant register a1 tcora1 r/w h?f h?ff87 timer constant register b1 tcorb1 r/w h?f h?ff89 timer counter 1 tcnt1 r/w h?0 2 h?ff90 timer control register 2 tcr2 r/w h?0 h?ff92 timer control/status register 2 tcsr2 r/(w)* 2 h?0 h?ff94 timer constant register a2 tcora2 r/w h?f h?ff96 timer constant register b2 tcorb2 r/w h?f h?ff98 timer counter 2 tcnt2 r/w h?0 3 h?ff91 timer control register 3 tcr3 r/w h?0 h?ff93 timer control/status register 3 tcsr3 r/(w)* 2 h?0 h?ff95 timer constant register a3 tcora3 r/w h?f h?ff97 timer constant register b3 tcorb3 r/w h?f h?ff99 timer counter 3 tcnt3 r/w h?0 notes: 1. indicates the lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. each pair of registers for channel 0 and channel 1 comprises a 16-bit register with the channel 0 register as the upper 8 bits and the channel 1 register as the lower 8 bits, so they can be accessed together by word access. similarly, each pair of registers for channel 2 and channel 3 comprises a 16-bit register with the channel 2 register as the upper 8 bits and the channel 3 register as the lower 8 bits, so they can be accessed together by word access. 388 10.2 register descriptions 10.2.1 timer counters (tcnt) 15 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 14 0 r/w bit initial value read/write 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w tcnt0 tcnt1 15 0 r/w 14 0 r/w 13 0 r/w 12 0 r/w 11 0 r/w 10 0 r/w 9 0 r/w 8 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w tcnt2 tcnt3 the timer counters (tcnt) are 8-bit readable/writable up-counters that increment on pulses generated from an internal or external clock source. the clock source is selected by clock select bits 2 to 0 (cks2 to cks0) in the timer control register (tcr). the cpu can always read or write to the timer counters. the tcnt0 and tcnt1 pair, and the tcnt2 and tcnt3 pair, can each be accessed as a 16-bit register by word access. tcnt can be cleared by an input capture signal or compare match signal. counter clear bits 1 and 0 (cclr1 and cclr0) in tcr select the method of clearing. when tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00, the overflow flag (ovf) in the timer control/status register (tcsr) is set to 1. each tcnt is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 389 10.2.2 time constant registers a (tcora) 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcora0 tcora1 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcora2 tcora3 bit initial value read/write bit initial value read/write tcora0 to tcora3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. the tcora0 and tcora1 pair, and the tcora2 and tcora3 pair, can each be accessed as a 16-bit register by word access. the tcora value is constantly compared with the tcnt value. when a match is detected, the corresponding compare match flag a (cmfa) is set to 1 in tcsr. the timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of output select bits 1 and 0 (os1, os0) in tcsr. each tcora register is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. 390 10.2.3 time constant registers b (tcorb) 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcorb0 tcorb1 15 1 r/w 14 1 r/w 13 1 r/w 12 1 r/w 11 1 r/w 10 1 r/w 9 1 r/w 8 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w tcorb2 tcorb3 bit initial value read/write bit initial value read/write tcorb0 to tcorb3 are 8-bit readable/writable registers. the tcorb0 and tcorb1 pair, and the tcorb2 and tcorb3 pair, can each be accessed as a 16-bit register by word access. the tcorb value is constantly compared with the tcnt value. when a match is detected, the corresponding compare match flag b (cmfb) is set to 1 in tcsr. the timer output can be freely controlled by these compare match signals and the settings of output/input capture edge select bits 3 and 2 (ois3, ois2) in tcsr. when tcorb is used for input capture, it stores the tcnt value on detection of an external input capture signal. at this time, the cmfb flag is set to 1 in the corresponding tcsr register. the detected edge of the input capture signal is set in tcsr. each tcorb register is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. 10.2.4 timer control register (tcr) 7 cmieb 0 r/w 6 cmiea 0 r/w 5 ovie 0 r/w 4 cclr1 0 r/w 3 cclr0 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write tcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the input clock source and the time at which tcnt is cleared, and enables interrupts. tcr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 391 for the timing, see section 10.4, operation. bit 7?ompare match interrupt enable b (cmieb): enables or disables the cmib interrupt request when the cmfb flag is set to 1 in tcsr. bit 7 cmieb description 0 cmib interrupt requested by cmfb is disabled (initial value) 1 cmib interrupt requested by cmfb is enabled bit 6?ompare match interrupt enable a (cmiea): enables or disables the cmia interrupt request when the cmfa flag is set to 1 in tcsr. bit 6 cmiea description 0 cmia interrupt requested by cmfa is disabled (initial value) 1 cmia interrupt requested by cmfa is enabled bit 5?imer overflow interrupt enable (ovie): enables or disables the ovi interrupt request when the ovf flag is set to 1 in tcsr. bit 5 ovie description 0 ovi interrupt requested by ovf is disabled (initial value) 1 ovi interrupt requested by ovf is enabled bits 4 and 3?ounter clear 1 and 0 (cclr1 and cclr0): these bits select how tcnt is cleared: by compare match a or b, or input capture b.. bit 4 cclr1 bit 3 cclr0 description 0 0 clearing is disabled (initial value) 1 cleared by compare match a 1 0 cleared by compare match b/ input capture b 1 cleared by input capture b 392 bits 2 to 0?lock select 2 to 0 (csk2 to csk0): these bits select whether the clock input to tcnt is an internal or external clock. three internal clocks can be selected, all divided from the system clock ( ): /8, /64, and /8192. the rising edge of the selected internal clock triggers the count. when use of an external clock is selected, three types of count can be selected: at the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. some functions differ between channels 0 and 2 and channels 1 and 3. bit 2 cks2 bit 1 cks1 bit 0 cks0 description 0 0 0 clock input disabled (initial value) 1 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8 1 0 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /64 1 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8192 1 0 0 channel 0: count on tcnt1 overflow signal* 1 channel 1: count on tcnt0 compare match a* 1 channel 2: count on tcnt3 overflow signal* 2 channel 3: count on tcnt2 compare match a* 2 1 external clock, counted on falling edge 1 0 external clock, counted on rising edge 1 external clock, counted on both rising and falling edges notes: 1. if the clock input of channel 0 is the tcnt1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the tcnt0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. do not use this setting. 2. if the clock input of channel 2 is the tcnt3 overflow signal and that of channel 3 is the tcnt2 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. do not use this setting. 393 10.2.5 timer control/status registers (tcsr) 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 0 r/(w)* 4 ice 0 r/w 3 ois3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w tcsr1, tcsr3 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 0 r/(w)* 4 1 3 ois3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w tcsr2 note: * only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. bit initial value read/write 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 0 r/(w)* 4 0 r/w 3 ois3 0 r/w 0 os0 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w tcsr0 adte bit initial value read/write bit initial value read/write the timer control/status registers (tcsr0 to tcsr3) are 8-bit registers that indicate compare match/input capture and overflow statuses, and control compare match output/input capture edge selection. each tcsr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ompare match/input capture flag b (cmfb): status flag that indicates the occurrence of a tcorb compare match or input capture. bit 7 cmfb description 0 clearing condition (initial value) read cmfb when cmfb = 1, then write 0 in cmfb 1 setting conditions tcnt = tcorb the tcnt value is transferred to tcorb by an input capture signal when tcorb functions as an input capture register 394 bit 6?ompare match flag a (cmfa): status flag that indicates the occurrence of a tcora compare match. bit 6 cmfa description 0 clearing condition (initial value) read cmfa when cmfa = 1, then write 0 in cmfa 1 setting condition tcnt = tcora bit 5?imer overflow flag (ovf): status flag that indicates that the tcnt has overflowed (from h'ff to h'00). bit 5 ovf description 0 clearing condition (initial value) read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf 1 setting condition tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00 bit 4?/d trigger enable (adte) (tcsr0): in combination with trge in the a/d control register (adcr), enables or disables a/d converter start requests by compare match a or an external trigger. tcsr2 is a reserved bit, but can be read and written. trge* bit 4 adte description 0 0 a/d converter start requests by compare match a or an external trigger are disabled (initial value) 1 a/d converter start requests by compare match a or an external trigger are disabled 1 0 a/d converter start requests by an external trigger are enabled, and a/d converter start requests by compare match a are disabled 1 a/d converter start requests by compare match a are enabled, and a/d converter start requests by an external trigger are disabled note: * trge is bit 7 of the a/d control register (adcr). 395 bit 4?nput capture enable (ice) (tcsr1, tcsr3): selects the function of tcorb. bit 4 ice description 0 tcorb is a compare match register (initial value) 1 tcorb is an input capture register bits 3 and 2?utput/input capture edge select b3 and b2 (ois3, ois2): in combination with the ice bit in tcsr1 (tcsr3), these bits select the compare match b output level or the input capture input detected edge. the function of tcorb1 (tcorb3) depends on the setting of bit 4 of tcsr1 (tcsr3). tcorb0 and tcorb2 function as compare match registers regardless of the setting of bit 4 of tcsr1 (tcsr3). ice bit in tcsr1 (tcsr3) bit 3 ois3 bit 2 ois2 description 0 0 0 no change when compare match b occurs (initial value) 1 0 is output when compare match b occurs 1 0 1 is output when compare match b occurs 1 output is inverted when compare match b occurs (toggle output) 1 0 0 tcorb input capture on rising edge 1 tcorb input capture on falling edge 1 0 tcorb input capture on both rising and falling edges 1 ? when the compare match register function is used, the timer output priority order is: toggle output > 1 output > 0 output. ? if compare match a and b occur simultaneously, the output changes in accordance with the higher-priority compare match. ? when bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 are all cleared to 0, timer output is disabled. 396 bits 1 and 0?utput select a1 and a0 (os1, os0): these bits select the compare match a output level. bit 1 os1 bit 0 os0 description 0 0 no change when compare match a occurs (initial value) 1 0 is output when compare match a occurs 1 0 1 is output when compare match a occurs 1 output is inverted when compare match a occurs (toggle output) ? when the compare match register function is used, the timer output priority order is: toggle output > 1 output > 0 output. ? if compare match a and b occur simultaneously, the output changes in accordance with the higher-priority compare match. ? when bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 are all cleared to 0, timer output is disabled. 397 10.3 cpu interface 10.3.1 8-bit registers tcnt, tcora, tcorb, tcr, and tcsr are 8-bit registers. these registers are connected to the cpu by an internal 16-bit data bus and can be read and written a word at a time or a byte at a time. figures 10.2 and 10.3 show the operation in word read and write accesses to tcnt. figures 10.4 to 10.7 show the operation in byte read and write accesses to tcnt0 and tcnt1. tcnt0 tcnt1 h l h l c p u internal data bus bus interface module data bus figure 10.2 tcnt access operation (cpu writes to tcnt, word) tcnt0 tcnt1 h l h l c p u internal data bus bus interface module data bus figure 10.3 tcnt access operation (cpu reads tcnt, word) tcnt0 tcnt1 h l h l c p u internal data bus bus interface module data bus figure 10.4 tcnt access operation (cpu writes to tcnt, upper byte) 398 tcnt0 tcnt1 h l h l c p u internal data bus bus interface module data bus figure 10.5 tcnt access operation (cpu writes to tcnt, lower byte) tcnt0 tcnt1 h l h l c p u internal data bus bus interface module data bus figure 10.6 tcnt access operation (cpu reads tcnt, upper byte) tcnt0 tcnt1 h l h l c p u internal data bus bus interface module data bus figure 10.7 tcnt access operation (cpu reads tcnt, lower byte) 399 10.4 operation 10.4.1 tcnt count timing tcnt is incremented by input clock pulses (either internal or external). internal clock: three different internal clock signals ( /8, /64, or /8192) divided from the system clock ( ) can be selected, by setting bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr. figure 10.8 shows the count timing. tcnt n 1 n n+1 internal clock tcnt input clock figure 10.8 count timing for internal clock input note: even when the same internal clock is selected for both the 16- and 8-bit timers, they do not operate in the same manner because the count-up edge differs. external clock: three incrementation methods can be selected by setting bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr: on the rising edge, the falling edge, and both rising and falling edges. the pulse width of the external clock signal must be at least 1.5 serial clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. shorter pulses will not be counted correctly. figure 10.9 shows the timing for incrementation on both edges of the external clock signal. 400 tcnt n 1 n n+1 external clock input tcnt input clock figure 10.9 count timing for external clock input (when detecting the both edges) 10.4.2 compare match timing timer output timing: when compare match a or b occurs, the timer output is as specified by the ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 bits in tcsr (unchanged, 0 output, 1 output, or toggle output). figure 10.10 shows the timing when the output is set to toggle on compare match a. compare match a signal timer output figure 10.10 timing of timer output clear by compare match: depending on the setting of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr, tcnt can be cleared when compare match a or b occurs, figure 10.11 shows the timing of this operation. 401 n h'00 tcnt compare match signal figure 10.11 timing of clear by compare match clear by input capture: depending on the setting of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr, tcnt can be cleared when input capture b occurs. figure 10.12 shows the timing of this operation. input capture signal input capture input tcnt nh '00 figure 10.12 timing of clear by input capture 10.4.3 input capture signal timing input capture on the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected by settings in tcsr. figure 10.13 shows the timing when the rising edge is selected. the pulse width of the input capture input signal must be at least 1.5 system clocks when a single edge is selected, and at least 2.5 system clocks when both edges are selected. 402 input capture signal input capture input tcnt n tcorb n figure 10.13 timing of input capture input signal 10.4.4 timing of status flag setting timing of cmfa/cmfb flag setting when compare match occurs: cmfa and cmfb in tcsr are set to 1 by the compare match signal output when the tcor and tcnt values match. the compare match signal is generated in the last state of the match (when the matched tcnt count value is updated). therefore, after the tcnt and tcor values match, the compare match signal is not generated until an incrementing clock pulse is generated. figure 10.14 shows the timing in this case. cmf compare match signal tcnt n n+1 n tcor figure 10.14 cmf flag setting timing when compare match occurs timing of cmfb flag setting when input capture occurs: on generation of an input capture signal, the cmfb flag is set to 1 and at the same time the tcnt value is transferred to tcorb. figure 10.15 shows the timing in this case. 403 cmfb input capture signal tcnt n n tcorb figure 10.15 cmfb flag setting timing when input capture occurs timing of overflow flag (ovf) setting: the ovf flag in tcsr is set to 1 by the overflow signal generated when tcnt overflows (from h'ff to h'00). figure 10.16 shows the timing in this case. ovf overflow signal tcnt h'ff h'00 figure 10.16 timing of ovf setting 10.4.5 operation with cascaded connection if bits cks2 to cks0 are set to b'100 in either tcr0 or tcr1, the 8-bit timers of channels 0 and 1 are cascaded. with this configuration, the two timers can be used as a single 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode), or channel 0 8-bit timer compare matches can be counted in channel 1 (compare match count mode). in this case, the timer operates as below. similarly, if bits cks2 to cks0 are set to b'100 in either tcr2 or tcr3, the 8-bit timers of channels 0 and 1 are cascaded. with this configuration, the two timers can be used as a single 16-bit timer (16-bit count mode),or channel 2 8-bit timer compare matches can be counted in channel 3 (compare match count mode). timer operation in these cases is described below. 404 16-bit count mode ? channels 0 and 1: when bits cks2 to cks0 are set to b'100 in tcr0, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 0 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 1 occupying the lower 8 bits. ? setting when compare match occurs ? the cmf flag is set to 1 in tcr0 when a 16-bit compare match occurs. ? the cmf flag is set to 1 in tcr1 when a lower 8-bit compare match occurs. ? tmo 0 pin output control by bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 in tcsr0 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions. ? tmio 1 pin output control by bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 in tcsr1 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions. ? setting when input capture occurs ? the cmfb flag is set to 1 in tcr0 and tcr1 when the ice bit is 1 in tcsr1 and input capture occurs. ? tmio 1 pin input capture input signal edge detection is selected by bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr0. ? counter clear specification ? if counter clear on compare match or input capture has been selected by the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr0, the 16-bit counter (both tcnt0 and tcnt1) is cleared. ? the settings of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr1 are ignored. the lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. ? ovf flag operation ? the ovf flag is set to 1 in tcsr0 when the 16-bit counter (tcnt0 and tcnt1) overflows (from h'ffff to h'0000). ? the ovf flag is set to 1 in tcsr1 when the 8-bit counter (tcnt1) overflows (from h'ff to h'00). ? channels 2 and 3: when bits cks2 to cks0 are set to b'100 in tcr2, the timer functions as a single 16-bit timer with channel 2 occupying the upper 8 bits and channel 3 occupying the lower 8 bits. ? setting when compare match occurs ? the cmf flag is set to 1 in tcr2 when a 16-bit compare match occurs. ? the cmf flag is set to 1 in tcr3 when a lower 8-bit compare match occurs. ? tmo 2 pin output control by bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 in tcsr2 is in accordance with the 16-bit compare match conditions. ? tmio 3 pin output control by bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 in tcsr3 is in accordance with the lower 8-bit compare match conditions. 405 ? setting when input capture occurs ? the cmfb flag is set to 1 in tcr2 and tcr3 when the ice bit is 1 in tcsr3 and input capture occurs. ? tmio 3 pin input capture input signal edge detection is selected by bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr2. ? counter clear specification ? if counter clear on compare match has been selected by the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr2, the 16-bit counter (both tcnt2 and tcnt3) is cleared. ? the settings of the cclr1 and cclr0 bits in tcr3 are ignored. the lower 8 bits cannot be cleared independently. ? ovf flag operation ? the ovf flag is set to 1 in tcsr2 when the 16-bit counter (tcnt2 and tcnt3) overflows (from h'ffff to h'0000). ? the ovf flag is set to 1 in tcsr3 when the 16-bit counter (tcnt3) overflows (from h'ff to h'00). compare match count mode ? channels 0 and 1: when bits cks2 to cks0 are set to b'100 in tcr1, tcnt1 counts channel 0 compare match a events. channels 0 and 1 are controlled independently. cmf flag setting, interrupt generation, tmo pin output, counter clearing, and so on, is in accordance with the settings for each channel. ? channels 2 and 3: when bits cks2 to cks0 are set to b'100 in tcr3, tcnt3 counts channel 2 compare match a events. channels 2 and 3 are controlled independently. cmf flag setting, interrupt generation, tmo pin output, counter clearing, and so on, is in accordance with the settings for each channel. caution do not set 16-bit count mode and compare match count mode simultaneously within the same group, as the tcnt input clock will not be generated and the counters will not operate. 10.4.6 input capture setting the tcnt value can be transferred to tcorb on detection of an input edge on the input capture/output compare pin (tmio 1 or tmio 3 ). rising edge, falling edge, or both edge detection can be selected. in 16-bit count mode, 16-bit input capture can be used. 406 setting input capture operation in 8-bit timer mode (normal operation) ? channel 1: ? set tcorb1 as an 8-bit input capture register with the ice bit in tcsr1. ? select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (tmio 1 ) with bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr1. ? select the input clock with bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr1, and start the tcnt count. ? channel 3: ? set tcorb3 as an 8-bit input capture register with the ice bit in tcsr3. ? select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (tmio 3 ) with bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr3. ? select the input clock with bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr3, and start the tcnt count. setting input capture operation in 16-bit count mode ? channels 0 and 1: ? in 16-bit count mode, tcorb0 and tcorb1 function as a 16-bit input capture register when the ice bit is set to 1 in tcsr1. ? select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (tmio 1 ) with bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr0. (in 16-bit count mode, the settings of bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr1 are ignored.) ? select the input clock with bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr1, and start the tcnt count. ? channels 2 and 3: ? in 16-bit count mode, tcorb2 and tcorb3 function as a 16-bit input capture register when the ice bit is set to 1 in tcsr3. ? select rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the input edge(s) for the input capture signal (tmio 3 ) with bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr2. (in 16-bit count mode, the settings of bits ois3 and ois2 in tcsr3 are ignored.) ? select the input clock with bits cks2 to cks0 in tcr3, and start the tcnt count. 407 10.5 interrupts 10.5.1 interrupt sources the 8-bit timer unit can generate three types of interrupt: compare match a and b (cmia and cmib) and overflow (ovi). table 10.3 shows the interrupt sources and their priority order. each interrupt source is enabled or disabled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit in tcr. a separate interrupt request signal is sent to the interrupt controller by each interrupt source. table 10.3 types of 8-bit timer interrupt sources and priority order priority interrupt source description high cmia interrupt by cmfa cmib interrupt by cmfb tovi interrupt by ovf low for compare match interrupts cmia1/cmib1 and cmia3/cmib3 and the overflow interrupts (tovi0/tovi1 and tovi2/tovi3), one vector is shared by two interrupts. table 10.4 lists the interrupt sources. table 10.4 8-bit timer interrupt sources channel interrupt source description 0 cmia0 tcora0 compare match cmib0 tcorb0 compare match/input capture 1 cmia1/cmib1 tcora1 compare match, or tcorb1 compare match/input capture 0, 1 tovi0/tovi1 counter 0 or counter 1 overflow 2 cmia2 tcora2 compare match cmib2 tcorb2 compare match/input capture 3 cmia3/cmib3 tcora3 compare match, or tcorb3 compare match/input capture 2,3 tovi2/tovi3 counter 2 or counter 3 overflow 408 10.5.2 a/d converter activation the a/d converter can only be activated by channel 0 compare match a. if the adte bit setting is 1 when the cmfa flag in tcsr0 is set to 1 by generation of channel 0 compare match a, an a/d conversion start request will be issued to the a/d converter. if the trge bit in adcr is 1 at this time, the a/d converter will be started. if the adte bit in tcsr0 is 1, the a/d converter external trigger input ( adtrg ) is disabled. 10.6 8-bit timer application example figure 10.17 shows how the 8-bit timer module can be used to output pulses with any desired duty cycle. the settings for this example are as follows: ? clear the cclr1 bit to 0 and set the cclr0 bit to 1 in tcr so that tcnt is cleared by a tcora compare match. ? set bits ois3, ois2, os1, and os0 to b'0110 in tcsr so that 1 is output on a tcora compare match and 0 is output on a tcorb compare match. the above settings enable a waveform with the cycle determined by tcora and the pulse width detected by tcorb to be output without software intervention. tcnt h'ff counter clear tcora tcorb h'00 tmo figure 10.17 example of pulse output 409 10.7 usage notes note that the following kinds of contention can occur in 8-bit timer operation. 10.7.1 contention between tcnt write and clear if a timer counter clear signal occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt write cycle, clearing of the counter takes priority and the write is not performed. figure 10.18 shows the timing in this case. address bus tcnt address internal write signal counter clear signal tcnt n h'00 t 1 t 3 t 2 tcnt write cycle figure 10.18 contention between tcnt write and clear 410 10.7.2 contention between tcnt write and increment if an increment pulse occurs in the t 3 state of a tcnt write cycle, writing takes priority and tcnt is not incremented. figure 10.19 shows the timing in this case. address bus tcnt address internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnt nm t 1 t 3 t 2 tcnt write cycle tcnt write data figure 10.19 contention between tcnt write and increment 411 10.7.3 contention between tcor write and compare match if a compare match occurs in the t 3 state of a tcor write cycle, writing takes priority and the compare match signal is inhibited. figure 10.20 shows the timing in this case. address bus tcor address internal write signal tcnt tcor nm t 1 t 3 t 2 tcor write cycle tcor write data n n+1 compare match signal inhibited figure 10.20 contention between tcor write and compare match 412 10.7.4 contention between tcor read and input capture if an input capture signal occurs in the t 3 state of a tcor read cycle, the value before input capture is read. figure 10.21 shows the timing in this case. address bus tcorb address internal read signal input capture signal tcorb nm t 1 t 3 t 2 tcorb read cycle internal data bus n figure 10.21 contention between tcor read and input capture 413 10.7.5 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment if an input capture signal and counter increment signal occur simultaneously, counter clearing by the input capture signal takes priority and the counter is not incremented. the value before the counter is cleared is transferred to tcorb. figure 10.22 shows the timing in this case. counter clear signal tcnt internal clock tcnt n x h'00 t 1 t 3 t 2 input capture signal tcorb n figure 10.22 contention between counter clearing by input capture and counter increment 414 10.7.6 contention between tcor write and input capture if an input capture signal occurs in the t 3 state of a tcor write cycle, input capture takes priority and the write to tcor is not performed. figure 10.23 shows the timing in this case. address bus tcor address internal write signal input capture signal tcnt m t 1 t 3 t 2 tcor write cycle tcor m x figure 10.23 contention between tcor write and input capture 415 10.7.7 contention between tcnt byte write and increment in 16-bit count mode (cascaded connection) if an increment pulse occurs in the t 2 or t 3 state of a tcnt byte write cycle in 16-bit count mode, writing takes priority and tcnt is not incremented. the tcnt byte that was not written retains its previous value. figure 10.24 shows the timing when an increment pulse occurs in the t 2 state of a byte write to tcnth. address bus tcnth address internal write signal tcnt input clock tcnth n tcnt write data t 1 t 3 t 2 tcnth byte write cycle tcntl x+1 x figure 10.24 contention between tcnt byte write and increment in 16-bit count mode 416 10.7.8 contention between compare matches a and b if compare matches a and b occur at the same time, the 8-bit timer operates according to the relative priority of the output states set for compare match a and compare match b, as shown in table 10.5. table 10.5 timer output priority order priority output setting high toggle output 1 output 0 output no change low 10.7.9 tcnt operation at internal clock source switchover switching internal clock sources may cause tcnt to increment, depending on the switchover timing. table 10.6 shows the relation between the time of the switchover (by writing to bits cks1 and cks0) and the operation of tcnt. the tcnt input clock is generated from the internal clock source by detecting the rising edge of the internal clock. if a switchover is made from a low clock source to a high clock source, as in case no. 3 in table 10.6, the switchover will be regarded as a falling edge, a tcnt clock pulse will be generated, and tcnt will be incremented. tcnt may also be incremented when switching between internal and external clocks. 417 table 10.6 internal clock switchover and tcnt operation no. cks1 and cks0 write timing tcnt operation 1 high high switchover* 1 o ld clock source n ew clock source t cnt clock t cnt cks bits rewritten n n+1 2 high low switchover* 2 cks bits rewritten n n+1 n+2 o ld clock source n ew clock source t cnt clock t cnt 3 low high switchover* 3 n n+1 n+2 * 4 cks bits rewritten o ld clock source n ew clock source t cnt clock t cnt 418 table 10.6 internal clock switchover and tcnt operation (cont) no. cks1 and cks0 write timing tcnt operation 4 low low switchover n n+1 n+2 cks bits rewritten old clock source new clock source tcnt clock tcnt notes: 1. including switchovers from a high clock source to the halted state, and from the halted state to a high clock source. 2. including switchover from the halted state to a low clock source. 3. including switchover from a low clock source to the halted state. 4. the switchover is regarded as a rising edge, causing tcnt to increment. 419 section 11 programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) 11.1 overview the h8/3067 series has a built-in programmable timing pattern controller (tpc) that provides pulse outputs by using the 16-bit timer as a time base. the tpc pulse outputs are divided into 4- bit groups (group 3 to group 0) that can operate simultaneously and independently. 11.1.1 features tpc features are listed below. ? 16-bit output data maximum 16-bit data can be output. tpc output can be enabled on a bit-by-bit basis. ? four output groups output trigger signals can be selected in 4-bit groups to provide up to four different 4-bit outputs. ? selectable output trigger signals output trigger signals can be selected for each group from the compare match signals of three 16-bit timer channels. ? non-overlap mode a non-overlap margin can be provided between pulse outputs. ? can operate together with the dma controller (dmac) the compare-match signals selected as trigger signals can activate the dmac for sequential output of data without cpu intervention. 420 11.1.2 block diagram figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of the tpc. paddr ndera tpmr pbddr nderb tpcr internal data bus tp tp tp tp tp tp 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 control logic 16-bit timer compare match signals pulse output pins, group 3 pbdr padr legend tpmr: tpcr: nderb: ndera: pbddr: paddr: ndrb: ndra: pbdr: padr: pulse output pins, group 2 pulse output pins, group 1 pulse output pins, group 0 tpc output mode register tpc output control register next data enable register b next data enable register a port b data direction register port a data direction register next data register b next data register a port b data register port a data register ndrb ndra tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp tp figure 11.1 tpc block diagram 421 11.1.3 tpc pins table 11.1 summarizes the tpc output pins. table 11.1 tpc pins name symbol i/o function tpc output 0 tp 0 output group 0 pulse output tpc output 1 tp 1 output tpc output 2 tp 2 output tpc output 3 tp 3 output tpc output 4 tp 4 output group 1 pulse output tpc output 5 tp 5 output tpc output 6 tp 6 output tpc output 7 tp 7 output tpc output 8 tp 8 output group 2 pulse output tpc output 9 tp 9 output tpc output 10 tp 10 output tpc output 11 tp 11 output tpc output 12 tp 12 output group 3 pulse output tpc output 13 tp 13 output tpc output 14 tp 14 output tpc output 15 tp 15 output 422 11.1.4 registers table 11.2 summarizes the tpc registers. table 11.2 tpc registers address* 1 name abbreviation r/w function h'ee009 port a data direction register paddr w h'00 h'fffd9 port a data register padr r/(w)* 2 h'00 h'ee00a port b data direction register pbddr w h'00 h'fffda port b data register pbdr r/(w)* 2 h'00 h'fffa0 tpc output mode register tpmr r/w h'f0 h'fffa1 tpc output control register tpcr r/w h'ff h'fffa2 next data enable register b nderb r/w h'00 h'fffa3 next data enable register a ndera r/w h'00 h'fffa5/ h'fffa7* 3 next data register a ndra r/w h'00 h'fffa4/ h'fffa6* 3 next data register b ndrb r/w h'00 notes: 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. bits used for tpc output cannot be written. 3. the ndra address is h'fffa5 when the same output trigger is selected for tpc output groups 0 and 1 by settings in tpcr. when the output triggers are different, the ndra address is h'fffa7 for group 0 and h'fffa5 for group 1. similarly, the address of ndrb is h'fffa4 when the same output trigger is selected for tpc output groups 2 and 3 by settings in tpcr. when the output triggers are different, the ndrb address is h'fffa6 for group 2 and h'fffa4 for group 3. 423 11.2 register descriptions 11.2.1 port a data direction register (paddr) paddr is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port a. bit initial value read/write 7 pa ddr 0 w port a data direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port a pins 7 6 pa ddr 0 w 6 5 pa ddr 0 w 5 4 pa ddr 0 w 4 3 pa ddr 0 w 3 2 pa ddr 0 w 2 1 pa ddr 0 w 1 0 pa ddr 0 w 0 port a is multiplexed with pins tp 7 to tp 0 . bits corresponding to pins used for tpc output must be set to 1. for further information about paddr, see section 8.11, port a. 11.2.2 port a data register (padr) padr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores tpc output data for groups 0 and 1, when these tpc output groups are used. bit initial value read/write 0 pa 0 r/(w) 0 1 pa 0 r/(w) 1 2 pa 0 r/(w) 2 3 pa 0 r/(w) 3 4 pa 0 r/(w) 4 5 pa 0 r/(w) 5 6 pa 0 r/(w) 6 7 pa 0 r/(w) 7 port a data 7 to 0 these bits store output data for tpc output groups 0 and 1 ******** note: bits selected for tpc output by ndera settings become read-only bits. * for further information about padr, see section 8.11, port a. 424 11.2.3 port b data direction register (pbddr) pbddr is an 8-bit write-only register that selects input or output for each pin in port b. bit initial value read/write 0 pb 0 ddr 0 w 1 pb 1 ddr 0 w 2 pb 2 ddr 0 w 3 pb 3 ddr 0 w 4 pb 4 ddr 0 w 5 pb 5 ddr 0 w 6 pb 6 ddr 0 w 7 pb 7 ddr 0 w port b direction 7 to 0 these bits select input or output for port b pins port b is multiplexed with pins tp 15 to tp 8 . bits corresponding to pins used for tpc output must be set to 1. for further information about pbddr, see section 8.12, port b. 11.2.4 port b data register (pbdr) pbdr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores tpc output data for groups 2 and 3, when these tpc output groups are used. bit initial value read/write note: * bits selected for tpc output by nderb settings become read-only bits. 0 pb 0 0 r/(w)* 1 pb 1 0 r/(w)* 2 pb 2 0 r/(w)* 3 pb 3 0 r/(w)* 4 pb 4 0 r/(w)* 5 pb 5 0 r/(w)* 6 pb 6 0 r/(w)* 7 pb 7 0 r/(w)* port b data 7 to 0 these bits store output data for tpc output groups 2 and 3 for further information about pbdr, see section 8.12, port b. 425 11.2.5 next data register a (ndra) ndra is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for tpc output groups 1 and 0 (pins tp 7 to tp 0 ). during tpc output, when an 16-bit timer compare match event specified in tpcr occurs, ndra contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in padr. the address of ndra differs depending on whether tpc output groups 0 and 1 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. ndra is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. same trigger for tpc output groups 0 and 1: if tpc output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by the same compare match event, the ndra address is h'fffa5. the upper 4 bits belong to group 1 and the lower 4 bits to group 0. address h'fffa7 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. address h'fffa5 bit initial value read/write 0 ndr0 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 3 ndr3 0 r/w 4 ndr4 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 7 ndr7 0 r/w next data 7 to 4 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 1 next data 3 to 0 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 0 address h'fffa7 bit initial value read/write 0 ? 1 1 ? 1 2 ? 1 3 ? 1 4 ? 1 5 ? 1 6 ? 1 7 1 reserved bits 426 different triggers for tpc output groups 0 and 1: if tpc output groups 0 and 1 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of ndra (group 1) is h'fffa5 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 0) is h'fffa7. bits 3 to 0 of address h'fffa5 and bits 7 to 4 of address h'fffa7 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. address h'fffa5 bit initial value read/write 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 ndr4 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 7 ndr7 0 r/w next data 7 to 4 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 1 reserved bits address h'fffa7 bit initial value read/write 0 ndr0 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 3 ndr3 0 r/w 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 next data 3 to 0 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 0 reserved bits 427 11.2.6 next data register b (ndrb) ndrb is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the next output data for tpc output groups 3 and 2 (pins tp 15 to tp 8 ). during tpc output, when an 16-bit timer compare match event specified in tpcr occurs, ndrb contents are transferred to the corresponding bits in pbdr. the address of ndrb differs depending on whether tpc output groups 2 and 3 have the same output trigger or different output triggers. ndrb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. same trigger for tpc output groups 2 and 3: if tpc output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by the same compare match event, the ndrb address is h'fffa4. the upper 4 bits belong to group 3 and the lower 4 bits to group 2. address h'fffa6 consists entirely of reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. address h'fffa4 bit initial value read/write 0 ndr8 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 3 ndr11 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 7 ndr15 0 r/w next data 15 to 12 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 3 next data 11 to 8 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 2 address h'fffa6 bit initial value read/write 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 reserved bits 428 different triggers for tpc output groups 2 and 3: if tpc output groups 2 and 3 are triggered by different compare match events, the address of the upper 4 bits of ndrb (group 3) is h'fffa4 and the address of the lower 4 bits (group 2) is h'fffa6. bits 3 to 0 of address h'fffa4 and bits 7 to 4 of address h'fffa6 are reserved bits that cannot be modified and always read 1. address h'fffa4 bit initial value read/write 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 ndr12 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 7 ndr15 0 r/w next data 15 to 12 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 3 reserved bits address h'fffa6 bit initial value read/write 0 ndr8 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 3 ndr11 0 r/w 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 next data 11 to 8 these bits store the next output data for tpc output group 2 reserved bits 429 11.2.7 next data enable register a (ndera) ndera is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables tpc output groups 1 and 0 (tp 7 to tp 0 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. bit initial value read/write 0 nder0 0 r/w 1 nder1 0 r/w 2 nder2 0 r/w 3 nder3 0 r/w 4 nder4 0 r/w 5 nder5 0 r/w 6 nder6 0 r/w 7 nder7 0 r/w next data enable 7 to 0 these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 1 and 0 if a bit is enabled for tpc output by ndera, then when the 16-bit timer compare match event selected in the tpc output control register (tpcr) occurs, the ndra value is automatically transferred to the corresponding padr bit, updating the output value. if tpc output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from ndra to padr and the output value does not change. ndera is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?ext data enable 7 to 0 (nder7 to nder0): these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 1 and 0 (tp 7 to tp 0 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. bits 7 to 0 nder7 to nder0 description 0 tpc outputs tp 7 to tp 0 are disabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are not transferred to pa 7 to pa 0 ) (initial value) 1 tpc outputs tp 7 to tp 0 are enabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are transferred to pa 7 to pa 0 ) 430 11.2.8 next data enable register b (nderb) nderb is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables tpc output groups 3 and 2 (tp 15 to tp 8 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. bit initial value read/write 0 nder8 0 r/w 1 nder9 0 r/w 2 nder10 0 r/w 3 nder11 0 r/w 4 nder12 0 r/w 5 nder13 0 r/w 6 nder14 0 r/w 7 nder15 0 r/w next data enable 15 to 8 these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 3 and 2 if a bit is enabled for tpc output by nderb, then when the 16-bit timer compare match event selected in the tpc output control register (tpcr) occurs, the ndrb value is automatically transferred to the corresponding pbdr bit, updating the output value. if tpc output is disabled, the bit value is not transferred from ndrb to pbdr and the output value does not change. nderb is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 0?ext data enable 15 to 8 (nder15 to nder8): these bits enable or disable tpc output groups 3 and 2 (tp 15 to tp 8 ) on a bit-by-bit basis. bits 7 to 0 nder15 to nder8 description 0 tpc outputs tp 15 to tp 8 are disabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are not transferred to pb 7 to pb 0 ) (initial value) 1 tpc outputs tp 15 to tp 8 are enabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are transferred to pb 7 to pb 0 ) 431 11.2.9 tpc output control register (tpcr) tpcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects output trigger signals for tpc outputs on a group-by-group basis. bit initial value read/write 0 g0cms0 1 r/w 1 g0cms1 1 r/w 2 g1cms0 1 r/w 3 g1cms1 1 r/w 4 g2cms0 1 r/w 5 g2cms1 1 r/w 6 g3cms0 1 r/w 7 g3cms1 1 r/w group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) group 2 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) group 1 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) group 0 compare match select 1 and 0 these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) tpcr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. 432 bits 7 and 6?roup 3 compare match select 1 and 0 (g3cms1, g3cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ). bit 7 g3cms1 bit 6 g3cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 1 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 1 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (initial value) bits 5 and 4?roup 2 compare match select 1 and 0 (g2cms1, g2cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ). bit 5 g2cms1 bit 4 g2cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 1 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 1 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (initial value) 433 bits 3 and 2?roup 1 compare match select 1 and 0 (g1cms1, g1cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ). bit 3 g1cms1 bit 2 g1cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 1 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 1 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (initial value) bits 1 and 0?roup 0 compare match select 1 and 0 (g0cms1, g0cms0): these bits select the compare match event that triggers tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ). bit 1 g0cms1 bit 0 g0cms0 description 0 0 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 1 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 1 0 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 1 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 (initial value) 434 11.2.10 tpc output mode register (tpmr) tpmr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for each group. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 g3nov 0 r/w 0 g0nov 0 r/w 2 g2nov 0 r/w 1 g1nov 0 r/w group 3 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 3 (tp to tp ) reserved bits group 2 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 2 (tp to tp ) group 1 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 1 (tp to tp ) group 0 non-overlap selects non-overlapping tpc output for group 0 (tp to tp ) 15 12 11 8 74 30 the output trigger period of a non-overlapping tpc output waveform is set in general register b (grb) in the 16-bit timer channel selected for output triggering. the non-overlap margin is set in general register a (gra). the output values change at compare match a and b. for details see section 11.3.4, non-overlapping tpc output. tpmr is initialized to h'f0 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 4?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 435 bit 3?roup 3 non-overlap (g3nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ). bit 3 g3nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 3 (output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (initial value) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 3 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel) bit 2?roup 2 non-overlap (g2nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ). bit 2 g2nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 2 (output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (initial value) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 2 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel) bit 1?roup 1 non-overlap (g1nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ). bit 1 g1nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 1 (output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (initial value) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 1 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel) bit 0?roup 0 non-overlap (g0nov): selects normal or non-overlapping tpc output for group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ). bit 0 g0nov description 0 normal tpc output in group 0 (output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel) (initial value) 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 0 (independent 1 and 0 output at compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel) 436 11.3 operation 11.3.1 overview when corresponding bits in paddr or pbddr and ndera or nderb are set to 1, tpc output is enabled. the tpc output initially consists of the corresponding padr or pbdr contents. when a compare-match event selected in tpcr occurs, the corresponding ndra or ndrb bit contents are transferred to padr or pbdr to update the output values. figure 11.2 illustrates the tpc output operation. table 11.3 summarizes the tpc operating conditions. ddr nder qq tpc output pin dr ndr c qd qd internal data bus output trigger signal figure 11.2 tpc output operation table 11.3 tpc operating conditions nder ddr pin function 0 0 generic input port 1 generic output port 1 0 generic input port (but the dr bit is a read-only bit, and when compare match occurs, the ndr bit value is transferred to the dr bit) 1 tpc pulse output sequential output of up to 16-bit patterns is possible by writing new output data to ndra and ndrb before the next compare match. for information on non-overlapping operation, see section 11.3.4, non-overlapping tpc output. 437 11.3.2 output timing if tpc output is enabled, ndra/ndrb contents are transferred to padr/pbdr and output when the selected compare match event occurs. figure 11.3 shows the timing of these operations for the case of normal output in groups 2 and 3, triggered by compare match a. tcnt gra compare match a signal ndrb pbdr tp to tp 815 n n n m m n + 1 n n figure 11.3 timing of transfer of next data register contents and output (example) 438 11.3.3 normal tpc output sample setup procedure for normal tpc output: figure 11.4 shows a sample procedure for setting up normal tpc output. normal tpc output set next tpc output data compare match? no yes set next tpc output data 16-bit timer setup 16-bit timer setup port and tpc setup 10 11 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. set tior to make gra an output compare register (with output inhibited). set the tpc output trigger period. select the counter clock source with bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. select the counter clear source with bits cclr1 and cclr0. enable the imfa interrupt in tier. the dmac can also be set up to transfer data to the next data register. set the initial output values in the dr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output. set the ddr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output to 1. set the nder bits of the pins to be used for tpc output to 1. select the 16-bit timer compare match event to be used as the tpc output trigger in tpcr. set the next tpc output values in the ndr bits. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. at each imfa interrupt, set the next output values in the ndr bits. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 select gr functions set gra value select counting operation select interrupt request start counter set initial output data select port output enable tpc output select tpc output trigger figure 11.4 setup procedure for normal tpc output (example) 439 example of normal tpc output (example of five-phase pulse output): figure 11.5 shows an example in which the tpc is used for cyclic five-phase pulse output. gra h'0000 ndrb pbdr tp 15 tp 14 tp 13 tp 12 tp 11 time 80 tcnt tcnt value c0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 c0 compare match the 16-bit timer channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that gra is an output compare register and the counter will be cleared by compare match a. the trigger period is set in gra. the imiea bit is set to 1 in tier to enable the compare match a interrupt. h'f8 is written in pbddr and nderb, and bits g3cms1, g3cms0, g2cms1, and g2cms0 are set in tpcr to select compare match in the 16-bit timer channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. output data h'80 is written in ndrb. the timer counter in this 16-bit timer channel is started. when compare match a occurs, the ndrb contents are transferred to pbdr and output. the compare match/input capture a (imfa) interrupt service routine writes the next output data (h'c0) in ndrb. five-phase overlapping pulse output (one or two phases active at a time) can be obtained by writing h'40, h'60, h'20, h'30, h'10, h'18, h'08, h'88 at successive imfa interrupts. if the dmac is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the cpu. 00 80 c0 40 60 20 30 10 18 08 88 80 c0 40 figure 11.5 normal tpc output example (five-phase pulse output) 440 11.3.4 non-overlapping tpc output sample setup procedure for non-overlapping tpc output: figure 11.6 shows a sample procedure for setting up non-overlapping tpc output. non-overlapping tpc output set next tpc output data compare match a? no yes set next tpc output data start counter 16-bit timer setup 16-bit timer setup port and tpc setup set initial output data set up tpc output enable tpc transfer select tpc transfer trigger select non-overlapping groups 1 2 3 4 12 10 11 5 6 7 8 9 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. set tior to make gra and grb output compare registers (with output inhibited). set the tpc output trigger period in grb and the non-overlap margin in gra. select the counter clock source with bits tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr. select the counter clear source with bits cclr1 and cclr0. enable the imfa interrupt in tisra. the dmac can also be set up to transfer data to the next data register. set the initial output values in the dr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output. set the ddr bits of the input/output port pins to be used for tpc output to 1. set the nder bits of the pins to be used for tpc output to 1. in tpcr, select the 16-bit timer compare match event to be used as the tpc output trigger. in tpmr, select the groups that will operate in non-overlap mode. set the next tpc output values in the ndr bits. set the str bit to 1 in tstr to start the timer counter. at each imfa interrupt, write the next output value in the ndr bits. select gr functions set gr values select counting operation select interrupt requests figure 11.6 setup procedure for non-overlapping tpc output (example) 441 example of non-overlapping tpc output (example of four-phase complementary non- overlapping output): figure 11.7 shows an example of the use of tpc output for four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output. grb h'0000 ndrb pbdr tp 15 tp 14 tp 13 tp 12 tp 11 tp 10 tp 9 tp 8 time 95 00 65 95 59 56 95 65 05 65 41 59 50 56 14 95 05 65 tcnt period is set in grb. the non-overlap margin is set in gra. the imiea bit is set to 1 in tisra to enable imfa interrupts. h'ff is written in pbddr and nderb, and bits g3cms1, g3cms0, g2cms1, and g2cms0 are set in tpcr to select compare match in the 16-bit timer channel set up in step 1 as the output trigger. bits g3nov and g2nov are set to 1 in tpmr to select non-overlapping output. output data h'95 is written in ndrb. tcnt value non-overlap margin the 16-bit timer channel to be used as the output trigger channel is set up so that gra and grb are output compare registers and the counter will be cleared by compare match b. the tpc output trigger the timer counter in this 16-bit timer channel is started. when compare match b occurs, outputs change from 1 to 0. when compare match a occurs, outputs change from 0 to 1 (the change from 0 to 1 is delayed by the value of gra). the imfa interrupt service routine writes the next output data (h'65) in ndrb. four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output can be obtained by writing h'59, h'56, h'95 at successive imfa interrupts. if the dmac is set for activation by this interrupt, pulse output can be obtained without loading the cpu. gra figure 11.7 non-overlapping tpc output example (four-phase complementary non-overlapping pulse output) 442 11.3.5 tpc output triggering by input capture tpc output can be triggered by 16-bit timer input capture as well as by compare match. if gra functions as an input capture register in the 16-bit timer channel selected in tpcr, tpc output will be triggered by the input capture signal. figure 11.8 shows the timing. tioc pin input capture signal ndr dr n n m figure 11.8 tpc output triggering by input capture (example) 443 11.4 usage notes 11.4.1 operation of tpc output pins tp 0 to tp 15 are multiplexed with 16-bit timer, dmac, address bus, and other pin functions. when 16-bit timer, dmac, or address output is enabled, the corresponding pins cannot be used for tpc output. the data transfer from ndr bits to dr bits takes place, however, regardless of the usage of the pin. pin functions should be changed only under conditions in which the output trigger event will not occur. 11.4.2 note on non-overlapping output during non-overlapping operation, the transfer of ndr bit values to dr bits takes place as follows. 1. ndr bits are always transferred to dr bits at compare match a. 2. at compare match b, ndr bits are transferred only if their value is 0. bits are not transferred if their value is 1. figure 11.9 illustrates the non-overlapping tpc output operation. ddr nder qq tpc output pin dr ndr c qd qd compare match a compare match b figure 11.9 non-overlapping tpc output 444 therefore, 0 data can be transferred ahead of 1 data by making compare match b occur before compare match a. ndr contents should not be altered during the interval from compare match b to compare match a (the non-overlap margin). this can be accomplished by having the imfa interrupt service routine write the next data in ndr, or by having the imfa interrupt activate the dmac. the next data must be written before the next compare match b occurs. figure 11.10 shows the timing relationships. compare match a compare match b ndr write ndr ndr write dr 0/1 output 0/1 output 0 output 0 output do not write to ndr in this interval do not write to ndr in this interval write to ndr in this interval write to ndr in this interval figure 11.10 non-overlapping operation and ndr write timing 445 section 12 watchdog timer 12.1 overview the h8/3067 has an on-chip watchdog timer (wdt). the wdt has two selectable functions: it can operate as a watchdog timer to supervise system operation, or it can operate as an interval timer. as a watchdog timer, it generates a reset signal for the h8/3067 chip if a system crash allows the timer counter (tcnt) to overflow before being rewritten. in interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is requested at each tcnt overflow. 12.1.1 features wdt features are listed below. ? selection of eight counter clock sources /2, /32, /64, /128, /256, /512, /2048, or /4096 ? interval timer option ? timer counter overflow generates a reset signal or interrupt. the reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation. an interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. ? watchdog timer reset signal resets the entire h8/3067 internally, and can also be output externally. the reset signal generated by timer counter overflow during watchdog timer operation resets the entire h8/3067 internally. an external reset signal can be output from the reso pin to reset other system devices simultaneously. this function is not provided in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. 446 12.1.2 block diagram figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of the wdt. /2 /32 /64 /128 /256 /512 /2048 /4096 tcnt tcsr rstcsr reset control interrupt signal reset (internal, external) (interval timer) interrupt control overflow clock clock selector read/ write control internal data bus internal clock sources legend tcnt: tcsr: rstcsr: timer counter timer control/status register reset control/status register figure 12.1 wdt block diagram 12.1.3 pin configuration table 12.1 describes the wdt output pin* 1 . table 12.1 wdt pin name abbreviation i/o function reset output reso output* 2 external output of the watchdog timer reset signal notes: 1. not present in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. 2. open-drain output. 447 12.1.4 register configuration table 12.2 summarizes the wdt registers. table 12.2 wdt registers address* 1 write* 2 read name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fff8c h'fff8c timer control/status register tcsr r/(w)* 3 h'18 h'fff8d timer counter tcnt r/w h'00 h'fff8e h'fff8f reset control/status register rstcsr r/(w)* 3 h'3f notes: 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. write word data starting at this address. 3. only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 448 12.2 register descriptions 12.2.1 timer counter (tcnt) tcnt is an 8-bit readable and writable up-counter. bit initial value read/write note: tcnt is write-protected by a password. for details see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 0 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w when the tme bit is set to 1 in tcsr, tcnt starts counting pulses generated from an internal clock source selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in tcsr. when the count overflows (changes from h'ff to h'00), the ovf bit is set to 1 in tcsr. tcnt is initialized to h'00 by a reset and when the tme bit is cleared to 0. 449 12.2.2 timer control/status register (tcsr) tcsr is an 8-bit readable and writable register. its functions include selecting the timer mode and clock source. bit initial value read/write notes: tcsr is write-protected by a password. for details see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 7 ovf 0 r/(w) 6 wt/it 0 r/w 5 tme 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w overflow flag status flag indicating overflow clock select these bits select the tcnt clock source timer mode select selects the mode timer enable selects whether tcnt runs or halts reserved bits * bits 7 to 5 are initialized to 0 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 2 to 0 are initialized to 0 by a reset. in software standby mode bits 2 to 0 are not initialized, but retain their previous values. 450 bit 7?verflow flag (ovf): this status flag indicates that the timer counter has overflowed from h'ff to h'00. bit 7 ovf description 0 [clearing condition] cleared by reading ovf when ovf = 1, then writing 0 in ovf (initial value) 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt changes from h'ff to h'00 bit 6?imer mode select (wt/ it ): selects whether to use the wdt as a watchdog timer or interval timer. if used as an interval timer, the wdt generates an interval timer interrupt request when tcnt overflows. if used as a watchdog timer, the wdt generates a reset signal when tcnt overflows. bit 6 wt/ it description 0 interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts (initial value) 1 watchdog timer: generates a reset signal bit 5?imer enable (tme): selects whether tcnt runs or is halted. when wt/ it = 1, clear the software standby bit (ssby) to 0 in syscr before setting tme. when setting ssby to 1, tme should be cleared to 0. bit 5 tme description 0 tcnt is initialized to h'00 and halted (initial value) 1 tcnt is counting bits 4 and 3?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 451 bits 2 to 0?lock select 2 to 0 (cks2/1/0): these bits select one of eight internal clock sources, obtained by prescaling the system clock ( ), for input to tcnt. bit 2 cks2 bit 1 cks1 bit 0 cks0 description 000 /2 (initial value) 1 /32 10 /64 1 /128 100 /256 1 /512 10 /2048 1 /4096 12.2.3 reset control/status register (rstcsr) rstcsr is an 8-bit readable and writable register that indicates when a reset signal has been generated by watchdog timer overflow, and controls external output of the reset signal. bit initial value read/write notes: rstcsr is write-protected by a password. for details see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. * only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 7 wrst 0 r/(w)* 6 rstoe 0 r/w 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 1 2 1 1 1 watchdog timer reset indicates that a reset signal has been generated reserved bits reset output enable enables or disables external output of the reset signal bits 7 and 6 are initialized by input of a reset signal at the res pin. they are not initialized by reset signals generated by watchdog timer overflow. 452 bit 7?atchdog timer reset (wrst): during watchdog timer operation, this bit indicates that tcnt has overflowed and generated a reset signal. this reset signal resets the entire h8/3067 chip internally. if bit rstoe is set to 1, this reset signal is also output (low) at the reso pin to initialize external system devices. note that there is no reso pin in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. bit 7 wrst description 0 [clearing condition] reset signal at res pin. read wrst when wrst =1, then write 0 in wrst. (initial value) 1 [setting condition] set when tcnt overflow generates a reset signal during watchdog timer operation bit 6?eset output enable (rstoe): enables or disables external output at the reso pin of the reset signal generated if tcnt overflows during watchdog timer operation. note that there is no reso pin in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. bit 6 rstoe description 0 reset signal is not output externally (initial value) (initial value) 1 reset signal is output externally bits 5 to 0?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 453 12.2.4 notes on register access the watchdog timer? tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr registers differ from other registers in being more difficult to write. the procedures for writing and reading these registers are given below. writing to tcnt and tcsr: these registers must be written by a word transfer instruction. they cannot be written by byte instructions. figure 12.2 shows the format of data written to tcnt and tcsr. tcnt and tcsr both have the same write address. the write data must be contained in the lower byte of the written word. the upper byte must contain h'5a (password for tcnt) or h'a5 (password for tcsr). this transfers the write data from the lower byte to tcnt or tcsr. 15 8 7 0 h'5a write data address h'fff8c * 15 8 7 0 h'a5 write data address h'fff8c * tcnt write tcsr write note: lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. * figure 12.2 format of data written to tcnt and tcsr 454 writing to rstcsr: rstcsr must be written by a word transfer instruction. it cannot be written by byte transfer instructions. figure 12.3 shows the format of data written to rstcsr. to write 0 in the wrst bit, the write data must have h'a5 in the upper byte and h'00 in the lower byte. the data (h'00) in the lower byte is written to rstcsr, clearing the wrst bit to 0. to write to the rstoe bit, the upper byte must contain h'5a and the lower byte must contain the write data. writing this word transfers a write data value into the rstoe bit. 15 8 7 0 h'a5 h'00 address h'fff8e* 15 8 7 0 h'5a write data address h'fff8e* writing 0 in wrst bit writing to rstoe bit note: lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. * figure 12.3 format of data written to rstcsr reading tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr: these registers are read like other registers. reading tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr: these registers are read like other registers. byte transfer instructions can be used. the read addresses are h'fff8c for tcsr, h'fff8d for tcnt, and h'fff8f for rstcsr, as listed in table 12-3. table 12.3 read addresses of tcnt, tcsr, and rstcsr address* register h'fff8c tcsr h'fff8d tcnt h'fff8f rstcsr note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 455 12.3 operation operations when the wdt is used as a watchdog timer and as an interval timer are described below. 12.3.1 watchdog timer operation figure 12.4 illustrates watchdog timer operation. to use the wdt as a watchdog timer, set the wt/ it and tme bits to 1 in tcsr. software must prevent tcnt overflow by rewriting the tcnt value (normally by writing h'00) before overflow occurs. if tcnt fails to be rewritten and overflows due to a system crash etc., the h8/3067 is internally reset for a duration of 518 states. the watchdog reset signal can be externally output from the reso pin to reset external system devices. the reset signal is output externally for 132 states. external output can be enabled or disabled by the rstoe bit in rstcsr. the reso pin function is not available in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. a watchdog reset has the same vector as a reset generated by input at the res pin. software can distinguish a res reset from a watchdog reset by checking the wrst bit in rstcsr. if a res reset and a watchdog reset occur simultaneously, the res reset takes priority. h 'ff h '00 r eso wdt overflow start h'00 written in tcnt reset tme set to 1 h'00 written in tcnt i nternal r eset signal 518 states 132 states t cnt count v alue ovf = 1 figure 12.4 operation in watchdog timer mode 456 12.3.2 interval timer operation figure 12.5 illustrates interval timer operation. to use the wdt as an interval timer, clear bit wt/ it to 0 and set bit tme to 1 in tcsr. an interval timer interrupt request is generated at each tcnt overflow. this function can be used to generate interval timer interrupts at regular intervals. tcnt count value time t interval timer interrupt interval timer interrupt interval timer interrupt interval timer interrupt wt/ = 0 tme = 1 it h'ff h'00 figure 12.5 interval timer operation 457 12.3.3 timing of setting of overflow flag (ovf) figure 12.6 shows the timing of setting of the ovf flag. the ovf flag is set to 1 when tcnt overflows. at the same time, a reset signal is generated in watchdog timer operation, or an interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer operation. tcnt overflow signal ovf h'ff h'00 figure 12.6 timing of setting of ovf 458 12.3.4 timing of setting of watchdog timer reset bit (wrst) the wrst bit in rstcsr is valid when bits wt/ it and tme are both set to 1 in tcsr. figure 12.7 shows the timing of setting of wrst and the internal reset timing. the wrst bit is set to 1 when tcnt overflows and ovf is set to 1. at the same time an internal reset signal is generated for the entire h8/3067 chip. this internal reset signal clears ovf to 0, but the wrst bit remains set to 1. the reset routine must therefore clear the wrst bit. tcnt overflow signal ovf wrst h'ff h'00 wdt internal reset figure 12.7 timing of setting of wrst bit and internal reset 459 12.4 interrupts during interval timer operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (wovi). the interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the ovf bit is set to 1 in tcsr. 12.5 usage notes contention between tcnt write and increment: if a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the t 3 state of a write cycle to tcnt, the write takes priority and the timer count is not incremented. see figure 12.8. t cnt t cnt nm counter write data t 3 t 2 t 1 cpu: tcnt write cycle i nternal write s ignal t cnt input c lock figure 12.8 contention between tcnt write and count up changing cks2 to cks0 bit: halt tcnt by clearing the tme bit to 0 in tcsr before changing the values of bits cks2 to cks0. 460 461 section 13 serial communication interface 13.1 overview the h8/3067 series has a serial communication interface (sci) with three independent channels. all three channels have identical functions. the sci can communicate in both asynchronous and synchronous mode. it also has a multiprocessor communication function for serial communication among two or more processors. when the sci is not used, it can be halted to conserve power. each sci channel can be halted independently. for details, see section 20.6, module standby function. the sci also has a smart card interface function conforming to the iso/iec 7816-3 (identification card) standard. this function supports serial communication with a smart card. switching between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface is carried out by means of a register setting. 13.1.1 features sci features are listed below. ? selection of synchronous or asynchronous mode for serial communication asynchronous mode serial data communication is synchronized one channel at a time. the sci can communicate with a universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (uart), asynchronous communication interface adapter (acia), or other chip that employs standard asynchronous communication. it can also communicate with two or more other processors using the multiprocessor communication function. there are twelve selectable serial data transfer formats. ? data length: 7 or 8 bits ? stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits ? parity: even/odd/none ? multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0 ? receive error detection: parity, overrun, and framing errors ? break detection: by reading the rxd level directly when a framing error occurs synchronous mode serial data communication is synchronized with a clock signal. the sci can communicate with other chips having a synchronous communication function. there is a single serial data communication format. ? data length: 8 bits ? receive error detection: overrun errors 462 ? full-duplex communication the transmitting and receiving sections are independent, so the sci can transmit and receive simultaneously. the transmitting and receiving sections are both double-buffered, so serial data can be transmitted and received continuously. ? the following settings can be made for the serial data to be transferred: ? lsb-first or msb-first transfer ? inversion of data logic level ? built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates ? selectable transmit/receive clock sources: internal clock from baud rate generator, or external clock from the sck pin ? four types of interrupts transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive-error interrupts are requested independently. the transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts from sci0 can activate the dma controller (dmac) to transfer data. features of the smart card interface are listed below. ? asynchronous communication ? data length: 8 bits ? parity bits generated and checked ? error signal output in receive mode (parity error) ? error signal detect and automatic data retransmit in transmit mode ? supports both direct convention and inverse convention ? built-in baud rate generator with selectable bit rates ? three types of interrupts transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and transmit/receive-error interrupts are requested independently. the transmit-data-empty and receive-data-full interrupts can activate the dma controller (dmac) to transfer data. 463 13.1.2 block diagram figure 13.1 shows a block diagram of the sci. rdr rsr tdr tsr ssr scr smr scmr brr / 4 /16 /64 rxd txd sck tei txi rxi eri legend rsr : receive shift register rdr : receive data register tsr : transmit shift register tdr : transmit data register smr : serial mode register scr : serial control register ssr : serial status register brr : bit rate register scmr : smart card mode register module data bus bus interface internal data bus parity generate parity check transmit/receive control baud rate generator clock external clock figure 13.1 sci block diagram 464 13.1.3 input/output pins the sci has serial pins for each channel as listed in table 13.1. table 13.1 sci pins channel name abbreviation i/o function 0 serial clock pin sck 0 input/output sci 0 clock input/output receive data pin rxd 0 input sci 0 receive data input transmit data pin txd 0 output sci 0 transmit data output 1 serial clock pin sck 1 input/output sci 1 clock input/output receive data pin rxd 1 input sci 1 receive data input transmit data pin txd 1 output sci 1 transmit data output 2 serial clock pin sck 2 input/output sci 2 clock input/output receive data pin rxd 2 input sci 2 receive data input transmit data pin txd 2 output sci 2 transmit data output 465 13.1.4 register configuration the sci has internal registers as listed in table 13.2. these registers select asynchronous or synchronous mode, specify the data format and bit rate, control the transmitter and receiver sections, and specify switching between the serial communication interface and smart card interface. table 13.2 sci registers channel address* 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value 0 h?ffb0 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h?ffb1 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h?ffb2 serial control register scr r/w h'00 h?ffb3 transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h?ffb4 serial status register ssr r/(w)* 2 h'84 h?ffb5 receive data register rdr r h'00 h?ffb6 smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 1 h?ffb8 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h?ffb9 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h?ffba serial control register scr r/w h'00 h?ffbb transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h?ffbc serial status register ssr r/(w)* 2 h'84 h?ffbd receive data register rdr r h'00 h?ffbe smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 2 h?ffc0 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h?ffc1 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h?ffc2 serial control register scr r/w h'00 h?ffc3 transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h?ffc4 serial status register ssr r/(w)* 2 h'84 h?ffc5 receive data register rdr r h'00 h?ffc6 smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 notes: 1. indicates the lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. only 0 can be written, to clear flags. 466 13.2 register descriptions 13.2.1 receive shift register (rsr) rsr is the register that receives serial data. bit 7 6 5432 10 read/write the sci loads serial data input at the rxd pin into rsr in the order received, lsb (bit 0) first, thereby converting the data to parallel data. when one byte of data has been received, it is automatically transferred to rdr. the cpu cannot read or write rsr directly. 13.2.2 receive data register (rdr) rdr is the register that stores received serial data. bit 7654321 0 initial value read/write r 0 0000 0 0 0 r r r r r r r when the sci has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received data from rsr into rdr for storage, completing the receive operation. rsr is then ready to receive the next data. this double-buffering allows data to be received continuously. rdr is a read-only register. its contents cannot be modified by the cpu. rdr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 467 13.2.3 transmit shift register (tsr) tsr is the register that transmits serial data. bit 7 6 5432 10 read/write the sci loads transmit data from tdr to tsr, then transmits the data serially from the txd pin, lsb (bit 0) first. after transmitting one data byte, the sci automatically loads the next transmit data from tdr into tsr and starts transmitting it. if the tdre flag is set to 1 in ssr, however, the sci does not load the tdr contents into tsr. the cpu cannot read or write rsr directly. 13.2.4 transmit data register (tdr) tdr is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. bit 7 6 54 3 2 1 0 initial value read/write r/w 11 1111 11 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w when the sci detects that tsr is empty, it moves transmit data written in tdr from tdr into tsr and starts serial transmission. continuous serial transmission is possible by writing the next transmit data in tdr during serial transmission from tsr. the cpu can always read and write tdr. tdr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. 468 13.2.5 serial mode register (smr) smr is an 8-bit register that specifies the sci's serial communication format and selects the clock source for the baud rate generator. c/ a chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 r/w 00000000 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w initial value read/write bit 76 54 32 1 0 clock select 1/0 these bits select the baud rate generator's clock source communication mode selects asynchronous or synchronous mode character length selects character length in asynchronous mode parity enable enables or disables the addition of a parity bit parity mode selects even or odd parity stop bit length selects the stop bit length multiprocessor mode selects the multiprocessor function the cpu can always read and write smr. smr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?ommunication mode (c/ a )/gsm mode (gm): the function of this bit differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. its function is switched with the smif bit in scmr. 469 for serial communication interface (smif bit in scmr cleared to 0): selects whether the sci operates in asynchronous or synchronous mode. bit 7 c/ a description 0 asynchronous mode (initial value) 1 synchronous mode for smart card interface (smif bit in scmr set to 1): selects gsm mode for the smart card interface. bit 7 gm description 0 the tend flag is set 12.5 etu after the start bit (initial value) 1 the tend flag is set 11.0 etu after the start bit note: etu: elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) bit 6?haracter length (chr): selects 7-bit or 8-bits data length in asynchronous mode. in synchronous mode, the data length is 8 bits regardless of the chr setting, bit 6 chr description 0 8-bit data (initial value) 1 7-bit data* note: * when 7-bit data is selected, the msb (bit 7) of tdr is not transmitted. bit 5?arity enable (pe): in asynchronous mode, this bit enables or disables the addition of a parity bit to transmit data, and the checking of the parity bit in receive data. in synchronous mode, the parity bit is neither added nor checked, regardless of the pe bit setting. bit 5 pe description 0 parity bit not added or checked (initial value) 1 parity bit added and checked* note: * when pe bit is set to 1, an even or odd parity bit is added to transmit data according to the even or odd parity mode selection by the o/ e bit, and the parity bit in receive data is checked to see that it matches the even or odd mode selected by the o/ e bit. 470 bit 4?arity mode (o/ e ): selects even or odd parity. the o/ e bit setting is only valid when the pe bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and checking, in asynchronous mode. the o/ e bit setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when parity addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode. bit 4 o/ e description 0 even parity* 1 (initial value) 1 odd parity* 2 notes: 1. when even parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an even number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. receive data must have an even number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. 2. when odd parity is selected, the parity bit added to transmit data makes an odd number of 1s in the transmitted character and parity bit combined. receive data must have an odd number of 1s in the received character and parity bit combined. bit 3?top bit length (stop): selects one or two stop bits in asynchronous mode. this setting is used only in asynchronous mode. in synchronous mod no stop bit is added, so the stop bit setting is ignored. bit 3 stop description 0 1 stop bit* 1 (initial value) 1 2 stop bits* 2 notes: 1. one stop bit (with value 1) is added to the end of each transmitted character. 2. two stop bits (with value 1) are added to the end of each transmitted character. in receiving, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the stop bit setting. if the second stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit. if the second stop bit is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next incoming character. bit 2?ultiprocessor mode (mp): selects a multiprocessor format. when a multiprocessor format is selected, parity settings made by the pe and o/ e bits are ignored. the mp bit setting is valid only in asynchronous mode. it is ignored in synchronous mode. for further information on the multiprocessor communication function, see section 13.3.3, multiprocessor communication. bit 2 mp description 0 multiprocessor function disabled (initial value) 1 multiprocessor format selected 471 bits 1 and 0?lock select 1 and 0 (cks1/0): these bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud rate generator. four clock sources are available: , /4, /16, and /64. for the relationship between the clock source, bit rate register setting, and baud rate, see section 13.2.8, bit rate register (brr). bit 1 cks1 bit 0 cks0 description 00 (initial value) 01 /4 10 /16 11 /64 472 13.2.6 serial control register (scr) scr register enables or disables the sci transmitter and receiver, enables or disables serial clock output in asynchronous mode, enables or disables interrupts, and selects the transmit/receive clock source. bit 7 6 5 4 3210 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 initial value read/write r/w 0 00000 0 0 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w transmit-end interrupt enable enables or disables transmit-end interrupts (tei) multiprocessor interrupt enable enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts receive enable enables or disables the receiver transmit enable enables or disables the transmitter receive interrupt enable enables or disables receive-data-full interrupts (rxi) and receive-error interrupts (eri) transmit interrupt enable enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupts (txi) clock enable 1/0 hese bits select the sci clock source the cpu can always read and write scr. scr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 473 bit 7?ransmit interrupt enable (tie): enables or disables the transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) requested when the tdre flag in ssr is set to 1 due to transfer of serial transmit data from tdr to tsr. bit 7 tie description 0 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is disabled* (initial value) 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is enabled note: * txi interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the tdre flag, then clearing it to 0; or by clearing the tie bit to 0. bit 6?eceive interrupt enable (rie): enables or disables the receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) requested when the rdrf flag in ssr is set to 1 due to transfer of serial receive data from rsr to rdr; also enables or disables the receive-error interrupt (eri). bit 6 rie description 0 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are disabled* (initial value) 1 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are enabled note: * rxi and eri interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the rdrf, fer, per, or orer flag, then clearing the flag to 0; or by clearing the rie bit to 0. bit 5?ransmit enable (te): enables or disables the start of sci serial transmitting operations. bit 5 te description 0 transmitting disabled* 1 (initial value) 1 transmitting enabled* 2 notes: 1. the tdre flag is fixed at 1 in ssr. 2. in the enabled state, serial transmission starts when the tdre flag in ssr is cleared to 0 after writing of transmit data into tdr. select the transmit format in smr before setting the te bit to 1. 474 bit 4?eceive enable (re): enables or disables the start of sci serial receiving operations. bit 4 re description 0 receiving disabled* 1 (initial value) 1 receiving enabled* 2 notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 does not affect the rdrf, fer, per, and orer flags. these flags retain their previous values. 2. in the enabled state, serial receiving starts when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode, or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode. select the receive format in smr before setting the re bit to 1. bit 3?ultiprocessor interrupt enable (mpie): enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts. the mpie bit setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only if the mp bit is set to 1 in smr. the mpie bit setting is ignored in synchronous mode or when the mp bit is cleared to 0. bit 3 mpie description 0 multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) (initial value) clearing conditions (1) the mpie bit is cleared to 0 (2) mpb = 1 in received data 1 multiprocessor interrupts are enabled* receive-data-full interrupts (rxi), receive-error interrupts (eri), and setting of the rdrf, fer, and orer status flags in ssr are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received. note: * the sci does not transfer receive data from rsr to rdr, does not detect receive errors, and does not set the rdrf, fer, and orer flags in ssr. when it receives data in which mpb = 1, the sci sets the mpb bit to 1 in ssr, automatically clears the mpie bit to 0, enables rxi and eri interrupts (if the tie and rie bits in scr are set to 1), and allows the fer and orer flags to be set. bit 2?ransmit-end interrupt enable (teie): enables or disables the transmit-end interrupt (tei) requested if tdr does not contain valid transmit data when the msb is transmitted. bit 2 teie description 0 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are disabled* (initial value) 1 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are enabled* note: * tei interrupt requests can be cleared by reading the value 1 from the tdre flag in ssr, then clearing the tdre flag to 0, thereby also clearing the tend flag to 0; or by clearing the teie bit to 0. 475 bits 1 and 0?lock enable 1 and 0 (cke1/0): the function of these bits differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. their function is switched with the smif bit in scmr. for serial communication interface (smif bit in scmr cleared to 0): these bits select the sci clock source and enable or disable clock output from the sck pin. depending on the settings of cke1 and cke0, the sck pin can be used for generic input/output, serial clock output, or serial clock input. the cke0 setting is valid only in asynchronous mode, and only when the sci is internally clocked (cke1 = 0). the cke0 setting is ignored in synchronous mode, or when an external clock source is selected (cke1 = 1). select the sci operating mode in smr before setting the cke1 and cke0 bits . for further details on selection of the sci clock source, see table 13.9 in section 13.3, operation. bit 1 cke1 bit 0 cke0 description 0 0 asynchronous mode internal clock, sck pin available for generic input/output* 1 synchronous mode internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output* 1 0 1 asynchronous mode internal clock, sck pin used for clock output* 2 synchronous mode internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output 1 0 asynchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for clock input* 3 synchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input 1 1 asynchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for clock input* 3 synchronous mode external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input notes: 1. initial value 2. the output clock frequency is the same as the bit rate. 3. the input clock frequency is 16 times the bit rate. 476 for smart card interface (smif bit in scmr set to 1): these bits, together with the gm bit in smr, determine whether the sck pin is used for generic input/output or as the serial clock output pin. smr gm bit 1 cke1 bit 0 cke0 description 0 0 0 sck pin available for generic input/output (initial value) 0 0 1 sck pin used for clock output 1 0 0 sck pin output fixed low 1 0 1 sck pin used for clock output 1 1 0 sck pin output fixed high 1 1 1 sck pin used for clock output 13.2.7 serial status register (ssr) ssr is an 8-bit register containing multiprocessor bit values, and status flags that indicate the operating status of the sci. 477 initial value read/write r r/w 0 1000100 bit 76 54 32 1 0 multiprocessor bit transfer value of multiprocessor bit to be transmitted r/(w)* 1 r/(w)* 1 r/(w)* 1 r/(w)* 1 r/(w)* 1 r tdre rdrf orer fer/ers per tend mpb mpbt multiprocessor bit stores the received multiprocessor bit value transmit end * 2 status flag indicating end of transmission parity error status flag indicating detection of a receive parity error framing error (fer)/error signal status (ers) * 2 status flag indicating detection of a receive framing error, or flag indicating detection of an error signal overrun error status flag indicating detection of a receive overrun error receive data register full status flag indicating that data has been received and stored in rdr transmit data register empty status flag indicating that transmit data has been transferred from tdr into tsr and new data can be written in tdr notes: *1. only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. *2. function differs between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface. the cpu can always read and write ssr, but cannot write 1 in the tdre, rdrf, orer, per, and fer flags. these flags can be cleared to 0 only if they have first been read while set to 1. the tend and mpb flags are read-only bits that cannot be written. ssr is initialized to h'84 by a reset and in standby mode. 478 bit 7?ransmit data register empty (tdre): indicates that the sci has loaded transmit data from tdr into tsr and the next serial data can be written in tdr. bit 7 tdre description 0 tdr contains valid transmit data clearing conditions read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre the dmac writes data in tdr 1 tdr does not contain valid transmit data (initial value) setting conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode the te bit in scr is cleared to 0 tdr contents are loaded into tsr, so new data can be written in tdr bit 6?eceive data register full (rdrf): indicates that rdr contains new receive data. bit 6 rdrf description 0 rdr does not contain new receive data (initial value) clearing conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode read rdrf when rdrf = 1, then write 0 in rdrf the dmac reads data from rdr 1 rdr contains new receive data setting condition serial data is received normally and transferred from rsr to rdr note: the rdr contents and the rdrf flag are not affected by detection of receive errors or by clearing of the re bit to 0 in scr. they retain their previous values. if the rdrf flag is still set to 1 when reception of the next data ends, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost. 479 bit 5?verrun error (orer): indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to an overrun error. bit 5 orer description 0 receiving is in progress or has ended normally* 1 (initial value) clearing conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode read orer when orer = 1, then write 0 in orer 1 a receive overrun error occurred* 2 setting condition reception of the next serial data ends when rdrf = 1 notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 in scr does not affect the orer flag, which retains its previous value. 2. rdr continues to hold the receive data prior to the overrun error, so subsequent receive data is lost. serial receiving cannot continue while the orer flag is set to 1. in synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. bit 4?raming error (fer)/error signal status (ers): the function of this bit differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. its function is switched with the smif bit in scmr. for serial communication interface (smif bit in scmr cleared to 0): indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a framing error in asynchronous mode. bit 4 fer description 0 receiving is in progress or has ended normally* 1 (initial value) clearing conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode read fer when fer = 1, then write 0 in fer 1 a receive framing error occurred* 2 setting condition the stop bit at the end of the receive data is checked and found to be 0 notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 in scr does not affect the fer flag, which retains its previous value. 2. when the stop bit length is 2 bits, only the first bit is checked. the second stop bit is not checked. when a framing error occurs the sci transfers the receive data into rdr but does not set the rdrf flag. serial receiving cannot continue while the fer flag is set to 1. in synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. 480 for smart card interface (smif bit in scmr set to 1): indicates the status of the error signal sent back from the receiving side during transmission. framing errors are not detected in smart card interface mode. bit 4 ers description 0 normal reception, no error signal* (initial value) clearing conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode read ers when ers = 1, then write 0 in ers 1 an error signal has been sent from the receiving side indicating detection of a parity error setting condition the error signal is low when sampled note: * clearing the te bit to 0 in scr does not affect the ers flag, which retains its previous value. bit 3?arity error (per): indicates that data reception ended abnormally due to a parity error in asynchronous mode. bit 3 per description 0 receiving is in progress or has ended normally* 1 (initial value) clearing conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode read per when per = 1, then write 0 in per 1 a receive parity error occurred* 2 setting condition the number of 1s in receive data, including the parity bit, does not match the even or odd parity setting of o/ e in smr notes: 1. clearing the re bit to 0 in scr does not affect the per flag, which retains its previous value. 2. when a parity error occurs the sci transfers the receive data into rdr but does not set the rdrf flag. serial receiving cannot continue while the per flag is set to 1. in synchronous mode, serial transmitting is also disabled. bit 2?ransmit end (tend): the function of this bit differs for the normal serial communication interface and for the smart card interface. its function is switched with the smif bit in scmr. for serial communication interface (smif bit in scmr cleared to 0): indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was transmitted tdr did not contain valid transmit data, so transmission has ended. the tend flag is a read-only bit and cannot be written. 481 bit 2 tend description 0 transmission is in progress clearing conditions read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre the dmac writes data in tdr 1 end of transmission (initial value) setting conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode the te bit in scr is cleared to 0 tdre is 1 when the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit character is transmitted for smart card interface (smif bit in scmr set to 1): indicates that when the last bit of a serial character was transmitted tdr did not contain valid transmit data, so transmission has ended. the tend flag is a read-only bit and cannot be written. bit 2 tend description 0 transmission is in progress clearing conditions read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre the dmac writes data in tdr 1 end of transmission (initial value) setting conditions the chip is reset or enters standby mode the te bit is cleared to 0 in scr and the fer/ers bit is also cleared to 0 tdre is 1 and fer/ers is 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu (when gm = 0) or 1.0 etu (when gm = 1) after a 1-byte serial character is transmitted note: etu: elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) bit 1?ultiprocessor bit (mpb): stores the value of the multiprocessor bit in the receive data when a multiprocessor format is used in asynchronous mode. mpb is a read-only bit, and cannot be written. bit 1 mpb description 0 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0* (initial value) 1 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 note: * if the re bit in scr is cleared to 0 when a multiprocessor format is selected, mpb retains its previous value. 482 bit 0?ultiprocessor bit transfer (mpbt): stores the value of the multiprocessor bit added to transmit data when a multiprocessor format in selected for transmitting in asynchronous mode. the mpbt bit setting is ignored in synchronous mode, when a multiprocessor format is not selected, or when the sci cannot transmit. bit 1 mpbt description 0 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 (initial value) 1 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 483 13.2.8 bit rate register (brr) brr is an 8-bit register that., together with the cks1 and cks0 bits in smr that select the baud rate generator clock source, determines the serial communication bit rate. bit initial value read/write 7 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 6 1 11 1 11 11 5 4 32 1 0 the cpu can always read and write brr. brr is initialized to h'ff by a reset and in standby mode. each sci channel has independent baud rate generator control, so different values can be set in the three channels. table 13.3 shows examples of brr settings in asynchronous mode. table 13.4 shows examples of brr settings in synchronous mode. table 13.3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode bit rate (mhz) (bit/s) 2 2.097152 2.4576 3 n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 1 141 0.03 1 148 0.04 1 174 0.26 1 212 0.03 150 1 103 0.16 1 108 0.21 1 127 0.00 1 155 0.16 300 0 207 0.16 0 217 0.21 0 255 0.00 1 77 0.16 600 0 103 0.16 0 108 0.21 0 127 0.00 0 155 0.16 1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 0.70 0 63 0.00 0 77 0.16 2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.14 0 31 0.00 0 38 0.16 4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 2.48 0 15 0.00 0 19 2.34 9600 0 6 6.99 0 6 2.48 0 7 0.00 0 9 2.34 19200 0 2 8.51 0 2 13.78 0 3 0.00 0 4 2.34 31250 0 1 0.00 0 1 4.86 0 1 22.88 0 2 0.00 38400 0 1 18.62 0 1 14.67 0 1 0.00 484 table 13.3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode (cont) bit rate (mhz) (bit/s) 3.6864 4 4.9152 5 n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 64 0.07 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 0.25 150 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 300 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 600 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1200 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 2400 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 4800 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 31 0.00 0 32 1.36 9600 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 19200 0 5 0.00 0 6 6.99 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73 31250 0 3 0.00 0 4 1.70 0 4 0.00 38400 0 2 0.00 0 2 8.51 0 3 0.00 0 3 1.73 bit rate (mhz) (bit/s) 6 6.144 7.3728 8 n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 106 0.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 0.07 2 141 0.03 150 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 300 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 9600 0 19 2.34 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 19200 0 9 2.34 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 31250 0 5 0.00 0 5 2.40 0 6 5.33 0 7 0.00 38400 0 4 2.34 0 4 0.00 0 5 0.00 0 6 6.99 485 table 13.3 examples of bit rates and brr settings in asynchronous mode (cont) bit rate (mhz) (bit/s) 9.8304 10 12 12.288 n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 174 0.26 2 177 0.25 2 212 0.03 2 217 0.08 150 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16 2 155 0.16 2 159 0.00 300 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 600 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1200 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 2400 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 4800 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 9600 0 31 0.00 0 32 1.36 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 19200 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.73 0 19 2.34 0 19 0.00 31250 0 9 1.70 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 11 2.40 38400 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.73 0 9 2.34 0 9 0.00 bit (mhz) rate 13 14 14.7456 16 18 20 (bit/s) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) n n error (%) 110 2 230 0.08 2 248 0.17 3 64 0.70 3 70 0.03 3 79 0.12 3 88 0.25 150 2 168 0.16 2 181 0.16 2 191 0.00 2 207 0.16 2 233 0.16 3 64 0.16 300 2 84 0.43 2 90 0.16 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16 2 116 0.16 2 129 0.16 600 1 168 0.16 1 181 0.16 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 233 0.16 2 64 0.16 1200 1 84 0.43 1 90 0.16 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 116 0.16 1 129 0.16 2400 0 168 0.16 0 181 0.16 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 233 0.16 1 64 0.16 4800 0 84 0.43 0 90 0.16 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 116 0.16 0 129 0.16 9600 0 41 0.76 0 45 0.93 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 58 0.69 0 64 0.16 19200 0 20 0.76 0 22 0.93 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 28 1.02 0 32 1.36 31250 0 12 0.00 0 13 0.00 0 14 1.70 0 15 0.00 0 17 0.00 0 19 0.00 38400 0 10 3.82 0 10 3.57 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 14 2.34 0 15 1.73 486 table 13.4 examples of bit rates and brr settings in synchronous mode bit (mhz) rate 2 4 8 10 13 16 18 20 (bit/s) nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn 110 3 70 250 2 124 2 249 3 124 3 202 3 249 500 1 249 2 124 2 249 3 101 3 124 3 140 3 155 1k 1 124 1 249 2 124 2 202 2 249 3 69 3 77 2.5k 0 199 1 99 1 199 1 249 2 80 2 99 2 112 2 124 5k 0 99 0 199 1 99 1 124 1 162 1 199 1 224 1 249 10k 0 49 0 99 0 199 0 249 1 80 1 99 1 112 1 124 25k 0 19 0 39 0 79 0 99 0 129 0 159 0 179 0 199 50k 0 9 0 19 0 39 0 49 0 64 0 79 0 89 0 99 100k 0 4 0 9 0 19 0 24 0 39 0 44 0 49 250k 0 1 0 3 0 7 0 9 0 12 0 15 0 17 0 19 500k 0 0* 0 1 0 3 0 4 07 08 0 9 1m 0 0* 0 1 03 04 0 4 2m 0 0* 01 2.5m 00* 4m 0 0* note: settings with an error of 1% or less are recommended. legend blank : no setting available ?: setting possible, but error occurs * : continuous transmission/reception not possible 487 the brr setting is calculated as follows: asynchronous mode: n = 64 2 2n 1 b 10 6 1 synchronous mode: n = 8 2 2n 1 b 10 6 1 b: bit rate (bit/s) n: brr setting for baud rate generator (0 n 255) : system clock frequency (mhz) n: baud rate generator clock source (n = 0, 1, 2, 3) (for the clock sources and values of n, see the following table.) smr settings n clock source cks1 cks0 0 00 1 /4 0 1 2 /16 1 0 3 /64 1 1 the bit rate error in asynchronous mode is calculated as follows: error (%) = (n + 1) b 64 2 2n 1 1 100 10 6 488 table 13.5 shows the maximum bit rates in asynchronous mode for various system clock frequencies. table 13.6 and 13.7 shows the maximum bit rates with external clock input. table 13.5 maximum bit rates for various frequencies (asynchronous mode) settings (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) n n 2 62500 0 0 2.097152 65536 0 0 2.4576 76800 0 0 3 93750 0 0 3.6864 115200 0 0 4 125000 0 0 4.9152 153600 0 0 5 156250 0 0 6 187500 0 0 6.144 192000 0 0 7.3728 230400 0 0 8 250000 0 0 9.8304 307200 0 0 10 312500 0 0 12 375000 0 0 12.288 384000 0 0 14 437500 0 0 14.7456 460800 0 0 16 500000 0 0 17.2032 537600 0 0 18 562500 0 0 20 625000 0 0 489 table 13.6 maximum bit rates with external clock input (asynchronous mode) (mhz) external input clock (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) 2 0.5000 31250 2.097152 0.5243 32768 2.4576 0.6144 38400 3 0.7500 46875 3.6864 0.9216 57600 4 1.0000 62500 4.9152 1.2288 76800 5 1.2500 78125 6 1.5000 93750 6.144 1.5360 96000 7.3728 1.8432 115200 8 2.0000 125000 9.8304 2.4576 153600 10 2.5000 156250 12 3.0000 187500 12.288 3.0720 192000 14 3.5000 218750 14.7456 3.6864 230400 16 4.0000 250000 17.2032 4.3008 268800 18 4.5000 281250 20 5.0000 312500 490 table 13.7 maximum bit rates with external clock input (synchronous mode) (mhz) external input clock (mhz) maximum bit rate (bit/s) 2 0.3333 333333.3 4 0.6667 666666.7 6 1.0000 1000000.0 8 1.3333 1333333.3 10 1.6667 1666666.7 12 2.0000 2000000.0 14 2.3333 2333333.3 16 2.6667 2666666.7 18 3.0000 3000000.0 20 3.3333 3333333.3 491 13.3 operation 13.3.1 overview the sci can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which synchronization is achieved with clock pulses. a smart card interface is also supported as a serial communication function for an ic card interface. selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format for the normal serial communication interface is made in smr, as shown in table 13.8. the sci clock source is selected by the c/ a bit in smr and the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr, as shown in table 13.9. for details of the procedures for switching between lsb-first and msb-first mode and inverting the data logic level, see section 14.2.1, smart card mode register (scmr). for selection of the smart card interface format, see section 14.3.3, data format. asynchronous mode ? data length is selectable: 7 or 8 bits ? parity and multiprocessor bits are selectable, and so is the stop bit length (1 or 2 bits). these selections determine the communication format and character length. ? in receiving, it is possible to detect framing errors, parity errors, overrun errors, and the break state. ? an internal or external clock can be selected as the sci clock source. ? when an internal clock is selected, the sci operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and can output a serial clock signal with a frequency matching the bit rate. ? when an external clock is selected, the external clock input must have a frequency 16 times the bit rate. (the on-chip baud rate generator is not used.) synchronous mode ? the communication format has a fixed 8-bit data length. ? in receiving, it is possible to detect overrun errors. ? an internal or external clock can be selected as the sci clock source. ? when an internal clock is selected, the sci operates using the on-chip baud rate generator, and can output a serial clock signal to external devices. ? when an external clock is selected, the sci operates on the input serial clock. the on-chip baud rate generator is not used. 492 smart card interface ? one frame consists of 8-bit data and a parity bit. ? in transmitting, a guard time of at least two elementary time units (2 etu) is provided between the end of the parity bit and the start of he next frame. (an elementary time unit is the time required to transmit one bit.) ? in receiving, if a parity error is detected, a low error signal level is output for 1 etu, beginning 10.5 etu after the start bit.. ? in transmitting, if an error signal is received, the same data is automatically transmitted again after at least 2 etu. ? only asynchronous communication is supported. there is no synchronous communication function. for details of smart card interface operation, see section 14, smart card interface. table 13.8 smr settings and serial communication formats smr settings sci communication format bit 7 c/ a bit 6 chr bit 2 mp bit 5 pe bit 3 stop mode data length multi- pro- cessor bit parity bit stop bit length 0 0 0 0 0 asyn- 8-bit data absent absent 1 bit 1 chronous 2 bits 10 mode present 1 bit 1 2 bits 1 0 0 7-bit data absent 1 bit 1 2 bits 1 0 present 1 bit 1 2 bits 01 0 asyn- chronous 8-bit data present absent 1 bit 1 mode (multi- 2 bits 1 0 processor 7-bit data 1 bit 1 format) 2 bits 1 syn- chronous mode 8-bit data absent none 493 table 13.9 smr and scr settings and sci clock source selection smr scr setting sci transmit/receive clock bit 7 c/ a bit 1 cke1 bit 0 cke0 mode clock source sck pin function 0 0 0 asynchronous internal sci does not use the sck pin 1 mode outputs clock with frequency matching the bit rate 1 0 external inputs clock with frequency 16 times the bit 1 rate 1 0 0 synchronous internal outputs the serial clock 1 mode 1 0 external inputs the serial clock 1 13.3.2 operation in asynchronous mode in asynchronous mode, each transmitted or received character begins with a start bit and ends with one or two stop bits. serial communication is synchronized one character at a time. the transmitting and receiving sections of the sci are independent, so full-duplex communication is possible. the transmitter and the receiver are both double-buffered, so data can be written and read while transmitting and receiving are in progress, enabling continuous transmitting and receiving. figure 13.2 shows the general format of asynchronous serial communication. in asynchronous serial communication the communication line is normally held in the mark (high) state. the sci monitors the line and starts serial communication when the line goes to the space (low) state, indicating a start bit. one serial character consists of a start bit (low), data (lsb first), parity bit (high or low), and one or two stop bits (high), in that order. when receiving in asynchronous mode, the sci synchronizes at the falling edge of the start bit. the sci samples each data bit on the eighth pulse of a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate. receive data is latched at the center of each bit. 494 1 d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 0/1 1 idle (mark) state 1 (msb) (lsb) 0 1 serial data start bit 1 bit transmit or receive data 7 or 8 bits one unit of data (character or frame) 1 bit, or none parity bit 1 or 2 bits stop bit(s) figure 13.2 data format in asynchronous communication (example: 8-bit data with parity and 2 stop bits) communication formats: table 13.10 shows the 12 communication formats that can be selected in asynchronous mode. the format is selected by settings in smr. 495 table 13.10 serial communication formats (asynchronous mode) 7-bit data stop stop mpb stop mpb stop p stop stop p stop stop smr settings chr pe mp stop 00 0 0 00 0 1 01 0 0 01 0 1 10 0 0 10 0 1 11 0 0 11 0 1 0 10 0 11 1 10 1 11 serial communication format and frame length 123456789101112 stop 8-bit data s 8-bit data s stop p 8-bit data s 8-bit data s stop 7-bit data s 7-bit data s 7-bit data s s 8-bit data s stop stop mpb 8-bit data s 7-bit data s 7-bit data s p stop stop stop stop stop mpb legend s: start bit stop: stop bit p: parity bit mpb: multiprocessor bit 496 clock: an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the sck pin can be selected as the sci transmit/receive clock. the clock source is selected by the c/ a bit in smr and bits cke1 and cke0 in scr. for details of sci clock source selection, see table 13.9. when an external clock is input at the sck pin, it must have a frequency 16 times the desired bit rate. when the sci is operated on an internal clock, it can output a clock signal at the sck pin. the frequency of this output clock is equal to the bit rate. the phase is aligned as shown in figure 13.3 so that the rising edge of the clock occurs at the center of each transmit data bit. d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 0/1 1 1 0 1 frame figure 13.3 phase relationship between output clock and serial data (asynchronous mode) transmitting and receiving data: ? sci initialization (asynchronous mode): before transmitting or receiving data, clear the te and re bits to 0 in scr, then initialize the sci as follows. when changing the communication mode or format, always clear the te and re bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. clearing te to 0 sets the tdre flag to 1 and initializes tsr. clearing re to 0, however, does not initialize the rdrf, per, fer, and orer flags, or rdr, which retain their previous contents. when an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during initialization or subsequent operation, since operation will be unreliable in this case. 497 figure 13.4 shows a sample flowchart for initializing the sci. start of initialization set value in brr select communication format in smr 1-bit interval elapsed? wait (4) (3) (2) (1) yes no 498 ? transmitting serial data (asynchronous mode): figure 13.5 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. yes yes 499 in transmitting serial data, the sci operates as follows: ? the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr. when the tdre flag is cleared to 0, the sci recognizes that tdr contains new data, and loads this data from tdr into tsr. ? after loading the data from tdr to tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmitting. if the tie bit is set to 1 in scr, the sci requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) at this time. serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the txd pin: ? start bit: one 0 bit is output. ? transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, lsb first. ? parity bit or multiprocessor bit: one parity bit (even or odd parity),or one multiprocessor bit is output. formats in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be selected. ? stop bit(s): one or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. ? mark state: output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. ? the sci checks the tdre flag when it outputs the stop bit. if the tdre flag is 0, the sci loads new data from tdr into tsr, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. if the tdre flag is 1, the sci sets the tend flag to 1 in ssr, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. if the teie bit is set to 1 in scr, a transmit-end interrupt (tei) is requested at this time figure 13.6 shows an example of sci transmit operation in asynchronous mode. 0/1 d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 1 0 start bit 0d0d1 d7 1 1 data parity bit stop bit start bit data parity bit stop bit tdre tend idle state (mark state) tei interrupt request txi interrupt request txi interrupt handler writes data in tdr and clears tdre flag to 0 txi interrupt request 1 frame figure 13.6 example of sci transmit operation in asynchronous mode (8-bit data with parity and one stop bit) 500 ? receiving serial data (asynchronous mode): figure 13.7 shows a sample flowchart for receiving serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. yes yes no no 501 yes 502 in receiving, the sci operates as follows: ? the sci monitors the communication line. when it detects a start bit (0 bit), the sci synchronizes internally and starts receiving. ? receive data is stored in rsr in order from lsb to msb. ? the parity bit and stop bit are received. after receiving these bits, the sci carries out the following checks: ? parity check: the number of 1s in the receive data must match the even or odd parity setting of in the o/ e bit in smr. ? stop bit check: the stop bit value must be 1. if there are two stop bits, only the first is checked. ? status check: the rdrf flag must be 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred from rsr into rdr. if these all checks pass, the rdrf flag is set to 1 and the received data is stored in rdr. if one of the checks fails (receive error * ), the sci operates as shown in table 13.11. note: * when a receive error occurs, further receiving is disabled. in receiving, the rdrf flag is not set to 1. be sure to clear the error flags to 0. ? when the rdrf flag is set to 1, if the rie bit is set to 1 in scr, a receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) is requested. if the orer, per, or fer flag is set to 1 and the rie bit in scr is also set to 1, a receive-error interrupt (eri) is requested. table 13.11 receive error conditions receive error abbreviation condition data transfer overrun error orer receiving of next data ends while rdrf flag is still set to 1 in ssr receive data is not transferred from rsr to rdr framing error fer stop bit is 0 receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr parity error per parity of received data differs from even/odd parity setting in smr receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr 503 figure 13.8 shows an example of sci receive operation in asynchronous mode. 0/1 d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 1 0 start bit 0d0d1 d7 1 1 data data parity bit parity bit stop bit stop bit stop bit start bit rdrf fer idle (mark) state framing error, eri request rxi request rxi interrupt handler reads data in rdr and clears rdrf flag to 0 1 frame figure 13.8 example of sci receive operation (8-bit data with parity and one stop bit) 13.3.3 multiprocessor communication the multiprocessor communication function enables several processors to share a single serial communication line. the processors communicate in asynchronous mode using a format with an additional multiprocessor bit (multiprocessor format). in multiprocessor communication, each receiving processor is addressed by an id. a serial communication cycle consists of an id-sending cycle that identifies the receiving processor, and a data-sending cycle. the multiprocessor bit distinguishes id-sending cycles from data-sending cycles. the transmitting processor stars by sending the id of the receiving processor with which it wants to communicate as data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. next the transmitting processor sends transmit data with the multiprocessor bit cleared to 0. receiving processors skip incoming data until they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. when they receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1, receiving processors compare the data with their ids. processors with ids not matching the received data skip further incoming data until they again receive data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1. multiple processors can send and receive data in this way. figure 13.9 shows an example of communication among different processors using a multiprocessor format. 504 communication formats: four formats are available. parity bit settings are ignored when a multiprocessor format is selected. for details see table 13.10. clock: see the description of asynchronous mode. (id=04) (id=01) (id=02) (id=03) transmitting processor receiving processor b receiving processor a receiving processor c receiving processor d h'01 (mpb=1) serial data h'aa (mpb=0) serial communication line id-sending cycle: receiving processor address data-sending cycle: data sent to receiving processor specified by id legend mpb : multiprocessor bit figure 13.9 example of communication among processors using multiprocessor format (sending data h'aa to receiving processor a) transmitting and receiving data: ? transmitting multiprocessor serial data: figure 13.10 shows a sample flowchart for transmitting multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. 505 tend = 1 no no read tend flag in ssr yes yes yes yes no no 506 in transmitting serial data, the sci operates as follows: ? the sci monitors the tdre flag in ssr. when the tdre flag is cleared to 0, the sci recognizes that tdr contains new data, and loads this data from tdr into tsr. ? after loading the data from tdr to tsr, the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 and starts transmitting. if the tie bit is set to 1 in scr, the sci requests a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) at this time. serial transmit data is transmitted in the following order from the txd pin: ? start bit: one 0 bit is output. ? transmit data: 7 or 8 bits are output, lsb first. ? multiprocessor bit: one multiprocessor bit (mpbt value) is output. ? stop bit(s): one or two 1 bits (stop bits) are output. ? mark state: output of 1 bits continues until the start bit of the next transmit data. ? the sci checks the tdre flag when it outputs the stop bit. if the tdre flag is 0, the sci loads new data from tdr into tsr, outputs the stop bit, then begins serial transmission of the next frame. if the tdre flag is 1, the sci sets the tend flag to 1 in ssr, outputs the stop bit, then continues output of 1 bits in the mark state. if the teie bit is set to 1 in scr, a transmit-end interrupt (tei) is requested at this time figure 13.11 shows an example of sci transmit operation using a multiprocessor format. d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 1 0 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0/1 1 data multi- processor bit stop bit start bit data multi- processor bit stop bit tdre tend idle (mark) state tei interrupt request txi interrupt request txi interrupt handler writes data in tdr and clears tdre flag to 0 txi interrupt request 1 frame figure 13.11 example of sci transmit operation (8-bit data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit) ? receiving multiprocessor serial data: figure 13.12 shows a sample flowchart for receiving multiprocessor serial data and indicates the procedure to follow. 507 read rdrf flag in ssr no yes yes yes no yes yes no no no read orer and fer flags in ssr (3) (1) (2) (4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) rdrf = 1 fer orer = 1 fer orer = 1 start receiving own id? 508 yes yes no no 509 figure 13.13 shows an example of sci receive operation using a multiprocessor format. id2 data2 idle (mark) state not own id, so mpie bit is set to 1 again a. own id does not match data b. own id matches data d0 d1 d7 1 1 0 start bit start bit stop bit stop bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0 1 1 data (id1) data (data1) start bit stop bit stop bit data (data1) mpie idle (mark) state 1 mpb rdrf rdr value rdr value rxi interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) mpb detection mpie = 0 rxi interrupt handler reads rdr data and clears rdrf flag to 0 no rxi interrupt request, rdr not updated id1 mpb d0 d1 d7 1 1 0 start bit 0 d0 d1 d7 0 1 1 data (id2) mpie 1 mpb rdrf rxi interrupt request (multiprocessor interrupt) rxi interrupt handler reads rdr data and clears rdrf flag to 0 own id, so receiving continues, with data received by rxi interrupt handler mpb id1 mpie bit is set to 1 again mpb detection mpie = 0 figure 13.13 example of sci receive operation (8-bit data with multiprocessor bit and one stop bit) 13.3.4 synchronous operation in synchronous mode, the sci transmits and receives data in synchronization with clock pulses. this mode is suitable for high-speed serial communication. the sci transmitter and receiver share the same clock but are otherwise independent, so full- duplex communication is possible. the transmitter and the receiver are also double-buffered, so continuous transmitting or receiving is possible by reading or writing data while transmitting or receiving is in progress. 510 figure 13.14 shows the general format in synchronous serial communication. don't care one unit (character or frame) of transfer data msb bit 0 bit 1 bit 3 bit 2 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 lsb don't care serial clock serial data * * note: * high except in continuous transmitting or receiving figure 13.14 data format in synchronous communication in synchronous serial communication, each data bit is placed on the communication line from one falling edge of the serial clock to the next. data is guaranteed valid at the rise of the serial clock. in each character, the serial data bits are transferred in order from lsb (first) to msb (last). after output of the msb, the communication line remains in the state of the msb. in synchronous mode the sci receives data by synchronizing with the rise of the serial clock. communication format: the data length is fixed at 8 bits. no parity bit or multiprocessor bit can be added. clock: an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input from the sck pin can be selected by means of the c/ a bit in smr and the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr. see table 13.6 for details of sci clock source selection. when the sci operates on an internal clock, it outputs the clock source at the sck pin. eight clock pulses are output per transmitted or received character. when the sci is not transmitting or receiving, the clock signal remains in the high state. if receiving in single-character units is required, an external clock should be selected. transmitting and receiving data: ? sci initialization (synchronous mode): before transmitting or receiving data, clear the te and re bits to 0 in scr, then initialize the sci as follows. when changing the communication mode or format, always clear the te and re bits to 0 before following the procedure given below. clearing te to 0 sets the tdre flag to 1 and initializes tsr. note that clearing re to 0, however, does not initialize the rdrf, per, and ore flags, or rdr, which retain their previous contents. 511 figure 13.15 shows a sample flowchart for initializing the sci. 512 ? 513 in transmitting serial data, the sci operates as follows. ? ? ? ? bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 serial clock serial data 1 frame txi interrupt request txi interrupt handler writes data in tdr and clears tdre flag to 0 txi interrupt request tei interrupt request transmit direction tend tdre figure 13.17 example of sci transmit operation ? 514 yes yes no no 515 516 figure 13.19 shows an example of sci receive operation. serial clock serial data rxi interrupt handler reads data in rdr and clears rdrf flag to 0 rxi interrupt request rxi interrupt request overrun error, eri interrupt request orer rdrf bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 6 bit 7 1 frame figure 13.19 example of sci receive operation 517 ? yes no no 518 13.4 sci interrupts the sci has four interrupt request sources: the transmit-end interrupt (tei), receive-error interrupt (eri), receive-data-full interrupt (rxi), and transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi). table 13.12 lists the interrupt sources and indicates their priority. these interrupts can be enabled or disabled by the tie, rie, and teie bits in scr. each interrupt request is sent separately to the interrupt controller. a txi interrupt is requested when the tdre flag is set to 1 in ssr. a tei interrupt is requested when the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr. a txi interrupt request can activate the dmac to transfer data. data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the tdre flag to 0. a tei interrupt request cannot activate the dmac. an rxi interrupt is requested when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr. an eri interrupt is requested when the orer, per, or fer flag is set to 1 in ssr. an rxi interrupt can activate the dmac to transfer data. data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the rdrf flag to 0. an eri interrupt request cannot activate the dmac. the dmac can be activated by interrupts from sci channel 0. table 13.12 sci interrupt sources interrupt source description priority eri receive error (orer, fer, or per) high rxi receive data register full (rdrf) txi transmit data register empty (tdre) tei transmit end (tend) low 13.5 usage notes 13.5.1 notes on use of sci note the following points when using the sci. tdr write and tdre flag: the tdre flag in ssr is a status flag indicating the loading of transmit data from tdr to tsr. the sci sets the tdre flag to 1 when it transfers data from tdr to tsr. data can be written into tdr regardless of the state of the tdre flag. if new data is written in tdr when the tdre flag is 0, the old data stored in tdr will be lost because this data has not yet been transferred to tsr. before writing transmit data in tdr, be sure to check that the tdre flag is set to 1. 519 simultaneous multiple receive errors: table 13.13 shows the state of the ssr status flags when multiple receive errors occur simultaneously. when an overrun error occurs the rsr contents are not transferred to rdr, so receive data is lost. table 13.13 ssr status flags and transfer of receive data ssr status flags receive data transfer rdrf orer fer per rsr rdr receive errors 11 0 0 overrun error 00 1 0 framing error 00 0 1 parity error 11 1 0 overrun error + framing error 11 0 1 overrun error + parity error 00 1 1 framing error + parity error 11 1 1 overrun error + framing error + parity error notes: : receive data is transferred from rsr to rdr. : receive data is not transferred from rsr to rdr. break detection and processing: break signals can be detected by reading the rxd pin directly when a framing error (fer) is detected. in the break state the input from the rxd pin consists of all 0s, so the fer flag is set and the parity error flag (per) may also be set. in the break state the sci receiver continues to operate, so if the fer flag is cleared to 0 it will be set to 1 again. sending a break signal: the input/output condition and level of the txd pin are determined by dr and ddr bits. this feature can be used to send a break signal. after the serial transmitter is initialized, the dr value substitutes for the mark state until the te bit is set to 1 (the txd pin function is not selected until the te bit is set to 1). the ddr and dr bits should therefore be set to 1 beforehand. to send a break signal during serial transmission, clear the dr bit to 0 , then clear the te bit to 0. when the te bit is cleared to 0 the transmitter is initialized, regardless of its current state, so the txd pin becomes an input/output outputting the value 0. 520 receive error flags and transmitter operation (synchronous mode only): when a receive error flag (orer, per, or fer) is set to 1 the sci will not start transmitting, even if the tdre flag is cleared to 0. be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 when starting to transmit. note that clearing the re bit to 0 does not clear the receive error flags to 0. receive data sampling timing in asynchronous mode and receive margin: in asynchronous mode the sci operates on a base clock with 16 times the bit rate frequency. in receiving, the sci synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. receive data is latched at the rising edge of the eighth base clock pulse. see figure 13.21. 15 0 internal base clock 8 clocks 7 0 receive data (rxd) synchronization sampling timing data sampling timing 15 0 d 0 d 1 start bit 16 clocks 7 figure 13.21 receive data sampling timing in asynchronous mode the receive margin in asynchronous mode can therefore be expressed as shown in equation (1). m = (0.5 1 2n d 0.5 n ) (l 0.5) f (1 + f) 100% . . . . . . . . (1) m: receive margin (%) n: ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (n = 16) d: clock duty cycle (l = 0 to 1.0) l: frame length (l = 9 to 12) f: absolute deviation of clock frequency 521 from equation (1), if f = 0 and d = 0.5, the receive margin is 46.875%, as given by equation (2). m = 2 16 ) 100% (0.5 1 d = 0.5, f = 0 = 46.875% . . . . . . . . (2) this is a theoretical value. a reasonable margin to allow in system designs is 20% to 30%. restrictions on use of dmac: ? ? sck d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 tdre t note: in operation with an external clock source, be sure that t >4 states. figure 13.22 example of synchronous transmission using dmac 522 switching from sck pin function to port pin function: ? a a sck/port data te c/a cke1 cke0 bit 7 bit 6 1. end of transmission 4. low-level output 3. c/a= 0 2.te = 0 half-cycle low-level output figure 13.23 operation when switching from sck pin function to port pin function 523 ? a a sck/port data te c/a cke1 cke0 bit 7 bit 6 1. end of transmission 3.cke1= 1 5.cke1= 0 4. c/a= 0 2.te = 0 high-level outputte figure 13.24 operation when switching from sck pin function to port pin function (example of preventing low-level output) 524 525 section 14 smart card interface 14.1 overview an ic card (smart card) interface conforming to the iso/iec 7816-3 (identification card) standard is supported as an extension of the serial communication interface (sci) functions. switchover between the normal serial communication interface and the smart card interface is controlled by a register setting. 14.1.1 features features of the smart card interface supported by the h8/3067 series are listed below. ? asynchronous communication ? data length: 8 bits ? parity bit generation and checking ? transmission of error signal (parity error) in receive mode ? error signal detection and automatic data retransmission in transmit mode ? direct convention and inverse convention both supported ? built-in baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected ? three interrupt sources ? there are three interrupt sources?ransmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and transmit/receive error?hat can issue requests independently. ? the transmit-data-empty interrupt and receive-data-full interrupt can activate the dma controller (dmac) to execute data transfer. 526 14.1.2 block diagram figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of the smart card interface. bus interface tdr rsr rdr module data bus tsr scmr ssr scr transmission/ reception control brr baud rate generator internal data bus rxd txd sck parity generation parity check clock external clock /4 /16 /64 txi rxi eri smr legend scmr: smart card mode register rsr: receive shift register rdr: receive data register tsr: transmit shift register tdr: transmit data register smr: serial mode register scr: serial control register ssr: serial status register brr: bit rate register figure 14.1 block diagram of smart card interface 14.1.3 pin configuration table 14.1 shows the smart card interface pins. table 14.1 smart card interface pins pin name abbreviation i/o function serial clock pin sck i/o clock input/output receive data pin rxd input receive data input transmit data pin txd output transmit data output 527 14.1.4 register configuration the smart card interface has the internal registers listed in table 14.2. the brr, tdr, and rdr registers have their normal serial communication interface functions, as described in section 13, serial communication interface. table 14.2 smart card interface registers channel address* 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value 0 h'fffb0 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h'fffb1 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h'fffb2 serial control register scr r/w h'00 h'fffb3 transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h'fffb4 serial status register ssr r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'fffb5 receive data register rdr r h'00 h'fffb6 smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 1 h'fffb8 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h'fffb9 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h'fffba serial control register scr r/w h'00 h'fffbb transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h'fffbc serial status register ssr r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'fffbd receive data register rdr r h'00 h'fffbe smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 2 h'fffc0 serial mode register smr r/w h'00 h'fffc1 bit rate register brr r/w h'ff h'fffc2 serial control register scr r/w h'00 h'fffc3 transmit data register tdr r/w h'ff h'fffc4 serial status register ssr r/(w) * 2 h'84 h'fffc5 receive data register rdr r h'00 h'fffc6 smart card mode register scmr r/w h'f2 notes: 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. only 0 can be written in bits 7 to 3, to clear the flags. 528 14.2 register descriptions this section describes the new or modified registers and bit functions in the smart card interface. 14.2.1 smart card mode register (scmr) scmr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects smart card interface functions. 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 sdir 0 r/w 0 smif 0 r/w 2 sinv 0 r/w 1 1 bit initial value read/write reserved bits reserved bit smart card interface mode select enables or disables the smart card interface function smart card data invert inverts data logic levels smart card data transfer direction selects the serial/parallel conversion format scmr is initialized to h'f2 by a reset and in standby mode. bits 7 to 4?eserved: read-only bits, always read as 1. bit 3?mart card data transfer direction (sdir): selects the serial/parallel conversion format.* 1 bit 3 sdir description 0 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first (initial value) receive data is stored lsb-first in rdr 1 tdr contents are transmitted msb-first receive data is stored msb-first in rdr 529 bit 2?mart card data invert (sinv): specifies inversion of the data logic level. this function is used in combination with the sdir bit to communicate with inverse-convention cards.* 2 the sinv bit does not affect the logic level of the parity bit. for parity settings, see section 14.3.4, register settings. bit 2 sinv description 0 unmodified tdr contents are transmitted (initial value) receive data is stored unmodified in rdr 1 inverted tdr contents are transmitted receive data is inverted before storage in rdr bit 1?eserved: read-only bit, always read as 1. bit 0?mart card interface mode select (smif): enables the smart card interface function. bit 0 smif description 0 smart card interface function is disabled (initial value) 1 smart card interface function is enabled notes: 1. the function for switching between lsb-first and msb-first mode can also be used with the normal serial communication interface. note that when the communication format data length is set to 7 bits and msb-first mode is selected for the serial data to be transferred, bit 0 of tdr is not transmitted, and only bits 7 to 1 of the received data are valid. 2. the data logic level inversion function can also be used with the normal serial communication interface. note that, when inverting the serial data to be transferred, parity transmission and parity checking is based on the number of high-level periods at the serial data i/o pin, and not on the register value. 14.2.2 serial status register (ssr) the function of ssr bit 4 is modified in smart card interface mode. this change also causes a modification to the setting conditions for bit 2 (tend). 530 7 tdre 1 r/(w)* 6 rdrf 0 r/(w)* 5 orer 0 r/(w)* 4 ers 0 r/(w)* 3 per 0 r/(w)* 0 mpbt 0 r/w 2 tend 1 r 1 mpb 0 r bit initial value read/write transmit end status flag indicating end of transmission error signal status (ers) status flag indicating that an error signal has been received note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bits 7 to 5: these bits operate as in normal serial communication. for details see section 13.2.7, serial status register (ssr). bit 4?rror signal status (ers): in smart card interface mode, this flag indicates the status of the error signal sent from the receiving device to the transmitting device. the smart card interface does not detection framing errors. bit 4 ers description 0 indicates normal transmission, with no error signal returned (initial value) [clearing conditions] the chip is reset, or enters standby mode or module stop mode software reads ers while it is set to 1, then writes 0. 1 indicates that the receiving device sent an error signal reporting a parity error [setting condition] a low error signal was sampled. note: clearing the te bit to 0 in scr does not affect the ers flag, which retains its previous value. bits 3 to 0: these bits operate as in normal serial communication. for details see section 13.2.7, serial status register (ssr). the setting conditions for transmit end (tend), however, are modified as follows. 531 bit 2 tend description 0 transmission is in progress [clearing conditions] software reads tdre while it is set to 1, then writes 0 in the tdre flag. the dmac or dtc writes data in tdr. 1 end of transmission [setting conditions] (initial value) the chip is reset or enters standby mode. the te bit and fer/ers bit are both cleared to 0 in scr. tdre is 1 and fer/ers is 0 at a time 2.5 etu after the last bit of a 1-byte serial character is transmitted (normal transmission). note: an etu (elementary time unit) is the time needed to transmit one bit. 14.2.3 serial mode register (smr) the function of smr bit 7 is modified in smart card interface mode. this change also causes a modification to the function of bits 1 and 0 in the serial control register (scr). 7 gm 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 0 cks0 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write bit 7?sm mode (gm): with the normal smart card interface, this bit is cleared to 0. setting this bit to 1 selects gsm mode, an additional mode for controlling the timing for setting the tend flag that indicates completion of transmission, and the type of clock output used. the details of the additional clock output control mode are specified by the cke1 and cke0 bits in the serial control register (scr). bit 7 gm description 0 normal smart card interface mode operation the tend flag is set 12.5 etu after the beginning of the start bit. clock output on/off control only. (initial value) 1 gsm mode smart card interface mode operation the tend flag is set 11.0 etu after the beginning of the start bit. clock output on/off and fixed-high/fixed-low control. 532 bits 6 to 0: these bits operate as in normal serial communication. for details see section 13.2.5, serial mode register (smr). 14.2.4 serial control register (scr) the function of scr bits 1 and 0 is modified in smart card interface mode 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 0 cke0 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w bit initial value read/write bits 7 to 2: these bits operate as in normal serial communication. for details see section 13.2.6, serial control register (scr). bits 1 and 0?lock enable 1 and 0 (cke1, cke0): these bits select the sci clock source and enable or disable clock output from the sck pin. in smart card interface mode, it is possible to specify a fixed high level or fixed low level for the clock output, in addition to the usual switching between enabling and disabling of the clock output. bit 7 gm bit 1 cke1 bit 0 cke0 description 0 0 0 internal clock/sck pin is i/o port (initial value) 1 internal clock/sck pin is clock output 1 0 internal clock/sck pin is fixed at low output 1 internal clock/sck pin is clock output 1 0 internal clock/sck pin is fixed at high output 1 internal clock/sck pin is clock output 14.3 operation 14.3.1 overview the main features of the smart card interface are as follows. ? one frame consists of 8-bit data plus a parity bit. ? in transmission, a guard time of at least 2 etu (elementary time units: the time for transfer of one bit) is provided between the end of the parity bit and the start of the next frame. ? if a parity error is detected during reception, a low error signal level is output for a1 etu period 10.5 etu after the start bit. 533 ? if an error signal is detected during transmission, the same data is transmitted automatically after the elapse of 2 etu or longer. ? only asynchronous communication is supported; there is no synchronous communication function. 14.3.2 pin connections figure 14.2 shows a pin connection diagram for the smart card interface. in communication with a smart card, since both transmission and reception are carried out on a single data transmission line, the txd pin and rxd pin should both be connected to this line. the data transmission line should be pulled up to v cc with a resistor. when the smart card uses the clock generated on the smart card interface, the sck pin output is input to the clk pin of the smart card. if the smart card uses an internal clock, this connection is unnecessary. the reset signal should be output from one of the h8/3067 series?generic ports. in addition to these pin connections, power and ground connections will normally also be necessary. txd rxd sck px (port) h8/3067 series chip v cc i/o data line clock line reset line clk rst card-processing device smart card figure 14.2 smart card interface connection diagram note: a loop-back test can be performed by setting both re and te to 1 without connecting a smart card. 534 14.3.3 data format figure 14.3 shows the smart card interface data format. in reception in this mode, a parity check is carried out on each frame, and if an error is detected an error signal is sent back to the transmitting device to request retransmission of the data. in transmission, the error signal is sampled and the same data is retransmitted if the error signal is low. ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp no parity error output from transmitting device ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp parity error output from transmitting device de output from receiving device legend ds: start bit d0 to d7: data bits dp: parity bit de: error signal figure 14.3 smart card interface data format the operating sequence is as follows. 1. when the data line is not in use it is in the high-impedance state, and is fixed high with a pull- up resistor. 2. the transmitting device starts transfer of one frame of data. the data frame starts with a start bit (ds, low-level), followed by 8 data bits (d0 to d7) and a parity bit (dp). 3. with the smart card interface, the data line then returns to the high-impedance state. the data line is pulled high with a pull-up resistor. 4. the receiving device carries out a parity check. if there is no parity error and the data is received normally, the receiving device waits for reception of the next data. if a parity error occurs, however, the receiving device outputs an error signal (de, low-level) to request retransmission of the data. after outputting the error signal for the prescribed length of time, the receiving device places the signal line in the high-impedance state again. the signal line is pulled high again by a pull-up resistor. 535 5. if the transmitting device does not receive an error signal, it proceeds to transmit the next data frame. if it receives an error signal, however, it returns to step 2 and transmits the same data again. 14.3.4 register settings table 14.3 shows a bit map of the registers used in the smart card interface. bits indicated as 0 or 1 must be set to the value shown. the setting of other bits is described in this section. table 14.3 smart card interface register settings bit register address *1 bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 smr h'fffb0 gm 0 1 o/ e 1 0 cks1 cks0 brr h'fffb1 brr7 brr6 brr5 brr4 brr3 brr2 brr1 brr0 scr h'fffb2 tie rie te re 0 0 cke1 * 2 cke0 tdr h'fffb3 tdr7 tdr6 tdr5 tdr4 tdr3 tdr2 tdr1 tdr0 ssr h'fffb4 tdre rdrf orer ers per tend 0 0 rdr h'fffb5 rdr7 rdr6 rdr5 rdr4 rdr3 rdr2 rdr1 rdr0 scmr h'fffb6 sdir sinv smif notes: unused bit. 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. when gm is cleared to 0 in smr, the cke1 bit must also be cleared to 0. serial mode register (smr) settings: clear the gm bit to 0 when using the normal smart card interface mode, or set to 1 when using gsm mode. clear the o/ e bit to 0 if the smart card is of the direct convention type, or set to 1 if of the inverse convention type. bits cks1 and cks0 select the clock source of the built-in baud rate generator. see section 14.3.5, clock. bit rate register (brr) settings: brr is used to set the bit rate. see section 14.3.5, clock, for the method of calculating the value to be set. serial control register (scr) settings: the tie, rie, te, and re bits have their normal serial communication functions. see section 13, serial communication interface, for details. the cke1 and cke0 bits specify clock output. to disable clock output, clear these bits to 00; to enable clock output, set these bits to 01. clock output is not performed when the gm bit is set to 1 in smr. clock output can also be fixed low or high. 536 smart card mode register (scmr) settings: clear both the sdir bit and sinv bit cleared to 0 if the smart card is of the direct convention type, and set both to 1 if of the inverse convention type. to use the smart card interface, set the smif bit to 1. the register settings and examples of starting character waveforms are shown below for two smart cards, one following the direct convention and one the inverse convention. 1. direct convention (sdir = sinv = o/ e = 0) ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp azzazzzaaz (z) (z) state with the direct convention type, the logic 0 level corresponds to state z and the logic 1 level to state a, and transfer is performed in lsb-first order. in the example above, the first character data is h'3b. the parity bit is 1, following the even parity rule designated for smart cards. 2. indirect convention (sdir = sinv = o/ e = 1) ds d7 d6 d5 d4 d3 d2 d1 d0 dp azzaaaaaaz (z) (z) state with the indirect convention type, the logic 1 level corresponds to state z and the logic 0 level to state a, and transfer is performed in msb-first order. in the example above, the first character data is h'3f. the parity bit is 0, corresponding to state z, following the even parity rule designated for smart cards. in the h8/3067 series, inversion specified by the sinv bit applies only to the data bits, d7 to d0. for parity bit inversion, the o/ e bit in smr must be set to odd parity mode. this applies to both transmission and reception. 537 14.3.5 clock only an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator can be used as the transmit/receive clock for the smart card interface. the bit rate is set with the bit rate register (brr) and the cks1 and cks0 bits in the serial mode register (smr). the equation for calculating the bit rate is shown below. table 14.5 shows some sample bit rates. if clock output is selected with cke0 set to 1, a clock with a frequency of 372 times the bit rate is output from the sck pin. b = 1488 2 2n 1 (n + 1) 10 6 where, n: brr setting (0 n 255) b: bit rate (bit/s) : operating frequency (mhz) n: see table 14.4 table 14.4 n-values of cks1 and cks0 settings n cks1 cks0 00 0 11 21 0 31 note:* if the gear function is used to divide the clock frequency, use the divided frequency to calculate the bit rate. the equation above applies directly to 1/1 frequency division. table 14.5 bit rates (bits/s) for various brr settings (when n = 0) (mhz) n 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 0 9600.0 13440.9 14400.0 17473.1 19200.0 21505.4 24193.5 1 4800.0 6720.4 7200.0 8736.6 9600.0 10752.7 12096.8 2 3200.0 4480.3 4800.0 5824.4 6400.0 7168.5 8064.5 note: bit rates are rounded off to one decimal place. 538 the following equation calculates the bit rate register (brr) setting from the operating frequency and bit rate. n is an integer from 0 to 255, specifying the value with the smaller error. n = 1488 2 2n 1 b 10 6 1 table 14.6 brr settings for typical bit rates (bits/s) (when n = 0) (mhz) 7.1424 10.00 10.7136 13.00 14.2848 16.00 18.00 bit/s n error n error n error n error n error n error n error 9600 0 0.00 1 30 1 25 1 8.99 1 0.00 1 12.01 2 15.99 table 14.7 maximum bit rates for various frequencies (smart card interface mode) (mhz) maximum bit rate (bits/s) n n 7.1424 9600 0 0 10.00 13441 0 0 10.7136 14400 0 0 13.00 17473 0 0 14.2848 19200 0 0 16.00 21505 0 0 18.00 24194 0 0 the bit rate error is given by the following equation: error (%) = 1488 2 2n-1 b (n + 1) 10 6 1 100 539 14.3.6 transmitting and receiving data initialization: before transmitting or receiving data, the smart card interface must be initialized as described below. initialization is also necessary when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, or vice versa. 1. clear the te and re bits to 0 in the serial control register (scr). 2. clear error flags fer/ers, per, and orer to 0 in the serial status register (ssr). 3. set the parity bit (o/ e ) and baud rate generator select bits (cks1 and cks0) in the serial mode register (smr). clear the c/ a , chr, and mp bits to 0, and set the stop and pe bits to 1. 4. set the smif, sdir, and sinv bits in the smart card mode register (scmr). when the smif bit is set to 1, the txd pin and rxd pin are both switched from port to sci pin functions and go to the high-impedance state. 5. set a value corresponding to the desired bit rate in the bit rate register (brr). 6. set the cke0 bit in scr. clear the tie, rie, te, re, mpie, teie, and cke1 bits to 0. if the cke0 bit is set to 1, the clock is output from the sck pin. 7. wait at least one bit interval, then set the tie, rie, te, and re bits in scr. do not set the te bit and re bit at the same time, except for self-diagnosis. transmitting serial data: as data transmission in smart card mode involves error signal sampling and retransmission processing, the processing procedure is different from that for the normal sci. figure 14.5 shows a sample transmission processing flowchart. 1. perform smart card interface mode initialization as described in initialization above. 2. check that the fer/ers error flag is cleared to 0 in ssr. 3. repeat steps 2 and 3 until it can be confirmed that the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr. 4. write the transmit data in tdr, clear the tdre flag to 0, and perform the transmit operation. the tend flag is cleared to 0. 5. to continue transmitting data, go back to step 2. 6. to end transmission, clear the te bit to 0. the above processing may include interrupt handling dma transfer. if transmission ends and the tend flag is set to 1 while the tie bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (txi) will be requested. if an error occurs in transmission and the ers flag is set to 1 while the rie bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a transmit/receive-error interrupt (eri) will be requested. the timing of tend flag setting depends on the gm bit in smr (see figure 14.4). if the txi interrupt activates the dmac, the number of bytes designated in the dmac can be transmitted automatically, including automatic retransmission. 540 for details, see interrupt operations and data transfer by dmac in this section. serial data (1) gm = 0 tend (2) gm = 1 tend ds dp de guard time 11.0 etu 12.5 etu figure 14.4 timing of tend flag setting 541 initialization no yes clear te bit to 0 start transmitting start no no no yes yes yes yes no end write transmit data in tdr, and clear tdre flag to 0 in ssr error handling error handling tend = 1? all data transmitted? tend = 1? fer/ers = 0? fer/ers = 0? figure 14.5 sample transmission processing flowchart 542 1. data write tdr tsr (shift register) data 1 2. transfer from tdr to tsr data 1 data 1 data remains in tdr data 1 3. serial data output note: when the ers flag is set, it should be cleared until transfer of the last bit (d7 in lsb-first transmission, d0 in msb-first transmission) of the retransmit data to be transmitted next has been completed. in case of normal transmission: tend flag is set in case of transmit error: ers flag is set steps 2 and 3 above are repeated until the tend flag is set. i/o signal output data 1 figure 14.6 relation between transmit operation and internal registers i/o data when gm = 0 guard time de ds da db dc dd de df dg dh dp 12.5 etu 11.0 etu when gm = 1 txi (tend interrupt) figure 14.7 timing of tend flag setting receiving serial data: data reception in smart card mode uses the same processing procedure as for the normal sci. figure 14.8 shows a sample reception processing flowchart. 1. perform smart card interface mode initialization as described in initialization above. 2. check that the orer flag and per flag are cleared to 0 in ssr. if either is set, perform the appropriate receive error handling, then clear both the orer and the per flag to 0. 3. repeat steps 2 and 3 until it can be confirmed that the rdrf flag is set to 1. 4. read the receive data from rdr. 5. to continue receiving data, clear the rdrf flag to 0 and go back to step 2. 6. to end reception, clear the re bit to 0. 543 initialization read rdr and clear rdrf flag to 0 in ssr clear re bit to 0 start receiving start error handling no no no yes yes orer = 0 and per = 0? rdrf = 1? all data received? yes figure 14.8 sample reception processing flowchart the above procedure may include interrupt handling and dma transfer. if reception ends and the rdrf flag is set to 1 while the rie bit is set to 1 and interrupt requests are enabled, a receive-data-full interrupt (rxi) will be requested. if an error occurs in reception and either the orer flag or the per flag is set to 1, a transmit/receive-error interrupt (eri) will be requested. if the rxi interrupt activates the dmac, the number of bytes designated in the dmac will be transferred, skipping receive data in which an error occurred. for details, see interrupt operations and data transfer by dmac in this section. if a parity error occurs during reception and the per flag is set to 1, the received data is transferred to rdr, so the erroneous data can be read. 544 switching modes: when switching from receive mode to transmit mode, first confirm that the receive operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing re to 0 and setting te to 1. the rdrf, per, or orer flag can be used to check that the receive operation has been completed. when switching from transmit mode to receive mode, first confirm that the transmit operation has been completed, then start from initialization, clearing te to 0 and setting re to 1. the tend flag can be used to check that the transmit operation has been completed. fixing clock output: when the gm bit is set to 1 in smr, clock output can be fixed by means of the cke1 and cke0 bits in scr. the minimum clock pulse width can be set to the specified width in this case. figure 14.9 shows the timing for fixing clock output. in this example, gm = 1, cke1 = 0, and the cke0 bit is controlled. specified pulse width cke1 value sck specified pulse width scr write (cke0 = 1) scr write (cke0 = 0) figure 14.9 timing for fixing cock output interrupt operations: the smart card interface has three interrupt sources: transmit-data-empty (txi), transmit/receive-error (eri), and receive-data-full (rxi). the transmit-end interrupt request (tei) is not available in smart card mode. a txi interrupt is requested when the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr. an rxi interrupt is requested when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr. an eri interrupt is requested when the orer, per, or ers flag is set to 1 in ssr. these relationships are shown in table 14.8. 545 table 14.8 smart card interface mode operating states and interrupt sources operating state flag enable bit interrupt source dmac activation transmit mode normal operation tend tie txi available error ers rie eri not available receive mode normal operation rdrf rie rxi available error per, orer rie eri not available data transfer by dmac: the dmac can be used to transmit and receive data in smart card mode, as in normal sci operations. in transmit mode, when the tend flag is set to 1 in ssr, the tdre flag is set simultaneously, generating a txi interrupt. if the txi request is designated beforehand as a dmac activation source, the dmac will be activated by the txi request and will transfer the next transmit data. this data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the tdre and tend flags to 0. in the event of an error, the sci automatically retransmits the same data, keeping the tend flag cleared to 0 so that the dmac is not activated. the sci and dmac will therefore automatically transmit the designated number of bytes, including retransmission when an error occurs. when an error occurs, the ers flag is not cleared automatically, so the rie bit should be set to 1 to enable the error to generate an eri request, and the eri interrupt handler should clear ers. when using the dmac to transmit or receive, first set up and enable the dmac, then make sci settings. dmac settings are described in section 7, dma controller. in receive operations, an rxi interrupt is requested when the rdrf flag is set to 1 in ssr. if the rxi request is designated beforehand as a dmac activation source, the dmac will be activated by the rxi request and will transfer the received data. this data transfer by the dmac automatically clears the rdrf flag to 0. when an error occurs, the rdrf flag is not set and an error flag is set instead. the dmac is not activated. the eri interrupt request is directed to the cpu. the eri interrupt handler should clear the error flags. 546 examples of operation in gsm mode: when switching between smart card interface mode and software standby mode, use the following procedures to maintain the clock duty cycle. ? switching from smart card interface mode to software standby mode 1. set the p9 4 data register (dr) and data direction register (ddr) to the values for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 2. write 0 in the te and re bits in the serial control register (scr) to stop transmit/receive operations. at the same time, set the cke1 bit to the value for the fixed output state in software standby mode. 3. write 0 in the cke0 bit in scr to stop the clock. 4. wait for one serial clock cycle. during this period, the duty cycle is preserved and clock output is fixed at the specified level. 5. write h'00 in the serial mode register (smr) and smart card mode register (scmr). 6. make the transition to the software standby state. ? returning from software standby mode to smart card interface mode 1. clear the software standby state. 2. set the cke1 bit in scr to the value for the fixed output state at the start of software standby (the current p9 4 pin state). 3. set smart card interface mode and output the clock. clock signal generation is started with the normal duty cycle. software standby normal operation normal operation (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) figure 14.10 procedure for stopping and restarting the clock use the following procedure to secure the clock duty cycle after powering on. 1. the initial state is port input and high impedance. use pull-up or pull-down resistors to fix the potential. 2. fix at the output specified by the cke1 bit in scr. 3. set smr and scmr, and switch to smart card interface mode operation. 4. set the cke0 bit to 1 in scr to start clock output. 547 14.4 usage notes the following points should be noted when using the sci as a smart card interface. receive data sampling timing and receive margin in smart card interface mode: in smart card interface mode, the sci operates on a base clock with a frequency of 372 times the transfer rate. in reception, the sci synchronizes internally with the fall of the start bit, which it samples on the base clock. receive data is latched at the rising edge of the 186th base clock pulse. the timing is shown in figure 14.11. internal base clock 372 clocks 186 clocks receive data (rxd) synchronization sampling timing d0 d1 data sampling timing 185 371 0 371 185 0 0 start bit figure 14.11 receive data sampling timing in smart card interface mode 548 the receive margin can therefore be expressed as follows. receive margin in smart card interface mode: m = (0.5 1 2n d 0.5 n ) (l 0.5) f (1 + f) 100% m: receive margin (%) n: ratio of clock frequency to bit rate (n = 372) d: clock duty cycle (l = 0 to 1.0) l: frame length (l =10) f: absolute deviation of clock frequency from the above equation, if f = 0 and d = 0.5, the receive margin is as follows. when d = 0.5 and f = 0: m = (0.5 1/2 372) 100% = 49.866% retransmission: retransmission is performed by the sci in receive mode and transmit mode as described below. ? retransmission when sci is in receive mode figure 14.12 illustrates retransmission when the sci is in receive mode. 1. if an error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the per bit is automatically set to 1. if the rie bit in scr is set to the enable state, an eri interrupt is requested. the per bit should be cleared to 0 in ssr before the next parity bit sampling timing. 2. the rdrf bit in ssr is not set for the frame in which the error has occurred. 3. if no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the per bit is not set to 1 in ssr. 4. if no error is found when the received parity bit is checked, the receive operation is assumed to have been completed normally, and the rdrf bit is automatically set to 1 in ssr. if the rie bit in scr is set to the enable state, an rxi interrupt is requested. if rxi is enabled as a dma transfer activation source, the rdr contents can be read automatically. when the dmac reads the rdr data, the rdrf flag is automatically cleared to 0. 5. when a normal frame is received, the data pin is held in the high-impedance state at the error signal transmission timing. 549 d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp (de) ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 ds frame n+1 retransmitted frame frame n rdrf [1] per [2] [3] [4] figure 14.12 retransmission in sci receive mode ? retransmission when sci is in transmit mode figure 14.13 illustrates retransmission when the sci is in transmit mode. 6. if an error signal is sent back from the receiving device after transmission of one frame is completed, the fer/ers bit is set to 1 in ssr. if the rie bit in scr is set to the enable state, an eri interrupt is requested. the ers bit should be cleared to 0 in ssr before the next parity bit sampling timing. 7. the tend bit in ssr is not set for the frame for which the error signal was received. 8. if an error signal is not sent back from the receiving device, the ers flag is not set in ssr. 9. if an error signal is not sent back from the receiving device, transmission of one frame, including retransmission, is assumed to have been completed, and the tend bit is set to 1 in ssr. if the tie bit in scr is set to the enable state, a txi interrupt is requested. if txi is enabled as a dma transfer activation source, the next data can be written in tdr automatically. when the dmac writes data in tdr, the tdre bit is automatically cleared to 0. d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp de ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 dp (de) ds d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 ds frame n+1 retransmitted frame frame n tdre tend [6] ers transfer from tdr to tsr transfer from tdr to tsr transfer from tdr to tsr [7] [9] [8] figure 14.13 retransmission in sci transmit mode 550 551 section 15 a/d converter 15.1 overview the h8/3067 series includes a 10-bit successive-approximations a/d converter with a selection of up to eight analog input channels. when the a/d converter is not used, it can be halted independently to conserve power. for details see section 20.6, module standby function. 15.1.1 features a/d converter features are listed below. ? 10-bit resolution ? eight input channels ? selectable analog conversion voltage range the analog voltage conversion range can be programmed by input of an analog reference voltage at the v ref pin. ? high-speed conversion conversion time: maximum 3.5 ? per channel (with 20 mhz system clock) ? two conversion modes single mode: a/d conversion of one channel scan mode: continuous conversion on one to four channels ? four 16-bit data registers a/d conversion results are transferred for storage into data registers corresponding to the channels. ? sample-and-hold function ? three conversion start sources the a/d converter can be activated by software, an external trigger, or an 8-bit timer compare match. ? a/d interrupt requested at end of conversion at the end of a/d conversion, an a/d end interrupt (adi) can be requested. ? dma controller (dmac) activation the dmac can be activated at the end of a/d conversion. 552 15.1.2 block diagram figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the a/d converter. module data bus bus interface on-chip data bus addra addrb addrc addrd adcsr adcr successive- approximations register 10-bit d/a analog multi- plexer sample-and- hold circuit comparator + control circuit ?4 ?8 adi interrupt signal av v av cc ref ss an an an an an an an an 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 legend adcr: adcsr: addra: addrb: addrc: addrd: a/d control register a/d control/status register a/d data register a a/d data register b a/d data register c a/d data register d adtrg adte compare match a0 tcsr0 8-bit timer figure 15.1 a/d converter block diagram 553 15.1.3 input pins table 15.1 summarizes the a/d converter? input pins. the eight analog input pins are divided into two groups: group 0 (an 0 to an 3 ), and group 1 (an 4 to an 7 ). av cc and av ss are the power supply for the analog circuits in the a/d converter. v ref is the a/d conversion reference voltage. table 15.1 a/d converter pins pin name abbrevi- ation i/o function analog power supply pin av cc input analog power supply analog ground pin av ss input analog ground and reference voltage reference voltage pin v ref input analog reference voltage analog input pin 0 an 0 input group 0 analog inputs analog input pin 1 an 1 input analog input pin 2 an 2 input analog input pin 3 an 3 input analog input pin 4 an 4 input group 1 analog inputs analog input pin 5 an 5 input analog input pin 6 an 6 input analog input pin 7 an 7 input a/d external trigger input pin adtrg input external trigger input for starting a/d conversion 554 15.1.4 register configuration table 15.2 summarizes the a/d converter? registers. table 15.2 a/d converter registers address* 1 name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fffe0 a/d data register a h addrah r h'00 h'fffe1 a/d data register a l addral r h'00 h'fffe2 a/d data register b h addrbh r h'00 h'fffe3 a/d data register b l addrbl r h'00 h'fffe4 a/d data register c h addrch r h'00 h'fffe5 a/d data register c l addrcl r h'00 h'fffe6 a/d data register d h addrdh r h'00 h'fffe7 a/d data register d l addrdl r h'00 h'fffe8 a/d control/status register adcsr r/(w)* 2 h'00 h'fffe9 a/d control register adcr r/w h'7e notes: 1. lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 2. only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 555 15.2 register descriptions 15.2.1 a/d data registers a to d (addra to addrd) bit addrn initial value 14 ad8 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 0 0 r 4 0 r 2 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 1 0 r 5 0 r 3 0 r a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result reserved bits read/write (n = a to d) the four a/d data registers (addra to addrd) are 16-bit read-only registers that store the results of a/d conversion. an a/d conversion produces 10-bit data, which is transferred for storage into the a/d data register corresponding to the selected channel. the upper 8 bits of the result are stored in the upper byte of the a/d data register. the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower byte. bits 5 to 0 of an a/d data register are reserved bits that are always read as 0. table 15.3 indicates the pairings of analog input channels and a/d data registers. the cpu can always read and write the a/d data registers. the upper byte can be read directly, but the lower byte is read through a temporary register (temp). for details see section 15.3, cpu interface. the a/d data registers are initialized to h'0000 by a reset and in standby mode. table 15.3 analog input channels and a/d data registers analog input channel group 0 group 1 a/d data register an 0 an 4 addra an 1 an 5 addrb an 2 an 6 addrc an 3 an 7 addrd 556 15.2.2 a/d control/status register (adcsr) bit initial value read/write 7 adf 0 r/(w) 6 adie 0 r/w 5 adst 0 r/w 4 scan 0 r/w 3 cks 0 r/w 0 ch0 0 r/w 2 ch2 0 r/w 1 ch1 0 r/w * note: only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. * a/d end flag indicates end of a/d conversion a/d interrupt enable enables and disables a/d end interrupts a/d start starts or stops a/d conversion scan mode selects single mode or scan mode clock select selects the a/d conversion time channel select 2 to 0 these bits select analog input channels adcsr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the mode and controls the a/d converter. adcsr is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. 557 bit 7?/d end flag (adf): indicates the end of a/d conversion. bit 7 adf description 0 [clearing condition] read adf when adf =1, then write 0 in adf. dmac activated by adi interrupt. (initial value) 1 [setting conditions] single mode: a/d conversion ends scan mode: a/d conversion ends in all selected channels bit 6?/d interrupt enable (adie): enables or disables the interrupt (adi) requested at the end of a/d conversion. bit 6 adie description 0 a/d end interrupt request (adi) is disabled (initial value) 1 a/d end interrupt request (adi) is enabled bit 5?/d start (adst): starts or stops a/d conversion. the adst bit remains set to 1 during a/d conversion. it can also be set to 1 by external trigger input at the adtrg pin, or by an 8-bit timer compare match. bit 5 adst description 0 a/d conversion is stopped (initial value) 1 single mode: a/d conversion starts; adst is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. scan mode: a/d conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels, until adst is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode. 558 bit 4?can mode (scan): selects single mode or scan mode. for further information on operation in these modes, see section 15.4, operation. clear the adst bit to 0 before switching the conversion mode. bit 4 scan description 0 single mode (initial value) 1 scan mode bit 3?lock select (cks): selects the a/d conversion time. clear the adst bit to 0 before switching the conversion time. bit 3 cks description 0 conversion time = 134 states (maximum) (initial value) 1 conversion time = 70 states (maximum) bits 2 to 0?hannel select 2 to 0 (ch2 to ch0): these bits and the scan bit select the analog input channels. clear the adst bit to 0 before changing the channel selection. group selection channel selection description ch2 ch1 ch0 single mode scan mode 000 an 0 (initial value) an 0 1an 1 an 0 , an 1 10 an 2 an 0 to an 2 1an 3 an 0 to an 3 100 an 4 an 4 1an 5 an 4 , an 5 10 an 6 an 4 to an 6 1an 7 an 4 to an 7 559 15.2.3 a/d control register (adcr) bit initial value read/write 7 trge 0 r/w 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 0 r/w 2 1 1 1 trigger enable enables or disables starting of a/d conversion by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match reserved bits adcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables starting of a/d conversion by external trigger input or an 8-bit timer compare match signal. adcr is initialized to h'7f by a reset and in standby mode. bit 7?rigger enable (trge): enables or disables starting of a/d conversion by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match. bit 7 trge description 0 starting of a/d conversion by an external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match is disabled (initial value) 1 a/d conversion is started at the falling edge of the external trigger signal ( adtrg ) or by an 8-bit timer compare match external trigger pin and 8-bit timer selection are performed by the 8-bit timer. for details, see section 10, 8-bit timers. bits 6 to 1?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 0?eserved: this bit can be read or written, but must not be set to 1. 560 15.3 cpu interface addra to addrd are 16-bit registers, but they are connected to the cpu by an 8-bit data bus. therefore, although the upper byte can be be accessed directly by the cpu, the lower byte is read through an 8-bit temporary register (temp). an a/d data register is read as follows. when the upper byte is read, the upper-byte value is transferred directly to the cpu and the lower-byte value is transferred into temp. next, when the lower byte is read, the temp contents are transferred to the cpu. when reading an a/d data register, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. it is possible to read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained. figure 15.2 shows the data flow for access to an a/d data register. upper-byte read bus interface module data bus cpu (h'aa) addrnh (h'aa) addrnl (h'40) lower-byte read bus interface module data bus cpu (h'40) addrnh (h'aa) addrnl (h'40) temp (h'40) temp (h'40) (n = a to d) (n = a to d) figure 15.2 a/d data register access operation (reading h'aa40) 561 15.4 operation the a/d converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution. it has two operating modes: single mode and scan mode. 15.4.1 single mode (scan = 0) single mode should be selected when only one a/d conversion on one channel is required. a/d conversion starts when the adst bit is set to 1 by software, or by external trigger input. the adst bit remains set to 1 during a/d conversion and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. when conversion ends the adf bit is set to 1. if the adie bit is also set to 1, an adi interrupt is requested at this time. to clear the adf flag to 0, first read adcsr, then write 0 in adf. when the mode or analog input channel must be switched during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the adst bit to 0 in adcsr to halt a/d conversion. after making the necessary changes, set the adst bit to 1 to start a/d conversion again. the adst bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel is changed. typical operations when channel 1 (an 1 ) is selected in single mode are described next. figure 15.3 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. single mode is selected (scan = 0), input channel an 1 is selected (ch2 = ch1 = 0, ch0 = 1), the a/d interrupt is enabled (adie = 1), and a/d conversion is started (adst = 1). 2. when a/d conversion is completed, the result is transferred into addrb. at the same time the adf flag is set to 1, the adst bit is cleared to 0, and the a/d converter becomes idle. 3. since adf = 1 and adie = 1, an adi interrupt is requested. 4. the a/d interrupt handling routine starts. 5. the routine reads adcsr, then writes 0 in the adf flag. 6. the routine reads and processes the conversion result (addrb). 7. execution of the a/d interrupt handling routine ends. after that, if the adst bit is set to 1, a/d conversion starts again and steps 2 to 7 are repeated. 562 adie adst adf state of channel 0 (an ) set set set clear clear idle idle idle idle a/d conversion (1) a/d conversion (2) idle read conversion result a/d conversion result (1) read conversion result a/d conversion result (2) note: vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. 0 1 2 3 a/d conversion starts * * * * * * addra addrb addrc addrd state of channel 1 (an ) state of channel 2 (an ) state of channel 3 (an ) idle figure 15.3 example of a/d converter operation (single mode, channel 1 selected) 563 15.4.2 scan mode (scan = 1) scan mode is useful for monitoring analog inputs in a group of one or more channels. when the adst bit is set to 1 by software or external trigger input, a/d conversion starts on the first channel in the group (an 0 when ch2 = 0, an 4 when ch2 = 1). when two or more channels are selected, after conversion of the first channel ends, conversion of the second channel (an 1 or an 5 ) starts immediately. a/d conversion continues cyclically on the selected channels until the adst bit is cleared to 0. the conversion results are transferred for storage into the a/d data registers corresponding to the channels. when the mode or analog input channel selection must be changed during analog conversion, to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the adst bit to 0 in adcsr to halt a/d conversion. after making the necessary changes, set the adst bit to 1. a/d conversion will start again from the first channel in the group. the adst bit can be set at the same time as the mode or channel selection is changed. typical operations when three channels in group 0 (an 0 to an 2 ) are selected in scan mode are described next. figure 15.4 shows a timing diagram for this example. 1. scan mode is selected (scan = 1), scan group 0 is selected (ch2 = 0), analog input channels an 0 to an 2 are selected (ch1 = 1, ch0 = 0), and a/d conversion is started (adst = 1). 2. when a/d conversion of the first channel (an 0 ) is completed, the result is transferred into addra. next, conversion of the second channel (an 1 ) starts automatically. 3. conversion proceeds in the same way through the third channel (an 2 ). 4. when conversion of all selected channels (an 0 to an 2 ) is completed, the adf flag is set to 1 and conversion of the first channel (an 0 ) starts again. if the adie bit is set to 1, an adi interrupt is requested at this time. 5. steps 2 to 4 are repeated as long as the adst bit remains set to 1. when the adst bit is cleared to 0, a/d conversion stops. after that, if the adst bit is set to 1, a/d conversion starts again from the first channel (an 0 ). 564 adst adf state of channel 0 (an ) 0 1 2 3 continuous a/d conversion set clear *1 clear * 1 idle a/d conversion (1) idle idle idle a/d conversion (4) idle a/d conversion (2) idle a/d conversion (5) idle a/d conversion (3) idle idle transfer a/d conversion result (1) a/d conversion result (4) a/d conversion result (2) a/d conversion result (3) 1. 2. a/d conversion time notes: *2 *1 addra addrb addrc addrd state of channel 1 (an ) state of channel 2 (an ) state of channel 3 (an ) vertical arrows ( ) indicate instructions executed by software. data currently being converted is ignored. figure 15.4 example of a/d converter operation (scan mode, channels an 0 to an 2 selected) 565 15.4.3 input sampling and a/d conversion time the a/d converter has a built-in sample-and-hold circuit. the a/d converter samples the analog input at a time t d after the adst bit is set to 1, then starts conversion. figure 15.5 shows the a/d conversion timing. table 15.4 indicates the a/d conversion time. as indicated in figure 15.5, the a/d conversion time includes t d and the input sampling time. the length of t d varies depending on the timing of the write access to adcsr. the total conversion time therefore varies within the ranges indicated in table 15.4. in scan mode, the values given in table 15.4 apply to the first conversion. in the second and subsequent conversions the conversion time is fixed at 128 states when cks = 0 or 66 states when cks = 1. a ddress bus w rite signal i nput sampling t iming a df (1) (2) t d t spl t conv legend (1): (2): t : t : t : d spl conv adcsr write cycle adcsr address synchronization delay input sampling time a/d conversion time figure 15.5 a/d conversion timing 566 table 15.4 a/d conversion time (single mode) cks = 0 cks = 1 symbol min typ max min typ max synchronization delay t d 6 94 5 input sampling time t spl 31 15 a/d conversion time t conv 131 134 69 70 note: values in the table are numbers of states. 15.4.4 external trigger input timing a/d conversion can be externally triggered. when the trge bit is set to 1 in adcr and the 8-bit timer's adte bit is cleared to 0, external trigger input is enabled at the adtrg pin. a high-to- low transition at the adtrg pin sets the adst bit to 1 in adcsr, starting a/d conversion. other operations, in both single and scan modes, are the same as if the adst bit had been set to 1 by software. figure 15.6 shows the timing. adtrg internal trigger signal adst a/d conversion figure 15.6 external trigger input timing 567 15.5 interrupts the a/d converter generates an interrupt (adi) at the end of a/d conversion. the adi interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by the adie bit in adcsr. the adi interrupt request can be designated as a dmac activation source. in this case, an interrupt request is not sent to the cpu. 15.6 usage notes when using the a/d converter, note the following points: 1. analog input voltage range: during a/d conversion, the voltages input to the analog input pins should be in the range av ss an n v ref . 2. relationships of av cc and av ss to v cc and v ss : av cc , av ss , v cc , and v ss should be related as follows: av ss = v ss . av cc and av ss must not be left open, even if the a/d converter is not used. 3. v ref programming range: the reference voltage input at the v ref pin should be in the range v ref av cc . 4. note on board design: in board layout, separate the digital circuits from the analog circuits as much as possible. particularly avoid layouts in which the signal lines of digital circuits cross or closely approach the signal lines of analog circuits. induction and other effects may cause the analog circuits to operate incorrectly, or may adversely affect the accuracy of a/d conversion. the analog input signals (an 0 to an 7 ), analog reference voltage (v ref ), and analog supply voltage (av cc ) must be separated from digital circuits by the analog ground (av ss ). the analog ground (av ss ) should be connected to a stable digital ground (v ss ) at one point on the board. 5. note on noise: to prevent damage from surges and other abnormal voltages at the analog input pins (an 0 to an 7 ) and analog reference voltage pin (v ref ), connect a protection circuit like the one in figure 15.7 between av cc and av ss . the bypass capacitors connected to av cc and v ref and the filter capacitors connected to an 0 to an 7 must be connected to av ss . if filter capacitors like the ones in figure 15.7 are connected, the voltage values input to the analog input pins (an 0 to an 7 ) will be smoothed, which may give rise to error. error can also occur if a/d conversion is frequently performed in scan mode so that the current that charges and discharges the capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit of the a/d converter becomes greater than that input to the analog input pins via input impedance rin. the circuit constants should therefore be selected carefully. 568 av cc *1 *1 v ref an 0 to an 7 av ss notes: * 1. * 2. rin: input impedance rin *2 100 ? 0.1 f 0.01 f 10 f figure 15.7 example of analog input protection circuit table 15.5 analog input pin ratings item min max unit analog input capacitance 20 pf allowable signal-source impedance 10* k note: * when conversion time = 134 states, v cc = 4.0 v to 5.5 v, and 13 mhz. for details see section 21, electrical characteristics. 20 pf to a/d converter an 0 to an 7 10 k ? figure 15.8 analog input pin equivalent circuit note: numeric values are approximate, except in table 15.5 569 6. a/d conversion accuracy definitions: a/d conversion accuracy in the h8/3067 series is defined as follows: resolution:....................digital output code length of a/d converter offset error: ..................deviation from ideal a/d conversion characteristic of analog input voltage required to raise digital output from minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001 (figure 15.10) full-scale error:.............deviation from ideal a/d conversion characteristic of analog input voltage required to raise digital output from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (figure 15.10) quantization error:........intrinsic error of the a/d converter; 1/2 lsb (figure 15.9) nonlinearity error: ........deviation from ideal a/d conversion characteristic in range from zero volts to full scale, exclusive of offset error, full-scale error, and quantization error. absolute accuracy:........deviation of digital value from analog input value, including offset error, full-scale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error. 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 1/8 2/8 3/8 4/8 5/8 6/8 7/8 fs quantization error analog input voltage digital output ideal a/d conversion characteristic figure 15.9 a/d converter accuracy definitions (1) 570 fs offset error nonlinearity error actual a/d conversion characteristic analog input voltage digital output ideal a/d conversion characteristic full-scale error figure 15.10 a/d converter accuracy definitions (2) 7. allowable signal-source impedance: the analog inputs of the h8/3067 series are designed to assure accurate conversion of input signals with a signal-source impedance not exceeding 10 k. the reason for this rating is that it enables the input capacitor in the sample-and-hold circuit in the a/d converter to charge within the sampling time. if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 k, charging may be inadequate and the accuracy of a/d conversion cannot be guaranteed. if a large external capacitor is provided in single mode, then the internal 10-k input resistance becomes the only significant load on the input. in this case the impedance of the signal source is not a problem. a large external capacitor, however, acts as a low-pass filter. this may make it impossible to track analog signals with high dv/dt (e.g. a variation of 5 mv/s) (figure 15.11). to convert high-speed analog signals or to use scan mode, insert a low-impedance buffer. 8. effect on absolute accuracy: attaching an external capacitor creates a coupling with ground, so if there is noise on the ground line, it may degrade absolute accuracy. the capacitor must be connected to an electrically stable ground, such as av ss . if a filter circuit is used, be careful of interference with digital signals on the same board, and make sure the circuit does not act as an antenna. 571 equivalent circuit of a/d converter h8/3067 series 20 pf cin = 15 pf 10 k ? up to 10 k ? low-pass filter c up to 0.1 f sensor output impedance sensor input figure 15.11 analog input circuit (example) 572 573 section 16 d/a converter 16.1 overview the h8/3067 series includes a d/a converter with two channels. 16.1.1 features d/a converter features are listed below. ? eight-bit resolution ? two output channels ? conversion time: maximum 10 s (with 20-pf capacitive load) ? output voltage: 0 v to v ref ? d/a outputs can be sustained in software standby mode 16.1.2 block diagram figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the d/a converter. dadr0 dadr1 dacr dastcr v av da da av ref cc ss 0 1 legend dacr: dadr0: dadr1: dastcr: 8-bit d/a module data bus bus interface on-chip data bus control circuit d/a control register d/a data register 0 d/a data register 1 d/a standby control register figure 16.1 d/a converter block diagram 574 16.1.3 input/output pins table 16.1 summarizes the d/a converter's input and output pins. table 16.1 d/a converter pins pin name abbreviation i/o function analog power supply pin av cc input analog power supply and reference voltage analog ground pin av ss input analog ground and reference voltage analog output pin 0 da 0 output analog output, channel 0 analog output pin 1 da 1 output analog output, channel 1 reference voltage input pin v ref input analog reference voltage 16.1.4 register configuration table 16.2 summarizes the d/a converter's registers. table 16.2 d/a converter registers address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'fff9c d/a data register 0 dadr0 r/w h'00 h'fff9d d/a data register 1 dadr1 r/w h'00 h'fff9e d/a control register dacr r/w h'1f h'ee01a d/a standby control register dastcr r/w h'fe note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 575 16.2 register descriptions 16.2.1 d/a data registers 0 and 1 (dadr0/1) bit initial value read/write 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w the d/a data registers (dadr0 and dadr1) are 8-bit readable/writable registers that store the data to be converted. when analog output is enabled, the d/a data register values are constantly converted and output at the analog output pins. the d/a data registers are initialized to h'00 by a reset and in standby mode. when the daste bit is set to 1 in the d/a standby control register (dastcr), the d/a registers are not initialized in software standby mode. 16.2.2 d/a control register (dacr) bit initial value read/write 7 daoe1 0 r/w 6 daoe0 0 r/w 5 dae 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 d/a output enable 1 d/a output enable 0 d/a enable controls d/a conversion and analog output controls d/a conversion and analog output controls d/a conversion dacr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the operation of the d/a converter. dacr is initialized to h'1f by a reset and in standby mode. when the daste bit is set to 1 in dastcr, the dacr is not initialized in software standby mode. 576 bit 7?/a output enable 1 (daoe1): controls d/a conversion and analog output. bit 7 daoe1 description 0da 1 analog output is disabled 1 channel-1 d/a conversion and da 1 analog output are enabled bit 6?/a output enable 0 (daoe0): controls d/a conversion and analog output. bit 6 daoe0 description 0da 0 analog output is disabled 1 channel-0 d/a conversion and da 0 analog output are enabled bit 5?/a enable (dae): controls d/a conversion, together with bits daoe0 and daoe1. when the dae bit is cleared to 0, analog conversion is controlled independently in channels 0 and 1. when the dae bit is set to 1, analog conversion is controlled together in channels 0 and 1. output of the conversion results is always controlled independently by daoe0 and daoe1. bit 7 daoe1 bit 6 daoe0 bit 5 dae description 0 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1 1 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 1 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 1 0 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 1 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 when the dae bit is set to 1, even if bits daoe0 and daoe1 in dacr and the adst bit in adcsr are cleared to 0, the same current is drawn from the analog power supply as during a/d and d/a conversion. bits 4 to 0?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 577 16.2.3 d/a standby control register (dastcr) dastcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables d/a output in software standby mode. bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 daste 0 r/w 2 1 1 1 reserved bits d/a standby enable enables or disables d/a output in software standby mode dastcr is initialized to h'fe by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bits 7 to 1?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 0?/a standby enable (daste): enables or disables d/a output in software standby mode. bit 0 daste description 0 d/a output is disabled in software standby mode (initial value) 1 d/a output is enabled in software standby mode 578 16.3 operation the d/a converter has two built-in d/a conversion circuits that can perform conversion independently. d/a conversion is performed constantly while enabled in dacr. if the dadr0 or dadr1 value is modified, conversion of the new data begins immediately. the conversion results are output when bits daoe0 and daoe1 are set to 1. an example of d/a conversion on channel 0 is given next. timing is indicated in figure 16.2. 1. data to be converted is written in dadr0. 2. bit daoe0 is set to 1 in dacr. d/a conversion starts and da0 becomes an output pin. the converted result is output after the conversion time. v ref the output value is dadr contents 256 output of this conversion result continues until the value in dadr0 is modified or the daoe0 bit is cleared to 0. 3. if the dadr0 value is modified, conversion starts immediately, and the result is output after the conversion time. 4. when the daoe0 bit is cleared to 0, da0 becomes an input pin. 579 dadr0 write cycle dacr write cycle dadr0 write cycle dacr write cycle address dadr0 daoe0 da 0 conversion data 1 conversion data 2 high-impedance state conversion result 1 conversion result 2 t dconv t dconv legend t : d/a conversion time dconv figure 16.2 example of d/a converter operation 16.4 d/a output control in the h8/3067 series, d/a converter output can be enabled or disabled in software standby mode. when the daste bit is set to 1 in dastcr, d/a converter output is enabled in software standby mode. the d/a converter registers retain the values they held prior to the transition to software standby mode. when d/a output is enabled in software standby mode, the reference supply current is the same as during normal operation. 580 581 section 17 ram 17.1 overview the h8/3067 and h8/3066 have 4 kbytes of high-speed static ram on-chip. the h8/3065 has 2 kbytes. the ram is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus. the cpu accesses both byte data and word data in two states, making the ram useful for rapid data transfer. the on-chip ram of the h8/3067 and h8/3066 is assigned to addresses h'fef20 to h'fff1f in modes 1, 2, and 7, and to addresses h'ffef20 to h'ffff1f in modes 3, 4, and 5,and to addresses h'ef20 to h'ff1f in mode 6. the on-chip ram of the h8/3065 are assigned to addresses h'ff720 to h'fff1f in modes 1, 2, and 7, and to addresses h'fff720 to h'ffff1f in modes 3, 4, and 5, and to addresses h'f720 to h'ff1f in mode 6. the ram enable bit (rame) in the system control register (syscr) can enable or disable the on-chip ram. 17.1.1 block diagram figure 17.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip ram. h'fef20* h'fef22* h'fff1e* h'fef21* h'fef23* h'fff1f* on-chip data bus (upper 8 bits) on-chip data bus (lower 8 bits) bus interface syscr on-chip ram even addresses odd addresses legend syscr: system control register note: * this example is of the h8/3067 operating in mode 7. the lower 20 bits of the address are shown. figure 17.1 ram block diagram 582 17.1.2 register configuration the on-chip ram is controlled by syscr. table 17.1 gives the address and initial value of syscr. table 17.1 system control register address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee012 system control register syscr r/w h'09 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 583 17.2 system control register (syscr) bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 ssoe 0 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w software standby standby timer select 2 to 0 user bit enable nmi edge select software standby output port enable ram enable bit enables or disables on-chip ram one function of syscr is to enable or disable access to the on-chip ram. the on-chip ram is enabled or disabled by the rame bit in syscr. for details about the other bits, see section 3.3, system control register (syscr). bit 0?am enable (rame): enables or disables the on-chip ram. the rame bit is initialized at the rising edge of the input at the res pin. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0 rame description 0 on-chip ram is disabled 1 on-chip ram is enabled (initial value) 584 17.3 operation when the rame bit is set to 1, the on-chip ram is enabled. accesses to addresses h'fef20 to h'fff1f in the h8/3067 and h8/3066 in modes 1, 2, and 7, and to addresses h'ffef20 to h'ffff1f in the h8/3067 and h8/3066 in modes 3, 4, and 5, and to addresses h'ef20 to h'ff1f in mode 6, are directed to the on-chip ram. in the h8/3065, accesses to addresses h'ff720 to h'fff1f in modes 1, 2, and 7, to addresses h'fff720 to h'ffff1f in modes 3, 4, and 5, and to addresses h'f720 to h'ff1f in mode 6, are directed to the on-chip ram. in modes 1 to 5 (expanded modes), when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the off-chip address space is accessed. in mode 6, 7 (single-chip mode), when the rame bit is cleared to 0, the on-chip ram is not accessed: read access always results in h'ff data, and write access is ignored. since the on-chip ram is connected to the cpu by an internal 16-bit data bus, it can be written and read by word access. it can also be written and read by byte access. byte data is accessed in two states using the upper 8 bits of the data bus. word data starting at an even address is accessed in two states using all 16 bits of the data bus. 585 section 18 rom 18.1 overview the h8/3067 has 128 kbytes of on-chip rom (flash memory or mask rom), the h8/3066 has 96 kbytes, and h8/3065 has 64 kbytes. the rom is connected to the cpu by a 16-bit data bus. the cpu accesses both byte and word data in two states, enabling rapid data transfer. the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) can be set to enable or disable the on-chip rom. see table 18.1. the on-chip flash memory product (h8/3067f-ztat) can be erased and programmed on-board as well as with a general-purpose prom programmer. table 18.1 operating mode and rom mode pins mode md 2 md 1 md 0 on-chip rom mode 1 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 0 0 1 disabled (external address area) mode 2 (1-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 01 0 mode 3 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 01 1 mode 4 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom disabled) 10 0 mode 5 (16-mbyte expanded mode with on-chip rom enabled) 1 0 1 enabled mode 6 (single-chip normal mode) 1 1 0 mode 7 (single-chip advanced mode) 1 1 1 586 18.2 overview of flash memory 18.2.1 features the features of the flash memory are summarized below. ? four flash memory operating modes ? program mode ? erase mode ? program-verify mode ? erase-verify mode ? programming/erase methods the flash memory is programmed 32 bytes at a time. erasing is performed by block erase. the block to be erased can be specified by setting the corresponding bit. there are block areas of 32kb 3 blocks, 28kb 1 block, and 1kb 4 blocks. ? programming/erase times the flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 32-byte programming, equivalent to 300 ? (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block. ? reprogramming capability the flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times. ? on-board programming modes there are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board: ? boot mode ? user program mode ? automatic bit rate adjustment with data transfer in boot mode, the h8/3067? bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the transfer bit rate of the host (9600 bps and 4800 bps). ? flash memory emulation by ram part of the ram area can be overlapped onto flash memory, to emulate flash memory updates in real time. ? prom mode flash memory can be programmed/erased in prom mode, using a prom programmer, as well as in on-board programming mode. ? protect modes 587 there are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations. 18.2.2 block diagram figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the flash memory. bus interface/controller on-chip flash memory (128 kb) operating mode internal data bus (upper 8 bits) internal data bus (lower 8 bits) fwe pin * 1 mode pins flmcr ebr ramcr flmsr h'00000 h'00002 h'00001 h'00003 h'1fffe h'1ffff even address odd address legend: flmcr: flash memory control register * 2 ebr: erase block register * 2 ramcr: ram control register * 2 flmsr: flash memory status register * 2 notes: 1. functions as the fwe pin in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, and as the reso pin in the mask rom versions. 2. the registers that control the flash memory (flmcr, ebr, ramcr, and flmsr) are used in the flash memory and flash memory r versions only. they are not provided in the mask rom versions. reading the corresponding addresses in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to these addresses are disabled. h'1fffc h'1fffd figure 18.1 block diagram of flash memory 588 18.2.3 pin configuration the flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 18.2. table 18.2 flash memory pins pin name abbreviation i/o function reset res input reset flash write enable fwe * input flash program/erase protection by hardware mode 2 md 2 input sets this lsi operating mode mode 1 md 1 input sets this lsi operating mode mode 0 md 0 input sets this lsi operating mode transmit data txd 1 output serial transmit data output receive data rxd 1 input serial receive data input note: the transmit data and receive data pins are used in boot mode. * in the mask rom versions, the fwe pin functions as the reso pin. 18.2.4 register configuration the registers used to control the on-chip flash memory when enabled are shown in table 18.3. table 18.3 flash memory registers register name abbreviation r/w initial value address * 1 flash memory control register flmcr r/w h'00 * 2 h'ee030 erase block register ebr r/w h'00 h'ee032 ram control register ramcr r/w h'f1 h'ee077 flash memory status register flmsr r h'7f h'ee07d notes: 1. lower 20 bits of address in advanced mode. 2. when a high level is input to the fwe pin, the initial value is h'80. the registers in table 18.3 are used in the flash memory and flash memory r versions only. reading the corresponding addresses in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to these addresses are disabled. 589 18.3 register descriptions 18.3.1 flash memory control register (flmcr) flmcr is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting swe to 1 when fwe = 1. program mode is entered by setting swe to 1 when fwe = 1, then setting the psu bit, and finally setting the p bit. erase mode is entered by setting swe to 1 when fwe = 1, then setting the esu bit, and finally setting the e bit. flmcr is initialized by a reset, and in hardware standby mode and software standby mode. its initial value is h'80 when a high level is input to the fwe pin, and h'00 when a low level is input. in mode 6 the fwe pin must be fixed low, as flash memory on-board programming is not supported. therefore, bits in this register cannot be set to 1 in mode 6. when on-chip flash memory is disabled, a read will return h'00, and writes are invalid. when setting bits 6 to 0 in this register to 1, each bit should be set individually. writes to the esu, psu, ev and pv bits in flmcr are enabled only when fwe = 1 and swe = 1; writes to the e bit only when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and esu = 1; and writes to the p bit only when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and psu = 1. 590 bit modes 1 to 4, and 6 7 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r initial value r/w initial value r/w modes 5 and 7 1/0 r 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w fwe ev 6543210 esu psu pv e p program setup prepares for a transition to program mode. erase setup prepares for a transition to erase mode. erase mode designates transition to or exit from erase mode program mode designates transition to or exit from program mode program-verify mode designates transition to or exit from program-verify mode erase-verify mode designates transition to or exit from erase-verify mode flash write enable bit sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. software write enable bit enables or disables the flash memory. swe bit 7?lash write enable bit (fwe): sets hardware protection against flash memory programming/erasing. when using this bit, refer to section 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. bit 7: fwe description 0 when a low level is input to the fwe pin (hardware-protected state) 1 when a high level is input to the fwe pin bit 6?oftware write enable bit (swe)* 1, * 2 : this bit enables/disables flash memory programming/erasing. this bit should be set before setting flmcr bits 5 to 0, and ebr bits 7 to 0. do not set the esu, psu, ev, pv, e, or p bits at the same time. 591 bit 6: swe description 0 program/erase disabled (initial value) 1 program/erase enabled [setting condition] when fwe = 1 bit 5?rase setup bit (esu) * 1 : prepares for a transition to erase mode. do not set the swe, psu, ev, pv, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 5: esu description 0 erase setup cleared (initial value) 1 erase setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 bit 4?rogram setup bit (psu) * 1 : prepares for a transition to program mode. do not set the swe, esu, ev, pv, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 4: psu description 0 program setup cleared (initial value) 1 program setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 bit 3?rase-verify (ev) * 1 : selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, pv, e, or p bit at the same time. bit 3: ev description 0 erase-verify mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to erase-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 bit 2?rogram-verify (pv)* 1 : selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, ev, e, or p bit at the same time. 592 bit 2: pv description 0 program-verify mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to program-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, and swe = 1 bit 1?rase (e) * 1, * 3 : selects erase mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, or p bit at the same time. bit 1: e description 0 erase mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to erase mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and esu = 1 bit 0?rogram (p) * 1, * 3 : selects program mode transition or clearing. do not set the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, or e bit at the same time. bit 0: p description 0 program mode cleared (initial value) 1 transition to program mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and psu = 1 notes: 1. do not set two or more bits at the same time. do not turn off v cc when a bit is set. 2. do not set/clear the swe bit simultaneously with other bits (esu, psu, ev, pv, e, p). 3. set the p and e bits according to the program and erase algorithms shown in section 18.5, programming and erasing flash memory. for the usage precautions, see section 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. 593 18.3.2 erase block register (ebr) ebr is an 8-bit register that designates the flash memory block for erasure. ebr is initialized to h'00 by a reset, in hardware standby mode, or software standby mode, when a high level is not input to the fwe terminal, or when the flmcr swe bit is 0 when a high level is applied to the fwe terminal. when a bit is set in ebr, the corresponding block can be erased. other blocks are erase - protected. the blocks are erased block by block. therefore, set only one bit in ebr; do not set bits in ebr to erase two or more blocks at the same time. each bit in ebr cannot be set until the swe bit in flmcr is set. the flash memory block configuration is shown in table 18.4. to erase all the blocks, erase each block sequentially. the h8/3067 series does not support the on-board programming mode in mode 6, so bits in this register cannot be set to 1 in mode 6. bit 7 eb7 eb3 6543210 eb5 eb4 eb2 eb1 eb0 eb6 modes 1 to 4, and 6 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r initial value r/w initial value r/w modes 5 and 7 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w bits 7 to 0?lock 7 to 0 (eb7 to eb0): these bits select blocks (eb7 to eb0) to be erased. bits 7 to 0: eb7 to eb0 description 0 block eb7 to eb0 is not selected. (initial value) 1 block eb7 to eb0 is selected. note: set each bit of ebr to h'00 except when erasing. 594 table 18.4 flash memory erase blocks block (size) address eb0 (1 kb) h'000000 to h'0003ff eb1 (1 kb) h'000400 to h'0007ff eb2 (1 kb) h'000800 to h'000bff eb3 (1 kb) h'000c00 to h'000fff eb4 (28 kb) h'001000 to h'007fff eb5 (32 kb) h'008000 to h'00ffff eb6 (32 kb) h'010000 to h'017fff eb7 (32 kb) h'018000 to h'01ffff 18.3.3 ram control register (ramcr) ramcr selects the ram area used when emulating real-time reprogramming of the flash memory. bit 7 rams 6543210 ram2 ram1 ram2/1 this bit is used with bit 3 to set the ram area. ram select this bit is used with bits 2 and 1 to set the ram area. reserved bits reserved bit modes 1 to 4 1 1 1 1 0 r 0 r 0 r 1 initial value r/w initial value r/w modes 5 to 7 1 1 1 1 0 r/w * 0 r/w * 0 r/w * 1 note: cannot be set to 1 in mode 6. bits 7 to 4?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 595 bit 3?am select (rams): is used with bits 2 to 1 to reassign an area to ram (see table 18.5). the initial setting for this bit is 0 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (internal flash memory enabled) and programming is enabled.* in modes other than 5 to 7, 0 is always read and writing is disabled. it is initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. when bit 3 is set, all flash-memory blocks are protected from programming and erasing. bits 2 to 1?am2 to ram1: these bits are used with bit 3 to reassign an area to ram (see table 18.5). the initial setting for this bit is 0 in modes 5, 6, and 7 (internal flash memory enabled) and programming is enabled.* in modes other than 5 to 7, 0 is always read and writing is disabled. they are initialized by a reset and in hardware standby mode. they are not initialized in software standby mode. bit 0?eserved: this bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1. note: * flash memory emulation by ram is not supported for mode 6 (single chip normal mode), so programming is possible, but do not set 1. when performing flash memory emulation by ram, the rame bit in syscr must be set to 1. table 18.5 ram area reassignment bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 ram ram area rams ram2 ram1 emulation state h'fff000 to h'fff3ff 0 0/1 0/1 no emulation h'000000 to h'0003ff 1 0 0 mapping ram h'000400 to h'0007ff 1 0 1 h'000800 to h'000bff 1 1 0 h'000c00 to h'000fff 1 1 1 rom block eb0 eb3 (h'000000 h'000fff) rom area ram area h'000000 h'000400 h'000800 h'000c00 eb0 eb1 eb3 real ram h'0003ff h'0007ff h'000bff h'000fff h'ffef20 h'fff000 h'fff400 h'ffefff h'fff3ff h'ffff1f mapping ram eb2 ram overlap area (h'fff000 h'fff3ff) ram selection area rom selection area figure 18.2 example of overlap rom area and ram area 596 18.3.4 flash memory status register the flash memory status register (flmsr) detects flash memory errors. bit initial value r/w 7 0 fler 6543210 111 1111 r reserved bits flash memory error status flag indicating that an error was detected during programming or erasing 597 bit 7?lash memory error (fler): indicates that an error occurred while flash memory was being programmed or erased. when bit 7 is set, flash memory is placed in an error-protect mode. bit 7 fler description 0 flash memory program/erase protection (error protection * 1 ) is disabled (initial value) [clearing conditions] wdt reset, reset by res * 1 ) is enabled [setting conditions] 1. flash memory was read * 2 while being programmed or erased (including vector or instruction fetch, but not including reading of a ram area overlapped onto flash memory). 2. a hardware exception-handling sequence (other than a reset, invalid instruction, trap instruction, or zero-divide exception) was executed just before programming or erasing. * 3 3. the sleep instruction (including software standby mode) was executed during programming or erasing. notes: 1. for details, see section 18.6.3, error protection. 2. the read data has undetermined values. 3. before stack and vector read by exception handling. bits 6 to 0?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. 598 18.4 on-board programming modes when pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be performed on the on-chip flash memory. there are two on-board programming modes: boot mode and user program mode. the pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table 18.6. in h8/3067f mode 6 (on-chip rom enabled), the boot mode and user program mode cannot be used. for the notes on fwe pin set/reset, see section 18.9 notes on flash memory programming/erasing. table 18.6 setting on-board programming modes mode fwe md 2 md 1 md 0 notes boot mode mode 5 1 * 1 0 * 2 0 0 0 : v il mode 7 0 * 2 1 0 1 : v ih user program mode mode 5 1 0 1 mode 7 1 1 1 notes: 1. for the high level input timing, see items (6) and (7) of notes on using the boot mode. 2. in the boot mode, the md 2 setting becomes inverted input. in the boot mode in the h8/3067 f-ztat , the levels of the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) are reflected in mode select bits 2 to 0 (mds2 to mds0) in the mode control register (mdcr). note that this specification differs from that of the h8/3039f series. 599 on-board programming modes ? boot mode flash memory h8/3067 series chip ram host programming control program sci application program (old version) programming control program new application program programming control program new application program flash memory h8/3067 series chip ram host sci application program (old version) boot program area new application program flash memory h8/3067 series chip ram host sci flash memory erase boot program flash memory h8/3067 series chip program execution state ram host sci new application program boot program 1. initial state the flash memory is in the erased state when the device is shipped. the description here applies to the case where the old program version or data is being rewritten. the user should prepare the programming control program and new application program beforehand in the host. 2. programming control program transfer when boot mode is entered, the boot program in the h8/3067 series chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is started, an sci communication check is carried out, and the boot program required for flash memory erasing is automatically transferred to the ram boot program area. 3. flash memory initialization the erase program in the boot program area (in ram) is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to h'ff). in boot mode, entire flash memory erasure is performed, without regard to blocks. 4. writing new application program the programming control program transferred from the host to ram by sci communication is executed, and the new application program in the host is written into the flash memory. boot program boot program boot program area programming control program figure 18.3 boot mode 600 ? user program mode flash memory h8/3067 series chip ram host programming/ erase control program sci boot program new application program flash memory h8/3067 series chip ram host sci new application program flash memory h8/3067 series chip ram host sci flash memory erase boot program new application program flash memory h8/3067 series chip program execution state ram host sci boot program boot program application program (old version) new application program 1. initial state (1) the program that will transfer the programming/ erase control program to on-chip ram should be written into the flash memory by the user beforehand. (2) the programming/erase control program should be prepared in the host or in the flash memory. 2. programming/erase control program transfer when the fwe pin is driven high, user software confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase control program to ram. 3. flash memory initialization the programming/erase program in ram is executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to h'ff). erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte units. 4. writing new application program next, the new application program in the host is written into the erased flash memory blocks. do not write to unerased blocks. programming/ erase control program programming/ erase control program programming/ erase control program application program (old version) transfer program transfer program fwe assessment program transfer program fwe assessment program transfer program figure 18.4 user program mode (example) 601 18.4.1 boot mode when boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the host beforehand. the channel 1 sci to be used is set to asynchronous mode. in reset start, after setting this lsi pin to the boot mode, start the microcomputer boot program, measure the low period of the data sent from the host, and select the bit rate register (brr) value beforehand. then enable reception of the user program from the outside using the serial communication interface (sci) on this lsi, and write the received user program to on-chip ram. after the program has been stored the end of writing, execution branches to the top address (h'fff400) of the on-chip ram, execute the program written on the on-chip ram, and enable flash memory program/erase. the system configuration in boot mode is shown in figure 18.5, and the boot program mode execution procedure in figure 18.6. rxd 1 txd 1 sci1 h8/3067f flash memory write data reception verify data transmission host on-chip ram figure 18.5 system configuration in boot mode 602 after branching to the ram boot program area (h'fef20 to h'fff3ff), the h8/3067 checks the data in the flashmemory user area. after sending h'aa, the h8/3067 branches to the ram area (h'fff400) and executes the user program transferred to the ram. transfer end byte count n=0? all data=h'ff? yes yes no no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 8 9 erase all blocks of flash memory. set the h8/3067 to the boot mode and reset starts the lsi. set the host to the prescribed bit rate (4800, 9600) and consecutively send h'00 data in 8-bit data, 1 stop bit format. the h8/3067 repeatedly measures the rxd1 pin low period and calculates the asynchronous communication bit rate at which the host performs transfer. at the end of sci bit rate adjustment, the h8/3067 sends one byte of h'00 data to signal the end of adjustment. check if the host normally received the one byte bit rate adjustment end signal sent from the h8/3067 and sent one byte of h'55 data. after h'55 is sent, the host receives h'aa and sends the byte count of the user program that is transferred to the h8/3067. send the 2-byte count in upper byte and lower byte order. then sequentially send the program set by the user. the h8/3067 sequentially sends (echo back) each byte of the received byte count and user program to the host as verification data. the h8/3067 sequentially writes the received user program to the on-chip ram area (h'fff400 h'ffff1f). before executing the transferred user program, the h8/3067 checks if data was written to flash memory after control branched to the ram boot program area (h'fef20 h'fff3f). if data was already written to flash memory, all the blocks are erased. 9 notes: 1. 2. 3. after sending h'aa, this lsi branches to the on-chip ram area (h'fff400) and executes the user program written to that area. the ram area that can be used by the user is 2.8k byte. set the transfer byte count to within 2.8k byte. always send the 2-byte transfer byte count in upper byte and lower byte order. transfer byte count example: for 256 bytes (h'0100), upper byte h'01, lower byte h'00. set the part that controls the user program flash memory at the program according to the flash memory programming/erase algorithms described later. when a memory cell malfunctions and cannot be erased, the h8/3067 sends one h'ff byte as an erase error and stops the erase operation and subsequent operations. the h8/3067 transfers the user program to ram. start set pins to boot program mode and execute reset-start host transfers data (h'00) continuously at prescribed bit rate the h8/3067 measures low period of h'00 data transmitted by host the h8/3067 calculates bit rate and sets value in bit rate register after bit rate adjustment, h8/3067 transmits one byte of h'00 data to host to indicate end of adjustment host confirms normal reception of bit rate adjustment end indication (h'00), and transmits one byte of h'55 data after receiving h'55, the h8/3067 sends h'aa and receives two bytes of the byte count (n) of the program transferred to the on-chip ram. the h8/3067 calculates the remaining number of bytes to be sent (n=n-1). * 3 * 2 * 1 figure 18.6 boot mode execution procedure 603 automatic sci bit rate adjustment start bit stop bit d0 d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 low period (9 bits) measured (h'00 data) high period (1 or more bits) figure 18.7 measuring the low period of the communication data from the host when boot mode is initiated, this lsi measures the low period of the asynchronous sci communication data (h'00) transmitted continuously from the host (figure 18.7). the sci transmit/receive format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. this lsi calculates the bit rate of the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one h'00 byte to the host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. the host should confirm that this adjustment end indication (h'00) has been received normally, and transmit one h'55 byte to the lsi. if reception cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations. depending on the host s transmission bit rate and the system clock frequency of this lsi, there will be a discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the lsi. to ensure correct sci operation, the host s transfer bit rate should be set to 4800 and 9600 bps* 1 . table 18.7 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of this lsi bit rate is possible. the boot program should be executed within this system clock range* 2 . table 18.7 system clock frequencies for which automatic adjustment of this lsi bit rate is possible host bit rate (bps) system clock frequency for which automatic adjustment of this lsi bit rate is possible (mhz) 9600 8 to 20 4800 4 to 20 notes: 1. the host bit rate settings are 4800 and 9600bps only. do not use any other setting. 2. this lsi may automatically adjusts the bit rate except for bit rate and system clock combinations as shown in table 18.7. however, the bit rate of the host and this lsi will be different and subsequent transfers will not be carried out normally. therefore, always execute the boot mode within the range of the bit rate and system clock combinations shown in table 18.7. 604 on-chip ram area divisions in boot mode: in boot mode, the ram area is divided into an area used by the boot program and an area to which the user program is transferred via the sci, as shown in figure 18.8. the boot program area can be used when a transition is made to the execution state for the user program transferred to ram. h'ffef20 h'ffff1f user program transfer area boot program area * 1 h'fff3ff h'fff400 note : 1. the boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution state for the user program transferred to ram. note also that the boot program remains in this ram area even after control branches to the user program. figure 18.8 ram areas in boot mode notes on using the boot mode (1) when this lsi comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period the input at the sci s rxd 1 pin. the reset should end with rxd 1 high. after the reset ends, it takes about 100 states for this lsi to get ready to measure the low period of the rxd 1 input. (2) if any data has been written to the flash memory (if all data is not h'ff), all flash memory blocks are erased when this mode is executed. therefore, boot mode should be used for initial on-board programming, or for forced recovery if the program to be activated in user program mode is accidentally erased and user program mode cannot be executed, for example. (3) interrupts cannot be used during programming or erasing of flash memory. (4) the rxd 1 and txd 1 pins should be pulled up on the board. 605 (5) this lsi terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip sci(channel 1) (by clearing the re and te bits in serial control register (scr)) before branching to the user program. however, the adjusted bit rate is held in the bit rate register (brr). at this time, the txd 1 pin is in the high level output state (p9ddr p9 1 ddr=1, p9dr p9 1 dr=1). before branching to the user program the value of the general registers in the cpu are also undefined. therefore, the general registers must be initialized immediately after control branches to the user program. since the stack pointer (sp) is implicitly used during subroutine call, etc., a stack area must be specified for use by the user program. there are no other internal i/o registers in which the initial value is changed. (6) transition to the boot mode executes a reset-start of this lsi after setting the md0 to md2 and fwe pins according to the mode setting conditions shown in table 18.6. at this time, this lsi latches the status of the mode pin inside the microcomputer to maintain the boot mode status at the reset clear (startup with low -> high) timing* 1 . to clear boot mode, it is necessary to drive the fwe pin low during the reset, and then execute reset release* 1 . the following points must be noted: (a) before making a transition from the boot mode to the regular mode, the microcomputer boot mode must be reset by reset input via the res pin. at this time, the res pin must be hold at low level for at least 20 system clock. * 3 (b) do not change the input levels at the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) or the fwe pin while in boot mode. when making a mode transition, first enter the reset state by inputting a low level to the res pin. when a watchdog timer reset was generated in the boot mode, the microcomputer mode is not reset and the on-chip boot program is restarted regardless of the state of the mode pin. (c) do not input low level to the fwe pin while the boot program is executing and when programming/erasing flash memory. * 2 (7) if the mode pin and fwe pin input levels are changed from 0 v to v cc or from v cc to 0v during a reset (while a low level is being input to the res pin), the microcomputer s operating mode will change. therefore, since the state of the address dual port and bus control output signals ( as , rd , hwr , lwr ) changes, use of these pins as output signals during reset must be disabled outside the microcomputer. notes: 1. the mode pin and fwe pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t mds ) relative to the reset clear timing. 2. for notes on fwe pin high/low, see section 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. 3. see section 4.2.2, reset sequence and 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. with the mask rom version of the h8/3067, h8/3066, and h8/3065, the minimum reset period during operation is 10 system clocks. however, the flash memory and flash memory r versions of the h8/3037 requires a minimum of 20 system clocks. 606 18.4.2 user program mode when set to the user program mode, this lsi can erase and program its flash memory by executing a user program. therefore, on-chip flash memory on-board programming can be performed by providing a means of controlling fwe and supplying the write data on the board and providing a write program in a part of the program area. to select this mode, set the lsi to on-chip rom enable modes 5 and 7 and apply a high level to the fwe pin. in this mode, the peripheral functions, other than flash memory, are performed the same as in modes 5 and 7. in mode 6, do not program/erase the flash memory. when setting mode 6, always input low level to the fwe pin. since the flash memory cannot be read while it is being programmed/erased, place a programming program on external memory, or transfer the programming program to ram area, and execute it in the ram. figure 18.9 shows the procedure for executing when transferred to on-chip ram. during reset start, starting from the user program mode is possible. 607 fwe=high (user program mode) branch to program in ram. transfer on-board programming program to ram. reset start md 2 - md 0 =101, 111 execute on-board programming program in ram (flash memory reprogramming). input low level to fwe after swe bit clear (user program mode exit) execute user application program in flash memory. 608 18.5 programming/erasing flash memory a software method, using the cpu, is employed to program and erase flash memory in the on- board programming modes. there are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. transitions to these modes can be made by setting the psu, p, e, pv, and ev bits in flmcr. for a description of state transition by flmcr bit setting, see figure 18.10. the flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. therefore, the program that controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be located and executed in on-chip ram or external memory. for the programming/erasing notes, see section 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. for the wait time after each bit in flmcr is set or cleared, see section 21.2.6, flash memory characteristics. notes: 1. operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, e, and p bits in flmcr is executed by a program in flash memory. 2. when programming or erasing, set the fwe pin input level to the high level, and set fwe to 1. (programming/erasing will not be executed if fwe = 0). 609 normal mode on-board programming mode software reprogramming disable state erase setup state erase mode programming mode erase-verify mode program setup state program-verify mode esu=1 esu=0 swe=1 swe=0 fwe=1 fwe=0 * 1 * 2 * 3 ev=1 ev=0 e=1 e=0 pv=1 pv=0 p=1 p=0 psu=1 psu=0 software reprogramming enable state notes: : normal mode : on-board programming mode 1. do not make a state transition by setting or clearing two or more bits at the same time. 2. after transition from the erase mode to the erase setup state, do not make a transition to the erase mode without going through the software reprogramming enable state. 3. after transition from the erase mode to the erase setup state, do not switch to the program mode without going through the software reprogramming enable state. figure 18.10 state transition by setting of each bit of flmcr 18.5.1 program mode follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 18.11 to write data or programs to flash memory. performing program operations according to this flowchart will enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability. programming should be carried out 32 bytes at a time. for the wait time (x, y, z, , , , , ) after setting or clearing each bit in the flash memory control register (flmcr) and the maximum programming count (n), see table 21.19 in section 21.2.6, flash memory characteristics. 610 following the elapse of (x) s or more after the swe bit is set to 1 in flash memory control register (flmcr), 32-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram data area, and the 32-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write addresses. (the lower 8 bits of the first address written to must be h'00, h'20, h'40, h'60, h'80, h'a0, h'c0, or h'e0.) 32 consecutive byte data transfers are performed. the program address and program data are latched in the flash memory. a 32-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing fewer than 32 bytes; in this case, h'ff data must be written to the extra addresses. next, the watchdog timer (wdt) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc. set a value greater than (y + z + + ) s as the wdt overflow period. preparation for entering program mode (program setup) is performed next by setting the psu bit in flmcr. the operating mode is then switched to program mode by setting the p bit in flmcr after the elapse of at least (y) s. the time while the p bit is set is the flash memory programming time. make a program setting so that the time for one programming operation is within the range of (z) s. the wait time after p bit setting must be changed according to the number of reprogramming loops. for details, see section 21.2.6, flash memory characteristics. 18.5.2 program-verify mode in program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been correctly written in the flash memory. clear the p bit in flmcr, then wait for at least ( ) s before clearing the psu bit to exit program mode. after exiting program mode, the watchdog timer setting is also cleared. then the operating mode is switched to program-verify mode by setting the pv bit in flmcr. before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of h'ff data should be made to the addresses to be read. the dummy write should be executed after the elapse of ( ) s or more. when the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. wait at least ( ) s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data, and reprogram data is computed (see figure 18.11) and transferred to ram. after verification of 32 bytes of data has been completed, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least ( ) s, then determine whether 32-byte programming has finished. if reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the program/program-verify sequence as before. however, ensure that the program/program-verify sequence is not repeated more than (n) times on the same bits. note: a 32-byte area to store program data and a 32-byte area to store reprogram data are required in ram. 611 start end of programming set swe bit in flmcr wait (x) > 1 1 1 still in erased state; no action ram program data storage area (32 bytes) reprogram data storage area (32 bytes) no reprogram figure 18.11 program/program-verify flowchart 612 18.5.3 erase mode flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 18.12. for the wait time (x, y, z, , , , , ) after setting or clearing of each bit in the flash memory control register (flmcr and the maximum erase count (n)), see table 21.19 of section 21.2.6, flash memory characteristics. to erase the contents of flash memory, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in erase block register (ebr) at least (x) s after setting the swe bit to 1 in flmcr. next, the watchdog timer (wdt) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. set a value greater than ( z ) ms + (y + + ) s as the wdt overflow period. preparation for entering erase mode (erase setup) is performed next by setting the esu bit in flmcr. the operating mode is then switched to erase mode by setting the e bit in flmcr after the elapse of at least (y) s. the time during which the e bit is set is the flash memory erase time. ensure that the erase time does not exceed (z) ms. note: with flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased to 0 ) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure. 18.5.4 erase-verify mode in erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been correctly erased. after the elapse of the fixed erase time, clear the e bit in flmcr, then wait for at least ( ) s before clearing the esu bit to exit erase mode. after exiting erase mode, the watchdog timer setting is also cleared. the operating mode is then switched to erase-verify mode by setting the ev bit in flmcr. before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of h'ff data should be made to the addresses to be read. the dummy write should be executed after the elapse of ( ) s or more. when the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the latched address is read. wait at least ( ) s after the dummy write before performing this read operation. if the read data has been erased (all 1 ), a dummy write is performed to the next address, and erase-verify is performed. if the read data is unerased, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence as before. however, do not repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence more than (n) times. 613 end of erasing start set swe bit in flmcr wait (x) figure 18.12 erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erasing) 614 18.6 flash memory protection there are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software protection, and error protection. 18.6.1 hardware protection hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly disabled or aborted. hardware protection is reset by settings in the flash memory control register (flmcr) and erase block register (ebr). in the case of error protection, the p bit and e bit can be set, but a transition is not made to program mode or erase mode. (see table 18.8.) 615 table 18.8 hardware protection function item description program erase verify * 1 fwe pin protection ? * 4 no * 2 no * 3 no reset/standby protection ? ? res res res * 5 no no * 3 no error protection ? res * 3 yes notes: 1. two modes: program-verify and erase-verify. 2. the ram area that overlapped flash memory is deleted. 3. all blocks become unerasable and specification by block is impossible. 4. for more information, see section 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. 5. see sections 4.2.2, reset sequence and 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. the h8/3067f requires a minimum reset time during operation of 20 system clocks. 616 18.6.2 software protection software protection can be implemented by setting the rams bit in ram control register (ramcr) and erase block register (ebr). when software protection is in effect, setting the p or e bit in flash memory control register (flmcr) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. (see table 18.9.) table 18.9 software protection function item description program erase verify * 1 emulation protection * 2 ? * 2 no * 3 yes block specification protection ? * 4 however, program protection is disabled. ? no yes notes: 1. two modes: program-verify mode and erase-verify mode. 2. programming to the ram area that overlaps flash memory is possible. 3. all blocks become unerasable, and specification by block is impossible. 4. set h'00 in the ebr bits, except for erase. 18.6.3 error protection in error protection, an error is detected when this lsi runaway occurs during flash memory programming/erasing* 1 , or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. aborting the program/erase operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. if the lsi malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the fler bit* 2 is set to 1 in flash memory status register (flmsr) and the error protection state is entered. the flmcr and ebr settings* 3 are retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. when 1 is set in the fler bit, transition to the program mode or erase mode cannot be made even by setting the p and e bits in flmcr. however, pv and ev bit in flmcr setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. error protection is released only by a reset via the res pin or a wdt reset, or in the hardware standby mode. 617 figure 18.13 shows the flash memory state transition diagram. notes: 1. this is the state in which the p or e bit in flmcr is set to 1. in this state, nmi input is disabled. for more information, see section 18.6.4, nmi input disable conditions. 2. for a detailed description of the fler bits setting conditions, see section 18.3.4, flash memory status register (flmsr). 3. data can be written to flmcr and ebr. however, when transition to the software standby mode was made in the error protection state, the registers are initialized. : memory read enable : verify-read enable : programming enable : erasing enable rd vf pr er : memory read disabled : verify-read disabled : programming disabled : erasing disabled : registers (flmcr, ebr) initialize state rd vf pr er pr er rd vf pr er rd vf pr er rd vf pr er figure 18.13 flash memory state transitions (when high level apply to fwe pin in modes 5 and 7 (on-chip rom enabled)) the error protection function is disabled for errors other than the fler bit set conditions. if considerable time elapses up to transit to this protection state, the flash memory may already be damaged. as a result, this function cannot completely protect the flash memory against damage. 618 therefore, to prevent such erroneous operation, operation must be carried out correctly in according with the program/erase algorithms in the state that flash write enable (fwe) is set. in addition, the operation must be always carried out correctly by supervising microcomputer errors inside and outside the chip with the watchdog timer, etc. at transition to this protection mode, the flash memory may be erroneously programmed or erased, or its abort may result in incomplete programming and erasing. in such cases, always forcibly return (reprogram) by boot mode. however, overprogramming and overerasing may prevent the boot mode from starting normally. 18.6.4 nmi input disable conditions while flash memory is being programed/erased and the boot program is executing in the boot mode (however, period up to branching to on-chip ram area)* 1 , nmi input is disabled because the programming/erasing operations have priority. this is done to avoid the following operation states: 1. generation of an nmi input during programming/erasing violates the program/erase algorithms and normal operation can not longer be assured. 2. verify-read cannot be carried out normally* 2 during nmi exception handling during programming/erasing and the microcomputer runs away as a result. 3. if an nmi input is generated during boot program execution, the normal boot mode sequence cannot be executed. therefore, this lsi has conditions that exceptionally disable nmi inputs only in the on-board programming mode. however, this does not assure normal programming/erasing and microcomputer operation. thus, in the fwe application state, all requests, including nmi, inside and outside the microcomputer, exception handling, and bus release must be restricted. nmi inputs are also disabled in the error protection state and the state that holds the p or e bit in flmcr during flash memory emulation by ram. notes: 1. indicates the period up to branching to the on-chip ram boot program area (h'fef20 - h'fff3f). (this branch occurs immediately after user program transfer was completed.) therefore, after branching to ram area, nmi input is enabled in states other than the program/erase state. thus, interrupt requests inside and outside the microcomputer must be disabled until initial writing by user program (writing of vector table and nmi processing program, etc.) is completed. 2. in this case, vector read is not performed normally for the following two reasons: a. the correct value cannot be read even by reading the flash memory during programming/erasing. (value is undefined.) 619 b. if a value has not yet been written to the nmi vector table, nmi exception handling will not be performed correctly. 18.7 flash memory emulation by ram erasing and programming the flash memory takes time, which can make it difficult to tune parameters and other data in real time. in this case, overlapping part (h'fff000 to h'fff3ff) of ram onto a small block area of flash memory can be performed to emulate real-time reprogramming of flash memory. this ram reassignment is performed using bits 3 to 1 in the ram control register (ramcr). after the ram area change, two areas can be accessed: the overlapped flash memory area and the original ram area (h'fff000 to h'fff3ff). for a description of the ramcr and ram area setting procedure, see section 18.3.3 ram control register (ramcr). example of real-time emulation of flash memory an example of ram area h'fff000 to h'fff3ff overlapping eb2 (h'000800 to h'000bff) flash memory area is shown below. h'000000 h'000800 h'ffef20 h'fff400 h'fff000 h'fff3ff h'ffefff h'ffff1f h'000bff h'000fff eb2 area flash memory space on-chip ram area block area * overlapping ram (real ram area) (image ram area) 620 notes on use of the ram emulation function (1) notes on flash write enable (fwe) high/low care is necessary to prevent erroneous programming/erasing at fwe=high/low, the same as in the on-board programming mode. to prevent erroneous programming and erasing due to program runaway, etc., during fwe application, in particular, the watchdog timer should be set when the psu, p, esu, or e bit is set to 1 in flmcr, even while the emulation function is being used. for more information, see section 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. (2) nmi input disable conditions when the p and e bits in flmcr are set, nmi input is disabled, the same as normal program/erase even when using the emulation function. nmi input is cleared when the p and e bits are reset (including watchdog timer reset), in the standby mode, when a high level is not applied to fwe, and when the swe bit in flmcr is 0 in state in which a high level is input to fwe. 18.8 flash memory prom mode 18.8.1 prom mode setting this lsi has a prom mode, besides an on-board programming mode, as a flash memory program/erase mode. in the prom mode, a program can be freely written to the on-chip rom using a prom writer that supports the hitachi 128kbytes flash memory on-chip microcomputer device type. for notes on prom mode use, see sections 18.8.9, notes on memory programming and 18.9, notes on flash memory programming/erasing. 18.8.2 memory map figure 18.15 shows the prom mode memory map. h8/3067f h'000000 h'01ffff h'000000 h'01ffff address in mcu mode address in prom mode on-chip rom area figure 18.15 prom mode memory map 621 18.8.3 prom mode operation table 18.10 shows how the different operating modes are set when using prom mode, and table 18.11 lists the commands used in prom mode. details of each mode are given below. ? memory read mode memory read mode supports byte reads. ? auto-program mode auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time. status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming. ? auto-erase mode auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory. status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing. ? status read mode status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal termination can be confirmed by reading the i/o 6 signal. in status read mode, error information is output if an error occurs. table 18.10 settings for each operating mode in prom mode pin names * 3 mode fwe ce oe we d 0 to d 7 a 0 to a 17 read v cc or 0 l l h data output ain output disable v cc or 0 l h h hi-z x command write v cc or 0 l h l data input ain * 2 chip disable * 1 v cc or 0 h x x hi-z x l : low level h : high level x : undefined hi-z : high impedance notes: for command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode, input vcc (v) to fwe. 1. chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state. 2. ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode. 3. the pin names are those assigned in h8/3067f prom mode. 622 table 18.11 prom mode commands number 1st cycle 2nd cycle command name of cycles mode address data mode address data memory read mode 1 write x h'00 read ra dout auto-program mode 129 write x h'40 write wa din auto-erase mode 2 write x h'20 write x h'20 status read mode 2 write x h'71 write x h'71 ra : read address wa : program address dout : read data din : program data notes: 1. in auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous 128-byte write. table 18.12 dc characteristics in memory read mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input high voltage 0 7 0 0 , a 16 a 0 v ih 2.2 vcc + 0.3 v input low voltage 0 7 0 0 , a 16 a 0 v il 0.3 0.8 v schmitt trigger oe ce we 1.0 2.5 v input voltage v t + 2.0 3.5 v v t + v t 0.4 v output high voltage 0 7 0 0 v oh 2.4 vi oh = 200 ? output low voltage 0 7 0 0 v ol 0.45 v i ol = 1.6 ma input leakage current 0 7 0 0 , a 16 a 0 | i li | 2 a v cc current reading i cc 40 65 ma programming i cc 50 85 ma erasing i cc 50 85 ma notes: for the absolute maximum ratings, see section 20.2.1, absolute maximum ratings exceeding the absolute maximum ratings may cause permanent damage to the chip. 623 18.8.4 memory read mode ac characteristics table 18.13 ac characteristics in memory read mode transition (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 ? ce ns ce ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns we 30 ns we 30 ns ce a16-0 i/o7-0 oe we command write t ceh t ds t dh tf tr t nxtc note: data is latched on the rising edge of we. t ces t wep memory read mode address stable figure 18.16 timing waveform in memory read mode transition 624 table 18.14 ac characteristics in memory contents read (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min max unit notes access time t acc 20 ? ce 150 ns oe 150 ns output disable delay time t df 100 ns data output hold time t oh 5 ns ce a16-0 i/o7-0 oe we v ih v il v il t acc t oh t oh t acc address stable address stable figure 18.17 ce / oe enable state read ce a16-0 i/o7-0 v ih oe we t ce t acc t oe t oh t oh t df t ce t acc t oe address stable address stable t df figure 18.18 ce / oe clock read 625 table 18.15 ac characteristics in transition from memory read mode to another mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 ? ce ns ce ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns we 30 ns we 30 ns ce a16-0 i/o7-0 oe we another mode command write t ceh t ds t dh tf tr t nxtc note: do not enable we and oe simultaneously t ces t wep memory read mode address stable figure 18.19 transition from memory read mode to another mode 626 18.8.5 auto-program mode ac characteristics table 18.16 ac characteristics in auto-program mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 ? ce ns ce ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns status polling start time t wsts 1 ms status polling access time t spa 150 ns address setup time t as 0 ns address hold time t ah 60 ns memory write time t write 1 3000 ms we 30 ns we 30 ns write setup time t pns 100 ns write end setup time t pnh 100 ns 627 address stable ce fwe a16-0 i/o5-0 i/o6 i/o7 oe we t as t ah t dh t ds tf tr t wep t wsts t write t spa t pns t pnh t nxtc t nxtc t ceh t ces programming operation end identification signal programming normal end identification signal data transfer 1byte to 128bytes h'40 h'00 figure 18.20 auto-program mode timing waveforms cautions on use of auto-program mode ? in auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. this should be carried out by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers. ? a 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. in this case, h'ff data must be written to the extra addresses. ? if a value other than an effective address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be flagged. ? memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 18.20). do not perform transfer after the second cycle. ? do not perform a command write during a programming operation. ? perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address. characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations. ? confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking i/o 6. alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose. 628 18.8.6 auto-erase mode ac characteristics table 18.17 ac characteristics in auto-erase mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 ? ce ns ce ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns status polling start time t ests 1 ms status polling access time t spa 150 ns memory erase time t erase 100 40000 ms we 30 ns we 30 ns erase setup time t ens 100 ns erase end setup time t enh 100 ns 629 ce fwe a16-0 i/o5-0 i/o6 i/o7 oe we t ests t erase t spa t dh t ds tf tr t wep t ens t pnh t nxtc t nxtc t ceh t ces erase end identification signal erase normal and confirmation signal h'20 h'20 h'00 figure 18.21 auto-erase mode timing waveforms caution on use of erase-program mode ? auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing. ? do not perform a command write during auto-erasing. ? confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking i/o 6. alternatively, status read mode can also be used for this purpose. 630 18.8.7 status read mode table 18.18 ac characteristics in status read mode (conditions: v cc = 5.0 v 10%, v ss = 0 v, t a = 25 c 5 c) item symbol min max unit notes command write cycle t nxtc 20 ? ce ns ce ns data hold time t dh 50 ns data setup time t ds 50 ns write pulse width t wep 70 ns oe 150 ns disable delay time t df 100 ns ce 150 ns we 30 ns we 30 ns ce a16-0 i/o7-0 oe we t dh t df t ds tf tr t wep t nxtc t nxtc tf tr t wep t ds t dh t nxtc t ceh t ceh t oe t ces t ces t ce h'71 h'71 note: i/o3 and i/o2 are undefined. figure 18.22 status read mode timing waveforms 631 table 18.19 status read mode return commands pin name i/o7 i/o6 i/o5 i/o4 i/o3 i/o2 i/o1 i/o0 attribute normal end identifica- tion command error program- ming error erase error program- ming or erase count exceeded effective address error initial value 00000000 indications normal end: 0 abnormal end: 1 command error: 1 otherwise: 0 program- ming error: 1 otherwise: 0 erase error: 1 otherwise: 0 count exceeded: 1 otherwise: 0 effective address error: 1 otherwise: 0 notes on status read mode after exiting auto-program mode or auto-erase mode, status read mode must be executed without dropping the power supply. immediately after powering on, or once powering off, the return command is undefined. 18.8.8 prom mode transition time commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the prom mode setup period. after the prom mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode. table 18.20 stipulated transition times to command wait state item symbol min max unit notes standby release (oscillation settling time) t osc1 20 ms prom mode setup time t bmv 10 ms v cc hold time t dwn 0 ms 632 v cc res fwe memory read mode command wait state command wait state normal/abnormal end identification auto-program mode auto-erase mode t osc1 t bmv t dwn note: set the fwe input pin low level, except in the auto-program and auto-erase modes. figure 18.23 oscillation stabilization time, boot program transfer time 18.8.9 notes on memory programming ? when programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out auto- erasing before auto-programming (figure 18.24). ? when performing programming using prom mode on a chip that has been programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before carrying out auto-programming. notes: 1. the flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by hitachi. for other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that auto- erasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level. 2. in the prom mode, auto-programming to a 128-byte programming unit block should be performed only once. do not perform additional programming to a programmed 128-byte programming unit block. to reprogram, perform auto-programming after auto-erasing. reprogram to programmed address auto-erase (chip batch) auto-program end figure 18.24 reprogramming to programmed address 633 18.9 notes on flash memory programming/erasing the following describes notes when using the on-board programming mode, ram emulation function, and prom mode. (1) program/erase with the specified voltage and timing. applied voltages in excess of the rating can permanently damage the device. use a prom writer that supports the hitachi 128kbytes flash memory on-board microcomputer device type. do not set the prom writer at the hn28f101. if the prom writer is set to the hn28f101 by mistake, a high level can be input to the fwe pin and the lsi can be destroyed. (2) notes on powering on/powering off (see figures 18.25 to 18.27.) input a high level to the fwe pin after verifying vcc. before turning off vcc, set the fwe pin to a low level. when powering on and powering off the vcc power supply, fix the fwe pin a low level and set the flash memory to the hardware protection mode. be sure that the powering on and powering off timing is satisfied even when the power is turned off and back on in the event of a power interruption, etc. if this timing is not satisfied, microcomputer runaway, etc., may cause overprogramming or overerasing and the memory cells may not operate normally. (3) notes on fwe pin high/low switching (see figures 18.25 to 18.27.) input fwe in the state microcomputer operation is verified. if the microcomputer does not satisfy the operation confirmation state, fix the fwe pin at a low level to set the protection mode. to prevent erroneous programming/erasing of flash memory, note the following in fwe pin high/low switching: ? apply an input to the fwe pin after the vcc voltage has stabilized within the rated voltage. if an input is applied to the fwe pin when the microcomputer vcc voltage does not satisfy the rated voltage, flash memory may be erroneously programmed or erased because the microcomputer is in the unconfirmed state. ? apply an input to the fwe pin when the oscillation has stabilized (after the oscillation stabilization time). when turning on the vcc power, apply an input to the fwe pin after holding the res pin at a low level during the oscillation stabilization time (t osc1 =20ms). do not apply an input to the fwe pin when oscillation is stopped or unstable. 634 ? in the boot mode, perform fwe pin high/low switching during reset. in transition to the boot mode, input fwe=high level and set md 2 to md 0 while the res input is low. at this time, the fwe and md 2 to md 0 inputs must satisfy the mode programming setup time (t mds ) relative to the reset clear timing. the mode programming setup time is necessary for res reset timing even in transition from the boot mode to another mode. in reset during operation, the res pin must be held at a low level for at least 20 system clocks. ? in the user program mode, fwe=high/low switching is possible regardless of the res input. fwe input switching is also possible during program execution on flash memory. ? apply an input to fwe when the program is not running away. when applying an input to the fwe pin, the program execution state must be supervised using a watchdog timer, etc. ? input low level to the fwe pin when the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, e, and p bits in flmcr have been cleared. do not erroneously set the swe, esu, psu, ev, pv, e, and p bits when fwe high/low. (4) do not input a constant high level to the fwe pin. to prevent erroneous programming/erasing in the event of program runaway, etc., input a high level to the fwe pin only when programming/erasing flash memory (including flash memory emulation by ram). avoid system configurations that constantly input a high level to the fwe pin. handle program runaway, etc. by starting the watchdog timer so that flash memory is not overprogrammed/overerased even while a high level is input to the fwe pin. (5) program/erase the flash memory in accordance with the recommended algorithms. the recommended algorithms can program/erase the flash memory without applying voltage stress to the device or sacrificing the reliability of the program data. when setting the psu and esu bits in flmcr, set the watchdog timer for program runaway, etc. (6) do not set/clear the swe bit while a program is executing on flash memory. before performing flash memory program execution or data read, clear the swe bit. if the swe bit is set, the flash data can be reprogrammed, but flash memory cannot be accessed for purposes other than verify (verify during programming/erase). similarly perform flash memory program execution and data read after clearing the swe bit even when using the ram emulation function with a high level input to the fwe pin. however, ram area that overlaps flash memory space can be read/programmed whether the swe bit is set or cleared. (7) do not use an interrupt during flash memory programming or erasing. since programming/erase operations (including emulation by ram) have priority when a high level is input to the fwe pin, disable all interrupt requests, including nmi. 635 (8) do not perform additional programming. reprogram flash memory after erasing. with on-board programming, program to 32-byte programming unit blocks one time only. program to 128-byte programming unit blocks one time only even in the prom mode. erase all the programming unit blocks before reprogramming. bus release must also be disabled. flash memory access disabled period (x: wait time after swe setting) flash memory reprogrammable period (flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) always fix the level by pulling down or pulling up the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) until powering off, except for mode switching. see 21.2.6 flash memory characteristics. note: * 1 res swe bit swe set swe clear programming and erase possible wait time: x * 2 * 1 * 2 figure 18.25 powering on/off timing (boot mode) 636 flash memory access disabled period (x: wait time after swe setting) flash memory reprogrammable period (flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) always fix the level by pulling down or pulling up the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ) up to powering off, except for mode switching. see 21.2.6 flash memory characteristics. note: * 1 res swe bit swe set swe clear programming and erase possible wait time: x * 2 * 1 * 2 figure 18.26 powering on/off timing (user program mode) 637 flash memory access disabled time (x: wait time after swe setting) flash memory reprogammable period (flash memory program execution and data read, other than verify, are disabled.) in transition to the boot mode and transition from the boot mode to another mode, mode switching via res res as rd wr res res * 1 mode switching * 1 boot mode user mode user mode user program mode user program mode swe set swe clear programming and erase possible wait time: x programming and erase possible programming and erase possible wait time: x programming and erase possible wait time: x wait time: x * 2 * 3 figure 18.27 mode transition timing (example: boot mode user mode ? ? ? ? user program mode) 638 18.10 mask rom overview 18.10.1 block diagram figure 18.28 shows a block diagram of the rom. h'000000 h'000002 h'01fffe h'000001 h'000003 h'01ffff internal data bus (upper 8 bits) internal data bus (lower 8 bits) on-chip rom even addresses odd addresses figure 18.28 rom block diagram (h8/3067) 639 18.11 notes on ordering mask rom version chip when ordering the h8/3067 series chips with a mask rom, note the following. ? when ordering through an eprom, use a 128-kbyte one. ? fill all the unused addresses with h'ff as shown in figure18.27 to make the rom data size 128 kbytes for all h8/3067 series chips, which incorporate different sizes of rom. this applies to ordering through an eprom and through electrical data transfer. ? the flash memory and flash memory r versions only registers for flash memory control (flmcr, ebr, ramcr, and flmsr) are not provided in the mask rom versions. reading the corresponding addresses in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to these addresses are disabled. this must be borne in mind when switching from the flash memory and flash memory r versions to a mask rom version. hd6433067 (rom:128kbytes) address: h'00000-1ffff h'00000 h'1ffff * note: program h'ff to all addresses in these areas. hd6433066 (rom:96kbytes) address: h'00000-17fff h'00000 h'1ffff not used * not used * hd6433065 (rom:64kbytes) address: h'00000-0ffff h'00000 h'0ffff h'10000 h'17fff h'18000 h'1ffff figure 18.29 mask rom addresses and data 640 641 section 19 clock pulse generator 19.1 overview the h8/3067 series has a built-in clock pulse generator (cpg) that generates the system clock ( ) and other internal clock signals ( /2 to /4096). after duty adjustment, a frequency divider divides the clock frequency to generate the system clock ( ). the system clock is output at the pin * 1 and furnished as a master clock to prescalers that supply clock signals to the on-chip supporting modules. frequency division ratios of 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, and 1/8 can be selected for the frequency divider by settings in a division control register (divcr) * 2 . power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio. notes: 1. usage of the pin differs depending on the chip operating mode and the pstop bit setting in the module standby control register (mstcr). for details, see section 20.7, system clock output disabling function. 2. the division ratio of the frequency divider can be changed dynamically during operation. the clock output at the pin also changes when the division ratio is changed. the frequency output at the pin is shown below. = extal n where, extal:frequency of crystal resonator or external clock signal n: frequency division ratio (n = 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, or 1/8) 19.1.1 block diagram figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator. xtal extal cpg pin /2 to /4096 oscillator duty adjustment circuit frequency divider division control register prescalers data bus figure 19.1 block diagram of clock pulse generator 642 19.2 oscillator circuit clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock signal. 19.2.1 connecting a crystal resonator circuit configuration: a crystal resonator can be connected as in the example in figure 19.2. the damping resistance rd should be selected according to table 19.1. an at-cut parallel- resonance crystal should be used. extal xtal c c c = c = 10 pf to 22 pf l1 l2 l1 l2 rd figure 19.2 connection of crystal resonator (example) table 19.1 damping resistance value damping resistance frequency f (mhz) value 2 2 < f 44 < f 88 < f 10 10 < f 13 13 < f 16 16 < f 18 18 < f 20 rd ( ) 1 k 500 200 0 0 0 0 0 note: a crystal resonator between 2 mhz and 20 mhz can be used. if the chip is to be operated at less than 2 mhz, the on-chip frequency divider should be used. (a crystal resonator of less than 2 mhz cannot be used.) crystal resonator: figure 19.3 shows an equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. the crystal resonator should have the characteristics listed in table 19.2. 643 xtal lrs c l c 0 extal at-cut parallel-resonance type figure 19.3 crystal resonator equivalent circuit table 19.2 crystal resonator parameters frequency (mhz) 2481012161820 rs max ( ) 500 120 80 70 60 50 40 40 co (pf) 7 pf max use a crystal resonator with a frequency equal to the system clock frequency ( ). notes on board design: when a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be noted: other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation. see figure 19.4. when the board is designed, the crystal resonator and its load capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the xtal and extal pins. xtal extal c l2 c l1 h8/3067 series avoid signal a signal b figure 19.4 example of incorrect board design 644 19.2.2 external clock input circuit configuration: an external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure 19.5. if the xtal pin is left open, the stray capacitance should not exceed 10 pf. if the stray capacitance at the xtal pin exceeds 10 pf in configuration a, use configuration b instead and hold the clock high in standby mode. extal xtal extal xtal external clock input open external clock input a. xtal pin left open b. complementary clock input at xtal pin figure 19.5 external clock input (examples) 645 external clock: the external clock frequency should be equal to the system clock frequency when not divided by the on-chip frequency divider. table 19.3 shows the clock timing, figure 19.6 shows the external clock input timing, and figure 19.7 shows the external clock output settling delay timing. when the appropriate external clock is input via the extal pin, its waveform is corrected by the on-chip oscillator and duty adjustment circuit. when the appropriate external clock is input via the extal pin, its waveform is corrected by the on-chip oscillator and duty adjustment circuit. the resulting stable clock is output to external devices after the external clock settling time (t dext ) has passed after the clock input. the system must remain reset with the reset signal low during t dext , while the clock output is unstable. table 19.3 clock timing v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v* 2 v cc = 3.0 v to 5.5 v v cc = 5.0 v 10% item symbol min max min max min max unit test conditions external clock input low pulse width t exl 40 ? 30 ? 15 ? ns figure 19.6 external clock input high pulse width t exh 40 ? 30 ? 15 ? ns external clock rise time t exr ?10?8?5ns external clock fall time t exf ?10?8?5ns clock low pulse t cl 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t cyc 5 mhz figure width 80 ? 80 ? 80 ? ns < 5 mhz 21.11 clock high pulse t ch 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t cyc 5 mhz width 80 ? 80 ? 80 ? ns < 5 mhz external clock output settling delay time t dext * 1 500 ? 500 ? 500 ? s figure 19.7 notes: 1. t dext includes res pulse width (t resw ). t resw is 10 tcyc in the mask rom version, and 20 tcyc in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. 2. the operating range v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v applies to the mask rom version. 646 extal t exr t exf v cc 0.7 0.3 v t exh t exl v cc 0.5 figure 19.6 external clock input timing v cc stby extal (internal or external) res t dext 2.7 v v ih figure 19.7 external clock output settling delay timing 647 19.3 duty adjustment circuit when the oscillator frequency is 5 mhz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate . 19.4 prescalers the prescalers divide the system clock ( ) to generate internal clocks ( /2 to /4096). 19.5 frequency divider the frequency divider divides the duty-adjusted clock signal to generate the system clock ( ). the frequency division ratio can be changed dynamically by modifying the value in divcr, as described below. power consumption in the chip is reduced in almost direct proportion to the frequency division ratio. the system clock generated by the frequency divider can be output at the pin. 19.5.1 register configuration table 19.4 summarizes the frequency division register. table 19.4 frequency division register address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee01b division control register divcr r/w h'fc note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 19.5.2 division control register (divcr) divcr is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects the division ratio of the frequency divider. bit initial value read/write 7 ? 1 ? 6 ? 1 ? 5 ? 1 ? 4 ? 1 ? 3 ? 1 ? 0 div0 0 r/w 2 ? 1 ? 1 div1 0 r/w reserved bits divide bits 1 and 0 these bits select the frequency division ratio divcr is initialized to h'fc by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. 648 bits 7 to 2?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bits 1 and 0?ivide (div1 and div0): these bits select the frequency division ratio, as follows. bit 1 div1 bit 0 div0 frequency division ratio 0 0 1/1 (initial value) 0 1 1/2 1 0 1/4 1 1 1/8 19.5.3 usage notes the divcr setting changes the frequency, so note the following points. ? select a frequency division ratio that stays within the assured operation range specified for the clock cycle time t cyc in the ac electrical characteristics. note that min = 1 mhz. avoid settings that give system clock frequencies less than 1 mhz. ? all on-chip module operations are based on . note that the timing of timer operations, serial communication, and other time-dependent processing differs before and after any change in the division ratio. the waiting time for exit from software standby mode also changes when the division ratio is changed. for details, see section 20.4.3, selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode. 649 section 20 power-down state 20.1 overview the h8/3067 series has a power-down state that greatly reduces power consumption by halting the cpu, and a module standby function that reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip modules. the power-down state includes the following three modes: ? sleep mode ? software standby mode ? hardware standby mode the module standby function can halt on-chip supporting modules independently of the power- down state. the modules that can be halted are the 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, sci0, sci1, sci2, dmac, dram interface, and a/d converter. table 20.1 indicates the methods of entering and exiting the power-down modes and module standby mode, and gives the status of the cpu and on-chip supporting modules in each mode. 650 table 20.1 power-down state and module standby function clock active halted halted active exiting conditions interrupt res stby nmi irq 0 to irq 2 res stby stby res stby res clear mstcr bit to 0* 5 i/o ports held held high impedance clock output output high output high impedance high impedance* 2 ram held held held* 3 other modules active halted and reset halted and reset active dram interface active halted and held* 1 halted and reset halted* 2 and held* 1 dmac active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset cpu registers held held undeter- mined cpu halted halted halted active entering conditions sleep instruc- tion executed while ssby = 0 in syscr sleep instruc- tion executed while ssby = 1 in syscr low input at stby pin corresponding bit set to 1 in mstcr mode sleep mode software standby mode hardware standby mode module standby 16-bit timer active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset 8-bit timer active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset sci0 active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset sci1 active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset sci2 active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset a/d active halted and reset halted and reset halted* 2 and reset state notes: 1. rtcnt and bits 7 and 6 of rtmcsr are initialized. other bits and registers hold their previous states. 2. state in which the corresponding mstcr bit was set to 1. for details see section 20.2.2, module standby control register h (m stcrh) and section 20.2.3, module standby control register l (mstcrl). 3. the rame bit must be cleared to 0 in syscr before the transition from the program execution state to hardware standby mode. 4. when p6 7 is used as the output pin. 5. when a mstcr bit is set to 1, the registers of the corresponding on-chip supporting module are initialized. to restart the mo dule, first clear the mstcr bit to 0, then set up the module registers again. legend syscr: system control register ssby: software standby bit mstcrh: module standby control register h mstcrl: module standby control register l * 4 651 20.2 register configuration the h8/3067 series has a system control register (syscr) that controls the power-down state, and module standby control registers h (mstcrh) and l (mstcrl) that control the module standby function. table 20.2 summarizes these registers. table 20.2 control register address* name abbreviation r/w initial value h'ee012 system control register syscr r/w h'09 h'ee01c module standby control register h mstcrh r/w h'78 h'ee01d module standby control register l mstcrl r/w h'00 note: * lower 20 bits of the address in advanced mode. 20.2.1 system control register (syscr) bit initial value read/write 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 0 r/w 3 ue 1 r/w 0 rame 1 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 ssoe 0 r/w software standby enables transition to software standby mode ram enable standby timer select 2 to 0 these bits select the waiting time of the cpu and peripheral functions user bit enable nmi edge select software standby output port enable syscr is an 8-bit readable/writable register. bit 7 (ssby), bits 6 to 4 (sts2 to sts0), and bit 1 (ssoe) control the power-down state. for information on the other syscr bits, see section 3.3, system control register (syscr). 652 bit 7?oftware standby (ssby): enables transition to software standby mode. when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt, this bit remains set to 1 after the return to normal operation. to clear this bit, write 0. bit 7 ssby description 0 sleep instruction causes transition to sleep mode (initial value) 1 sleep instruction causes transition to software standby mode bits 6 to 4?tandby timer select (sts2 to sts0): these bits select the length of time the cpu and on-chip supporting modules wait for the clock to settle when software standby mode is exited by an external interrupt. if the clock is generated by a crystal resonator, set these bits according to the clock frequency so that the waiting time will be at least 7 ms (oscillation settling time). see table 20.3. if an external clock is used, any setting is permitted. bit 6 sts2 bit 5 sts1 bit 4 sts0 description 0 0 0 waiting time = 8,192 states (initial value) 1 waiting time = 16,384 states 1 0 waiting time = 32,768 states 1 waiting time = 65,536 states 1 0 0 waiting time = 131,072 states 1 waiting time = 262,144 states 1 0 waiting time = 1,024 states 1 illegal setting bit 1?oftware standby output port enable (ssoe): specifies whether the address bus and bus control signals ( cs 0 to cs 7 , as , rd , hwr , lwr , ucas , lcas , and rfsh ) are kept as outputs or fixed high, or placed in the high-impedance state in software standby mode. bit 1 ssoe description 0 in software standby mode, the address bus and bus control signals are all high-impedance (initial value) 1 in software standby mode, the address bus retains its output state and bus control signals are fixed high 653 20.2.2 module standby control register h (mstcrh) mstcrh is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls output of the system clock ( ). it also controls the module standby function, which places individual on-chip supporting modules in the standby state. module standby can be designated for the sci0, sci1, sci2. bit initial value read/write 7 pstop 0 r/w 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 mstph0 0 r/w 2 mstph2 0 r/w 1 mstph1 0 r/w clock stop enables or disables output of the system clock module standby h2 to 0 these bits select modules to be placed in standby reserved bit mstcrh is initialized to h'78 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7 clock stop (pstop): enables or disables output of the system clock ( ). bit 1 pstop description 0 system clock output is enabled (initial value) 1 system clock output is disabled bits 6 to 3?eserved: these bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1. bit 2?odule standby h2 (mstph2): selects whether to place the sci2 in standby. bit 2 mstph2 description 0 sci2 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci2 is in standby state 654 bit 1?odule standby h1 (mstph1): selects whether to place the sci1 in standby. bit 1 mstph1 description 0 sci1 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci1 is in standby state bit 0?odule standby h0 (mstph0): selects whether to place the sci0 in standby. bit 0 mstph0 description 0 sci0 operates normally (initial value) 1 sci0 is in standby state 20.2.3 module standby control register l (mstcrl) mstcrl is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the module standby function, which places individual on-chip supporting modules in the standby state. module standby can be designated for the dmac, 16-bit timer, dram interface, 8-bit timer, and a/d converter modules. 2 mstpl2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 mstpl0 0 r/w reserved bits module standby l7, l5 to l2, l0 these bits select modules to be placed in standby bit initial value read/write 7 mstpl7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 mstpl5 0 r/w 4 mstpl4 0 r/w 3 mstpl3 0 r/w mstcrl is initialized to h'00 by a reset and in hardware standby mode. it is not initialized in software standby mode. bit 7?odule standby l7 (mstpl7): selects whether to place the dmac in standby. bit 7 mstpl7 description 0 dmac operates normally (initial value) 1 dmac is in standby state 655 bit 6?eserved: this bit can be written and read. bit 5?odule standby l5 (mstpl5): selects whether to place the dram interface in standby. bit 5 mstpl5 description 0 dram interface operates normally (initial value) 1 dram interface is in standby state bit 4?odule standby l4 (mstpl4): selects whether to place the 16-bit timer in standby. bit 4 mstpl4 description 0 16-bit timer operates normally (initial value) 1 16-bit timer is in standby state bit 3?odule standby l3 (mstpl3): selects whether to place 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 in standby. bit 3 mstpl3 description 0 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 operate normally (initial value) 1 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 are in standby state bit 2?odule standby l2 (mstpl2): selects whether to place 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 in standby. bit 2 mstpl2 description 0 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 operate normally (initial value) 1 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 are in standby state bit 1?eserved: this bit can be written and read. bit 0?odule standby l0 (mstpl0): selects whether to place the a/d converter in standby. bit 0 mstpl0 description 0 a/d converter operates normally (initial value) 1 a/d converter is in standby state 656 20.3 sleep mode 20.3.1 transition to sleep mode when the ssby bit is cleared to 0 in syscr, execution of the sleep instruction causes a transition from the program execution state to sleep mode. immediately after executing the sleep instruction the cpu halts, but the contents of its internal registers are retained. the dma controller (dmac), dram interface, and on-chip supporting modules do not halt in sleep mode. modules which have been placed in standby by the module standby function, however, remain halted. 20.3.2 exit from sleep mode sleep mode is exited by an interrupt, or by input at the res or stby pin. exit by interrupt: an interrupt terminates sleep mode and causes a transition to the interrupt exception handling state. sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt source in an on-chip supporting module if the interrupt is disabled in the on-chip supporting module. sleep mode is not exited by an interrupt other than nmi if the interrupt is masked by interrupt priority settings and the settings of the i and ui bits in ccr, ipr. exit by res input: low input at the res pin exits from sleep mode to the reset state. exit by stby input: low input at the stby pin exits from sleep mode to hardware standby mode. 657 20.4 software standby mode 20.4.1 transition to software standby mode to enter software standby mode, execute the sleep instruction while the ssby bit is set to 1 in syscr. in software standby mode, current dissipation is reduced to an extremely low level because the cpu, clock, and on-chip supporting modules all halt. the dmac and on-chip supporting modules are reset and halted. as long as the specified voltage is supplied, however, cpu register contents and on-chip ram data are retained. the settings of the i/o ports and dram interface * are also held. when the wdt is used as a watchdog timer (wt/ it = 1), the tme bit must be cleared to 0 before setting ssby. also, when setting tme to 1, ssby should be cleared to 0. clear the brle bit in brcr (inhibiting bus release) before making a transition to software standby mode. note: * rtcnt and bits 7 and 6 of rtmcsr are initialized. other bits and registers hold their previous states. 20.4.2 exit from software standby mode software standby mode can be exited by input of an external interrupt at the nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , or irq 2 pin, or by input at the res or stby pin. exit by interrupt: when an nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , or irq 2 interrupt request signal is received, the clock oscillator begins operating. after the oscillator settling time selected by bits sts2 to sts0 in syscr, stable clock signals are supplied to the entire chip, software standby mode ends, and interrupt exception handling begins. software standby mode is not exited if the interrupt enable bits of interrupts irq 0 , irq 1 , and irq 2 are cleared to 0, or if these interrupts are masked in the cpu. exit by res input: when the res input goes low, the clock oscillator starts and clock pulses are supplied immediately to the entire chip. the res signal must be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to stabilize. when res goes high, the cpu starts reset exception handling. exit by stby input: low input at the stby pin causes a transition to hardware standby mode. 658 20.4.3 selection of waiting time for exit from software standby mode bits sts2 to sts0 in syscr and bits div1 and div0 in divcr should be set as follows. crystal resonator: set sts2 to sts0, div1, and div0 so that the waiting time (for the clock to stabilize) is at least 7 ms. table 20.3 indicates the waiting times that are selected by sts2 to sts0, div1, and div0 settings at various system clock frequencies. external clock: any values may be set. table 20.3 clock frequency and waiting time for clock to settle div1 div0 sts2 sts1 sts0 waiting time 20 mhz 18 mhz 16 mhz 12 mhz 10 mhz 8 mhz 6 mhz 4 mhz 2 mhz 1 mhz 0 0 0 0 0 8192 states 0.4 0.46 0.51 0.65 0.8 1.0 1.3 2.0 4.1 8.2* 0 0 1 16384 states 0.8 0.91 1.0 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.1 8.2* 16.4 0 1 0 32768 states 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2* 16.4 32.8 0 1 1 65536 states 3.3 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2* 10.9* 16.4 32.8 65.5 1 0 0 131072 states 6.6 7.3* 8.2* 10.9* 13.1* 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 1 0 1 262144 states 13.1* 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 1 1 0 1024 states 0.05 0.057 0.064 0.085 0.10 0.13 0.17 0.26 0.51 1.0 1 1 1 illegal setting 0 1 0 0 0 8192 states 0.8 0.91 1.02 1.4 1.6 2.0 2.7 4.0 8.2* 16.4* 0 0 1 16384 states 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2* 16.4 32.8 0 1 0 32768 states 3.3 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2* 10.9* 16.4 32.8 65.5 0 1 1 65536 states 6.6 7.3* 8.2* 10.9* 13.1* 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 1 0 0 131072 states 13.1* 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 1 0 1 262144 states 26.2 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3 1 1 0 1024 states 0.10 0.11 0.13 0.17 0.20 0.26 0.34 0.51 1.0 2.0 1 1 1 illegal setting 1 0 0 0 0 8192 states 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.7 3.3 4.1 5.5 8.2* 16.4* 32.8* 0 0 1 16384 states 3.3 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2* 10.9* 16.4 32.8 65.5 0 1 0 32768 states 6.6 7.3* 8.2* 10.9* 13.1* 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 0 1 1 65536 states 13.1* 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 1 0 0 131072 states 26.2 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3 1 0 1 262144 states 52.4 58.3 65.5 87.4 104.9 131.1 174.8 262.1 524.3 1048.6 1 1 0 1024 states 0.20 0.23 0.26 0.34 0.41 0.51 0.68 1.02 2.0 4.1 1 1 1 illegal setting 1 1 0 0 0 8192 states 3.3 3.6 4.1 5.5 6.6 8.2* 10.9* 16.4* 32.8* 65.5 0 0 1 16384 states 6.6 7.3* 8.2* 10.9* 13.1* 16.4 21.8 32.8 65.5 131.1 0 1 0 32768 states 13.1* 14.6 16.4 21.8 26.2 32.8 43.7 65.5 131.1 262.1 0 1 1 65536 states 26.2 29.1 32.8 43.7 52.4 65.5 87.4 131.1 262.1 524.3 1 0 0 131072 states 52.4 58.3 65.5 87.4 104.9 131.1 174.8 262.1 524.3 1048.6 1 0 1 262144 states 104.9 116.5 131.1 174.8 209.7 262.1 349.5 524.3 1048.6 2097.1 1 1 0 1024 states 0.41 0.46 0.51 0.68 0.82 1.0 1.4 2.0 4.1 8.2* 1 1 1 illegal setting * : recommended setting unit ms ms ms ms 659 20.4.4 sample application of software standby mode figure 20.1 shows an example in which software standby mode is entered at the fall of nmi and exited at the rise of nmi. with the nmi edge select bit (nmieg) cleared to 0 in syscr (selecting the falling edge), an nmi interrupt occurs. next the nmieg bit is set to 1 (selecting the rising edge) and the ssby bit is set to 1; then the sleep instruction is executed to enter software standby mode. software standby mode is exited at the next rising edge of the nmi signal. n mi n mieg s sby nmi interrupt handler nmieg = 1 ssby = 1 software standby mode (power- down state) oscillator settling time (t osc2 ) sleep instruction nmi exception handling c lock o scillator figure 20.1 nmi timing for software standby mode (example) 20.4.5 note the i/o ports retain their existing states in software standby mode. if a port is in the high output state, its output current is not reduced. 660 20.4.6 cautions on clearing the software standby mode of f-ztat version (1) operation phenomena when using operating mode 5, 6, or 7* (on-chip flash memory enabled), the first read of on- chip flash memory after exiting software standby mode may not be carried out correctly. software standby mode is exited by means of an external interrupt (via the nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , or irq 2 pin), the res pin, or the stby pin. in the case of an external interrupt via the nmi, irq 0 , irq 1 , or irq 2 pin, the first read after exiting software standby mode is a read of the vector corresponding to the respective exception handling interrupt source. this vector may not be read correctly, resulting in program runaway. note: * mode 5: expanded 16-mbyte mode with on-chip rom enabled mode 6: single-chip normal mode mode 7: single-chip advanced mode (2) exemplary procedures to avoid program runaway this operation phenomenon can be avoided by writing or amending program code in accordance with the following procedures. (a) when using mode 5 or mode 7, assign addresses in the 64-kbyte space from h'00000 to h'0ffff as the vector addresses for the external interrupts that clear software standby mode. (b) when using mode 6, change the mode to mode 7 in the program, and use change (a) above. note that it is necessary to change vector address assignments and to extend addresses as follows. ? addresses h'dfff and below (on-chip rom area): h'xxxx h'0xxxx ? addresses h'e000 to h'e0ff (internal i/o registers-1): h'yyyy h'eyyyy ? addresses h'ef20 and above (on-chip ram area and internal i/o registers-2): h'zzzz h'fzzzz (where x, y and z are any hexadecimal numbers) with the production lots prior to the week code ?k1?of the HD64F3067 and HD64F3067r, avoid program runaway according to the procedures designated above. meanwhile, as for the production lots of the week code ?k1?and after, the special constraint according to of the aforementioned section (2) is not applicable. 661 20.5 hardware standby mode 20.5.1 transition to hardware standby mode regardless of its current state, the chip enters hardware standby mode whenever the stby pin goes low. hardware standby mode reduces power consumption drastically by halting all functions of the cpu, dmac, dram interface, and on-chip supporting modules. all modules are reset except the on-chip ram. as long as the specified voltage is supplied, on-chip ram data is retained. i/o ports are placed in the high-impedance state. clear the rame bit to 0 in syscr before stby goes low to retain on-chip ram data. the inputs at the mode pins (md2 to md0) should not be changed during hardware standby mode. 20.5.2 exit from hardware standby mode hardware standby mode is exited by inputs at the stby and res pins. while res is low, when stby goes high, the clock oscillator starts running. res should be held low long enough for the clock oscillator to settle. when res goes high, reset exception handling begins, followed by a transition to the program execution state. 20.5.3 timing for hardware standby mode figure 20.2 shows the timing relationships for hardware standby mode. to enter hardware standby mode, first drive res low, then drive stby low. to exit hardware standby mode, first drive stby high, wait for the clock to settle, then bring res from low to high. res stby clock oscillator oscillator settling time reset exception handling figure 20.2 hardware standby mode timing 662 20.6 module standby function 20.6.1 module standby timing the module standby function can halt several of the on-chip supporting modules (sci2, sci1, sci0, the dmac, 16-bit timer, 8-bit timer, dram interface, and a/d converter) independently in the power-down state. this standby function is controlled by bits mstph2 to mstph0 in mstcrh and bits mstpl7 to mstpl0 in mstcrl. when one of these bits is set to 1, the corresponding on-chip supporting module is placed in standby and halts at the beginning of the next bus cycle after the mstcr write cycle. 20.6.2 read/write in module standby when an on-chip supporting module is in module standby, read/write access to its registers is disabled. read access always results in h'ff data. write access is ignored. 20.6.3 usage notes when using the module standby function, note the following points. dmac: when setting a bit in mstcr to 1 to place the dmac in module standby, make sure that the dmac is not currently requesting the bus right. if the corresponding bit in mstcr is set to 1 when a bus request is present, operation of the bus arbiter becomes ambiguous and a malfunction may occur. dram interface: when the module standby function is used on the dram interface, set the mstcr bit to 1 while dram space is deselected. on-chip supporting module interrupts: before setting a module standby bit, first disable interrupts by that module. when an on-chip supporting module is placed in standby by the module standby function, its registers are initialized, including registers with interrupt request flags. pin states: pins used by an on-chip supporting module lose their module functions when the module is placed in module standby. what happens after that depends on the particular pin. for details, see section 8, i/o ports. pins that change from the input to the output state require special care. for example, if sci1 is placed in module standby, the receive data pin loses its receive data function and becomes a port pin. if its port ddr bit is set to 1, the pin becomes a data output pin, and its output may collide with external sci transmit data. data collision should be prevented by clearing the port ddr bit to 0 or taking other appropriate action. register resetting: when an on-chip supporting module is halted by the module standby function, all its registers are initialized. to restart the module, after its mstcr bit is cleared to 0, its registers must be set up again. it is not possible to write to the registers while the mstcr bit is set to 1. 663 mstcr access from dmac disabled: to prevent malfunctions, mstcr can only be accessed from the cpu. it can be read by the dmac, but it cannot be written by the dmac. 20.7 system clock output disabling function output of the system clock ( ) can be controlled by the pstop bit in mstcrh. when the pstop bit is set to 1, output of the system clock halts and the pin is placed in the high- impedance state. figure 20.3 shows the timing of the stopping and starting of system clock output. when the pstop bit is cleared to 0, output of the system clock is enabled. table 20.4 indicates the state of the pin in various operating states. t1 t2 (pstop = 1) t3 t1 t2 (pstop = 0) mstcrh write cycle mstcrh write cycle high impedance pin t3 figure 20.3 starting and stopping of system clock output table 20.4 pin state in various operating states operating state pstop = 0 pstop = 1 hardware standby high impedance high impedance software standby always high high impedance sleep mode system clock output high impedance normal operation system clock output high impedance 664 665 section 21 electrical characteristics 21.1 electrical characteristics of mask rom version 21.1.1 absolute maximum ratings table 21.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings. table 21.1 absolute maximum ratings item symbol value unit power supply voltage v cc ?.3 to +7.0 v input voltage (except for port 7) v in ?.3 to v cc +0.3 v input voltage (port 7) v in ?.3 to av cc +0.3 v reference voltage v ref ?.3 to av cc +0.3 v analog power supply voltage av cc ?.3 to +7.0 v analog input voltage v an ?.3 to av cc +0.3 v operating temperature t opr regular specifications: ?0 to +75 ? wide-range specifications: ?0 to +85 ? storage temperature t stg ?5 to +125 ? caution: permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. 666 21.1.2 dc characteristics table 21.2 lists the dc characteristics. table 21.3 lists the permissible output currents. table 21.2 dc characteristics (1) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions schmitt trigger input voltages port a, p8 0 to p8 2 v t v t + v t + ?v t 1.0 0.4 v cc 0.7 v v v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 v ih v cc ?0.7 v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 2.0 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1 to 6, p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b 2.0 v cc + 0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , md 2 to md 0 v il ?.3 0.5 v nmi, extal, ports 1 to 7, p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b ?.3 0.8 v output high voltage all output pins (except reso ) v oh v cc ?0.5 3.5 v v i oh = ?00 ? i oh = ? ma output low voltage all output pins (except reso ) v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma ports 1, 2, and 5 1.0 v i ol = 10 ma reso 0.4 v i ol = 2.6 ma 667 table 21.2 dc characteristics (1) (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage current stby , nmi, res , md 2 to md 0 |i in | 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to v cc ?0.5 v port 7 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to av cc ?0.5 v three-state leakage current ports 1 to 6 ports 8 to b |i tsi | 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to v cc ?0.5 v reso 10.0 ? v in = 0 v input pull-up mos current ports 2, 4, and 5 ? p 50 300 ? v in = 0 v input capacitance nmi all input pins except nmi c in 50 15 pf pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? current dissipation* 2 normal operation i cc * 3 ?5 (5.0 v) 100 ma f = 20 mhz sleep mode 40 (5.0 v) 73 ma f = 20 mhz module standby mode ?4 (5.0 v) 51 ma f = 20 mhz standby mode 0.01 5.0 ? t a 50? 20.0 ? 50? t a 668 table 21.2 dc characteristics (1) (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power supply current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.6 1.5 ma during a/d and d/a conversion 0.6 1.5 ma idle 0.01 5.0 ? daste = 0 reference current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.5 0.8 ma during a/d and d/a conversion 2.0 3.0 ma idle 0.01 5.0 ? daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v notes: 1. do not open the pin connections of the av cc , v ref and av ss pins while the a/d converter is not in use. connect the av cc and v ref pins to the v cc and connect the av ss pin to the v ss , respectively. 2. given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up mos is turned off under conditions that v ih min = v cc ?0.5 v and v il max = 0.5 v. also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when v ih min = v cc 0.9 and v il max = 0.3 v under the condition of v ram v cc < 4.5 v. 3. i cc max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.90 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.45 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. 669 table 21.2 dc characteristics (2) conditions: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions schmitt trigger input voltages port a, p8 0 to p8 2 v t v t + v t + ?v t v cc 0.2 v cc 0.07 v cc 0.7 v v v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 v ih v cc 0.9 v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 v cc 0.7 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1 to 6 p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , md 2 to md 0 v il ?.3 v cc 0.1 v nmi, extal, ports 1 to 7 p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b ?.3 v cc 0.2 0.8 v v v cc < 4.0 v v cc = 4.0 to 5.5 v output high voltage all output pins (except reso ) v oh v cc ?0.5 v i oh = ?00 ? v cc ?1.0 v i oh = ? ma output low voltage all output pins (except reso ) v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma ports 1, 2, and 5 1.0 v i ol = 5 ma (v cc < 4.0 v) i ol = 10 ma (v cc = 4.0 to 5.5 v) reso 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma 670 table 21.2 dc characteristics (2) (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage current stby , nmi, res , md 2 to md 0 |i in | 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to v cc ?0.5 v port 7 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to av cc ?0.5 v three-state leakage current ports 1 to 6 ports 8 to b |i tsi | 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to v cc ?0.5 v reso 10.0 ? v in = 0 v input pull-up mos current ports 2, 4, and 5 ? p 10 300 ? v in = 0 v input capacitance nmi all input pins except nmi c in 50 15 pf pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? current dissipation* 2 normal operation i cc * 3 ?8 (3.0 v) 51 ma f = 10 mhz sleep mode 14 (3.0 v) 37 ma f = 10 mhz module standby mode ? (3.0 v) 26 ma f = 10 mhz standby mode 0.01 5.0 ? t a 50? 20.0 ? 50? t a 671 table 21.2 dc characteristics (2) (cont) conditions: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power supply current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.2 0.6 0.5 ma ma av cc = 3.0 v av cc = 5.0 v during a/d and d/a conversion 0.2 0.6 0.5 ma ma av cc = 3.0 v av cc = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 ? daste = 0 reference current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.3 0.5 0.5 ma ma v ref = 3.0 v v ref = 5.0 v during a/d and d/a conversion 1.2 2.0 2.0 ma ma v ref = 3.0 v v ref = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 ? daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v notes: 1. do not open the pin connections of the av cc , v ref and av ss pins while the a/d converter is not in use. connect the av cc and v ref pins to the v cc and connect the av ss pin to the v ss , respectively. 2. given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up mos is turned off under conditions that v ih min = v cc ?0.5 v and v il max = 0.5 v. also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when v ih min = v cc 0.9 and v il max = 0.3 v under the condition of v ram v cc < 2.7 v. 3. i cc max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.90 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.45 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. 672 table 21.2 dc characteristics (3) conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions schmitt trigger input voltages port a, p8 0 to p8 2 v t v t + v t + ?v t v cc 0.2 v cc 0.07 v cc 0.7 v v v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 v ih v cc 0.9 v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 v cc 0.7 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1 to 6 p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , md 2 to md 0 v il ?.3 v cc 0.1 v nmi, extal, ports 1 to 7 p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b ?.3 v cc 0.2 0.8 v v v cc < 4.0 v v cc = 4.0 to 5.5 v output high voltage all output pins (except reso ) v oh v cc ?0.5 v i oh = ?00 ? v cc ?1.0 v i oh = ? ma output low voltage all output pins (except reso ) v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma ports 1, 2, and 5 1.0 v i ol = 5 ma (v cc < 4.0 v) i ol = 10 ma (v cc = 4.0 to 5.5 v) reso 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma 673 table 21.2 dc characteristics (3) (cont) conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage current stby , res , nmi, md 2 to md 0 |i in | 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to v cc ?0.5 v port 7 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to av cc ?0.5 v three-state leakage current ports 1 to 6 ports 8 to b |i tsi | 1.0 ? v in = 0.5 v to v cc ?0.5 v reso 10.0 ? v in = 0 v input pull-up mos current ports 2, 4, and 5 ? p 10 300 ? v in = 0 v input capacitance nmi all input pins except nmi c in 50 15 pf pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25? current dissipation* 2 normal operation i cc * 3 ?8 (3.5 v) 66 ma f = 13 mhz sleep mode 20 (3.5 v) 48 ma f = 13 mhz module standby mode ?3 (3.5 v) 34 ma f = 13 mhz standby mode 0.01 5.0 ? t a 50? 20.0 ? 50? t a 674 table 21.2 dc characteristics (3) (cont) conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power during a/d ai cc 0.2 0.5 ma av cc = 3.0 v supply current conversion 0.6 ma av cc = 5.0 v during a/d and d/a conversion 0.2 0.6 0.5 ma ma av cc = 3.0 v av cc = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 ? daste = 0 reference during a/d ai cc 0.3 0.5 ma v ref = 3.0 v current conversion 0.5 ma v ref = 5.0 v during a/d and d/a conversion 1.2 2.0 2.0 ma ma v ref = 3.0 v v ref = 5.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 ? daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v notes: 1. do not open the pin connections of the av cc , v ref and av ss pins while the a/d converter is not in use. connect the av cc and v ref pins to the v cc and connect the av ss pin to the v ss , respectively. 2. given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up mos is turned off under conditions that v ih min = v cc ?0.5 v and v il max = 0.5 v. also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when v ih min = v cc 0.9 and v il max = 0.3 v under the condition of v ram v cc < 3.0 v. 3. i cc max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.90 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.45 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. 675 table 21.3 permissible output currents conditions: v cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit permissible output low current (per pin) ports 1, 2, and 5 other output pins i ol 10 2.0 ma ma permissible output low current (total) total of 20 pins in ports 1, 2, and 5 i ol 80ma total of all output pins, including the above 120 ma permissible output high current (per pin) all output pins |? oh | 2.0 ma permissible output high current (total) total of all output pins | i oh | 40ma notes: 1. to protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21.3. 2. when driving a darlington pair, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 21.1 and 21.2. h8/3067 series port 2 k ? darlington pair figure 21.1 darlington pair drive circuit (example) 676 h8/3067 series ports 1, 2, 5 led 600 ? figure 21.2 sample led circuit 677 21.1.3 ac characteristics clock timing parameters are listed in table 21.4, control signal timing parameters in table 21.5, and bus timing parameters in table 21.6. timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21.7. table 21.4 clock timing condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions clock cycle time clock pulse low width t cyc t cl 100 30 1000 76.9 18 1000 50 15 1000 ns ns figure 21.11 clock pulse high width t ch 30 18 15 ns clock rise time t cr 20 15 10 ns clock fall time t cf 20 15 10 ns clock oscillator settling time at reset t osc1 20 20 20 ms figure 21.7 clock oscillator settling time in software standby t osc2 7 7 7 ms figure 20.1 678 table 21.5 control signal timing condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions res setup time t ress 200 200 150 ns figure 21.8 res pulse width t resw 10 10 10 t cyc mode programming setup time t mds 200 200 200 ns reso output delay time t resd 100 100 50 ns figure 21.9 reso output pulse width t resow 132 132 132 t cyc nmi, irq setup time t nmis 200 200 150 ns figure 21.10 nmi, irq hold time t nmih 10 10 10 ns nmi, irq pulse width t nmiw 200 200 200 ns 679 table 21.6 bus timing condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions address delay time address hold time read strobe delay time t ad t ah t rsd 0.5 t cyc 45 50 60 0.5 t cyc 35 40 50 0.5 t cyc 20 25 25 ns ns ns figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 address strobe delay time t asd 60 50 25 ns write strobe delay time t wsd 60 50 25 ns strobe delay time t sd 60 50 25 ns write strobe pulse width 1 t wsw1 1.0 t cyc 50 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 25 ns write strobe pulse width 2 t wsw2 1.5 t cyc 50 1.5 t cyc 40 1.5 t cyc 25 ns address setup time 1 t as1 0.5 t cyc 45 0.5 t cyc 29 0.5 t cyc 20 ns address setup time 2 t as2 1.0 t cyc 45 1.0 t cyc 35 1.0 t cyc 20 ns read data setup time t rds 50 40 25 ns read data hold time t rdh 0 0 0 ns 680 table 21.6 bus timing (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions write data delay time write data setup time 1 write data setup time 2 t wdd t wds1 t wds2 1.0 t cyc 50 2.0 t cyc 50 60 1.0 t cyc 40 2.0 t cyc 40 50 1.0 t cyc 30 2.0 t cyc 30 35 ns ns ns figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 write data hold time t wdh 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns read data access time 1 t acc1 2.0 t cyc 100 2.0 t cyc 80 2.0 t cyc 45 ns read data access time 2 t acc2 3.0 t cyc 100 3.0 t cyc 80 3.0 t cyc 45 ns read data access time 3 t acc3 1.5 t cyc 100 1.5 t cyc 80 1.5 t cyc 45 ns read data access time 4 t acc4 2.5 t cyc 100 2.5 t cyc 80 2.5 t cyc 45 ns precharge time 1 t pch1 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 30 1.0 t cyc 20 ns precharge time 2 t pch2 0.5 t cyc 40 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 20 ns wait setup time t wts 40 40 25 ns figure 21.13 wait hold time t wth 5 5 5 ns bus request setup time t brqs 40 40 25 ns figure 21.16 bus acknowledge delay time 1 t bacd1 60 50 30 ns bus acknowledge delay time 2 t bacd2 60 50 30 ns 681 table 21.6 bus timing (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions bus-floating time t bzd 60 50 30 ns figure 21.16 ras precharge time t rp 1.5 t cyc 50 1.5 t cyc 40 1.5 t cyc 25 ns figure 21.17 to cas precharge time t cp 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns figure 21.19 low address hold time t rah 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns ras delay time 1 t rad1 60 50 25 ns ras delay time 2 t rad2 60 50 30 ns cas delay time 1 t casd1 60 50 25 ns cas delay time 2 t casd2 60 50 25 ns we delay time t wcd 60 50 25 ns cas pulse width 1 t cas1 1.5 t cyc 50 1.5 t cyc 40 1.5 t cyc 20 ns cas pulse width 2 t cas2 1.0 t cyc 50 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 20 ns cas pulse width 3 t cas3 1.0 t cyc 50 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 20 ns ras access time t rac 2.5 t cyc 80 2.5 t cyc 70 2.5 t cyc 40 ns address access time t aa 2.0 t cyc 100 2.0 t cyc 80 2.0 t cyc 50 ns cas access time t cac 1.5 t cyc 100 1.5 t cyc 80 1.5 t cyc 50 ns we setup time t wcs 0.5 t cyc 45 0.5 t cyc 35 0.5 t cyc 20 ns 682 table 21.6 bus timing (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions we hold time t wch 0.5 t cyc 40 0.5 t cyc 28 0.5 t cyc 15 ns figure 21.17 to write data setup time t wds 0.5 t cyc 45 0.5 t cyc 35 0.5 t cyc 20 ns figure 21.19 we write data hold time t wdh 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns cas setup time 1 t csr1 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 20 ns cas setup time 2 t csr2 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns cas hold time t chr 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns ras pulse width t ras 1.5 t cyc 30 1.5 t cyc 25 1.5 t cyc 15 ns 683 table 21.7 timing of on-chip supporting modules condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions ports and tpc output data delay time input data setup time t pwd t prs 50 100 50 100 50 50 ns ns figure 21.20 input data hold time t prh 50 50 50 ns 16-bit timer timer output delay time t tocd 100 100 50 ns figure 21.21 timer input setup time t tics 50 50 50 ns timer clock input setup time t tcks 50 50 50 ns figure 21.22 timer clock pulse width single edge both edges t tckwh t tckwl 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 t cyc t cyc 8-bit timer timer output delay time t tocd 100 100 50 ns figure 21.21 timer input setup time t tics 50 50 50 ns timer clock input setup time t tcks 50 50 50 ns figure 21.22 timer clock pulse width single edge both edges t tckwh t tckwl 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 t cyc t cyc 684 table 21.7 timing of on-chip supporting modules (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v condition abc test item symbol min max min max min max unit conditions sci input clock asyn- chronous t scyc 4 4 4 t cyc figure 21.23 cycle syn- chronous 6 6 6 t cyc input clock rise time t sckr 1.5 1.5 1.5 t cyc input clock fall time t sckf 1.5 1.5 1.5 t cyc input clock pulse width t sckw 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t scyc transmit data delay time t txd 100 100 100 ns figure 21.24 receive data setup time (synchronous) t rxs 100 100 100 ns receive data hold clock input t rxh 100 100 100 ns time (syn- chronous) clock output 0 0 0 ns dmac tend delay time 1 t ted1 100 100 50 ns figure 21.25, figure 21.26 tend delay time 2 t ted2 100 100 50 ns dreq setup time t drqs 40 40 25 ns figure 21.27 dreq hold time t drqh 10 10 10 ns 685 cr h r l h8/3067 series output pin c = 90 pf: ports 4, 6, 8, a 19 to a 0 , d 15 to d 8 c = 30 pf: ports 9, a, b, reso input/output timing measurement levels low: 0.8 v high: 2.0 v r = 2.4 k r = 12 k l h ? ? figure 21.3 output load circuit 686 21.1.4 a/d conversion characteristics table 21.8 lists the a/d conversion characteristics. table 21.8 a/d conversion characteristics condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 10 mhz condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition abc item min typ max min typ max min typ max unit conver- sion time: 134 states resolution conversion time (single mode) 10 10 10 134 10 10 10 134 10 10 10 134 bits t cyc analog input capacitance 20 20 20 pf permissible signal-source impedance 13 mhz > 13 mhz 4.0 v av cc 5.5 v 10 10 10 5 k k k 2.7 v av cc < 4.0 v 5 5 k nonlinearity error 7.5 7.5 3.5 lsb offset error 7.5 7.5 3.5 lsb full-scale error 7.5 7.5 3.5 lsb quantization error 0.5 0.5 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy 8.0 8.0 4.0 lsb 687 table 21.8 a/d conversion characteristics (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 10 mhz condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition abc item min typ max min typ max min typ max unit conver- sion time: 70 states resolution conversion time (single mode) 10 10 10 70 10 10 10 70 10 10 10 70 bits t cyc analog input capacitance 20 20 20 pf permissible signal-source impedance 13 mhz > 13 mhz 4.0 v av cc 5.5 v 5 5 5 3 k k k 2.7 v av cc < 4.0 v 3 3 k nonlinearity error 15.5 15.5 7.5 lsb offset error 15.5 15.5 7.5 lsb full-scale error 15.5 15.5 7.5 lsb quantization error 0.5 0.5 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy 16 16 8.0 lsb 688 21.1.5 d/a conversion characteristics table 21.9 lists the d/a conversion characteristics. table 21.9 d/a conversion characteristics condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, av cc = 2.7 to 5.5 v, v ref = 2.7 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 10 mhz condition b: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition c: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition abc test item min typ max min typ max min typ max unit conditions resolution 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 bits conversion time (centering time) 10 10 10 s 20 pf capacitive load absolute accuracy 2.0 3.0 2.0 3.0 1.5 2.0 lsb 2 m resistive load 2.0 2.0 1.5 lsb 4 m resistive load 689 21.2 electrical characteristics of flash memory and flash memory r versions 21.2.1 absolute maximum ratings table 21.10 lists the absolute maximum ratings. table 21.10 absolute maximum ratings item symbol value unit power supply voltage v cc 0.3 to +7.0 v programming voltage (fwe) * 1 v in 0.3 to v cc +0.3 v input voltage (except for port 7) * 1 v in 0.3 to v cc +0.3 v input voltage (port 7) v in 0.3 to av cc +0.3 v reference voltage v ref 0.3 to av cc +0.3 v analog power supply voltage av cc 0.3 to +7.0 v analog input voltage v an 0.3 to av cc +0.3 v operating temperature t opr regular specifications: 20 to +75 * 2 c wide-range specifications: 40 to +85 * 2 c storage temperature t stg 55 to +125 c caution: permanent damage to the chip may result if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded. notes: 1. 12 v must not be applied to any pin, as this may cause permanent damage to the device. 2. the operating temperature range when programming and erasing the flash memory is: t a = 0 to + 75 c (regular specifications), t a = 0 to + 85 c (wide-range specifications). 690 21.2.2 dc characteristics tables 21.11 lists the dc characteristics. table 21.12 lists the permissible output currents. table 21.11 dc characteristics (1) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) [programming/erasing conditions: t a = 0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = 0? to +85? (wide-range specifications)] item symbol min typ max unit test conditions schmitt trigger input voltages port a, p8 0 to p8 2 v t v t + v t + v t 1.0 0.4 v cc 0.7 v v v input high voltage res , stby , nmi, md 2 to md 0 , fwe v ih v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 2.0 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1 to 6, p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b 2.0 v cc + 0.3 v input low voltage res , stby , fwe, md 2 to md 0 v il 0.3 0.5 v nmi, extal, ports 1 to 7, p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b 0.3 0.8 v output high voltage all output pins v oh v cc 0.5 3.5 v v i oh = 200 a i oh = 1 ma output low all output pins v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage ports 1, 2, and 5 1.0 v i ol = 10 ma 691 table 21.11 dc characteristics (1) (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) [programming/erasing conditions: t a = 0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = 0? to +85? (wide-range specifications)] item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage current stby , res , nmi, fwe md 2 to md 0 |i in | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 v to v cc 0.5 v port 7 1.0 a v in = 0.5 v to av cc 0.5 v three-state leakage current ports 1 to 6 ports 8 to b |i tsi | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 v to v cc 0.5 v input pull-up mos current ports 2, 4, and 5 i p 50 300 a v in = 0 v input capacitance fwe nmi all input pins except nmi, and fwe c in 80 50 15 pf pf pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25 c current dissipation* 2 normal operation i cc * 3 55 (5.0 v) 100 ma f = 20 mhz sleep mode 40 (5.0 v) 73 ma f = 20 mhz module standby mode 24 (5.0 v) 51 ma f = 20 mhz standby mode 0.01 5.0 a t a 50 c 20.0 a 50 c t a flash memory programming/ erasing 60 (5.0 v) 110 ma 0 c t a 85 c f = 20 mhz 692 table 21.11 dc characteristics (1) (cont) conditions: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) [programming/erasing conditions: t a = 0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = 0? to +85? (wide-range specifications)] item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power supply current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.6 1.5 ma during a/d and d/a conversion 0.6 1.5 ma idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 reference current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.5 0.8 ma during a/d and d/a conversion 2.0 3.0 ma idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v notes: 1. do not open the pin connections of the av cc , v ref and av ss pins while the a/d converter is not in use. connect the av cc and v ref pins to the v cc and connect the av ss pin to the v ss , respectively. 2. given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up mos is turned off under conditions that v ih min = v cc 0.5 v and v il max = 0.5 v. also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when v ih min = v cc 0.9 and v il max = 0.3 v under the condition of v ram v cc < 2.7 v. 3. i cc max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.90 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.45 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. 693 table 21.11 dc characteristics (2) conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) [programming/erasing conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 3.6 v, t a = 0 to +75? (regular specifications), t a = 0 to +85? (wide-range specifications)] item symbol min typ max unit test conditions schmitt trigger input voltages port a, p8 0 to p8 2 v t v t + v t + v t v cc 0.2 v cc 0.07 v cc 0.7 v v v input high voltage stby , res , nmi, md 2 to md 0 , fwe v ih v cc 0.9 v cc + 0.3 v extal v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v port 7 v cc 0.7 av cc + 0.3 v ports 1 to 6 p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b v cc 0.7 v cc + 0.3 v input low voltage stby , res , fwe, md 2 to md 0 v il 0.3 v cc 0.1 v nmi, extal, ports 1 to 7 0.3 v cc 0.2 v v cc < 4.0 v p8 3 , p8 4 , p9 0 to p9 5 , port b 0.8 v v cc = 4.0 to 5.5 v output high voltage all output pins v oh v cc 0.5 vi oh = 200 a v cc 1.0 vi oh = 1 ma output low all output pins v ol 0.4 v i ol = 1.6 ma voltage ports 1, 2, and 5 1.0 v i ol = 5 ma 694 table 21.11 dc characteristics (2) (cont) conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) [programming/erasing conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 3.6 v, t a = 0 to +75? (regular specifications), t a = 0 to +85? (wide-range specifications)] item symbol min typ max unit test conditions input leakage current stby , res , nmi, fwe, md 2 to md 0 |i in | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 v to v cc 0.5 v port 7 1.0 a v in = 0.5 v to av cc 0.5 v three-state leakage current ports 1 to 6 ports 8 to b |i tsi | 1.0 a v in = 0.5 v to v cc 0.5 v input pull-up mos current ports 2, 4, and 5 i p 10 300 a v in = 0 v input capacitance fwe nmi all input pins except nmi, and fwe c in 80 50 15 pf pf pf v in = 0 v f = 1 mhz t a = 25 c current dissipation* 2 normal operation i cc * 3 28 (3.5 v) 66 ma f = 13 mhz sleep mode 20 (3.5 v) 48 ma f = 13 mhz module standby mode 13 (3.5 v) 34 ma f = 13 mhz standby mode 0.01 5.0 a t a 50 c 20.0 a 50 c t a flash memory programming/ erasing 33 (3.5 v) 76 ma 0 c t a 85 c f = 13 mhz 695 table 21.11 dc characteristics (2) (cont) conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc * 1 , v ss = av ss = 0 v* 1 , t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) [programming/erasing conditions: v cc = 3.0 to 3.6 v, t a = 0 to +75? (regular specifications), t a = 0 to +85? (wide-range specifications)] item symbol min typ max unit test conditions analog power supply current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.2 0.5 ma av cc = 3.0 v during a/d and d/a conversion 0.2 0.5 ma av cc = 3.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 reference current during a/d conversion ai cc 0.3 0.5 ma v ref = 3.0 v during a/d and d/a conversion 1.2 2.0 ma v ref = 3.0 v idle 0.01 5.0 a daste = 0 ram standby voltage v ram 2.0 v notes: 1. do not open the pin connections of the av cc , v ref and av ss pins while the a/d converter is not in use. connect the av cc and v ref pins to the v cc and connect the av ss pin to the v ss , respectively. 2. given current consumption values are when all the output pins are made to unloaded state and, furthermore, when the on-chip pull-up mos is turned off under conditions that v ih min = v cc 0.5 v and v il max = 0.5 v. also, the aforesaid current consumption values are when v ih min = v cc 0.9 and v il max = 0.3 v under the condition of v ram v cc < 3.0 v. 3. i cc max. (under normal operations) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.90 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when using the sleeve) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.65 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f i cc max. (when the sleeve + module are standing by) = 1.0 (ma) + 0.45 (ma/(mhz v)) v cc f also, the typ. values for current dissipation are reference values. 696 table 21.12 permissible output currents conditions: v cc = 3.0 v to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 v to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 v to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) item symbol min typ max unit permissible output low current (per pin) ports 1, 2, and 5 other output pins i ol 10 2.0 ma ma permissible output low current (total) sum of 20 pins in ports 1, 2, and 5 i ol 80 ma total of all output pins, including the above 120 ma permissible output high current (per pin) all output pins | i oh | 2.0 ma permissible output high current (total) total of all output pins | i oh | 40 ma notes: 1. to protect chip reliability, do not exceed the output current values in table 21.12. 2. when driving a darlington pair, always insert a current-limiting resistor in the output line, as shown in figures 21.4 and 21.5. h8/3067 series port 2 k ? darlington pair figure 21.4 darlington pair drive circuit (example) 697 h8/3067 series ports 1, 2, 5 led 600 ? figure 21.5 sample led circuit 698 21.2.3 ac characteristics clock timing parameters are listed in table 21.13, control signal timing parameters in table 21.14, and bus timing parameters in table 21.15. timing parameters of the on-chip supporting modules are listed in table 21.16. table 21.13 clock timing condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions clock cycle time clock pulse low width t cyc t cl 76.9 18 1000 50 15 1000 ns ns figure 21.11 clock pulse high width t ch 18 15 ns clock rise time t cr 15 10 ns clock fall time t cf 15 10 ns clock oscillator settling time at reset t osc1 20 20 ms figure 21.7 clock oscillator settling time in software standby t osc2 7 7 ms figure 20.1 699 table 21.14 control signal timing condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions res setup time t ress 200 150 ns figure 21.8 res pulse width t resw 20 20 t cyc mode programming setup time t mds 200 200 ns nmi, irq setup time t nmis 200 150 ns figure 21.10 nmi, irq hold time t nmih 10 10 ns nmi, irq pulse width t nmiw 200 200 ns 700 table 21.15 bus timing condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions address delay time address hold time read strobe delay time t ad t ah t rsd 0.5 t cyc 35 40 50 0.5 t cyc 20 25 25 ns ns ns figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 address strobe delay time t asd 50 25 ns write strobe delay time t wsd 50 25 ns strobe delay time t sd 50 25 ns write strobe pulse width 1 t wsw1 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 25 ns write strobe pulse width 2 t wsw2 1.5 t cyc 40 1.5 t cyc 25 ns address setup time 1 t as1 0.5 t cyc 29 0.5 t cyc 20 ns address setup time 2 t as2 1.0 t cyc 35 1.0 t cyc 20 ns read data setup time t rds 40 25 ns read data hold time t rdh 0 0 ns 701 table 21.15 bus timing (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions write data delay time write data setup time 1 write data setup time 2 t wdd t wds1 t wds2 1.0 t cyc 40 2.0 t cyc 40 50 1.0 t cyc 30 2.0 t cyc 30 35 ns ns ns figure 21.11, figure 21.12, figure 21.14, figure 21.15, figure 21.17 write data hold time t wdh 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns read data access time 1 t acc1 2.0 t cyc 80 2.0 t cyc 45 ns read data access time 2 t acc2 3.0 t cyc 80 3.0 t cyc 45 ns read data access time 3 t acc3 1.5 t cyc 80 1.5 t cyc 45 ns read data access time 4 t acc4 2.5 t cyc 80 2.5 t cyc 45 ns precharge time 1 t pch1 1.0 t cyc 30 1.0 t cyc 20 ns precharge time 2 t pch2 0.5 t cyc 30 0.5 t cyc 20 ns wait setup time t wts 40 25 ns figure 21.13 wait hold time t wth 5 5 ns bus request setup time t brqs 40 25 ns figure 21.16 bus acknowledge delay time 1 t bacd1 50 30 ns bus acknowledge delay time 2 t bacd2 50 30 ns 702 table 21.15 bus timing (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions bus-floating time t bzd 50 30 ns figure 21.16 ras precharge time t rp 1.5 t cyc 40 1.5 t cyc 25 ns figure 21.17 to cas precharge time t cp 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns figure 21.19 low address hold time t rah 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns ras delay time 1 t rad1 50 25 ns ras delay time 2 t rad2 50 30 ns cas delay time 1 t casd1 50 25 ns cas delay time 2 t casd2 50 25 ns we delay time t wcd 50 25 ns cas pulse width 1 t cas1 1.5 t cyc 40 1.5 t cyc 20 ns cas pulse width 2 t cas2 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 20 ns cas pulse width 3 t cas3 1.0 t cyc 40 1.0 t cyc 20 ns ras access time t rac 2.5 t cyc 70 2.5 t cyc 40 ns address access time t aa 2.0 t cyc 80 2.0 t cyc 50 ns cas access time t cac 1.5 t cyc 80 1.5 t cyc 50 ns we setup time t wcs 0.5 t cyc 35 0.5 t cyc 20 ns 703 table 21.15 bus timing (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions we hold time write data setup time t wch t wds 0.5 t cyc 28 0.5 t cyc 35 0.5 t cyc 15 0.5 t cyc 20 ns ns figure 21.17 to figure 21.19 we write data hold time t wdh 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns cas setup time 1 t csr1 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 20 ns cas setup time 2 t csr2 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns cas hold time t chr 0.5 t cyc 25 0.5 t cyc 15 ns ras pulse width t ras 1.5 t cyc 25 1.5 t cyc 15 ns 704 table 21.16 timing of on-chip supporting modules condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions port/ tpc output data delay time input data setup time t pwd t prs 50 100 50 50 ns ns figure 21.20 input data hold time t prh 50 50 ns 16-bit timer timer output delay time t tocd 100 50 ns figure 21.21 timer input setup time t tics 50 50 ns timer clock input setup time t tcks 50 50 ns figure 21.22 timer clock pulse width single edge both edges t tckwh t tckwl 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 t cyc t cyc 8-bit timer timer output delay time t tocd 100 50 ns figure 21.21 timer input setup time t tics 50 50 ns timer clock input setup time t tcks 50 50 ns figure 21.22 timer clock pulse width single edge both edges t tckwh t tckwl 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 t cyc t cyc 705 table 21.16 timing of on-chip supporting modules (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item symbol min max min max unit conditions sci input clock cycle asyn- chronous t scyc 4 4 t cyc figure 21.23 syn- chronous 6 6 t cyc input clock rise time t sckr 1.5 1.5 t cyc input clock fall time t sckf 1.5 1.5 t cyc input clock pulse width t sckw 0.4 0.6 0.4 0.6 t scyc transmit data delay time t txd 100 100 ns figure 21.24 receive data setup time (synchronous) t rxs 100 100 ns receive data hold clock input t rxh 100 100 ns time (syn- chronous) clock output 0 0 ns dmac tend delay time 1 t ted1 100 50 ns figure 21.25, tend delay time 2 t ted2 100 50 ns figure 21.26 dreq setup time t drqs 40 25 ns figure 21.27 dreq hold time t drqh 10 10 ns 706 cr h r l h8/3067 series output pin c = 90 pf: ports 4, 6, 8, a 19 to a 0 , d 15 to d 8 c = 30 pf: ports 9, a, b input/output timing measurement levels low: 0.8 v high: 2.0 v r = 2.4 k r = 12 k l h ? ? figure 21.6 output load circuit 707 21.2.4 a/d conversion characteristics table 21.17 lists the a/d conversion characteristics. table 21.17 a/d conversion characteristics condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab item min typ max min typ max unit conversion time: 134 states resolution conversion time (single mode) 10 10 10 134 10 10 10 134 bits t cyc analog input capacitance 20 20 pf permissible signal-source impedance 13 mhz > 13 mhz 4.0 v av cc 5.5 v 10 10 5 k k k 3.0 v av cc < 4.0 v 5 k nonlinearity error 7.5 3.5 lsb offset error 7.5 3.5 lsb full-scale error 7.5 3.5 lsb quantization error 0.5 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy 8.0 4.0 lsb 708 table 21.17 a/d conversion characteristics (cont) condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab item min typ max min typ max unit conversion time: 70 states resolution conversion time (single mode) 10 10 10 70 10 10 10 70 bits t cyc analog input capacitance 20 20 pf permissible signal-source impedance 13 mhz > 13 mhz 4.0 v av cc 5.5 v 5 5 3 k k k 3.0 v av cc < 4.0 v 3 k nonlinearity error 15.5 7.5 lsb offset error 15.5 7.5 lsb full-scale error 15.5 7.5 lsb quantization error 0.5 0.5 lsb absolute accuracy 16 8.0 lsb 709 21.2.5 d/a conversion characteristics table 21.18 lists the d/a conversion characteristics. table 21.18 d/a conversion characteristics condition: t a = ?0? to +75? (regular specifications), t a = ?0? to +85? (wide-range specifications) condition a: v cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, av cc = 3.0 to 5.5 v, v ref = 3.0 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 13 mhz condition b: v cc = 5.0 v ?10%, av cc = 5.0 v ?10%, v ref = 4.5 to av cc , v ss = av ss = 0 v, fmax = 20 mhz condition ab test item min typ max min typ max unit conditions resolution 8 8 8 8 8 8 bits conversion time (centering time) 10 10 s 20 pf capacitive load absolute accuracy 2.0 3.0 1.5 2.0 lsb 2 m resistive load 2.0 1.5 lsb 4 m resistive load 710 21.2.6 flash memory characteristics table 21.19 shows the flash memory characteristics. table 21.19 flash memory characteristics (1) conditions: v cc =4.5 to 5.5v, av cc =4.5 to 5.5v, v ss =av ss =0v t a =0 to +75? (programming/erasing operating temperature range: regular specification) t a =0 to +85? (programming/erasing operating temperature range: wide-range specification) item symbol min typ max unit test condition programming time * 1, * 2, * 4 t p 10 200 ms/32 bytes erase time * 1, * 3, * 5 t e 100 1200 ms/block reprogramming count n wec 100 times programming wait time after swe bit setting * 1 x10 s wait time after psu bit setting * 1 y50 s wait time after p bit setting * 1, * 4 z 150 500 s wait time after p bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after psu bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after pv bit setting * 1 4 s wait time after h'ff dummy write * 1 2 s wait time after pv bit clear * 1 4 s maximum programming count * 1, * 4 n 403 times erase wait time after swe bit setting * 1 x10 s wait time after esu bit setting * 1 y 200 s wait time after e bit setting * 1, * 5 z5 10 ms wait time after e bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after esu bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after ev bit setting * 1 20 s wait time after h'ff dummy write * 1 2 s wait time after ev bit clear * 1 5 s maximum erase count * 1, * 5 n 120 240 times notes: 1. make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify flowchart or erase/erase-verify flowchart. 2. programming time per 32 bytes (shows the total period for which the p-bit in the flash memory control register (flmcr) is set. it does not include the programming verification time.) 3. block erase time (shows the total period for which the e-bit in flmcr is set. it does not include the erase verification time.) 4. to specify the maximum programming time (t p (max)) in the 32-byte programming flowchart, set the maximum value (403) for the maximum programming count (n). the wait time after p bit setting (z) should be changed as follows according to the programming counter value. programming counter value of 1 to 4 : z = 150 s programming counter value of 5 to 403 : z = 500 s 5. for the maximum erase time (t e (max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after e bit setting (z) and the maximum erase count (n): t e (max) = wait time after e bit setting (z) x maximum erase count (n) to set the maximum erase time, the values of z and n should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. examples: when z = 5 [ms], n = 240 times when z = 10 [ms], n = 120 times 711 table 21.19 flash memory characteristics (2) conditions: v cc =3.0 to 3.6 v, av cc =3.0 to 3.6 v, v ss =av ss =0v t a =0 to +75? (programming/erasing operating temperature range: regular specification) t a =0 to +85? (programming/erasing operating temperature range: wide-range specification) item symbol min typ max unit test condition programming time * 1, * 2, * 4 t p 10 200 ms/32 bytes erase time * 1, * 3, * 5 t e 100 1200 ms/block reprogramming count n wec 100 times programming wait time after swe bit setting * 1 x10 s wait time after psu bit setting * 1 y50 s wait time after p bit setting * 1, * 4 z 150 500 s wait time after p bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after psu bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after pv bit setting * 1 4 s wait time after h'ff dummy write * 1 2 s wait time after pv bit clear * 1 4 s maximum programming count * 1, * 4 n 403 times erase wait time after swe bit setting * 1 x10 s wait time after esu bit setting * 1 y 200 s wait time after e bit setting * 1, * 5 z5 10 ms wait time after e bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after esu bit clear * 1 10 s wait time after ev bit setting * 1 20 s wait time after h'ff dummy write * 1 2 s wait time after ev bit clear * 1 5 s maximum erase count * 1, * 5 n 120 240 times notes: 1. make each time setting in accordance with the program/program-verify flowchart or erase/erase-verify flowchart. 2. programming time per 32 bytes (shows the total period for which the p-bit in the flash memory control register (flmcr) is set. it does not include the programming verification time.) 3. block erase time (shows the total period for which the e-bit in flmcr is set. it does not include the erase verification time.) 4. to specify the maximum programming time (t p (max)) in the 32-byte programming flowchart, set the max. value (403) for the maximum programming count (n). the wait time after p bit setting (z) should be changed as follows according to the programming counter value. programming counter value of 1 to 4 : z = 150 s programming counter value of 5 to 403 : z = 500 s 5. for the maximum erase time (t e (max)), the following relationship applies between the wait time after e bit setting (z) and the maximum erase count (n): t e (max) = wait time after e bit setting (z) maximum erase count (n) to set the maximum erase time, the values of z and n should be set so as to satisfy the above formula. examples: when z = 5 [ms], n = 240 times when z = 10 [ms], n = 120 times 712 21.3 operational timing this section shows timing diagrams. 21.3.1 clock timing clock timing is shown as follows: ? oscillator settling timing figure 21.7 shows the oscillator settling timing. v cc stby res t osc1 t osc1 figure 21.7 oscillator settling timing 713 21.3.2 control signal timing control signal timing is shown as follows: ? reset input timing figure 21.8 shows the reset input timing. ? reset output timing* figure 21.9 shows the reset output timing. ? interrupt input timing figure 21.10 shows the interrupt input timing for nmi and irq 5 to irq 0 . t ress t ress t resw t mds res md 2 to md 0 figure 21.8 reset input timing reso t resd t resow t resd figure 21.9 reset output timing* note: * this function is used only in the mask rom version, and is not provided in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. 714 nmi irq irq e l t nmis t nmih t nmis t nmih t nmis t nmiw nmi irq j irq : edge-sensitive irq : level-sensitive irq (i = 0 to 5) e l i i irq (j = 0 to 5) figure 21.10 interrupt input timing 715 21.3.3 bus timing bus timing is shown as follows: ? basic bus cycle: two-state access figure 21.11 shows the timing of the external two-state access cycle. ? basic bus cycle: three-state access figure 21.12 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle. ? basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state figure 21.13 shows the timing of the external three-state access cycle with one wait state inserted. ? burst rom access timing: burst cycle two-state figure 21.14 shows the timing of the burst cycle two-state access. ? burst rom access timing: burst cycle three-state figure 21.15 shows the timing of the burst cycle three-state access. ? bus-release mode timing figure 21.16 shows the bus-release mode timing. 716 t 1 t 2 t ch t ad t cl t cr t cf t asd t acc3 t as1 t cyc t cyc t sd t rds t ah t pch1 t pch2 t rdh * t pch1 t sd t ah t asd t acc3 t as1 t acc1 t asd t as1 t wsw1 t wds1 t wdh t wdd a 23 to a 0 , cs n as rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr, lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) note: * specification from the earliest negation timing of a 23 to a 0 , csn, and rd. t rsd figure 21.11 basic bus cycle: two-state access 717 t 1 t 2 t 3 t acc4 t acc4 t as2 t wdd t wds2 t wsw2 t wsd t acc2 t rds a 23 to a 0 , cs n as rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr, lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) figure 21.12 basic bus cycle: three-state access 718 t 1 t 2 t w t 3 t wts t wts t wth as rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (read) hwr, lwr (write) d 15 to d 0 (write) wait t wth a 23 to a 0 , cs n figure 21.13 basic bus cycle: three-state access with one wait state 719 t ad t asd t as1 t acc4 t rds t rds t 3 t 1 t 2 t 2 t 1 t asd t sd t ah t as1 t ah t sd t asd t as1 t acc4 t acc2 t rsd t rdh * 1 t acc1 t ad a 23 to a 3 csn a 2 to a 0 as rd d 15 to d 0 note: * 1 specification from the earliest negation timing of a 23 to a 0 , csn, and rd. figure 21.14 burst rom access timing: two-state access 720 t ad t asd t as1 t acc4 t rds t rds t 3 t 1 t 2 t 3 t 2 t 1 t asd t sd t ah t as1 t ah t sd t asd t as1 t acc4 t acc2 t rsd t rdh * 1 t acc2 t ad a 23 to a 3 csn a 2 to a 0 as rd d 15 to d 0 note: * 1 specification from the earliest negation timing of a 23 to a 0 , csn, and rd. figure 21.15 burst rom access timing: three-state access breq back a 23 to a 0 , as, rd, hwr, lwr t brqs t brqs t bacd1 t bzd t bacd2 t bzd figure 21.16 bus-release mode timing 721 21.3.4 dram interface bus timing dram interface bus timing is shown as follows: ? dram bus timing: read and write access figure 21.17 shows the timing of the read and write access. ? dram bus timing: cas before ras refresh figure 21.18 shows the timing of the cas before ras refresh. ? dram bus timing: self-refresh figure 21.19 shows the timing of the self-refresh. 722 t p t ad t r t c1 t c2 t rp t ad t as1 t rad1 t rad2 t casd2 t cp t asd t cas1 t rdh* t casd2 t cas2 t cp t casd1 t cac t rds t rac t aa t rah t ad t wcd t wch t wcs t wdd t wds t wdh t asd a 23 to a 0 cs 5 to cs 2 (ras 5 to ras 2 ) ucas, lcas (read) rd (we) (read) high high ucas, lcas (write) rd (we) (write) d 15 to d 0 (read) d 15 to d 0 (write) rfsh note: * specification from the earliest negation timing of ras and cas. figure 21.17 dram bus timing (read/write) 723 tr p tr 1 tr 2 t rp t rad1 t casd1 t casd2 t rad2 t ras cs 5 to cs 2 (ras 5 to ras 2 ) ucas, lcas rd (we) (high) rfsh t csr1 t rad1 t csr1 t chr t ras t rad2 t chr t cas3 figure 21.18 dram bus timing (cas before ras refresh) 724 t csr2 t csr2 cs 5 to cs 2 (ras 5 to ras 2 ) ucas, lcas rd (we) (high) rfsh figure 21.19 dram bus timing (self-refresh) 21.3.5 tpc and i/o port timing figure 21.20 shows the tpc and i/o port input/output timing. t 1 t 2 t 3 port 1 to b (read) port 1 to 6, 8 to b (write) t prs t prh t pwd figure 21.20 tpc and i/o port input/output timing 725 21.3.6 timer input/output timing 16-bit timer and 8-bit timer timing is shown as follows: ? timer input/output timing figure 21.21 shows the timer input/output timing. ? timer external clock input timing figure 21.22 shows the timer external clock input timing. output compare *1 input capture *2 t tocd t tics notes: 1. tioca to tioca , tiocb to tiocb , tmo 0 , tmo 2 , tmio 1 , tmio 3 2. tioca to tioca , tiocb to tiocb , tmio 1 , tmio 3 0202 0202 figure 21.21 timer input/output timing t tcks t tcks t tckwh t tckwl tclka to tclkd figure 21.22 timer external clock input timing 726 21.3.7 sci input/output timing sci timing is shown as follows: ? sci input clock timing figure 21.23 shows the sci input clock timing. ? sci input/output timing (synchronous mode) figure 21.24 shows the sci input/output timing in synchronous mode. sck 0 to sck 2 t sckw t scyc t sckr t sckf figure 21.23 sci input clock timing t scyc t txd t rxs t rxh s ck 0 to s ck 2 t xd 0 to txd 2 ( transmit d ata) r xd 0 to rxd 2 ( receive d ata) figure 21.24 sci input/output timing in synchronous mode 727 21.3.8 dmac timing dmac timing is shown as follows. ? dmac tend output timing for 2 state access figure 21.25 shows the dmac tend output timing for 2 state access. ? dmac tend output timing for 3 state access figure 21.26 shows the dmac tend output timing for 3 state access. ? dmac dreq input timing figure 21.27 shows dmac dreq input timing. t 1 t 2 t ted1 t ted2 tend figure 21.25 dmac tend output timing for 2 state access t 1 t 2 t 3 t ted1 t ted2 tend figure 21.26 dmac tend output timing for 3 state access t drqh t drqs dreq figure 21.27 dmac dreq input timing 728 729 appendix a instruction set a.1 instruction list operand notation symbol description rd general destination register rs general source register rn general register erd general destination register (address register or 32-bit register) ers general source register (address register or 32-bit register) ern general register (32-bit register) (ead) destination operand (eas) source operand pc program counter sp stack pointer ccr condition code register n n (negative) flag in ccr z z (zero) flag in ccr v v (overflow) flag in ccr c c (carry) flag in ccr disp displacement transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from the state on the left to the state on the right + addition of the operands on both sides subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left multiplication of the operands on both sides division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right logical and of the operands on both sides logical or of the operands on both sides exclusive logical or of the operands on both sides not (logical complement) ( ), < > contents of operand note: general registers include 8-bit registers (r0h to r7h and r0l to r7l) and 16-bit registers (r0 to r7 and e0 to e7). 730 condition code notation symbol description changed according to execution result * undetermined (no guaranteed value) 0 cleared to 0 1 set to 1 not affected by execution of the instruction ? varies depending on conditions, described in notes 731 table a.1 instruction set 1. data transfer instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @?rn/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc mov.b #xx:8, rd mov.b rs, rd mov.b @ers, rd mov.b @(d:16, ers), rd mov.b @(d:24, ers), rd mov.b @ers+, rd mov.b @aa:8, rd mov.b @aa:16, rd mov.b @aa:24, rd mov.b rs, @erd mov.b rs, @(d:16, erd) mov.b rs, @(d:24, erd) mov.b rs, @ erd mov.b rs, @aa:8 mov.b rs, @aa:16 mov.b rs, @aa:24 mov.w #xx:16, rd mov.w rs, rd mov.w @ers, rd mov.w @(d:16, ers), rd mov.w @(d:24, ers), rd mov.w @ers+, rd mov.w @aa:16, rd b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b w w w w w w w 2 2 2 4 8 2 2 4 6 2 4 8 2 2 4 6 4 2 2 4 8 2 4 #xx:8 rd8 rs8 rd8 @ers rd8 @(d:16, ers) rd8 @(d:24, ers) rd8 @ers rd8 ers32+1 ers32 @aa:8 rd8 @aa:16 rd8 @aa:24 rd8 rs8 @erd rs8 @(d:16, erd) rs8 @(d:24, erd) erd32 1 erd32 rs8 @erd rs8 @aa:8 rs8 @aa:16 rs8 @aa:24 #xx:16 rd16 rs16 rd16 @ers rd16 @(d:16, ers) rd16 @(d:24, ers) rd16 @ers rd16 ers32+2 @erd32 @aa:16 rd16 2 2 4 6 10 6 4 6 8 4 6 10 6 4 6 8 4 2 4 6 10 6 6 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 732 table a.1 instruction set (cont) mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc mov.w @aa:24, rd mov.w rs, @erd mov.w rs, @(d:16, erd) mov.w rs, @(d:24, erd) mov.w rs, @ erd mov.w rs, @aa:16 mov.w rs, @aa:24 mov.l #xx:32, rd mov.l ers, erd mov.l @ers, erd mov.l @(d:16, ers), erd mov.l @(d:24, ers), erd mov.l @ers+, erd mov.l @aa:16, erd mov.l @aa:24, erd mov.l ers, @erd mov.l ers, @(d:16, erd) mov.l ers, @(d:24, erd) mov.l ers, @ erd mov.l ers, @aa:16 mov.l ers, @aa:24 pop.w rn pop.l ern w w w w w w w l l l l l l l l l l l l l l w l 6 2 4 8 2 4 6 6 2 4 6 10 4 6 8 4 6 10 4 6 8 2 4 @aa:24 rd16 rs16 @erd rs16 @(d:16, erd) rs16 @(d:24, erd) erd32 2 erd32 rs16 @erd rs16 @aa:16 rs16 @aa:24 #xx:32 rd32 ers32 erd32 @ers erd32 @(d:16, ers) erd32 @(d:24, ers) erd32 @ers erd32 ers32+4 ers32 @aa:16 erd32 @aa:24 erd32 ers32 @erd ers32 @(d:16, erd) ers32 @(d:24, erd) erd32 4 erd32 ers32 @erd ers32 @aa:16 ers32 @aa:24 @sp rn16 sp+2 sp @sp ern32 sp+4 sp 8 4 6 10 6 6 8 6 2 8 10 14 10 10 12 8 10 14 10 10 12 6 10 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 733 table a.1 instruction set (cont) mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc push.w rn push.l ern movfpe @aa:16, rd movtpe rs, @aa:16 w l b b 2 4 4 4 sp 2 sp rn16 @sp sp 4 sp ern32 @sp cannot be used in the h8/3067 series cannot be used in the h8/3067 series 6 10 ?? 0 ?? 0 cannot be used in the h8/3067 series cannot be used in the h8/3067 series 2. arithmetic instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc add.b #xx:8, rd add.b rs, rd add.w #xx:16, rd add.w rs, rd add.l #xx:32, erd add.l ers, erd addx.b #xx:8, rd addx.b rs, rd adds.l #1, erd adds.l #2, erd adds.l #4, erd inc.b rd inc.w #1, rd inc.w #2, rd b b w w l l b b l l l b w w 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 rd8+#xx:8 rd8 rd8+rs8 rd8 rd16+#xx:16 rd16 rd16+rs16 rd16 erd32+#xx:32 erd32 erd32+ers32 erd32 rd8+#xx:8 +c rd8 rd8+rs8 +c rd8 erd32+1 erd32 erd32+2 erd32 erd32+4 erd32 rd8+1 rd8 rd16+1 rd16 rd16+2 rd16 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ????? ????? (1) ???? (1) ???? (2) ???? (2) ???? ?? (3) ?? ?? (3) ?? ??? ??? ??? 734 table a.1 instruction set (cont) mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc inc.l #1, erd inc.l #2, erd daa rd sub.b rs, rd sub.w #xx:16, rd sub.w rs, rd sub.l #xx:32, erd sub.l ers, erd subx.b #xx:8, rd subx.b rs, rd subs.l #1, erd subs.l #2, erd subs.l #4, erd dec.b rd dec.w #1, rd dec.w #2, rd dec.l #1, erd dec.l #2, erd das.rd mulxu. b rs, rd mulxu. w rs, erd mulxs. b rs, rd mulxs. w rs, erd divxu. b rs, rd l l b b w w l l b b l l l b w w l l b b w b w b 2 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 2 erd32+1 erd32 erd32+2 erd32 rd8 decimal adjust rd8 rd8 rs8 rd8 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 rd16 rs16 rd16 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 erd32 ers32 erd32 rd8 #xx:8 c rd8 rd8 rs8 c rd8 erd32 1 erd32 erd32 2 erd32 erd32 4 erd32 rd8 1 rd8 rd16 1 rd16 rd16 2 rd16 erd32 1 erd32 erd32 2 erd32 rd8 decimal adjust rd8 rd8 rs8 rd16 (unsigned multiplication) rd16 rs16 erd32 (unsigned multiplication) rd8 rs8 rd16 (signed multiplication) rd16 rs16 erd32 (signed multiplication) rd16 rs8 rd16 (rdh: remainder, rdl: quotient) (unsigned division) 2 2 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 14 22 16 24 14 ??? ??? * ?? * ????? (1) ???? (1) ???? (2) ???? (2) ???? ?? (3) ?? ?? (3) ?? ??? ??? ??? ??? ??? * ?? * ?? ?? (6) (7) 735 table a.1 instruction set (cont) mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc divxu. w rs, erd divxs. b rs, rd divxs. w rs, erd cmp.b #xx:8, rd cmp.b rs, rd cmp.w #xx:16, rd cmp.w rs, rd cmp.l #xx:32, erd cmp.l ers, erd neg.b rd neg.w rd neg.l erd extu.w rd extu.l erd exts.w rd exts.l erd w b w b b w w l l b w l w l w l 2 4 4 2 2 4 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 erd32 rs16 erd32 (ed: remainder, rd: quotient) (unsigned division) rd16 rs8 rd16 (rdh: remainder, rdl: quotient) (signed division) erd32 rs16 erd32 (ed: remainder, rd: quotient) (signed division) rd8 #xx:8 rd8 rs8 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 rs16 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 ers32 0 rd8 rd8 0 rd16 rd16 0 erd32 erd32 0 ( 736 table a.1 instruction set (cont) 3. logic instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc and.b #xx:8, rd and.b rs, rd and.w #xx:16, rd and.w rs, rd and.l #xx:32, erd and.l ers, erd or.b #xx:8, rd or.b rs, rd or.w #xx:16, rd or.w rs, rd or.l #xx:32, erd or.l ers, erd xor.b #xx:8, rd xor.b rs, rd xor.w #xx:16, rd xor.w rs, rd xor.l #xx:32, erd xor.l ers, erd not.b rd not.w rd not.l erd b b w w l l b b w w l l b b w w l l b w l 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 rd8 #xx:8 rd8 rd8 rs8 rd8 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 rd16 rs16 rd16 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 erd32 ers32 erd32 rd8 #xx:8 rd8 rd8 rs8 rd8 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 rd16 rs16 rd16 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 erd32 ers32 erd32 rd8 #xx:8 rd8 rd8 rs8 rd8 rd16 #xx:16 rd16 rd16 rs16 rd16 erd32 #xx:32 erd32 erd32 ers32 erd32 rd8 rd8 rd16 rd16 rd32 rd32 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 4 2 6 4 2 2 2 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 ?? 0 737 table a.1 instruction set (cont) 4. shift instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc shal.b rd shal.w rd shal.l erd shar.b rd shar.w rd shar.l erd shll.b rd shll.w rd shll.l erd shlr.b rd shlr.w rd shlr.l erd rotxl.b rd rotxl.w rd rotxl.l erd rotxr.b rd rotxr.w rd rotxr.l erd rotl.b rd rotl.w rd rotl.l erd rotr.b rd rotr.w rd rotr.l erd b w l b w l b w l b w l b w l b w l b w l b w l 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 ???? ???? ???? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? ?? 0 ? c msb lsb c msb lsb c msb lsb c msb lsb msb lsb 0 c msb lsb 0 c c msb lsb 0c msb lsb 738 table a.1 instruction set (cont) 5. bit manipulation instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc bset #xx:3, rd bset #xx:3, @erd bset #xx:3, @aa:8 bset rn, rd bset rn, @erd bset rn, @aa:8 bclr #xx:3, rd bclr #xx:3, @erd bclr #xx:3, @aa:8 bclr rn, rd bclr rn, @erd bclr rn, @aa:8 bnot #xx:3, rd bnot #xx:3, @erd bnot #xx:3, @aa:8 bnot rn, rd bnot rn, @erd bnot rn, @aa:8 btst #xx:3, rd btst #xx:3, @erd btst #xx:3, @aa:8 btst rn, rd btst rn, @erd btst rn, @aa:8 bld #xx:3, rd b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 (#xx:3 of rd8) 1 (#xx:3 of @erd) 1 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 1 (rn8 of rd8) 1 (rn8 of @erd) 1 (rn8 of @aa:8) 1 (#xx:3 of rd8) 0 (#xx:3 of @erd) 0 (#xx:3 of @aa:8) 0 (rn8 of rd8) 0 (rn8 of @erd) 0 (rn8 of @aa:8) 0 (#xx:3 of rd8) (#xx:3 of rd8) (#xx:3 of @erd) (#xx:3 of @erd) (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of @aa:8) (rn8 of rd8) (rn8 of rd8) (rn8 of @erd) (rn8 of @erd) (rn8 of @aa:8) (rn8 of @aa:8) (#xx:3 of rd8) z (#xx:3 of @erd) z (#xx:3 of @aa:8) z (rn8 of @rd8) z (rn8 of @erd) z (rn8 of @aa:8) z (#xx:3 of rd8) c 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 739 table a.1 instruction set (cont) mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc bld #xx:3, @erd bld #xx:3, @aa:8 bild #xx:3, rd bild #xx:3, @erd bild #xx:3, @aa:8 bst #xx:3, rd bst #xx:3, @erd bst #xx:3, @aa:8 bist #xx:3, rd bist #xx:3, @erd bist #xx:3, @aa:8 band #xx:3, rd band #xx:3, @erd band #xx:3, @aa:8 biand #xx:3, rd biand #xx:3, @erd biand #xx:3, @aa:8 bor #xx:3, rd bor #xx:3, @erd bor #xx:3, @aa:8 bior #xx:3, rd bior #xx:3, @erd bior #xx:3, @aa:8 bxor #xx:3, rd bxor #xx:3, @erd bxor #xx:3, @aa:8 bixor #xx:3, rd bixor #xx:3, @erd bixor #xx:3, @aa:8 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 2 4 4 (#xx:3 of @erd) c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c (#xx:3 of rd8) c (#xx:3 of @erd) c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c c (#xx:3 of rd8) c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c (#xx:3 of rd8) c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c (#xx:3 of rd8) c c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c c (#xx:3 of rd8) c c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c c (#xx:3 of rd8) c c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c c (#xx:3 of rd8) c c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c c (#xx:3 of rd8) c c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c c (#xx:3 of rd8) c c (#xx:3 of @erd24) c c (#xx:3 of @aa:8) c 6 6 2 6 6 2 8 8 2 8 8 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 2 6 6 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? 740 table a.1 instruction set (cont) 6. branching instructions mnemonic operation branch condition condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc bra d:8 (bt d:8) bra d:16 (bt d:16) brn d:8 (bf d:8) brn d:16 (bf d:16) bhi d:8 bhi d:16 bls d:8 bls d:16 bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) bcs d:8 (blo d:8) bcs d:16 (blo d:16) bne d:8 bne d:16 beq d:8 beq d:16 bvc d:8 bvc d:16 bvs d:8 bvs d:16 bpl d:8 bpl d:16 bmi d:8 bmi d:16 bge d:8 bge d:16 blt d:8 blt d:16 bgt d:8 bgt d:16 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 if condition is true then pc pc+d else next; 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 4 6 always never c z = 0 c z = 1 c = 0 c = 1 z = 0 z = 1 v = 0 v = 1 n = 0 n = 1 n v = 0 n v = 1 z (n v) = 0 741 table a.1 instruction set (cont) mnemonic operation operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc ble d:8 ble d:16 jmp @ern jmp @aa:24 jmp @@aa:8 bsr d:8 bsr d:16 jsr @ern jsr @aa:24 jsr @@aa:8 rts 2 4 2 4 2 2 4 2 4 2 2 pc ern pc aa:24 pc @aa:8 pc @ sp pc pc+d:8 pc @ sp pc pc+d:16 pc @ sp pc @ern pc @ sp pc @aa:24 pc @ sp pc @aa:8 pc @sp+ 4 6 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 8 8 10 8 10 8 10 12 10 branch condition if condition is true then pc pc+d else next; z (n v) = 1 742 table a.1 instruction set (cont) 7. system control instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc trapa #x:2 rte sleep ldc #xx:8, ccr ldc rs, ccr ldc @ers, ccr ldc @(d:16, ers), ccr ldc @(d:24, ers), ccr ldc @ers+, ccr ldc @aa:16, ccr ldc @aa:24, ccr stc ccr, rd stc ccr, @erd stc ccr, @(d:16, erd) stc ccr, @(d:24, erd) stc ccr, @ erd stc ccr, @aa:16 stc ccr, @aa:24 andc #xx:8, ccr orc #xx:8, ccr xorc #xx:8, ccr nop b b w w w w w w b w w w w w w b b b 2 2 2 4 6 10 4 6 8 2 4 6 10 4 6 8 2 2 2 2 pc @ sp ccr @ sp 743 table a.1 instruction set (cont) 8. block transfer instructions mnemonic operation condition code operand size #xx rn @ern @(d, ern) @ ern/@ern+ @aa @(d, pc) @@aa addressing mode and instruction length (bytes) normal advanced no. of states* 1 ihnzvc eepmov. b eepmov. w 4 4 if r4l 0 repeat @r5 @r6 r5+1 r5 r6+1 r6 r4l 1 r4l until r4l=0 else next; if r4 0 repeat @r5 @r6 r5+1 r5 r6+1 r6 r4 1 r4 until r4=0 else next; 8+ 4n* 2 8+ 4n* 2 notes: 1. the number of states is the number of states required for execution when the instruction and its operands are located in on-chip memory. for other cases see section a.3. 2. n is the value set in register r4l or r4. (1) set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0. (2) set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0. (3) retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (4) set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value. (5) the number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in synchronization with the e clock is variable. (6) set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. (7) set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0. (8) set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0. 744 a.2 operation code maps table a.2 operation code map (1) ah al 0123456789abcdef 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c d e f nop bra mulxu bset brn divxu bnot stc bhi mulxu bclr ldc bls divxu btst orc or.b bcc rts or xorc xor.b bcs bsr xor bor bior bxor bixor band biand andc and.b bne rte and ldc bnq trapa bld bild bst bist bvc mov bpl jmp bmi addx subx bgt jsr ble mov add addx cmp subx or xor and mov instruction when most significant bit of bh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of bh is 1. instruction code: table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) bvs blt bge bsr table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (2) table a.2 (3) 1st byte 2nd byte ah bh al bl add sub mov cmp mov.b eepmov 745 table a.2 operation code map (2) ah al bh 0123456789abcdef 01 0a 0b 0f 10 11 12 13 17 1a 1b 1f 58 79 7a mov inc adds daa dec subs das bra mov mov bhi cmp cmp ldc/stc bcc or or bpl bgt instruction code: bvs sleep bvc bge table a.2 (3) table a.2 (3) table a.2 (3) bne and and inc extu dec beq inc extu dec bcs xor xor shll shlr rotxl rotxr not bls sub sub brn add add inc exts dec blt inc exts dec ble shal shar rotl rotr neg bmi 1st byte 2nd byte ah bh al bl subs adds add mov sub cmp shll shlr rotxl rotxr not shal shar rotl rotr neg 746 table a.2 operation code map (3) ah albh blch cl 0123456789abcdef 01406 01c05 01d05 01f06 7cr06 7cr07 7dr06 7dr07 7eaa6 7eaa7 7faa6 7faa7 mulxs bset bset bset bset divixs bnot bnot bnot bnot mulxs bclr bclr bclr bclr divxs btst btst btst btst or xor bor bior bxor bixor band biand and bld bild bst bist instruction when most significant bit of dh is 0. instruction when most significant bit of dh is 1. instruction code: * * * * * * * * 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 bor bior bxor bixor band biand bld bild bst bist notes: 1. 2. r is the register designation field. aa is the absolute address field. 1st byte 2nd byte ah bh al bl 3rd byte ch dh cl dl 4th byte ldc stc ldc ldc ldc stc stc stc 747 a.3 number of states required for execution the tables in this section can be used to calculate the number of states required for instruction execution by the h8/300h cpu. table a.4 indicates the number of instruction fetch, data read/write, and other cycles occurring in each instruction. table a.3 indicates the number of states required per cycle according to the bus size. the number of states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated from these two tables as follows: number of states = i s i + j s j + k s k + l s l + m s m + n s n examples of calculation of number of states required for execution examples: advanced mode, stack located in external address space, on-chip supporting modules accessed with 8-bit bus width, external devices accessed in three states with one wait state and 16-bit bus width. bset #0, @ffffc7:8 from table a.4, i = l = 2 and j = k = m = n = 0 from table a.3, s i = 4 and s l = 3 number of states = 2 4 + 2 3 = 14 jsr @@30 from table a.4, i = j = k = 2 and l = m = n = 0 from table a.3, s i = s j = s k = 4 number of states = 2 4 + 2 4 + 2 4 = 24 748 table a.3 number of states per cycle access conditions on-chip sup- external device porting module 8-bit bus 16-bit bus execution state (cycle) on-chip memory 8-bit bus 16-bit bus 2-state access 3-state access 2-state access 3-state access instruction fetch s i 2 6346 + 2m23 + m branch address read s j stack operation s k byte data access s l 3 2 3 + m word data access s m 6 4 6 + 2m internal operation s n 1 legend m: number of wait states inserted into external device access 749 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n add add.b #xx:8, rd add.b rs, rd add.w #xx:16, rd add.w rs, rd add.l #xx:32, erd add.l ers, erd 1 1 2 1 3 1 adds adds #1/2/4, erd 1 addx addx #xx:8, rd addx rs, rd 1 1 and and.b #xx:8, rd and.b rs, rd and.w #xx:16, rd and.w rs, rd and.l #xx:32, erd and.l ers, erd 1 1 2 1 3 2 andc andc #xx:8, ccr 1 band band #xx:3, rd band #xx:3, @erd band #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 bcc bra d:8 (bt d:8) brn d:8 (bf d:8) bhi d:8 bls d:8 bcc d:8 (bhs d:8) bcs d:8 (blo d:8) bne d:8 beq d:8 bvc d:8 bvs d:8 bpl d:8 bmi d:8 bge d:8 blt d:8 bgt d:8 ble d:8 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 750 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n bcc bra d:16 (bt d:16) brn d:16 (bf d:16) bhi d:16 bls d:16 bcc d:16 (bhs d:16) bcs d:16 (blo d:16) bne d:16 beq d:16 bvc d:16 bvs d:16 bpl d:16 bmi d:16 bge d:16 blt d:16 bgt d:16 ble d:16 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 bclr bclr #xx:3, rd bclr #xx:3, @erd bclr #xx:3, @aa:8 bclr rn, rd bclr rn, @erd bclr rn, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 biand biand #xx:3, rd biand #xx:3, @erd biand #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 bild bild #xx:3, rd bild #xx:3, @erd bild #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 bior bior #xx:8, rd bior #xx:8, @erd bior #xx:8, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 bist bist #xx:3, rd bist #xx:3, @erd bist #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 2 2 bixor bixor #xx:3, rd bixor #xx:3, @erd bixor #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 bld bld #xx:3, rd bld #xx:3, @erd bld #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 751 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n bnot bnot #xx:3, rd bnot #xx:3, @erd bnot #xx:3, @aa:8 bnot rn, rd bnot rn, @erd bnot rn, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 bor bor #xx:3, rd bor #xx:3, @erd bor #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 bset bset #xx:3, rd bset #xx:3, @erd bset #xx:3, @aa:8 bset rn, rd bset rn, @erd bset rn, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 bsr bsr d:8 normal 2 1 advanced 2 2 bsr d:16 normal 2 1 2 advanced 2 2 2 bst bst #xx:3, rd bst #xx:3, @erd bst #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 2 2 btst btst #xx:3, rd btst #xx:3, @erd btst #xx:3, @aa:8 btst rn, rd btst rn, @erd btst rn, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 bxor bxor #xx:3, rd bxor #xx:3, @erd bxor #xx:3, @aa:8 1 2 2 1 1 cmp cmp.b #xx:8, rd cmp.b rs, rd cmp.w #xx:16, rd cmp.w rs, rd cmp.l #xx:32, erd cmp.l ers, erd 1 1 2 1 3 1 daa daa rd 1 das das rd 1 752 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n dec dec.b rd dec.w #1/2, rd dec.l #1/2, erd 1 1 1 divxs divxs.b rs, rd divxs.w rs, erd 2 2 12 20 divxu divxu.b rs, rd divxu.w rs, erd 1 1 12 20 eepmov eepmov.b eepmov.w 2 2 2n + 2* 1 2n + 2* 1 exts exts.w rd exts.l erd 1 1 extu extu.w rd extu.l erd 1 1 inc inc.b rd inc.w #1/2, rd inc.l #1/2, erd 1 1 1 jmp jmp @ern 2 jmp @aa:24 2 2 jmp @@aa:8 normal 2 1 2 advanced 2 2 2 jsr jsr @ern normal 2 1 advanced 2 2 jsr @aa:24 normal 2 1 2 advanced 2 2 2 jsr @@aa:8 normal 2 1 1 advanced 2 2 2 ldc ldc #xx:8, ccr ldc rs, ccr ldc @ers, ccr ldc @(d:16, ers), ccr ldc @(d:24, ers), ccr ldc @ers+, ccr ldc @aa:16, ccr ldc @aa:24, ccr 1 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 753 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n mov mov.b #xx:8, rd mov.b rs, rd mov.b @ers, rd mov.b @(d:16, ers), rd mov.b @(d:24, ers), rd mov.b @ers+, rd mov.b @aa:8, rd mov.b @aa:16, rd mov.b @aa:24, rd mov.b rs, @erd mov.b rs, @(d:16, erd) mov.b rs, @(d:24, erd) mov.b rs, @ erd mov.b rs, @aa:8 mov.b rs, @aa:16 mov.b rs, @aa:24 mov.w #xx:16, rd mov.w rs, rd mov.w @ers, rd mov.w @(d:16, ers), rd mov.w @(d:24, ers), rd mov.w @ers+, rd mov.w @aa:16, rd mov.w @aa:24, rd mov.w rs, @erd mov.w rs, @(d:16, erd) mov.w rs, @(d:24, erd) mov.w rs, @ erd mov.w rs, @aa:16 mov.w rs, @aa:24 1 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 1 2 3 2 1 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 2 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 mov.l #xx:32, erd mov.l ers, erd mov.l @ers, erd m ov.l @( d:16, ers) , er d m ov.l @( d:24, ers) , er d mov.l @ers+, erd mov.l @aa:16, erd mov.l @aa:24, erd mov.l ers, @erd m ov.l er s, @( d:16, er d) m ov.l er s, @( d:24, er d) mov.l ers, @ erd mov.l ers, @aa:16 mov.l ers, @aa:24 3 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 754 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n movfpe movfpe @aa:16, rd* 2 21 movtpe movtpe rs, @aa:16* 2 21 mulxs mulxs.b rs, rd mulxs.w rs, erd 2 2 12 20 mulxu mulxu.b rs, rd mulxu.w rs, erd 1 1 12 20 neg neg.b rd neg.w rd neg.l erd 1 1 1 nop nop 1 not not.b rd not.w rd not.l erd 1 1 1 or or.b #xx:8, rd or.b rs, rd or.w #xx:16, rd or.w rs, rd or.l #xx:32, erd or.l ers, erd 1 1 2 1 3 2 orc orc #xx:8, ccr 1 pop pop.w rn pop.l ern 1 2 1 2 2 2 push push.w rn push.l ern 1 2 1 2 2 2 rotl rotl.b rd rotl.w rd rotl.l erd 1 1 1 rotr rotr.b rd rotr.w rd rotr.l erd 1 1 1 rotxl rotxl.b rd rotxl.w rd rotxl.l erd 1 1 1 rotxr rotxr.b rd rotxr.w rd rotxr.l erd 1 1 1 rte rte 2 2 2 755 table a.4 number of cycles per instruction (cont) instruction mnemonic instruction fetch i branch addr. read j stack operation k byte data access l word data access m internal operation n rts rts normal 2 1 2 advanced 2 2 2 shal shal.b rd shal.w rd shal.l erd 1 1 1 shar shar.b rd shar.w rd shar.l erd 1 1 1 shll shll.b rd shll.w rd shll.l erd 1 1 1 shlr shlr.b rd shlr.w rd shlr.l erd 1 1 1 sleep sleep 1 stc stc ccr, rd stc ccr, @erd st c c cr , @( d:16, er d) st c c cr , @( d:24, er d) stc ccr, @ erd stc ccr, @aa:16 stc ccr, @aa:24 1 2 3 5 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 sub sub.b rs, rd sub.w #xx:16, rd sub.w rs, rd sub.l #xx:32, erd sub.l ers, erd 1 2 1 3 1 subs subs #1/2/4, erd 1 subx subx #xx:8, rd subx rs, rd 1 1 trapa trapa #x:2 normal 2 1 2 4 advanced 2 2 2 4 xor xor.b #xx:8, rd xor.b rs, rd xor.w #xx:16, rd xor.w rs, rd xor.l #xx:32, erd xor.l ers, erd 1 1 2 1 3 2 xorc xorc #xx:8, ccr 1 notes: 1. n is the value set in register r4l or r4. the source and destination are accessed n + 1 times each. 2. not available in the h8/3067 series. 756 appendix b internal i/o registers b.1 addresses address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?e000 p1ddr 8 p1 7 ddr p1 6 ddr p1 5 ddr p1 4 ddr p1 3 ddr p1 2 ddr p1 1 ddr p1 0 ddr port 1 h?e001 p2ddr 8 p2 7 ddr p2 6 ddr p2 5 ddr p2 4 ddr p2 3 ddr p2 2 ddr p2 1 ddr p2 0 ddr port 2 h?e002 p3ddr 8 p3 7 ddr p3 6 ddr p3 5 ddr p3 4 ddr p3 3 ddr p3 2 ddr p3 1 ddr p3 0 ddr port 3 h?e003 p4ddr 8 p4 7 ddr p4 6 ddr p4 5 ddr p4 4 ddr p4 3 ddr p4 2 ddr p4 1 ddr p4 0 ddr port 4 h?e004 p5ddr 8 ?5 3 ddr p5 2 ddr p5 1 ddr p5 0 ddr port 5 h?e005 p6ddr 8 p6 6 ddr p6 5 ddr p6 4 ddr p6 3 ddr p6 2 ddr p6 1 ddr p6 0 ddr port 6 h?e006 h?e007 p8ddr 8 p8 4 ddr p8 3 ddr p8 2 ddr p8 1 ddr p8 0 ddr port 8 h?e008 p9ddr 8 p9 5 ddr p9 4 ddr p9 3 ddr p9 2 ddr p9 1 ddr p9 0 ddr port 9 h?e009 paddr 8 pa 7 ddr pa 6 ddr pa 5 ddr pa 4 ddr pa 3 ddr pa 2 ddr pa 1 ddr pa 0 ddr port a h?e00a pbddr 8 pb 7 ddr pb 6 ddr pb 5 ddr pb 4 ddr pb 3 ddr pb 2 ddr pb 1 ddr pb 0 ddr port b h?e00b h?e00c h?e00d h?e00e h?e00f h?e010 h?e011 mdcr 8 mds2 mds1 mds0 system h?e012 syscr 8 ssby sts2 sts1 sts0 ue nmieg ssoe rame control h?e013 brcr 8 a23e a22e a21e a20e brle bus controller h?e014 iscr 8 irq5sc irq4sc irq3sc irq2sc irq1sc irq0sc interrupt h?e015 ier 8 irq5e irq4e irq3e irq2e irq1e irq0e controller h?e016 isr 8 irq5f irq4f irq3f irq2f irq1f irq0f h?e017 h?e018 ipra 8 ipra7 ipra6 ipra5 ipra4 ipra3 ipra2 ipra1 ipra0 h?e019 iprb 8 iprb7 iprb6 iprb5 iprb3 iprb2 iprb1 h?e01a dastcr 8 daste d/a converter h?e01b divcr 8 div1 div0 system h?e01c mstcrh 8 pstop mstph2 mstph1 mstph0 control h?e01d mstcrl 8 mstpl7 mstpl5 mstpl4 mstpl3 mstpl2 mstpl0 h?e01e adrcr * 8 adrctl bus controller h?e01f cscr 8 cs7e cs6e cs5e cs4e note: * the adrcr register is provided only in the flash memory r version and mask rom versions; it is not present in the flash memory version. 757 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?e020 abwcr 8 abw7 abw6 abw5 abw4 abw3 abw2 abw1 abw0 bus h?e021 astcr 8 ast7 ast6 ast5 ast4 ast3 ast2 ast1 ast0 controller h?e022 wcrh 8 w71 w70 w61 w60 w51 w50 w41 w40 h?e023 wcrl 8 w31 w30 w21 w20 w11 w10 w01 w00 h?e024 bcr 8 icis1 icis0 brome brsts1 brsts0 rdea waite h?e025 h?e026 drcra 8 dras2 dras1 dras0 be rdm srfmd rfshe dram h?e027 drcrb 8 mxc1 mxc0 csel rcyce tpc rcw rlw interface h?e028 rtmcsr 8 cmf cmie cks2 cks1 cks0 h?e029 rtcnt 8 h?e02a rtcor 8 h?e02b h?e02c h?e02d h?e02e h?e02f h?e030 flmcr * 8 fwe swe esu psu ev pv e p flash h?e031 memory h?e032 ebr * 8 eb7 eb6 eb5 eb4 eb3 eb2 eb1 eb0 h?e033 h?e034 h?e035 h?e036 h?e037 h?e038 h?e039 h?e03a h?e03b h?e03c p2pcr 8 p2 7 pcr p2 6 pcr p2 5 pcr p2 4 pcr p2 3 pcr p2 2 pcr p2 7 pcr p2 0 pcr port 2 h?e03d h?e03e p4pcr 8 p4 7 pcr p4 6 pcr p4 5 pcr p4 4 pcr p4 3 pcr p4 2 pcr p4 1 pcr p4 0 pcr port 4 h?e03f p5pcr 8 ?5 3 pcr p5 2 pcr p5 1 pcr p5 0 pcr port 5 note: * the flmcr and ebr registers are used only in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, and are not provided in the mask rom versions. reserved area (access prohibited) reserved area (access prohibited) reserved area (access prohibited) 758 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h ' ee040 h ' ee041 h ' ee042 h ' ee043 h ' ee044 h ' ee045 h ' ee046 h ' ee047 h ' ee048 h ' ee049 h ' ee04a h ' ee04b h ' ee04c h ' ee04d h ' ee04e h ' ee04f h ' ee050 h ' ee051 h ' ee052 h ' ee053 h ' ee054 h ' ee055 h ' ee056 h ' ee057 h ' ee058 h ' ee059 h ' ee05a h ' ee05b h ' ee05c h ' ee05d h ' ee05e h ' ee05f 759 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h ' ee060 h ' ee061 h ' ee062 h ' ee063 h ' ee064 h ' ee065 h ' ee066 h ' ee067 h ' ee068 h ' ee069 h ' ee06a h ' ee06b h ' ee06c h ' ee06d h ' ee06e h ' ee06f h ' ee070 h ' ee071 h ' ee072 h ' ee073 h ' ee074 h ' ee075 h ' ee076 h ' ee077 ramcr * 8 rams ram2 ram1 flash h ' ee078 memory * h ' ee079 h ' ee07a h ' ee07b h ' ee07c h ' ee07d flmsr * 8 fler h ' ee07e h ' ee07f h ' ee080 h ' ee081 note: * the ramcr and flmcr registers are used only in the flash memory and flash memory r versions, and are not provided in the mask rom versions. reserved area (access prohibited) reserved area (access prohibited) reserved area (access prohibited) 760 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ff20 mar0ar 8 dmac channel 0a h?ff21 mar0ae 8 h?ff22 mar0ah 8 h?ff23 mar0al 8 h?ff24 etcr0ah 8 h?ff25 etcr0al 8 h?ff26 ioar0a 8 h?ff27 dtcr0a 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dte dtsz said saide dtie dts2a dts1a dts0a full address mode h?ff28 mar0br 8 dmac channel 0b h?ff29 mar0be 8 h?ff2a mar0bh 8 h?ff2b mar0bl 8 h?ff2c etcr0bh 8 h?ff2d etcr0bl 8 h?ff2e ioar0b 8 h?ff2f dtcr0b 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dtme daid daide tms dts2b dts1b dts0b full address mode h?ff30 mar1ar 8 dmac channel 1a h?ff31 mar1ae 8 h?ff32 mar1ah 8 h?ff33 mar1al 8 h?ff34 etcr1ah 8 h?ff35 etcr1al 8 h?ff36 ioar1a 8 h?ff37 dtcr1a 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dte dtsz said saide dtie dts2a dts1a dts0a full address mode h?ff38 mar1br 8 dmac channel 1b h?ff39 mar1be 8 h?ff3a mar1bh 8 h?ff3b mar1bl 8 h?ff3c etcr1bh 8 h?ff3d etcr1bl 8 h?ff3e ioar1b 8 h?ff3f dtcr1b 8 dte dtsz dtid rpe dtie dts2 dts1 dts0 short address mode dtme daid daide tms dts2b dts1b dts0b full address mode 761 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ff40 h?ff41 h?ff42 h?ff43 h?ff44 h?ff45 h?ff46 h?ff47 h?ff48 h?ff49 h?ff4a h?ff4b h?ff4c h?ff4d h?ff4e h?ff4f h?ff50 h?ff51 h?ff52 h?ff53 h?ff54 h?ff55 h?ff56 h?ff57 h?ff58 h?ff59 h?ff5a h?ff5b h?ff5c h?ff5d h?ff5e h?ff5f 762 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ff60 tstr 8 str2 str1 str0 16-bit timer, h?ff61 tsnc 8 sync2 sync1 sync0 (all channels) h?ff62 tmdr 8 mdf fdir pwm2 pwm1 pwm0 h?ff63 tolr 8 tob2 toa2 tob1 toa1 tob0 toa0 h?ff64 tisra 8 imiea2 imiea1 imiea0 imfa2 imfa1 imfa0 h?ff65 tisrb 8 imieb2 imieb1 imieb0 imfb2 imfb1 imfb0 h?ff66 tisrc 8 ovie2 ovie1 ovie0 ovf2 ovf1 ovf0 h?ff67 h?ff68 tcr0 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 16-bit timer h?ff69 tior0 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 channel 0 h?ff6a tcnt0h 16 h?ff6b tcnt0l h?ff6c gra0h 16 h?ff6d gra0l h?ff6e grb0h 16 h?ff6f grb0l h?ff70 tcr1 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 16-bit timer h?ff71 tior1 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 channel 1 h?ff72 tcnt1h 16 h?ff73 tcnt1l h?ff74 gra1h 16 h?ff75 gra1l h?ff76 grb1h 16 h?ff77 grb1l h?ff78 tcr2 8 cclr1 cclr0 ckeg1 ckeg0 tpsc2 tpsc1 tpsc0 16-bit timer h?ff79 tior2 8 iob2 iob1 iob0 ioa2 ioa1 ioa0 channel 2 h?ff7a tcnt2h 16 h?ff7b tcnt2l h?ff7c gra2h 16 h?ff7d gra2l h?ff7e grb2h 16 h?ff7f grb2l 763 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ff80 tcr0 8 cmieb cmiea ovie cclr1 cclr0 cks2 cks1 cks0 h?ff81 tcr1 8 cmieb cmiea ovie cclr1 cclr0 cks2 cks1 cks0 h?ff82 tcsr0 8 cmfb cmfa ovf adte ois3 ois2 os1 os0 h?ff83 tcsr1 8 cmfb cmfa ovf ice ois3 ois2 os1 os0 h?ff84 tcora0 8 h?ff85 tcora1 8 h?ff86 tcorb0 8 h?ff87 tcorb1 8 h?ff88 tcnt0 8 h?ff89 tcnt1 8 h?ff8a h?ff8b h?ff8c tcsr* 8 ovf wt/ it tme cks2 cks1 cks0 wdt h?ff8d tcnt* 8 h?ff8e h?ff8f rstcsr* 8 wrst rstoe h?ff90 tcr2 8 cmieb cmiea ovie cclr1 cclr0 cks2 cks1 cks0 h?ff91 tcr3 8 cmieb cmiea ovie cclr1 cclr0 cks2 cks1 cks0 h?ff92 tcsr2 8 cmfb cmfa ovf ois3 ois2 os1 os0 h?ff93 tcsr3 8 cmfb cmfa ovf ice ois3 ois2 os1 os0 h?ff94 tcora2 8 h?ff95 tcora3 8 h?ff96 tcorb2 8 h?ff97 tcorb3 8 h?ff98 tcnt2 8 h?ff99 tcnt3 8 h?ff9a h?ff9b h?ff9c dadr0 8 d/a h?ff9d dadr1 8 converter h?ff9e dacr 8 daoe1 daoe0 dae h?ff9f 8 note: * for write access to tcsr, tcnt, and rstcsr, see section 12.2.4, notes on register access. legend wdt: watchdog timer 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 764 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ffa0 tpmr 8 g3nov g2nov g1nov g0nov tpc h?ffa1 tpcr 8 g3cms1 g3cms0 g2cms1 g2cms0 g1cms1 g1cms0 g0cms1 g0cms0 h?ffa2 nderb 8 nder15 nder14 nder13 nder12 nder11 nder10 nder9 nder8 h?ffa3 ndera 8 nder7 nder6 nder5 nder4 nder3 nder2 nder1 nder0 h?ffa4 ndrb* 8 nder15 nder14 nder13 nder12 nder11 nder10 nder9 nder8 nder15 nder14 nder13 nder12 h?ffa5 ndra* 8 nder7 nder6 nder5 nder4 nder3 nder2 nder1 nder0 nder7 nder6 nder5 nder4 h?ffa6 ndrb* 8 nder11 nder10 nder9 nder8 h?ffa7 ndra* 8 nder3 nder2 nder1 nder0 h?ffa8 h?ffa9 h?ffaa h?ffab h?ffac h?ffad h?ffae h?ffaf h?ffb0 smr 8 c/ a chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 sci h?ffb1 brr 8 channel 0 h?ffb2 scr 8 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h?ffb3 tdr 8 h?ffb4 ssr 8 tdre rdrf orer fe r/ e rs per tend mpb mpbt h?ffb5 rdr 8 h?ffb6 scmr 8 sdir sinv smif h?ffb7 reserved area (access prohibited) h?ffb8 smr 8 c/ a chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 sci h?ffb9 brr 8 channel 1 h?ffba scr 8 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h?ffbb tdr 8 h?ffbc ssr 8 tdre rdrf orer fe r/ e rs per tend mpb mpbt h?ffbd rdr 8 h?ffbe scmr 8 sdir sinv smif h?ffbf reserved area (access prohibited) note: * the address depends on the output trigger setting. legend tpc: programmable timing pattern controller sci: serial communication interface 765 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ffc0 smr 8 c/ a chr pe o/ e stop mp cks1 cks0 sci h?ffc1 brr 8 channel 2 h?ffc2 scr 8 tie rie te re mpie teie cke1 cke0 h?ffc3 tdr 8 h?ffc4 ssr 8 tdre rdrf orer fer/ers per tend mpb mpbt h?ffc5 rdr 8 h?ffc6 scmr 8 sdir sinv smif h?ffc7 reserved area (access prohibited) h?ffc8 h?ffc9 h?ffca h?ffcb h?ffcc h?ffcd h?ffce h?ffcf h?ffd0 p1dr 8 p1 7 p1 6 p1 5 p1 4 p1 3 p1 2 p1 1 p1 0 port1 h?ffd1 p2dr 8 p2 7 p2 6 p2 5 p2 4 p2 3 p2 2 p2 1 p2 0 port2 h?ffd2 p3dr 8 p3 7 p3 6 p3 5 p3 4 p3 3 p3 2 p3 1 p3 0 port3 h?ffd3 p4dr 8 p4 7 p4 6 p4 5 p4 4 p4 3 p4 2 p4 1 p4 0 port4 h?ffd4 p5dr 8 ?5 3 p5 2 p5 1 p5 0 port5 h?ffd5 p6dr 8 p6 7 p6 6 p6 5 p6 4 p6 3 p6 2 p6 1 p6 0 port6 h?ffd6 p7dr 8 p7 7 p7 6 p7 5 p7 4 p7 3 p7 2 p7 1 p7 0 port7 h?ffd7 p8dr 8 p8 4 p8 3 p8 2 p8 1 p8 0 port8 h?ffd8 p9dr 8 p9 5 p9 4 p9 3 p9 2 p9 1 p9 0 port9 h?ffd9 padr 8 pa 7 pa 6 pa 5 pa 4 pa 3 pa 2 pa 1 pa 0 porta h?ffda pbdr 8 pb 7 pb 6 pb 5 pb 4 pb 3 pb 2 pb 1 pb 0 portb h?ffdb h?ffdc h?ffdd h?ffde h?ffdf legend sci: serial communication interface 766 b.1 addresses (cont) address (low) register name data bus width bit names bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 module name h?ffe0 addrah 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 a/d h?ffe1 addral 8 ad1 ad0 converter h?ffe2 addrbh 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h?ffe3 addrbl 8 ad1 ad0 h?ffe4 addrch 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h?ffe5 addrcl 8 ad1 ad0 h?ffe6 addrdh 8 ad9 ad8 ad7 ad6 ad5 ad4 ad3 ad2 h?ffe7 addrdl 8 ad1 ad0 h?ffe8 adcsr 8 adf adie adst scan cks ch2 ch1 ch0 h?ffe9 adcr 8 trge 767 b.2 functions bit initial value r/w: 0 r/w 7 iciae 0 r/w 6 icibe 0 r/w 5 icice 0 r/w 4 ocide 0 r/w 3 ociae 1 r/w 2 ocibe 1 r/w 1 ovie 1 0 timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 interrupt requested by ovf flag is disabled interrupt requested by ovf flag is enabled output compare interrupt b enable 0 1 interrupt requested by ocfb flag is disabled interrupt requested by ocfb flag is enabled output compare interrupt a enable 0 1 interrupt requested by ocfa flag is disabled interrupt requested by ocfa flag is enabled input capture interrupt d enable 0 1 interrupt requested by icfd flag is disabled interrupt requested by icfd flag is enabled tier timer interrupt enable register h' 90 frt register abbreviation register name address to which register is mapped name of on-chip supporting module names of the bits. dashes ( ) indicate reserved bits. full name of bit descriptions of bit settings bit numbers initial bit values possible types of access r w r/w read only write only read and write 768 p1ddr?ort 1 data direction register h?e000 port 1 bit initial value read/write 0 w 7 p1 7 ddr 0 w 6 p1 6 ddr 0 w 5 p1 5 ddr 0 w 4 p1 4 ddr 0 w 3 p1 3 ddr 0 w 2 p1 2 ddr 0 w 1 p1 1 ddr 0 w 0 p1 0 ddr port 1 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output initial value read/write 11111111 modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 p2ddr?ort 2 data direction register h?e001 port 2 bit initial value read/write 0 w 7 p2 7 ddr 0 w 6 p2 6 ddr 0 w 5 p2 5 ddr 0 w 4 p2 4 ddr 0 w 3 p2 3 ddr 0 w 2 p2 2 ddr 0 w 1 p2 1 ddr 0 w 0 p2 0 ddr port 2 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output initial value read/write 11111111 modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 769 p3ddr?ort 3 data direction register h?e002 port 3 bit initial value read/write 0 w 7 p3 7 ddr 0 w 6 p3 6 ddr 0 w 5 p3 5 ddr 0 w 4 p3 4 ddr 0 w 3 p3 3 ddr 0 w 2 p3 2 ddr 0 w 1 p3 1 ddr 0 w 0 p3 0 ddr port 3 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output p4ddr?ort 4 data direction register h?e003 port 4 bit initial value read/write 0 w 7 p4 7 ddr 0 w 6 p4 6 ddr 0 w 5 p4 5 ddr 0 w 4 p4 4 ddr 0 w 3 p4 3 ddr 0 w 2 p4 2 ddr 0 w 1 p4 1 ddr 0 w 0 p4 0 ddr port 4 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output 770 p5ddr?ort 5 data direction register h?e004 port 5 bit initial value read/write 7654 0 w 3 p5 3 ddr 0 w 2 p5 2 ddr 0 w 1 p5 1 ddr 0 w 0 p5 0 ddr port 5 input/output select 0 1 generic input pin generic output pin initial value read/write 11111111 modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 1111 p6ddr?ort 6 data direction register h?e005 port 6 bit 76 p6 6 ddr 5 p6 5 ddr 4 p6 4 ddr 3 p6 3 ddr 2 p6 2 ddr 1 p6 1 ddr 0 p6 0 ddr initial value read/write 10 w 0 w 0 w 0 w 0 w 0 w 0 w port 6 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output 771 p8ddr?ort 8 data direction register h?e007 port 8 bit initial value read/write 7654 p8 4 ddr 0 w 3 p8 3 ddr 0 w 2 p8 2 ddr 0 w 1 p8 1 ddr 0 w 0 p8 0 ddr port 8 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output initial value read/write 111 0 w 0 w 0 w 0 w modes 1 to 4 modes 5 to 7 111 0 w 1 w 772 p9ddr?ort 9 data direction register h?e008 port 9 bit initial value read/write 7 1 6 0 w 5 p9 5 ddr 0 w 4 p9 4 ddr 0 w 3 p9 3 ddr 0 w 2 p9 2 ddr 0 w 1 p9 1 ddr 0 w 0 p9 0 ddr port 9 input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output 1 paddr?ort a data direction register h?e009 port a bit initial value read/write 7 pa 7 ddr 6 pa 6 ddr 5 pa 5 ddr 4 pa 4 ddr 0 w 3 pa 3 ddr 0 w 2 pa 2 ddr 0 w 1 pa 1 ddr 0 w 0 pa 0 ddr initial value read/write 10 w 0 w 0 w 0 w modes 3, 4 modes 1, 2, 5, 6, 7 0 w 0 w port a input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output 0 w 0 w 0 w 0 w 0 w pbddr?ort b data direction register h?e00a port b bit initial value read/write 7 pb 7 ddr 0 w 6 pb 6 ddr 0 w 5 pb 5 ddr 0 w 4 pb 4 ddr 0 w 3 pb 3 ddr 0 w 2 pb 2 ddr 0 w 1 pb 1 ddr 0 w 0 pb 0 ddr port b input/output select 0 1 generic input generic output 0 w 773 mdcr?ode control register h?e011 system control bit initial value read/write 1 7 1 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 r 2 mds2 r 1 mds1 r 0 mds0 mode select 2 to 0 0 1 0 1 operating mode * * * bit 2 md 2 bit 1 md 1 bit 0 md 0 0 1 0 1 mode 1 mode 2 mode 3 mode 4 mode 5 mode 6 mode 7 0 1 0 1 0 1 note: * determined by the state of the mode pins (md 2 to md 0 ). 774 syscr?ystem control register h?e012 system control bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 ssby 0 r/w 6 sts2 0 r/w 5 sts1 0 r/w 4 sts0 1 r/w 3 ue 0 r/w 2 nmieg 0 r/w 1 ssoe 1 r/w 0 rame nmi edge select 0 1 an interrupt is requested at the falling edge of nmi an interrupt is requested at the rising edge of nmi ram enable 0 1 on-chip ram is disabled on-chip ram is enabled user bit enable 0 1 ccr bit 6 (ui) is used as an interrupt mask bit ccr bit 6 (ui) is used as a user bit standby timer select 2 to 0 bit 6 sts2 waiting time = 8,192 states waiting time = 16,384 states waiting time = 32,768 states waiting time = 65,536 states waiting time = 131,072 states waiting time = 26,2144 states waiting time = 1,024 states illegal setting bit 5 sts1 bit 4 sts0 standby timer 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 software standby 0 1 sleep instruction causes transition to sleep mode sleep instruction causes transition to software standby mode software standby output port enable 0 1 in software standby mode, all address bus and bus control signals are high- impedance in software standby mode, address bus retains output state and bus control signals are fixed high 775 brcr?us release control register h?e013 bus controller bit 7 a23e 6 a22e 5 a21e 4 a20e 3210 brle initial value read/write 11111110 r/w modes 1, 2, 6, 7 initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1110 r/w address 23 to 20 enable 0 1 address output other input/output mode 5 bus release enable 0 1 the bus cannot be released to an external device the bus can be released to an external device initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 011 10 r/w modes 3, 4 iscr?rq sense control register h?e014 interrupt controller bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 irq5sc 0 r/w 4 irq4sc 0 r/w 3 irq3sc 0 r/w 2 irq2sc 0 r/w 1 irq1sc 0 r/w 0 irq0sc irq 5 to irq 0 sense control 0 1 interrupts are requested when irq 5 to irq 0 are low interrupts are requested by falling-edge input at irq 5 to irq 0 776 ier?rq enable register h?e015 interrupt controller bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 irq5e 0 r/w 4 irq4e 0 r/w 3 irq3e 0 r/w 2 irq2e 0 r/w 1 irq1e 0 r/w 0 irq0e irq 5 to irq 0 enable 0 1 irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts are disabled irq 5 to irq 0 interrupts are enabled isr?rq status register h?e016 interrupt controller bit initial value read/write 0 7 0 6 0 r/(w)* 5 irq5f 0 r/(w)* 4 irq4f 0 r/(w)* 3 irq3f 0 r/(w)* 2 irq2f 0 r/(w)* 1 irq1f 0 r/(w)* 0 irq0f irq5 to irq0 flags 0 note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bits 5 to 0 irq5f to irq0f setting and clearing conditions 1 (n = 5 to 0) [clearing conditions] read irqnf when irqnf = 1, then write 0 in irqnf. irqnsc = 0, irqn input is high, and interrupt exception handling is being carried out. irqnsc = 1 and irqn interrupt exception handling is being carried out. [setting conditions] irqnsc = 0 and irqn input is low. irqnsc = 1 and irqn input changes from high to low. 777 ipra?nterrupt priority register a h?e018 interrupt controller bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 ipra7 0 r/w 6 ipra6 0 r/w 5 ipra5 0 r/w 4 ipra4 0 r/w 3 ipra3 0 r/w 2 ipra2 0 r/w 1 ipra1 0 r/w 0 ipra0 priority level a7 to a0 0 1 priority level 0 (low priority) priority level 1 (high priority) interrupt sources controlled by each bit ipra bit interrupt source bit 7 ipra7 irq 0 bit 6 ipra6 irq 1 bit 5 ipra5 irq 2 , irq 3 bit 4 ipra4 irq 4 , irq 5 bit 3 ipra3 bit 2 ipra2 bit 1 ipra1 bit 0 ipra0 wdt, dram interface, a/d converter 16-bit timer channel 0 16-bit timer channel 1 16-bit timer channel 2 iprb?nterrupt priority register b h?e019 interrupt controller bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 iprb7 0 r/w 6 iprb6 0 r/w 5 iprb5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 iprb3 0 r/w 2 iprb2 0 r/w 1 iprb1 0 r/w 0 priority level b7 to b5, b3 to b1 0 1 priority level 0 (low priority) priority level 1 (high priority) bit 7 iprb7 bit 6 iprb6 bit 5 iprb5 bit 4 bit 3 iprb3 bit 2 iprb2 bit 1 iprb1 bit 0 8-bit timer channels 0 and 1 8-bit timer channels 2 and 3 dmac sci channel 0 sci channel 1 sci channel 2 interrupt sources controlled by each bit iprb bit interrupt source 778 dastcr?/a standby control register h?e01a d/a bit initial value read/write 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 0 r/w 0 daste d/a standby enable 0 1 d/a output is disabled in software standby mode d/a output is enabled in software standby mode (initial value) 779 divcr?ivision control register h?e01b system control bit initial value read/write 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 0 r/w 1 div1 0 r/w 0 div0 divide 1 and 0 frequency division ratio bit 1 div1 bit 0 div0 1/1 1/2 1/4 1/8 0 1 0 1 0 1 (initial value) 780 mstcrh?odule standby control register h h?e01c system control 765 4 321 0 pstop mstph2 mstph1 mstph0 r/w r/w r/w r/w 011 1 100 0 module standby h2 to h0 selection bits for placing modules in standby state. bit initial value read/write reserved bits clock stop enables or disables clock output. mstcrl module standby control register l h ee01d system control 765 4 321 0 mstpl7 mstpl2 mstpl3 mstpl4 mstpl5 mstpl0 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 000 0 000 0 module standby l7, l5 to l2, l0 selection bits for placing modules in standby state. reserved bits bit initial value read/write 781 adrcr address control register h ee01e bus controller 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 0 adrctl 1 r/w 2 1 1 1 reserved bits address control selects address update mode 1 or address update mode 2. description adrctl address update mode 2 is selected address update mode 1 is selected (initial value) 0 1 note: * this register is used only in the flash memory r version and mask rom version. cscr chip select control register h ee01f bus controller bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 cs7e (n = 7 to 4) 0 r/w 6 cs6e 0 r/w 5 cs5e 0 r/w 4 cs4e 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 chip select 7 to 4 enable description bit n csne output of chip select signal csn is disabled (initial value) output of chip select signal csn is enabled 0 1 782 abwcr bus width control register h ee020 bus controller bit initial value initial value read/write 1 0 r/w 7 abw7 1 0 r/w 6 abw6 1 0 r/w 5 abw5 1 0 r/w 4 abw4 1 0 r/w 3 abw3 1 0 r/w 2 abw2 1 0 r/w 1 abw1 1 0 r/w 0 abw0 area 7 to 0 bus width control bus width of access area bits 7 to 0 abw7 to abw0 areas 7 to 0 are 16-bit access areas areas 7 to 0 are 8-bit access areas 0 1 modes 1, 3, 5, 6, 7 modes 2, 4 astcr access state control register h ee021 bus controller bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 7 ast7 1 r/w 6 ast6 1 r/w 5 ast5 1 r/w 4 ast4 1 r/w 3 ast3 1 r/w 2 ast2 1 r/w 1 ast1 1 r/w 0 ast0 area 7 to 0 access state control number of states in access area bits 7 to 0 ast7 to ast0 areas 7 to 0 are two-state access areas areas 7 to 0 are three-state access areas 0 1 783 wcrh wait control register h h ee022 bus controller 1 r/w 7 w71 1 r/w 6 w70 1 r/w 5 w61 1 r/w 4 w60 1 r/w 3 w51 1 r/w 2 w50 1 r/w 1 w41 1 r/w 0 w40 0 area 4 wait control 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 0 area 5 wait control 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 0 area 6 wait control 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 0 area 7 wait control 1 and 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 bit initial value read/write 784 wcrl wait control register l h ee023 bus controller bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 7 w31 1 r/w 6 w30 1 r/w 5 w21 1 r/w 4 w20 1 r/w 3 w11 1 r/w 2 w10 1 r/w 1 w01 1 r/w 0 w00 area 0 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 area 1 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 area 2 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 area 3 wait control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 no program wait is inserted 1 program wait state is inserted 2 program wait states are inserted 3 program wait states are inserted 1 785 bcr bus control register h ee024 bus controller bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 7 icis1 1 r/w 6 icis0 0 r/w 5 brome 0 r/w 4 brsts1 0 r/w 3 brsts0 1 2 1 r/w 1 rdea 0 r/w 0 waite 0 1 wait pin wait input is disabled wait pin wait input is enabled burst cycle select 1 0 1 burst access cycle comprises 2 states burst access cycle comprises 3 states burst rom enable 0 1 area 0 is a basic bus interface area area 0 is a burst rom interface area idle cycle insertion 0 0 1 no idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read and write cycles idle cycle insertion 1 0 1 no idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas idle cycle is inserted in case of consecutive external read cycles for different areas burst cycle select 0 0 1 max. 4 words in burst access max. 8 words in burst access area division unit select 0 1 area divisions are as follows: areas 0 to 7 are the same size (2 mb) wait pin enable area 0: 2 mb area 4: 1.93 mb area 1: 2 mb area 5: 4 kb area 2: 8 mb area 6: 23.75 kb area 3: 2 mb area 7: 22 b 786 drcra dram control register a h ee026 dram interface 7 dras2 0 r/w 6 dras1 0 r/w 5 dras0 0 r/w 4 1 3 be 0 r/w 2 rdm 0 r/w 1 srfmd 0 r/w 0 rfshe 0 r/w bit initial value read/write refresh pin enable 0 1 self-refresh mode 0 1 ras down mode 0 1 burst access enable 0 1 rfsh pin refresh signal output is disabled rfsh pin refresh signal output is enabled dram self-refreshing is disabled in software standby mode dram self-refreshing is enabled in software standby mode dram interface: ras up mode selected dram interface: ras down mode selected burst disabled (always full access) dram space access performed in fast page mode dram area select 00 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 dras2 dras1 dras0 area 5 normal normal normal normal normal dram space ( cs 5 ) area 4 normal normal normal normal dram space ( cs 4 ) dram space ( cs 4 ) area 3 normal normal dram space ( cs 3 ) dram space ( cs 3) dram space ( cs 3 ) area 2 normal dram space ( cs 2 ) dram space ( cs 2 ) dram space ( cs 2 ) dram space ( cs 2 ) dram space( cs 2 )* dram space( cs 4 )* dram space( cs 2 )* dram space( cs 2 )* note: a single csn pin serves as a common ras output pin for a number of areas. unused csn pins can be used as input/output ports. 787 drcrb dram control register b h ee027 dram interface 7 mxc1 0 r/w 6 mxc0 0 r/w 5 csel 0 r/w 4 rcyce 0 r/w 3 1 2 tpc 0 r/w 1 rcw 0 r/w 0 rlw 0 r/w bit initial value read/write refresh cycle wait control 0 1 ras - cas wait tp cycle control 0 1 refresh cycle enable 0 1 wait state (t rw ) insertion is disabled 1 wait state (t rw ) is inserted 1-state precharge cycle is inserted 2-state precharge cycle is inserted refresh cycles are disabled dram refresh cycles are enabled multiplex control 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 mxc1 mxc0 wait state (t rw ) insertion is disabled 1 wait state (t rw ) is inserted 0 1 cas output pin select 0 1 pb4 and pb5 selected as ucas and lcas output pins hwr and lwr selected as ucas and lcas output pins column address: 8 bits compared address: modes 1, 2 8-bit access space a 19 to a 8 16-bit access space a 19 to a 9 modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space a 23 to a 8 16-bit access space a 23 to a 9 column address: 9 bits compared address: modes 1, 2 8-bit access space a 19 to a 9 16-bit access space a 19 to a 10 modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space a 23 to a 9 16-bit access space a 23 to a 10 column address: 10 bits compared address: modes 1, 2 8-bit access space a 19 to a 10 16-bit access space a 19 to a 11 modes 3, 4, 5 8-bit access space a 23 to a 10 16-bit access space a 23 to a 11 illegal setting description 788 rtmcsr refresh timer control/status register h ee028 dram interface 7 cmf 0 r/( w)* 6 cmie 0 r/w 5 cks2 0 4 cks1 0 3 cks0 0 2 1 1 1 0 1 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w refresh counter clock select 00 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 cks2 cks1 cks0 count operation halted /2 used as counter clock /8 used as counter clock /32 used as counter clock /128 used as counter clock /512 used as counter clock /2048 used as counter clock /4096 used as counter clock compare match interrupt enable 0 1 the cmi interrupt requested by the cmf flag is disabled the cmi interrupt requested by the cmf flag is enabled compare match flag 0 1 [clearing conditions] cleared by a reset and in standby mode cleared by reading cmf when cmf = 1, then writing 0 in cmf [setting condition] when rtcnt = rtcor description note: only 0 can be written to clear the flag. 789 rtcnt refresh timer counter h ee029 dram interface 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 0 r/w bit initial value read/write incremented by internal clock selected by bits cks2 to cks0 in rtmcsr rtcor refresh time constant register h ee02a dram interface 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 1 r/w bit initial value read/write rtcnt compare match period note: only byte access can be used on this register. 790 flmcr-flash memory control register h'ee030 flash memory bit initial value read/write 1/0 r 7 fwe 0 r/w 6 swe 0 r/w 5 esu 0 r/w 4 psu 0 r/w 3 ev 0 r/w 2 pv 0 r/w 1 e 0 r/w initial value read/write modes 5 and 7 modes 1 to 4, and 6 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 p 0 1 program mode cleared (initial value) transition to program mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and psu = 1 program mode 0 1 erase mode cleared (initial value) transition to erase mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1, swe = 1, and esu = 1 erase mode 0 1 program-verify mode cleared (initial value) transition to program-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 program-verify mode 0 1 erase-verify mode cleared (initial value) transition to erase-verify mode [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 erase-verify mode 0 1 program setup cleared (initial value) program setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 program setup 0 1 erase setup cleared (initial value) erase setup [setting condition] when fwe = 1 and swe = 1 erase setup bit 0 1 write/erase disabled (initial value) write/erase enabled [setting condition] when fwe = 1 software write enable bit 0 1 when a low level is input to the fwe pin (hardware protection state) when a high level is input to the fwe pin flash write enable bit note: this register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. reading the corresponding address in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. fix the fwe pin low in mode 6. 791 ebr-erase block register h'ee032 flash memory bit ebr 7 eb7 6 eb6 5 eb5 4 eb4 3 eb3 2 eb2 1 eb1 0 eb0 0 1 block eb7 to eb0 is not selected (initial value) block eb7 to eb0 is selected block 7 to 0 note: when not erasing flash memory, ebr should be cleared to h'00. note: this register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. reading the corresponding address in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. initial value read/write 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w initial value read/write modes 5 and 7 modes 1 to 4, and 6 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 0 r 792 p2pcr port 2 input pull-up control register h ee03c port 2 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 p2 7 pcr 0 r/w 6 p2 6 pcr 0 r/w 5 p2 5 pcr 0 r/w 4 p2 4 pcr 0 r/w 3 p2 3 pcr 0 r/w 2 p2 2 pcr 0 r/w 1 p2 1 pcr 0 r/w 0 p2 0 pcr port 2 input pull-up control 7 to 0 0 1 input pull-up transistor is off input pull-up transistor is on note: valid when the corresponding p2ddr bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). 793 p4pcr port 4 input pull-up control register h ee03e port 4 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 p4 7 pcr 0 r/w 6 p4 6 pcr 0 r/w 5 p4 5 pcr 0 r/w 4 p4 4 pcr 0 r/w 3 p4 3 pcr 0 r/w 2 p4 2 pcr 0 r/w 1 p4 1 pcr 0 r/w 0 p4 0 pcr port 4 input pull-up control 7 to 0 0 1 input pull-up transistor is off input pull-up transistor is on note: valid when the corresponding p4ddr bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). p5pcr port 5 input pull-up control register h ee03f port 5 bit initial value read/write 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 0 r/w 3 p5 3 pcr 0 r/w 2 p5 2 pcr 0 r/w 1 p5 1 pcr 0 r/w 0 p5 0 pcr port 5 input pull-up control 3 to 0 0 1 input pull-up transistor is off input pull-up transistor is on note: valid when the corresponding p5ddr bit is cleared to 0 (designating generic input). 794 ram control register ramcr h'ee077 flash memory bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 rams ram2 ram1 ram area 0 1 0/1 0 1 0/1 0 1 0 1 ram emulation status h'fff000 to h'fff3ff h'000000 to h'0003ff h'000400 to h'0007ff h'000800 to h'000bff h'000c00 to h'000fff no emulation mapping ram ram select, ram2, ram1 note: * in mode 6 (single-chip normal mode), flash memory emulation by ram is not supported; these bits can be modified, but must not be set to 1. bit 7 rams 6543210 ram2 ram1 reserved bits modes 1 to 4 1 1 1 1 0 r 0 r 0 r 1 initial value r/w initial value r/w modes 5 to 7 1 1 1 1 0 r/w * 0 r/w * 0 r/w * 1 note: this register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. reading the corresponding address in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. 795 flmsr-flash memory status register h'ee07d flash memory bit 7 fler description 0 1 flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled (initial value) [clearing condition] wdt reset, reset via the res pin or hardware standby mode an error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing, and error pro- tection * 1 is enabled [setting conditions] 1. flash memory was read * 2 while being programmed or erased (including vector or instruction fetch, but not including reading of a ram area overlapped onto flash memory). 2. a hardware exception-handling sequence (other than a reset, invalid instruction, trap instruction, or zero-divide exception) was executed just before programming or erasing. * 3 3. the sleep instruction (including software standby mode) was executed during programming or erasing. ram select, ram2, ram1 notes 1. 2. 3. see 18.6.3, error protection, for details. the read value in this case is undefined. before stack and vector read by exception handling. bit 7 fler 6543210 reserved bits 0 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 initial value r/w note: this register is used only in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. reading the corresponding address in a mask rom version will always return 1s, and writes to this address are disabled. 796 mar0a r/e/h/l memory address register 0a r/e/h/l h fff20 h fff21 h fff22 h fff23 dmac0 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 11111 1 1 1 mar0ar mar0ae undetermined bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mar0ah mar0al undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined source or destination address 797 etcr0a h/l execute transfer count register 0a h/l h fff24 h fff25 dmac0 ? short address mode ? i/o mode and idle mode bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w transfer counter ? repeat mode bit initial value read/write 76543210 undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w transfer counter 76543210 etcr0ah undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w initial count etcr0al ? full address mode ? normal mode bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w transfer counter ? block transfer mode bit initial value read/write 76543210 undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w block size counter 76543210 etcr0ah undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w initial block size etcr0al 798 ioar0a i/o address register 0a h fff26 dmac0 bit initial value read/write r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 short address mode : source or destination address full address mode : not used undetermined 799 dtcr0a data transfer control register 0a h fff27 dmac0 ? short address mode bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w 0 dts0 data transfer interrupt enable 0 interrupt requested by dte bit is disabled 1 interrupt requested by dte bit is enabled repeat enable 0 i/o mode 1 repeat mode idle mode 0 1 rpe dtie description 0 1 data transfer increment/decrement 0 incremented: if dtsz = 0, mar is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is incremented by 2 after each transfer 1 decremented: if dtsz = 0, mar is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is decremented by 2 after each transfer data transfer size 0 1 byte-size transfer word-size transfer data transfer enable 0 1 data transfer is disabled data transfer is enabled data transfer select bit 2 dts2 bit 1 dts1 bit 0 dts0 0 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 a/d converter conversion end interrupt sci0 transmit-data-empty interrupt sci0 receive-data-full interrupt transfer in full address mode transfer in full address mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 data transfer activation source 0 1 0 1 800 dtcr0a data transfer control register 0a (cont) h fff27 dmac0 ? full address mode bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 said 0 r/w 4 saide 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 2 dts2a 0 r/w 1 dts1a 0 r/w 0 dts0a data transfer select 0a bit 4 saide 0 mara is held fixed incremented: if dtsz = 0, mara is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mara is incremented by 2 after each transfer 0 1 increment/decrement enable data transfer size 0 1 byte-size transfer word-size transfer data transfer enable 0 1 data transfer is disabled data transfer is enabled 0 1 normal mode block transfer mode data transfer select 2a and 1a set both bits to 1 data transfer interrupt enable 0 1 interrupt requested by dte bit is disabled interrupt requested by dte bit is enabled source address increment/decrement (bit 5) source address increment/decrement enable (bit 4) 1 0 1 mara is held fixed decremented: if dtsz = 0, mara is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mara is decremented by 2 after each transfer bit 5 said 801 mar0b r/e/h/l memory address register 0b r/e/h/l h fff28 h fff29 h fff2a h fff2b dmac0 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 11111 1 1 1 mar0br mar0be undetermined bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mar0bh mar0bl undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined source or destination address 802 etcr0b h/l execute transfer count register 0b h/l h fff2c, h fff2d dmac0 ? short address mode ? i/o mode and idle mode r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w bit initial value read/write undetermined transfer counter ? repeat mode : 76543210 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w bit initial value read/write undetermined transfer counter etcr0bh undetermined initial count etcr0bl ? full address mode ? normal mode bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w not used ? block transfer mode bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w block transfer counter 803 ioar0b i/o address register 0b h fff2e dmac0 bit initial value read/write r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 short address mode : source or destination address full address mode : not used undetermined 804 dtcr0b data transfer control register 0b h fff2f dmac0 ? short address mode bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w 0 dts0 data transfer select bit 2 dts2 bit 1 dts1 bit 0 dts0 1 0 1 0 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 a/d converter conversion end interrupt sci0 transmit-data-empty interrupt sci0 receive-data-full interrupt falling edge of dreq input low level of dreq input 0 1 0 1 0 1 data transfer activation source data transfer interrupt enable 0 interrupt requested by dte bit is disabled 1 interrupt requested by dte bit is enabled repeat enable 0 i/o mode 1 repeat mode idle mode 0 1 rpe dtie description 0 1 data transfer increment/decrement 0 incremented: if dtsz = 0, mar is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is incremented by 2 after each transfer 1 decremented: if dtsz = 0, mar is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, mar is decremented by 2 after each transfer data transfer size 0 1 byte-size transfer word-size transfer data transfer enable 0 1 data transfer is disabled data transfer is enabled 0 1 0 805 dtcr0b data transfer control register 0b (cont) h fff2f dmac0 ? full address mode bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 dtme 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 daid 0 r/w 4 daide 0 r/w 3 tms 0 r/w 2 dts2b 0 r/w 1 dts1b 0 r/w 0 dts0b data transfer select 2b to 0b bit 2 dts2b bit 1 dts1b bit 0 dts0b 0 0 1 0 1 data transfer activation source transfer mode select 0 1 destination is the block area in block transfer mode source is the block area in block transfer mode data transfer master enable 0 1 data transfer is disabled data transfer is enabled compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 0 normal mode block transfer mode auto-request (burst mode) compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 1 not available compare match/input capture a interrupt from 16-bit timer channel 2 auto-request (cycle-steal mode) a/d converter conversion end interrupt not available not available falling edge input of dreq not available not available not available falling edge input of dreq low level input at dreq 0 1 0 1 0 bit 4 daide 0 marb is held fixed incremented: if dtsz = 0, marb is incremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, marb is incremented by 2 after each transfer marb is held fixed decremented: if dtsz = 0, marb is decremented by 1 after each transfer if dtsz = 1, marb is decremented by 2 after each transfer 0 1 increment/decrement enable destination address increment/decrement (bit 5) destination address increment/decrement enable (bit 4) 1 0 1 bit 5 daid 1 0 1 1 not available 806 mar1a r/e/h/l memory address register 1a r/e/h/l h fff30 h fff31 h fff32 h fff33 dmac1 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 11111 1 1 1 mar1ar mar1ae undetermined bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mar1ah mar1al undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. etcr1a h/l execute transfer count register 1a h/l h fff34 h fff35 dmac1 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w bit initial value read/write 76543210 undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 etcr1ah undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w etcr1al 807 ioar1a i/o address register 1a h fff36 dmac1 bit initial value read/write r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. undetermined dtcr1a data transfer control register 1a h fff37 dmac1 ? short address mode bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w 0 dts0 ? full address mode bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 said 0 r/w 4 saide 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 2 dts2a 0 r/w 1 dts1a 0 r/w 0 dts0a note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. 808 mar1b r/e/h/l memory address register 1b r/e/h/l h fff38 h fff39 h fff3a h fff3b dmac1 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 11111 1 1 1 mar1br mar1be undetermined bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mar1bh mar1bl undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. etcr1b h/l execute transfer count register 1b h/l h fff3c h fff3d dmac1 bit initial value read/write r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 undetermined note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w bit initial value read/write 76543210 undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w 76543210 etcr1bh undetermined r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w r/w etcr1bl 809 ioar1b i/o address register 1b h fff3e dmac1 note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. r/w 7 r/w 6 r/w 5 r/w 4 r/w 3 r/w 2 r/w 1 r/w 0 bit initial value read/write undetermined dtcr1b data transfer control register 1b h fff3f dmac1 ? short address mode r/w 7 dte 0 r/w 6 dtsz 0 r/w 5 dtid 0 r/w 4 rpe 0 r/w 3 dtie 0 r/w 2 dts2 0 r/w 1 dts1 0 r/w 0 dts0 0 bit initial value read/write ? full address mode note: bit functions are the same as for dmac0. r/w 7 dtme 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 daid 0 r/w 4 daide 0 r/w 3 tms 0 r/w 2 dts2b 0 r/w 1 dts1b 0 0 r/w 0 dts0b bit initial value read/write 810 tstr?imer start register h?ff60 16-bit timer (all channels) 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 str2 0 r/w reserved bits 1 str1 0 r/w 0 str0 0 r/w 0 1 tcnt0 is halted (initial value) tcnt0 is counting counter start 0 0 1 tcnt1 is halted (initial value) tcnt1 is counting counter start 1 0 1 tcnt2 is halted (initial value) tcnt2 is counting counter start 2 811 tsnc?imer synchro register h?ff61 16-bit timer (all channels) 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 sync2 0 r/w 1 sync1 0 r/w 0 sync0 0 r/w 0 1 channel 0 timer counter (tcnt0) operates independently (tcnt0 presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (initial value) channel 0 operates synchronously tcnt0 synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible timer synchronization 0 0 1 channel 1 timer counter (tcnt1) operates independently (tcnt1 presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (initial value) channel 1 operates synchronously tcnt1 synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible timer synchronization 1 0 1 channel 2 timer counter (tcnt2) operates independently (tcnt2 presetting/clearing is unrelated to other channels) (initial value) channel 2 operates synchronously tcnt2 synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing is possible timer synchronization 2 reserved bits 812 tmdr?imer mode register h?ff62 16-bit timer (all channels) 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 mdf 0 r/w 5 fdir 0 r/w 4 1 3 1 2 pwm2 0 r/w 1 pwm1 0 r/w 0 pwm0 0 r/w 0 1 channel 0 operates normally (initial value) channel 0 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 0 0 1 channel 1 operates normally (initial value) channel 1 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 1 0 1 channel 2 operates normally (initial value) channel 2 operates in pwm mode pwm mode 2 0 1 ovf is set to 1 in tisrc when tcnt2 overflows or underflows (initial value) ovf is set to 1 in tisrc when tcnt2 overflows flag direction 0 1 channel 2 operates normally (initial value) channel 2 operates in phase counting mode phase counting mode flag 813 tolr?imer output level setting register h?ff63 16-bit timer (all channels) 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 1 5 tob2 0 w 4 toa2 0 w 3 tob1 0 w 2 toa1 0 w 1 tob0 0 w 0 toa0 0 w 0 1 tioca 0 is 0 (initial value) tioca 0 is 1 output level setting a0 0 1 tiocb 0 is 0 (initial value) tiocb 0 is 1 output level setting b0 0 1 tioca 1 is 0 (initial value) tioca 1 is 1 output level setting a1 0 1 tiocb 1 is 0 (initial value) tiocb 1 is 1 output level setting b1 0 1 tioca 2 is 0 (initial value) tioca 2 is 1 output level setting a2 0 1 tiocb 2 is 0 (initial value) tiocb 2 is 1 output level setting b2 814 tisra?imer interrupt status register a h?ff64 16-bit timer (all channels) 1 7 imiea2 0 r/w 6 imiea1 0 r/w 5 imiea0 0 r/w 4 1 3 imfa2 0 r/(w)* 2 imfa1 0 r/(w)* 1 imfa0 0 r/(w)* 0 0 1 input capture/compare match flag a0 [clearing conditions] (initial value) read imfa0 when imfa0=1, then write 0 in imfa0 dmac activated by imia0 interrupt. [setting conditions] tcnt0=gra0 when gra0 functions as an output compare register. tcnt0 value is transferred to gra0 by an input capture signal when gra0 functions as an input capture register. 0 1 input capture/compare match flag a1 [clearing conditions] (initial value) read imfa1 when imfa1=1, then write 0 in imfa1 dmac activated by imia1 interrupt. [setting conditions] tcnt1=gra1 when gra1 functions as an output compare register. tcnt1 value is transferred to gra1 by an input capture signal when gra1 functions as an input capture register. 0 1 input capture/compare match flag a2 [clearing conditions] (initial value) read imfa2 when imfa2=1, then write 0 in imfa2 dmac activated by imia2 interrupt. [setting conditions] tcnt2=gra2 when gra2 functions as an output compare register. tcnt2 value is transferred to gra2 by an input capture signal when gra2 functions as an input capture register. 0 1 imia0 interrupt requested by imfa0 flag is disabled (initial value) imia0 interrupt requested by imfa0 is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable a0 0 1 imia1 interrupt requested by imfa1 flag is disabled (initial value) imia1 interrupt requested by imfa1 is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable a1 0 1 imia2 interrupt requested by imfa2 flag is disabled (initial value) imia2 interrupt requested by imfa2 is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable a2 bit: initial value: read/write: note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 815 tisrb?imer interrupt status register b h?ff65 16-bit timer (all channels) 1 7 imieb2 0 r/w 6 imieb1 0 r/w 5 imieb0 0 r/w 4 1 3 imfb2 0 r/(w)* 2 imfb1 0 r/(w)* 1 imfb0 0 r/(w)* 0 0 1 input capture/compare match flag b0 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb0 when imfb0=1, then write 0 in imfb0. [setting conditions] tcnt0=grb0 when grb0 functions as an output compare register. tcnt0 value is transferred to grb0 by an input capture signal when grb0 functions as an input capture register. 0 1 input capture/compare match flag b1 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb1 when imfb1=1, then write 0 in imfb1. [setting conditions] tcnt1=grb1 when grb1 functions as an output compare register. tcnt1 value is transferred to grb1 by an input capture signal when grb1 functions as an input capture register. 0 1 input capture/compare match flag b2 [clearing condition] (initial value) read imfb2 when imfb2=1, then write 0 in imfb2. [setting conditions] tcnt2=grb2 when grb2 functions as an output compare register. tcnt2 value is transferred to grb2 by an input capture signal when grb2 functions as an input capture register. 0 1 imib0 interrupt requested by imfb0 flag is disabled (initial value) imib0 interrupt requested by imfb0 is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable b0 0 1 imib1 interrupt requested by imfb1 flag is disabled (initial value) imib1 interrupt requested by imfb1 is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable b1 0 1 imib2 interrupt requested by imfb2 flag is disabled (initial value) imib2 interrupt requested by imfb2 is enabled input capture/compare match interrupt enable b2 note : * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bit: initial value: read/write: 816 tisrc?imer interrupt status register c h?ff66 16-bit timer (all channels) 1 7 ovie2 0 r/w 6 ovie1 0 r/w 5 ovie0 0 r/w 4 1 3 ovf2 0 r/(w)* 2 ovf1 0 r/(w)* 1 ovf0 0 r/(w)* 0 0 1 ovi0 interrupt requested by ovf0 flag is disabled (initial value) ovi0 interrupt requested by ovf0 flag is enabled overflow interrupt enable 0 0 1 ovi1 interrupt requested by ovf1 flag is disabled (initial value) ovi1 interrupt requested by ovf1 flag is enabled overflow interrupt enable 1 0 1 ovi2 interrupt requested by ovf2 flag is disabled (initial value) ovi2 interrupt requested by ovf2 flag is enabled overflow interrupt enable 2 bit: initial value: read/write: [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf0 when ovf0 = 1, then write 0 in ovf0. [setting condition] tcnt0 overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000. overflow flag 0 0 1 [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf1 when ovf1 = 1, then write 0 in ovf1. [setting condition] tcnt1 overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000. overflow flag 1 0 1 [clearing condition] (initial value) read ovf2 when ovf2 = 1, then write 0 in ovf2. [setting condition] tcnt2 overflowed from h'ffff to h'0000, or underflowed from h'0000 to h'ffff. overflow flag 2 0 1 note : * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 817 tcr0?imer control register h?ff68 16-bit timer channel 0 bit initial value read/write 1 7 0 r/w 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 timer prescaler 2 to 0 tcnt clock source bit 2 tpsc2 bit 1 tpsc1 bit 0 tpsc0 internal clock : (initial value) internal clock : / 2 internal clock : / 4 internal clock : / 8 external clock a : tclka input external clock b : tclkb input external clock c : tclkc input external clock d : tclkd input 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 clock edge 1 and 0 counted edges of external clock bit 4 ckeg1 bit 3 ckeg0 rising edges counted falling edges counted both edges counted 0 1 0 0 1 counter clear 1 and 0 tcnt clear sources bit 6 cclr1 bit 5 cclr0 tcnt is not cleared tcnt is cleared by gra compare match or input capture tcnt is cleared by grb compare match or input capture synchronous clear : tcnt is cleared in synchronization with other synchronized timers 0 1 0 1 0 1 (initial value) (initial value) 818 tior0?imer i/o control register 0 h?ff69 16-bit timer channel 0 i/o control a2 to a0 gra functions bit 2 ioa2 bit 1 ioa1 bit 0 ioa0 1 7 iob2 0 r/w 6 iob1 0 r/w 5 iob0 0 r/w 4 1 3 ioa2 0 r/w 2 ioa1 0 r/w 1 ioa0 0 r/w 0 bit: initial value: read/write: no output at compare match (initial value) 0 output at gra compare match 1 output at gra compare match output toggles at gra compare match (channel 2 only: 1 output) gra captures rising edges of input gra captures falling edges of input gra captures both edges of input 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 gra is an output compare register gra is an input capture register i/o control b2 to b0 grb functions bit 6 iob2 bit 5 iob1 bit 4 iob0 no output at compare match (initial value) 0 output at grb compare match 1 output at grb compare match output toggles at grb compare match (channel 2 only: 1 output) grb captures rising edges of input grb captures falling edges of input grb captures both edges of input 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 grb is an output compare register grb is an input capture register 819 tcnt0 h/l?imer counter 0 h/l h?ff6a, h?ff6b 16-bit timer channel 0 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w up - counter gra0 h/l?eneral register a0 h/l h?ff6c, h?ff6d 16-bit timer channel 0 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w output compare or input capture register grb0 h/l?eneral register b0 h/l h?ff6e, h?ff6f 16-bit timer channel 0 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w output compare or input capture register 820 tcr1 timer control register 1 h?ff70 16-bit timer channel 1 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. tior1?imer i/o control register 1 h?ff71 16-bit timer channel 1 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. tcnt1 h/l?imer counter 1 h/l h?ff72, h?ff73 16-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. 821 gra1 h/l?eneral register a1 h/l h?ff74, h?ff75 16-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. grb1 h/l?eneral register b1 h/l h?ff76, h?ff77 16-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. tcr2 timer control register 2 h?ff78 16-bit timer channel 2 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 cclr1 0 r/w 5 cclr0 0 r/w 4 ckeg1 0 r/w 3 ckeg0 0 r/w 2 tpsc2 0 r/w 1 tpsc1 0 r/w 0 tpsc0 0 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. note : when phase counting mode is selected in channel 2, the settings of bits ckeg1 and ckeg0 and tpsc2 to tpsc0 in tcr2 are ignored. 822 tior2?imer i/o control register 2 h?ff79 16-bit timer channel 2 7 1 bit initial value read/write 6 iob2 0 r/w 5 iob1 0 r/w 4 iob0 0 r/w 3 1 2 ioa2 0 r/w 1 ioa1 0 r/w 0 ioa0 0 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. tcnt2 h/l?imer counter 2 h/l h?ff7a, h?ff7b 16-bit timer channel 2 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w phase counting mode : other mode : up / down counter up - counter gra2 h/l?eneral register a2 h/l h?ff7c, h?ff7d 16-bit timer channel 2 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. 823 grb2 h/l?eneral register b2 h/l h?ff7e, h?ff7f 16-bit timer channel 2 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w *bit functions are the same as for 16-bit timer channel 0. 824 tcr0?imer control register 0 tcr1?imer control register 1 h?ff80 h?ff81 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 cmieb 0 r/w 6 cmiea 0 r/w 5 ovie 0 r/w 4 cclr1 0 r/w 3 cclr0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 cks0 clock select 2 to 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 clock input is disabled internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /64 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8192 external clock, counted on falling edge external clock, counted on rising edge external clock, counted on both rising and falling edges counter clear 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 clearing is disabled cleared by compare match a cleared by compare match b/input capture b cleared by input capture b 1 timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 ovi interrupt requested by ovf is disabled ovi interrupt requested by ovf is enabled compare match interrupt enable a 0 1 cmia interrupt requested by cmfa is disabled cmia interrupt requested by cmfa is enabled compare match interrupt enable b 0 1 cmib interrupt requested by cmfb is disabled cmib interrupt requested by cmfb is enabled 1 channel 0: count on tcnt1 overflow signal* channel 1: count on tcnt0 compare match a* notes: * if the clock input of channel 0 is the tcnt1 overflow signal and that of channel 1 is the tcnt0 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. do not use this setting. 825 tcsr0?imer control/status register 0 h?ff82 8-bit timer channel 0 output select a1 and a0 0 description description description bit 1 os1 bit 0 os0 ice in tcsr1 bit 3 ois3 bit 4 adte trge * bit 2 ois2 1 0 1 no change at compare match a 0 output at compare match a 1 output at compare match a output toggles at compare match a output/input capture edge select b3 and b2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 no change at compare match b 0 output at compare match b 1 output at compare match b output toggles at compare match b tcorb input capture on rising edge tcorb input capture on falling edge tcorb input capture on both rising and falling edges 1 a/d trigger enable (tcsr0 only) 0 0 1 0 1 a/d converter start requests by compare match a or an external trigger are disabled a/d converter start requests by compare match a or an external trigger are enabled a/d converter start requests by an external trigger are enabled a/d converter start requests by compare match a are enabled timer overflow flag 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf. bit initial value read/write 0 r/(w)* 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 0 r/w 4 adte 0 r/w 3 ois3 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w 0 os0 0 1 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00. compare match flag a 0 [clearing condition] read cmfa when cmfa = 1, then write 0 in cmfa. 1 [setting condition] tcnt = tcora compare match/input capture flag b 0 [clearing condition] read cmfb when cmfb = 1, then write 0 in cmfb. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = tcorb the tcnt value is transferred to tcorb by an input capture signal when tcorb functions as an input capture register. note: * only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. note: * trge is bit 7 of the a/d control register (adcr). 1 826 tcsr1?imer control/status register 1 h?ff83 8-bit timer channel 1 output select a1 and a0 0 description description bit 1 os1 bit 0 os0 ice in tcsr1 bit 3 ois3 bit 2 ois2 1 0 1 no change at compare match a 0 output at compare match a 1 output at compare match a output toggles at compare match a output/input capture edge select b3 and b2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 no change at compare match b 0 output at compare match b 1 output at compare match b output toggles at compare match b tcorb input capture on rising edge tcorb input capture on falling edge tcorb input capture on both rising and falling edges 1 timer overflow flag 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf. 0 1 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00. compare match/input capture flag a 0 [clearing condition] read cmfa when cmfa = 1, then write 0 in cmfa. 1 [setting condition] tcnt = tcora compare match/input capture flag b 0 [clearing condition] read cmfb when cmfb = 1, then write 0 in cmfb. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = tcorb the tcnt value is transferred to tcorb by an input capture signal when tcorb functions as an input capture register. note: * only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. bit initial value read/write 0 r/(w)* 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 0 r/w 4 ice 0 r/w 3 ois3 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w 0 os0 input capture enable 0 1 tcorb is a compare match register tcorb is an input capture register 827 tcora0?ime constant register a0 tcora1?ime constant register a1 h?ff84 h?ff85 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w tcora0 tcora1 tcorb0?ime constant register b0 tcorb1?ime constant register b1 h?ff86 h?ff87 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w tcorb0 tcorb1 tcnt0?imer counter 0 tcnt1?imer counter 1 h?ff88 h?ff89 8-bit timer channel 0 8-bit timer channel 1 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w tcnt0 tcnt1 828 tcsr?imer control/status register h?ff8c wdt bit initial value read/write 0 r/(w)* 7 ovf 0 r/w 6 wt/ it 0 r/w 5 tme 4 11 3 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 clock select 2 to 0 0 0 /2 /32 /64 /128 /256 /512 /2048 /4096 1 0 cks0 0 r/w 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 timer enable 0 timer disabled tcnt is initialized to h'00 and halted 1 timer enabled tcnt is counting timer mode select 0 interval timer: requests interval timer interrupts 1 watchdog timer: generates a reset signal overflow flag 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf 1 [setting condition] tcnt changes from h'ff to h'00 note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. cks2 cks1 cks0 description 829 tcnt?imer counter h'fff8d (read), h'fff8c (write) wdt bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 count value rstcsr?eset control/status register h'fff8f (read), h'fff8e (write) wdt bit initial value read/write 0 r/(w)* 7 wrst 0 r/w 6 rstoe 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 reset output enable 0 external output of reset signal is disabled external output of reset signal is enabled 1 watchdog timer reset 0 [clearing conditions] reset signal at res pin read wrst when wrst = 1, then write 0 in wrst 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflow generates a reset signal note: * only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag. 830 tcr2?imer control register 2 tcr3?imer control register 3 h?ff90 h?ff91 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 cmieb 0 r/w 6 cmiea 0 r/w 5 ovie 0 r/w 4 cclr1 0 r/w 3 cclr0 0 r/w 2 cks2 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 cks0 clock select 2 to 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 clock input is disabled internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /64 internal clock, counted on rising edge of /8192 external clock, counted on falling edge external clock, counted on rising edge external clock, counted on both rising and falling edges counter clear 1 and 0 0 0 1 0 1 clearing is disabled cleared by compare match a cleared by compare match b/input capture b cleared by input capture b 1 timer overflow interrupt enable 0 1 ovi interrupt requested by ovf is disabled ovi interrupt requested by ovf is enabled compare match interrupt enable a 0 1 cmia interrupt requested by cmfa is disabled cmia interrupt requested by cmfa is enabled compare match interrupt enable b 0 1 cmib interrupt requested by cmfb is disabled cmib interrupt requested by cmfb is enabled 1 csk2 csk1 csk0 description channel 2: count on tcnt3 overflow signal* channel 3: count on tcnt2 compare match a* note: * if the clock input of channel 2 is the tcnt3 overflow signal and that of channel 3 is the tcnt2 compare match signal, no incrementing clock is generated. do not use this setting. 831 tcsr2?imer control/status register 2 tcsr3?imer control/status register 3 h?ff92 h?ff93 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 bit initial value read/write 0 r/(w)* 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 0 r/w 4 ice 0 r/w 3 ois3 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w 0 os0 timer overflow flag 0 [clearing condition] read ovf when ovf = 1, then write 0 in ovf. bit initial value read/write 0 r/(w)* 7 cmfb 0 r/(w)* 6 cmfa 0 r/(w)* 5 ovf 1 4 0 r/w 3 ois3 0 r/w 2 ois2 0 r/w 1 os1 0 r/w 0 os0 tcsr3 tcsr2 1 [setting condition] tcnt overflows from h'ff to h'00. compare match/input capture flag a 0 [clearing condition] read cmfa when cmfa = 1, then write 0 in cmfa. 1 [setting condition] tcnt = tcora compare match/input capture flag b 0 [clearing condition] read cmfb when cmfb = 1, then write 0 in cmfb. 1 [setting conditions] tcnt = tcorb the tcnt value is transferred to tcorb by an input capture signal when tcorb functions as an input capture register. note: * only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 5, to clear these flags. output select a1 and a0 0 description bit 1 os1 bit 0 os0 1 0 1 no change at compare match a 0 output at compare match a 1 output at compare match a output toggles at compare match a 0 1 description ice in tcsr3 bit 3 ois3 bit 3 ois2 output/input capture edge select b3 and b2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 no change at compare match b 0 output at compare match b 1 output at compare match b output toggles at compare match b tcorb input capture on rising edge tcorb input capture on falling edge tcorb input capture on both rising and falling edges 1 input capture enable (tcsr3 only) 0 1 tcorb is a compare match register tcorb is an input capture register 832 tcora2?ime constant register a2 tcora3?ime constant register a3 h?ff94 h?ff95 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w tcora2 tcora3 tcorb2?ime constant register b2 tcorb3?ime constant register b3 h?ff96 h?ff97 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w tcorb2 tcorb3 tcnt2?imer counter 2 tcnt3?imer counter 3 h?ff98 h?ff99 8-bit timer channel 2 8-bit timer channel 3 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w 0 r/w tcnt2 tcnt3 833 dadr0?/a data register 0 h?ff9c d/a bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 d/a conversion data dadr1?/a data register 1 h?ff9d d/a bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 4 0 r/w 3 0 r/w 2 0 r/w 1 0 r/w 0 d/a conversion data 834 dacr?/a control register h?ff9e d/a bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 daoe1 0 r/w 6 daoe0 0 r/w 5 dae 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 d/a enable bit 7 daoe1 d/a conversion is disabled in channels 0 and 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 1 d/a conversion is disabled in channel 0 d/a conversion is enabled in channel 1 description d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 d/a conversion is enabled in channels 0 and 1 bit 6 bit 5 daoe0 dae 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 d/a output enable 0 0 da 0 analog output is disabled 1 channel-0 d/a conversion and da 0 analog output are enabled d/a output enable 1 0 da 1 analog output is disabled 1 channel-1 d/a conversion and da 1 analog output are enabled 835 tpmr?pc output mode register h?ffa0 tpc bit initial value read/write 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 0 r/w 3 g3nov 0 r/w 2 g2nov 0 r/w 1 g1nov 0 r/w 0 g0nov group 0 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 0. output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 0, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel group 1 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 1. output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 1, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel group 2 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 2. output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 2, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel group 3 non-overlap 0 normal tpc output in group 3. output values change at compare match a in the selected 16-bit timer channel 1 non-overlapping tpc output in group 3, controlled by compare match a and b in the selected 16-bit timer channel 836 tpcr?pc output control register h?ffa1 tpc group 0 compare match select 1 and 0 bit 1 g0cms1 16-bit timer channel selected as output trigger bit 0 g0cms0 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 tpc output group 0 (tp 3 to tp 0 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 group 1 compare match select 1 and 0 bit 3 g1cms1 16-bit timer channel selected as output trigger bit 2 g1cms0 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 tpc output group 1 (tp 7 to tp 4 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 group 2 compare match select 1 and 0 bit 5 g2cms1 16-bit timer channel selected as output trigger bit 4 g2cms0 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 tpc output group 2 (tp 11 to tp 8 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 group 3 compare match select 1 and 0 bit 7 g3cms1 16-bit timer channel selected as output trigger bit 6 g3cms0 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 0 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 1 tpc output group 3 (tp 15 to tp 12 ) is triggered by compare match in 16-bit timer channel 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 bit initial value read/write 7 g3cms1 6 g3cms0 5 g2cms1 4 g2cms0 1 r/w 3 g1cms1 1 r/w 2 g1cms0 1 r/w 1 g0cms1 1 r/w 0 g0cms0 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 1 r/w 837 nderb?ext data enable register b h?ffa2 tpc bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 nder15 0 r/w 6 nder14 0 r/w 5 nder13 0 r/w 4 nder12 0 r/w 3 nder11 0 r/w 2 nder10 0 r/w 1 nder9 0 r/w 0 nder8 next data enable 15 to 8 bits 7 to 0 nder15 to nder8 description tpc outputs tp 15 to tp 8 are disabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are not transferred to pb 7 to pb 0 ) tpc outputs tp 15 to tp 8 are enabled (ndr15 to ndr8 are transferred to pb 7 to pb 0 ) 0 1 ndera?ext data enable register a h?ffa3 tpc bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 nder7 0 r/w 6 nder6 0 r/w 5 nder5 0 r/w 4 nder4 0 r/w 3 nder3 0 r/w 2 nder2 0 r/w 1 nder1 0 r/w 0 nder0 next data enable 7 to 0 bits 7 to 0 nder7 to nder0 description tpc outputs tp 7 to tp 0 are disabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are not transferred to pa 7 to pa 0 ) tpc outputs tp 7 to tp 0 are enabled (ndr7 to ndr0 are transferred to pa 7 to pa 0 ) 0 1 838 ndrb?ext data register b h?ffa4/h?ffa6 tpc ? same trigger for tpc output groups 2 and 3 ? address h'fffa4 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 0 r/w 3 ndr11 0 r/w 2 ndr10 0 r/w 1 ndr9 0 r/w 0 ndr8 store the next output data for tpc output group 3 store the next output data for tpc output group 2 ? address h'fffa6 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 bit initial value read/write ? different triggers for tpc output groups 2 and 3 ? address h'fffa4 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 ndr15 0 r/w 6 ndr14 0 r/w 5 ndr13 0 r/w 4 ndr12 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 store the next output data for tpc output group 3 ? address h'fffa6 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 43 ndr11 2 ndr10 1 ndr9 1111 0 ndr8 store the next output data for tpc output group 2 839 ndra?ext data register a h?ffa5/h?ffa7 tpc ? same trigger for tpc output groups 0 and 1 ? address h'fffa5 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 ndr7 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 4 ndr4 0 r/w 3 ndr3 0 r/w 2 ndr2 0 r/w 1 ndr1 0 r/w 0 ndr0 store the next output data for tpc output group 1 store the next output data for tpc output group 0 ? address h'fffa7 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 bit initial value read/write ? different triggers for tpc output groups 0 and 1 ? address h'fffa5 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 ndr7 0 r/w 6 ndr6 0 r/w 5 ndr5 0 r/w 4 ndr4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 store the next output data for tpc output group 1 ? address h'fffa7 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 0 r/w 5 0 r/w 43 ndr3 2 ndr2 1 ndr1 1111 0 ndr0 store the next output data for tpc output group 0 840 smr?erial mode register h?ffb0 sci0 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 c/ a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 4 o/ e 0 r/w 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 clock select 1 and 0 0 bit 0 clock /4 clock /16 clock /64 clock 1 0 cks0 0 r/w multiprocessor mode 0 multiprocessor function disabled multiprocessor format selected 1 bit 1 clock source cks0 cks1 0 1 0 1 stop bit length 0 one stop bit two stop bits 1 parity mode 0 even parity odd parity 1 parity enable 0 parity bit is not added or checked parity bit is added and checked 1 gsm mode (for smart card interface) 0 tend flag is set 12.5 etu* after start bit tend flag is set 11.0 etu* after start bit 1 character length 0 8-bit data 7-bit data 1 communication mode (for serial communication interface) 0 asynchronous mode synchronous mode 1 note: * etu: elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) 841 brr?it rate register h?ffb1 sci0 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 serial communication bit rate setting 842 scr?erial control register h?ffb2 sci0 bit initial value read/write 0 r/w 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w 0 cke0 clock enable 1 and 0 (for serial communication interface) bit 1 cke1 bit 0 cke0 asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode synchronous mode asynchronous mode synchronous mode 0 1 0 1 0 1 description transmit-end interrupt enable 0 1 transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are disabled transmit-end interrupt requests (tei) are enabled receive interrupt enable 0 1 receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are disabled receive-data-full (rxi) and receive-error (eri) interrupt requests are enabled internal clock, sck pin available for generic i/o internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output internal clock, sck pin used for clock output internal clock, sck pin used for serial clock output external clock, sck pin used for clock input external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input external clock, sck pin used for clock input external clock, sck pin used for serial clock input multiprocessor interrupt enable 0 1 multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal receive operation) multiprocessor interrupts are enabled receive enable 0 1 receiving is disabled receiving is enabled transmit enable 0 1 transmitting is disabled transmitting is enabled transmit interrupt enable 0 1 transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is disabled transmit-data-empty interrupt request (txi) is enabled clock enable 1 and 0 (for smart card interface) smr gm bit 1 cke1 bit 0 cke0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 description sck pin available for generic i/o sck pin used for clock output sck pin output fixed low sck pin used for clock output sck pin output fixed high sck pin used for clock output 843 tdr?ransmit data register h?ffb3 sci0 bit initial value read/write 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 serial transmit data 844 ssr?erial status register h?ffb4 sci0 bit initial value read/write 1 r/(w)* 7 tdre 0 r/(w)* 6 rdrf 0 r/(w)* 5 orer 0 r/(w)* 4 fer/ers 0 r/(w)* 3 per 1 r 2 tend 0 r 1 mpb 0 r/w 0 mpbt transmit end (for serial communication interface) 0 multiprocessor bit transfer 0 1 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 0 multiprocessor bit value in transmit data is 1 multiprocessor bit 0 1 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 0 multiprocessor bit value in receive data is 1 [clearing conditions] read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre. the dmac writes data in tdr. [setting conditions] reset or transition to standby mode te is cleared to 0 in scr. tdre is 1 when last bit of 1-byte serial character is transmitted. parity error 0 1 [clearing conditions] reset or transition to standby mode read per when per = 1, then write 0 in per. [setting condition] parity error (parity of receive data does not match parity setting of o/ e bit in smr) framing error (for serial communication interface) 0 [clearing conditions] reset or transition to standby mode read fer when fer = 1, then write 0 in fer. [setting condition] framing error (stop bit is 0) error signal status (for smart card interface) 0 [clearing conditions] reset or transition to standby mode read ers when ers = 1, then write 0 in ers. [setting condition] a low error signal is received. 1 1 overrun error 0 [clearing conditions] reset or transition to standby mode read orer when orer = 1, then write 0 in orer. [setting condition] overrun error (reception of the next serial data ends when rdrf = 1) 1 receive data register full 0 [clearing conditions] reset or transition to standby mode read rdrf when rdrf = 1, then write 0 in rdrf. the dmac reads data from rdr. [setting condition] serial data is received normally and transferred from rsr to rdr. 1 transmit data register empty note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. 0 [clearing conditions] read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre. the dmac writes data in tdr. [setting conditions] reset or transition to standby mode te is 0 in scr. data is transferred from tdr to tsr, enabling new data to be written in tdr 1 1 transmit end (for smart card interface) 0 [clearing conditions] read tdre when tdre = 1, then write 0 in tdre. the dmac writes data in tdr. [setting conditions] reset or transition to standby mode te is cleared to 0 in scr and fer/ers is cleared to 0. tdre is 1 and fer/ers is 0 (normal transmission) 2.5 etu* (when gm = 0) or 1.0 etu (when gm = 1) after 1-byte serial character is transmitted. 1 note: * etu: elementary time unit (time required to transmit one bit) 845 rdr?eceive data register h?ffb5 sci0 bit initial value read/write 0 r 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 serial receive data 846 scmr?mart card mode register h?ffb6 sci0 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 0 r/w 3 sdir 0 r/w 2 sinv 1 1 0 r/w 0 smif smart card interface mode select 0 1 smart card interface function is disabled (initial value) smart card interface function is enabled smart card data invert 0 1 unmodified tdr contents are transmitted (initial value) receive data is stored unmodified in rdr inverted 1/0 logic levels of tdr contents are transmitted 1/0 logic levels of received data are inverted before storage in rdr smart card data transfer direction 0 1 tdr contents are transmitted lsb-first (initial value) receive data is stored lsb-first in rdr tdr contents are transmitted msb-first receive data is stored msb-first in rdr bit initial value read/write 847 smr?erial mode register h?ffb8 sci1 0 r/w 7 c/ a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 cks0 note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. bit initial value read/write brr?it rate register h?ffb9 sci1 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. bit initial value read/write scr?erial control register h?ffba sci1 0 r/w 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w 0 cke0 note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. bit initial value read/write 848 tdr?ransmit data register h?ffbb sci1 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. ssr?erial status register h?ffbc sci1 0 r/(w)* 7 tdre 0 r/(w)* 6 rdrf 0 r/(w)* 5 orer 0 r/(w)* 4 fer/ers 0 r/(w)* 3 per 1 r 2 tend 0 r 1 mpb 0 r/w 0 mpbt bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. rdr?eceive data register h?ffbd sci1 0 r 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 849 scmr?mart card mode register h?ffbe sci1 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 1 5 0 r/w 43 sdir 2 sinv 1 1111 0 smif bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 850 smr?erial mode register h?ffc0 sci2 0 r/w 7 c/ a 0 r/w 6 chr 0 r/w 5 pe 0 r/w 4 o/ e 0 r/w 3 stop 0 r/w 2 mp 0 r/w 1 cks1 0 r/w 0 cks0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. brr?it rate register h?ffc1 sci2 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. scr?erial control register h?ffc2 sci2 0 r/w 7 tie 0 r/w 6 rie 0 r/w 5 te 0 r/w 4 re 0 r/w 3 mpie 0 r/w 2 teie 0 r/w 1 cke1 0 r/w 0 cke0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 851 tdr?ransmit data register h?ffc3 sci2 1 r/w 7 1 r/w 6 1 r/w 5 1 r/w 4 1 r/w 3 1 r/w 2 1 r/w 1 1 r/w 0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. ssr?erial status register h?ffc4 sci2 1 r/(w)* 7 tdre 0 r/(w)* 6 rdrf 0 r/(w)* 5 orer 0 r/(w)* 4 fer/ers 0 r/(w)* 3 per 1 r 2 tend 0 r 1 mpb 0 r/w 0 mpbt bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. rdr?eceive data register h?ffc5 sci2 0 r 7 0 r 6 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 852 scmr?mart card mode register h?ffc6 sci2 0 r/w 7 0 r/w 6 1 5 0 r/w 43 sdir 2 sinv 1 1111 0 smif bit initial value read/write note: bit functions are the same as for sci0. 853 p1dr?ort 1 data register h?ffd0 port 1 0 r/w 7 p1 7 0 r/w 6 p1 6 0 r/w 5 p1 5 0 r/w 4 p1 4 0 r/w 3 p1 3 0 r/w 2 p1 2 0 r/w 1 p1 1 0 r/w 0 p1 0 data for port 1 pins bit initial value read/write p2dr?ort 2 data register h?ffd1 port 2 0 r/w 7 p2 7 0 r/w 6 p2 6 0 r/w 5 p2 5 0 r/w 4 p2 4 0 r/w 3 p2 3 0 r/w 2 p2 2 0 r/w 1 p2 1 0 r/w 0 p2 0 data for port 2 pins bit initial value read/write p3dr?ort 3 data register h?ffd2 port 3 0 r/w 7 p3 7 0 r/w 6 p3 6 0 r/w 5 p3 5 0 r/w 4 p3 4 0 r/w 3 p3 3 0 r/w 2 p3 2 0 r/w 1 p3 1 0 r/w 0 p3 0 data for port 3 pins bit initial value read/write 854 p4dr?ort 4 data register h?ffd3 port 4 0 r/w 7 p4 7 0 r/w 6 p4 6 0 r/w 5 p4 5 0 r/w 4 p4 4 0 r/w 3 p4 3 0 r/w 2 p4 2 0 r/w 1 p4 1 0 r/w 0 p4 0 data for port 4 pins bit initial value read/write p5dr?ort 5 data register h?ffd4 port 5 1 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 0 r/w 3 p5 3 0 r/w 2 p5 2 0 r/w 1 p5 1 0 r/w 0 p5 0 data for port 5 pins bit initial value read/write p6dr?ort 6 data register h?ffd5 port 6 1 r 7 p6 7 0 r/w 6 p6 6 0 r/w 5 p6 5 0 r/w 4 p6 4 0 r/w 3 p6 3 0 r/w 2 p6 2 0 r/w 1 p6 1 0 r/w 0 p6 0 data for port 6 pins bit initial value read/write 855 p7dr?ort 7 data register h?ffd6 port 7 r 7 p7 7 r 6 p7 6 r 5 p7 5 r 4 p7 4 r 3 p7 3 r 2 p7 2 r 1 p7 1 r 0 p7 0 data for port 7 pins * * * * * * * * note: * determined by pins p7 7 to p7 0 . bit initial value read/write p8dr?ort 8 data register h?ffd7 port 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 0 r/w 4 p8 4 0 r/w 3 p8 3 0 r/w 2 p8 2 0 r/w 1 p8 1 0 r/w 0 p8 0 data for port 8 pins bit initial value read/write 856 p9dr?ort 9 data register h?ffd8 port 9 1 7 1 6 0 r/w 5 p9 5 0 r/w 4 p9 4 0 r/w 3 p9 3 0 r/w 2 p9 2 0 r/w 1 p9 1 0 r/w 0 p9 0 data for port 9 pins bit initial value read/write padr?ort a data register h?ffd9 port a 0 r/w 7 pa 7 0 r/w 6 pa 6 0 r/w 5 pa 5 0 r/w 4 pa 4 0 r/w 3 pa 3 0 r/w 2 pa 2 0 r/w 1 pa 1 0 r/w 0 pa 0 data for port a pins bit initial value read/write pbdr?ort b data register h?ffda port b 0 r/w 7 pb 7 0 r/w 6 pb 6 0 r/w 5 pb 5 0 r/w 4 pb 4 0 r/w 3 pb 3 0 r/w 2 pb 2 0 r/w 1 pb 1 0 r/w 0 pb 0 data for port b pins bit initial value read/write 857 addra h/l?/d data register a h/l h?ffe0, h?ffe1 a/d 0 r 15 ad9 a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result 0 r 14 ad8 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 addrah addral bit initial value read/write addrb h/l a/d data register b h/l h fffe2, h fffe3 a/d 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 14 ad8 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 addrbh addrbl a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result bit initial value read/write 858 addrc h/l a/d data register c h/l h fffe4, h fffe5 a/d 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 14 ad8 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 addrch addrcl a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result bit initial value read/write addrd h/l a/d data register d h/l h fffe6, h fffe7 a/d 0 r 15 ad9 0 r 14 ad8 0 r 13 ad7 0 r 12 ad6 0 r 11 ad5 0 r 10 ad4 0 r 9 ad3 0 r 8 ad2 0 r 7 ad1 0 r 6 ad0 0 r 5 0 r 4 0 r 3 0 r 2 0 r 1 0 r 0 addrdh addrdl a/d conversion data 10-bit data giving an a/d conversion result bit initial value read/write adcr a/d control register h fffe9 a/d 0 r/w 7 trge 1 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 0 r/w 0 trigger enable 0 1 a/d conversion start by external trigger or 8-bit timer compare match is disabled a/d conversion is started by falling edge of external trigger signal ( adtrg ) or 8-bit timer compare match bit initial value read/write 859 adcsr a/d control/status register h fffe8 a/d 0 r/(w)* 7 adf 0 r/w 6 adie 0 r/w 5 adst 0 r/w 4 scan 0 r/w 3 cks 0 r/w 2 ch2 0 r/w 1 ch1 0 r/w 0 ch0 channel select 2 to 0 group selection 0 1 0 1 an 0 an 1 an 2 an 3 an 4 an 5 an 6 an 7 0 ch2 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 description single mode scan mode clock select 0 1 conversion time = 134 states (maximum) conversion time = 70 states (maximum) channel selection ch1 ch0 an 0 an 0, an 1 an 0 to an 2 an 0 to an 3 an 4 an 4, an 5 an 4 to an 6 an 4 to an 7 scan mode 0 1 single mode scan mode a/d start 0 1 a/d conversion is stopped single mode: a/d conversion starts; adst is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends scan mode: a/d conversion starts and continues, cycling among the selected channels adst is cleared to 0 by software, by a reset, or by a transition to standby mode a/d interrupt enable 0 1 a/d end interrupt request is disabled a/d end interrupt request is enabled a/d end flag 0 [clearing condition] read adf when adf = 1, then write 0 in adf the dmac is activated by an adi interrupt [setting conditions] single mode: a/d conversion ends scan mode: a/d conversion ends in all selected channels 1 note: * only 0 can be written, to clear the flag. bit initial value read/write 860 appendix c i/o port block diagrams c.1 port 1 block diagram reset r p1 ddr n mode 1 to 4 wp1d q d c reset r p1 dr n wp1 qd c rp1 mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus (upper) internal address bus wp1d: wp1: rp1: ssoe: n = 0 to 7 write to p1ddr write to port 1 read port 1 software standby output port enable p1 n external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 6/7 ssoe figure c.1 port 1 block diagram 861 c.2 port 2 block diagram reset r p2 dr n wp2 qd c reset r p2 ddr n wp2d qd c reset r p2 pcr n wp2p qd c mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus (upper) internal address bus p2 n rp2p rp2 wp2p: rp2p: wp2d: wp2: rp2: ssoe: n = 0 to 7 write to p2pcr read p2pcr write to p2ddr write to port 2 read port 2 software standby output port enable external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 6/7 mode 1 to 4 ssoe figure c.2 port 2 block diagram 862 c.3 port 3 block diagram p3 n reset r p3 ddr n wp3d qd c reset r p3 dr n wp3 qd c rp3 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus (upper) wp3d: wp3: rp3: n = 0 to 7 write to p3ddr write to port 3 read port 3 mode 6/7 write to external address mode 6/7 hardware standby external bus released read external address internal data bus (lower) figure c.3 port 3 block diagram 863 c.4 port 4 block diagram p4 n rp4p rp4 wp4 wp4d wp4p reset reset reset qd r c p4 pcr n qd r c p4 ddr n qd r c p4 dr n wp4p: rp4p: wp4d: wp4: rp4: n = 0 to 7 write to p4pcr read p4pcr write to p4ddr write to port 4 read port 4 write to external address external bus release hardware standby read external address internal data bus (upper) internal data bus (lower) 8-bit bus mode mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 16-bit bus mode figure c.4 port 4 block diagram 864 c.5 port 5 block diagram p5 n rp5p rp5 wp5 wp5d wp5p reset reset reset qd r c p5 pcr n qd r c p5 ddr n qd r c p5 dr n wp5p: rp5p: wp5d: wp5: rp5: ssoe: n = 0 to 3 write to p5pcr read p5pcr write to p5ddr write to port 5 read port 5 software standby output port enable mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus (upper) internal address bus external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 6/7 mode 1 to 4 ssoe figure c.5 port 5 block diagram 865 c.6 port 6 block diagrams wp6d: wp6: rp6: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 rp6 input wp6d reset qd r c p6 ddr 0 wp6 reset qd r c p6 dr 0 p6 0 internal data bus bus controller wait input enable bus controller wait mode 6/7 hardware standby figure c.6 (a) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 0 ) 866 p6 1 wp6d: wp6: rp6: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 wp6d reset qd r c p6 ddr 1 wp6 reset qd r c p6 dr 1 rp6 internal data bus bus controller bus release enable breq input mode 6/7 hardware standby figure c.6 (b) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 1 ) 867 wp6d reset qd r c p6 ddr 2 wp6 reset qd r c p6 dr 2 rp6 p6 2 wp6d: wp6: rp6: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 internal data bus bus controller bus release enable back output mode 6/7 hardware standby figure c.6 (c) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 2 ) 868 p6 3 reset r p6 ddr 3 wp6d qd c reset r p6 dr 3 wp6 qd c rp6 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus wp6d: wp6: rp6: ssoe: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 software standby output port enable mode 6/7 mode 6/7 as output bus controller external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 6/7 ssoe figure c.6 (d) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 3 ) 869 p6 4 reset r p6 ddr 4 wp6d qd c reset r p6 dr 4 wp6 qd c rp6 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus wp6d: wp6: rp6: ssoe: write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 software standby output port enable mode 6/7 mode 6/7 rd output we output enable bus controller we output external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 6/7 ssoe figure c.6 (e) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 4 ) 870 p6 n reset r p6 ddr n wp6d qd c reset r p6 dr n wp6 qd c rp6 mode 1 to 5 internal data bus wp6d: wp6: rp6: ssoe: n = 5 and 6 write to p6ddr write to port 6 read port 6 software standby output port enable mode 6/7 mode 6/7 hwr output lwr output cas output enable bus controller ucas output lcas output external bus released hardware standby software standby mode 6/7 ssoe figure c.6 (f) port 6 block diagram (pins p6 5 and p6 6 ) 871 read port 6 rp6: hardware standby rp6 p6 7 output output enable internal data bus figure c.6 (g) port 6 block diagram (pin p6 7 ) 872 c.7 port 7 block diagrams p7 n rp7 rp7: read port 7 n = 0 to 5 internal data bus a/d converter input enable channel select signal analog input figure c.7 (a) port 7 block diagram (pins p7 0 to p7 5 ) p7 n rp7 rp7: read port 7 n = 6 and 7 internal data bus d/a converter analog output output enable a/d converter input enable channel select signal analog input figure c.7 (b) port 7 block diagram (pins p7 6 and p7 7 ) 873 c.8 port 8 block diagrams p8 0 rp8 wp8d reset external bus released hardware standby ssoe software standby qd r c p8 ddr 0 wp8 reset qd r c p8 dr 0 wp8d: wp8: rp8: ssoe: write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 software standby output port enable internal data bus bus controller rfsh output enable self-refresh output enable output interrupt controller input rfsh irq 0 mode 6/7 figure c.8 (a) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 0 ) 874 p8 n wp8d reset qd r c p8 ddr 1 wp8 reset qd r c p8 dr 1 rp8 wp8d: wp8: rp8: ssoe: write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 software standby output port enable internal data bus bus controller interrupt controller irq 1 input cs 3 output ras 3 output ras 3 output enable area 3 dram connection enable mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 ssoe hardware standby software standby external bus release figure c.8 (b) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 1 ) 875 p8 2 wp8d reset qd r c p8 ddr 2 wp8 reset qd r c p8 dr 2 rp8 wp8d: wp8: rp8: ssoe: write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 software standby output port enable internal data bus bus controller interrupt controller irq 2 input cs 2 output ras 2 output ras 2 output enable mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 ssoe hardware standby software standby external bus release figure c.8 (c) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 2 ) 876 a/d converter wp8d p8 3 dr c qd write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 software standby output port enable wp8d: wp8: rp8: ssoe: wp8 r reset internal data bus rp8 p8 3 bus controller cs 1 output reset mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 interrupt controller irq 3 input adtrg input mode 6/7 ssoe external bus release software standby hardware standby p8 3 ddr c qd r figure c.8 (d) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 3 ) 877 p8 4 wp8d qd s c p8 ddr 4 wp8 reset reset mode 1 to 4 qd r c p8 dr 4 rp8 wp8d: wp8: rp8: ssoe: write to p8ddr write to port 8 read port 8 software standby output port enable internal data bus bus controller output 0 cs mode 6/7 mode 1 to 5 r mode 6/7 ssoe external bus release software standby hardware standby figure c.8 (e) port 8 block diagram (pin p8 4 ) 878 c.9 port 9 block diagrams wp9d: wp9: rp9: write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 p9 0 rp9 wp9d reset hardware standby qd r c p9 ddr 0 wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr 0 internal data bus sci output enable serial transmit data guard time figure c.9 (a) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 0 ) 879 wp9d: wp9: rp9: write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 p9 1 rp9 wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr 1 wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr 1 internal data bus sci output enable serial transmit data guard time hardware standby figure c.9 (b) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 1 ) 880 wp9d: wp9: rp9: write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 p9 2 wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr 2 wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr 2 rp9 internal data bus input enable serial receive data sci hardware standby figure c.9 (c) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 2 ) 881 p9 3 ddr c qd wp9d rp9 p9 3 dr c qd p9 3 serial receive data input enable write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 wp9d: wp9: rp9: wp9 r r reset internal data bus reset sci hardware standby figure c.9 (d) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 3 ) 882 wp9d: wp9: rp9: write to p9ddr write to port 9 read port 9 wp9d reset qd r c p9 ddr 4 wp9 reset qd r c p9 dr 4 rp9 p9 4 internal data bus sci clock input enable clock output enable clock output clock input interrupt controller input irq 4 hardware standby figure c.9 (e) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 4 ) 883 r p9 5 ddr c qd reset wp9d wp9 rp9 r p9 5 dr c qd reset p9 5 sci clock input enable clock output enable clock output interrupt controller irq 5 input clock input : write to p9ddr : write to port 9 : read port 9 wp9d wp9 rp9 internal data bus hardware standby figure c.9 (f) port 9 block diagram (pin p9 5 ) 884 c.10 port a block diagrams wpad: wpa: rpa: n = 0 and 1 write to paddr write to port a read port a pa n wpad reset qd r c pa ddr n reset qd r c pa dr n rpa wpa internal data bus tpc output enable tpc next data output trigger output enable transfer end output dma controller counter clock input 16-bit timer counter clock input 8-bit timer hardware standby figure c.10 (a) port a block diagram (pins pa 0 , pa 1 ) 885 wpad: wpa: rpa: n = 2 and 3 write to paddr write to port a read port a pa n rpa wpa wpad reset qd r c pa ddr n reset qd r c pa dr n internal data bus tpc output enable tpc next data output trigger output enable compare match output input capture counter clock input 16-bit timer counter clock input 8-bit timer hardware standby figure c.10 (b) port a block diagram (pins pa 2 , pa 3 ) 886 wpad: wpa: rpa: ssoe: n = 4 to 7 note: the pa 7 address output enable setting is fixed at 1 in modes 3 and 4. write to paddr write to port a read port a software standby output port enable pa n wpad reset pra wpa qd r c pa n ddr reset qd r c pa n dr internal address bus internal data bus tpc 16-bit timer tpc output enable next data output trigger output enable compare match output input capture software standby ssoe bus released mode 3/4 address output enable hardware standby figure c.10 (c) port a block diagram (pins pa 4 to pa 7 ) 887 c.11 port b block diagrams pb n wpbd: wpb: rpb: ssoe: write to pbddr write to port b read port b software standby output port enable reset qd r c pb ddr n wpbd reset qd r c pb dr n wpb rpb internal data bus tpc output enable tpc next data output trigger output enable compare match output 8-bit timer mode 1 to 5 bus released bus controller cs output enable cs7 output software standby ssoe hardware standby figure c.11 (a) port b block diagram (pin pb 0 ) 888 r pb n ddr c qd reset mode 1 to 5 wpbd wpb rpb r pb n dr c qd reset pb n tpc 8-bit timer tpc output enable bus controller cs output enable cs6 output next data output trigger output enable compare match output dmac dreq0 dreq1 input tmo2 tmo3 input write to pbddr write to port b read port b software standby output port enable wpbd: wpb: rpb: ssoe: bus released software standby ssoe internal data bus hardware standby figure c.11 (b) port b block diagram (pin pb 1 ) 889 r pb 2 ddr c qd reset wpbd wpb rpb r pb 2 dr c qd reset pb 2 tpc 8-bit timer tpc output enable bus controller ras 5 output enable ras 5 output cs 5 output cs 5 output enable area 5 dram connection output enable next data output trigger output enable compare match output write to pbddr write to port b read port b software standby output port enable wpbd: wpb: rpb: ssoe: internal data bus software standby external bus release ssoe hardware standby mode 6/7 figure c.11 (c) port b block diagram (pin pb 2 ) 890 r pb 2 ddr c qd reset wpbd wpb rpb r pb 2 dr c qd reset pb 2 tpc 8-bit timer tmio 3 input dreq 1 input dmac tpc output enable bus controller ras 5 output enable ras 5 output cs 5 output cs 5 output enable area 5 dram connection output enable next data output trigger output enable compare match output write to pbddr write to port b read port b software standby output port enable wpbd: wpb: rpb: ssoe: internal data bus software standby external bus release ssoe hardware standby mode 6/7 figure c.11 (d) port b block diagram (pin pb 3 ) 891 pb 4 wpbd: wpb: rpb: ssoe: write to pbddr write to port b read port b software standby output port enable note: in modes 6 and 7, cas output enable is fixed at 0. wpb rpb reset hardware standby external bus release ssoe software standby qd r c pb ddr 4 wpbd reset qd r c pb dr 4 internal data bus tpc output enable next data output trigger output enable cas output tpc bus controller figure c.11 (e) port b block diagram (pin pb 4 ) 892 r pb 5 ddr c qd reset wpbd wpb rpb r pb 5 dr c qd reset pb 5 tpc sci tpc output enable sci next data output trigger clock output enable clock input enable clock output clock input write to pbddr write to port b read port b software standby output port enable bus controller cas output enable cas output wpbd: wpb: rpb: ssoe: internal data bus hardware standby external bus release ssoe software standby note: in modes 6 and 7, cas output enable is fixed at 0. figure c.11 (f) port b block diagram (pin pb 5 ) 893 wpbd reset hardware standby reset qd r c pb ddr qd r c pb dr 6 rpb wpb tpc sci wpbd: wpb: rpb: write to pbddr write to port b read port b tpc output enable next data output trigger output enable serial transmit data guard time internal data bus 6 pb 6 figure c.11 (g) port b block diagram (pin pb 6 ) 894 pb 7 wpbd reset reset qd r c pb ddr qd r c pb dr 7 rpb wpb sci tpc sci wpbd: wpb: rpb: write to pbddr write to port b read port b tpc output enable input enable next data output trigger internal data bus 7 serial receive data hardware standby figure c.11 (h) port b block diagram (pin pb 7 ) 895 appendix d pin states d.1 port states in each mode table d.1 port states pin name mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus-released mode program execution mode reso * 17 t * 17 t * 17 tt * 17 t * 17 p1 7 to p1 0 1 to 4 l t (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) keep ta 7 to a 0 5 t t (ddr = 0) keep (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) keep t (ddr=0) input port (ddr=1) a 7 to a 0 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p2 7 to p2 0 1 to 4 l t (ssoe = 0) t (ssoe = 1) keep ta 15 to a 8 5 t t (ddr = 0) keep (ddr=1,ssoe=0) t (ddr=1,ssoe=1) keep t (ddr=0) input port (ddr=1) a 15 to a 8 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p3 7 to p3 0 1 to 5 t t t t d 15 to d 8 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p4 7 to p4 0 1, 3, 5 t t keep keep i/o port 2, 4 t t t t d 7 to d 0 6, 7 t t keep i/o port 896 table d.1 port states (cont) pin name mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus-released mode program execution mode p5 3 to p5 0 1 to 4 l t (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) keep ta 19 to a 16 5 t t (ddr=0) keep (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) keep t (ddr=0) input port (ddr=1) a 19 to a 16 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p6 0 1 to 5 t t keep keep i/o port wait 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p6 1 1 to 5 t t (brle=0) keep (brle=1) t t i/o port breq 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p6 2 1 to 5 t t (brle=0) keep (brle=1) h l (brle=0) i/o port (brle=1) back 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p6 6 to p6 3 1 to 5 h t (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h t as , rd , hwr , lwr 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p6 7 1 to 7 clock output t (pstop=0) h (pstop=1) keep (pstop=0) (pstop=1) keep (pstop=0) (pstop=1) input port p7 7 to p7 0 1 to 7 t t t t input port 897 table d.1 port states (cont) pin name mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus-released mode program execution mode p8 0 1 to 5 t t when dram space is not selected * 1 (rfshe=0) keep (rfshe=1) illegal setting when dram space is selected * 2 (rfshe=0) keep (rfshe=1, srfmd=0, ssoe=0) t (rfshe=1, srfmd=0, ssoe=1) h (rfshe=1, srfmd=1) rfsh when dram space is selected * 1 (rfshe=0) keep (rfshe=1) illegal setting when dram space is selected * 2 (rfshe=0) keep (rfshe=1) t (rfshe=0) i/o port (rfshe=1) rfsh 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p8 1 1 to 5 t t when dram space is selected * 3 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h when dram space is selected * 4 keep otherwise * 5 * 1 (ddr=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) h when dram space is selected * 3 t when dram space is selected * 4 keep otherwise * 1 (ddr=0) keep (ddr=1) t when dram space is selected and ras3 is output ras 3 when dram space is selected and ras3 is not output i/o port otherwise (ddr=0) input port (ddr=1) cs 3 6, 7 t t keep i/o port 898 table d.1 port states (cont) pin name mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus-released mode program execution mode p8 2 1 to 5 t t ras 2 output * 2 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h otherwise * 1 (ddr=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) h ras 2 output * 2 t otherwise * 1 (ddr=0) keep (ddr=1) t ras 2 output ras 2 otherwise (ddr=0) i/o port (ddr=1) cs 2 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p8 3 1 to 5 t t (ddr=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) h (ddr=0) keep (ddr=1) t (ddr=0) input port (ddr=1) cs 1 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p8 4 1 to 4 h t (ddr=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) h (ddr = 0) keep (ddr = 1) t (ddr = 0) input port (ddr = 1) cs 0 5 t t (ddr=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=0) t (ddr=1, ssoe=1) h (ddr=0) keep (ddr=1) t (ddr=0) input port (ddr=1) cs 0 6, 7 t t keep i/o port p9 5 to p9 0 1 to 7 t t keep keep i/o port pa 3 to pa 0 1 to 7 t t keep keep i/o port pa 6 to pa 4 1, 2, 6, 7 t t keep keep i/o port 899 table d.1 port states (cont) pin name mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus-released mode program execution mode pa 6 to pa 4 3 to 5 t t address output * 5 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) keep otherwise * 6 keep address output * 5 t otherwise * 6 keep address output a 23 to a 21 otherwise i/o port pa 7 1, 2 t t keep keep i/o port 3, 4 l t (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) keep ta 20 5 l t when a20e = 0 ssoe = 0 t ssoe = 1 keep when a20e = 1 keep when a20e = 0 t when a20e = 1 keep when a20e = 0 a 20 when a20e = 1 i/o port 6, 7 t t keep i/o port pb 1 to pb 0 1 to 5 t t cs output * 7 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h otherwise * 8 keep cs output * 7 t otherwise * 8 keep cs output cs 7 to cs 6 otherwise i/o port 6, 7 t t keep i/o port pb 2 1 to 5 t t ras5 output * 9 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h cs output * 10 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h otherwise * 11 keep ras5 output * 9 t cs output * 10 t otherwise * 11 keep ras5 output ras5 cs output cs5 otherwise i/o port 6, 7 t t keep i/o port 900 table d.1 port states (cont) pin name mode reset hardware standby mode software standby mode bus-released mode program execution mode pb 3 1 to 5 t t ras4 output * 12 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h cs output * 13 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h otherwise * 14 keep ras4 output * 12 t cs output * 13 t otherwise * 14 keep ras4 output ras4 cs output cs4 otherwise i/o port 6, 7 t t keep i/o port pb 5 to pb 4 1 to 5 t t cas output * 15 (ssoe=0) t (ssoe=1) h otherwise * 16 keep cas output * 15 t otherwise * 16 keep cas output ucas , lcas otherwise i/o port 6, 7 t t keep i/o port pb 7 to pb 6 1 to 7 t t keep keep i/o port legend h: high l: low t: high-impedance state keep: input pins are in the high-impedance state; output pins maintain their previous state. ddr: data direction register notes: 1. when bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) are all cleared to 0. 2. when any of bits dras2, dras1, or dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is set to 1. 3. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is 010, 100, or 101. 4. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is other than 010, 100, 101, or 000. 5. when bit a23e, a22e, or a21e, respectively, in brcr (bus release control register) is cleared to 0. 6 when bit a23e, a22e, or a21e, respectively, in brcr (bus release control register) is set to 1. 7. when bit cs7e or cs6e, respectively, in cscr (chip select control register) is set to 1. 8. when bit cs7e or cs6e, respectively, in cscr (chip select control register) is cleared to 0. 901 9. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is 101. 10. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is other than 101, and bit cs5e in cscr (chip select control register) is set to 1. 11. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is other than 101, and bit cs5e in cscr (chip select control register) is cleared to 0. 12. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is 100, 101, or 110. 13. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is other than 100, 101, or 110, and bit cs4e in cscr (chip select control register) is set to 1. 14. when the setting of bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is other than 100, 101, or 110, and bit cs4e in cscr (chip select control register) is cleared to 0. 15. when any of bits dras2, dras1, or dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is set to 1, and bit csel in drcrb (dram control register b) is cleared to 0. 16. when any of bits dras2, dras1, or dras0 in drcra (dram control register a) is set to 1, and bit csel in drcrb (dram control register b) is set to 1; or, when bits dras2, dras1, and dras0 are all cleared to 0. 17. reso output is a mask rom version function. a low level is output only in the case of a reset due to wdt overflow. there is no bus-released state in modes 6 and 7. 902 d.2 pin states at reset modes 1 and 2: figure d.1 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during an external memory access in mode 1 or 2. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. as , rd , hwr , lwr , and cs 0 go high, and d 15 to d 0 go to the high-impedance state. the address bus is initialized to the low output level 2.5 clock cycles after the low level of res is sampled. clock pin p6 7 / goes to the output state at the next rise of after res goes low. as , rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (write) hwr , lwr (write) internal reset signal res p6 7 / i/o port, cs 7 to cs 1 cs 0 a 19 to a 0 t1 t2 t3 access to external memory h'00000 high impedance high impedance figure d.1 reset during memory access (modes 1 and 2) 903 modes 3 and 4: figure d.2 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during an external memory access in mode 3 or 4. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. as , rd , hwr , lwr , and cs 0 go high, and d 15 to d 0 go to the high-impedance state. the address bus is initialized to the low output level 2.5 clock cycles after the low level of res is sampled. however, when pa 4 to pa 6 are used as address bus pins, or when p8 3 to p8 1 and pb 0 to pb 3 are used as cs output pins, they go to the high-impedance state at the same time as res goes low. clock pin p6 7 / goes to the output state at the next rise of after res goes low. t1 t2 t3 access to external memory h'000000 high impedance high impedance as , rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (write) hwr , lwr (write) internal reset signal res p6 7 / i/o port, pa 4 /a 23 to pa 6 /a 21 , cs 7 to cs 1 cs 0 a 20 to a 0 figure d.2 reset during memory access (modes 3 and 4) mode 5: figure d.3 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during an external memory access in mode 5. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. as , rd , hwr , and lwr go high, and the address bus and d 15 to d 0 go to the high-impedance state. clock pin p6 7 / goes to the output state at the next rise of after res goes low. 904 t1 t2 t3 access to external memory high impedance high impedance high impedance as , rd (read) d 15 to d 0 (write) hwr , lwr (write) internal reset signal res p6 7 / i/o port, cs 7 to cs 1 a 23 to a 0 figure d.3 reset during memory access (mode 5) modes 6 and 7: figure d.4 is a timing diagram for the case in which res goes low during an operation in mode 6 or 7. as soon as res goes low, all ports are initialized to the input state. clock pin p6 7 / goes to the output state at the next rise of after res goes low. internal reset signal res p6 7 / i/o port high impedance figure d.4 reset during operation (modes 6 and 7) 905 appendix e timing of transition to and recovery from hardware standby mode timing of transition to hardware standby mode 1. to retain ram contents with the rame bit set to 1 in syscr, drive the res signal low 10 system clock cycles before the stby signal goes low, as shown below. res must remain low until stby goes low (minimum delay from stby low to res high: 0 ns). t 1 10t cyc t 2 0 ns stby res 2. to retain ram contents with the rame bit cleared to 0 in syscr, res does not have to be driven low as in (1). timing of recovery from hardware standby mode: drive the res signal low approximately 100 ns before stby goes high. stby res t 100 ns t osc 906 appendix f product code lineup product type product code mark code package (hitachi package code) h8/3067 5 v HD64F3067f HD64F3067f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) HD64F3067te HD64F3067te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) HD64F3067fp HD64F3067fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 5 vr HD64F3067rf HD64F3067rf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) HD64F3067rte HD64F3067rte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) HD64F3067rfp HD64F3067rfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 vr HD64F3067rvf HD64F3067rvf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) HD64F3067rvte HD64F3067rvte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) HD64F3067rvfp HD64F3067rvfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 5 v hd6433067f hd6433067(***)f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433067te hd6433067(***)te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433067fp hd6433067(***)fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 v hd6433067vf hd6433067(***)vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433067vte hd6433067(***)vte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433067vfp hd6433067(***)vfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) h8/3066 5 v hd6433066f hd6433066(***)f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433066te hd6433066(***)te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433066fp hd6433066(***)fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 v hd6433066vf hd6433066(***)vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433066vte hd6433066(***)vte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433066vfp hd6433066(***)vfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) h8/3065 5 v hd6433065f hd6433065(***)f 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433065te hd6433065(***)te 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433065fp hd6433065(***)fp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) 3 v hd6433065vf hd6433065(***)vf 100-pin qfp (fp-100b) hd6433065vte hd6433065(***)vte 100-pin tqfp (tfp-100b) hd6433065vfp hd6433065(***)vfp 100-pin qfp (fp-100a) note: for mask rom versions, (***) is the rom code. on-chip flash memory on-chip mask rom on-chip mask rom on-chip mask rom 907 appendix g package dimensions figures g.1 show the fp-100b package dimensions of the h8/3067 series. figure g.2 shows the tfp-100b package dimensions. figure g.3 shows the fp-100a package dimentions. 0.10 16.0 0.3 1.0 0.5 0.2 16.0 0.3 3.05 max 75 51 50 26 1 25 76 100 14 0 ?8 0.5 0.08 m *0.22 0.05 2.70 *0.17 0.05 0.12 +0.13 ?.12 1.0 0.20 0.04 0.15 0.04 unit: mm *dimension including the plating thickness base material dimension figure g.1 package dimensions (fp-100b) 908 16.0 0.2 14 0.08 0.10 0.5 0.1 16.0 0.2 0.5 0.10 0.10 1.20 max *0.17 0.05 0 8 75 51 125 76 100 26 50 m *0.22 0.05 1.0 1.00 1.0 0.20 0.04 0.15 0.04 unit: mm *dimension including the plating thickness base material dimension figure g.2 package dimensions (tfp-100b) 909 0.13 m 0 10 *0.32 0.08 *0.17 0.05 3.10 max 1.2 0.2 24.8 0.4 20 80 51 50 31 30 1 100 81 18.8 0.4 14 0.15 0.65 2.70 2.4 0.20 +0.10 0.20 0.58 0.83 0.30 0.06 0.15 0.04 unit: mm *dimension including the plating thickness base material dimension figure g.3 package dimensions (fp-100a) 910 appendix h comparison of h8/300h series product specifications h.1 differences between h8/3067 and h8/3062 series, h8/3048 series, h8/3007 and h8/3006, and h8/3002 item h8/3067, h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 1 operating mode mode 5 16 mb rom enabled expanded mode 1 mb rom enabled expanded mode mode 6 64 kb single-chip mode 16 mb rom enabled expanded mode 2 interrupt controller internal interrupt sources 36 (h8/3067) 27 (h8/3062) 30 36 30 3 bus controller burst rom interface yes (h8/3067) no (h8/3062) no yes no idle cycle insertion function yes no yes no wait mode 2 modes 4 modes 2 modes 4 modes wait state number setting per area common to all areas per area common to all areas address output method choice of address update mode (mask rom and flash memory r versions only) fixed fixed fixed 4 dram interface connectable areas area 2/3/4/5 (h8/3067 only) area 3 area 2/3/4/5 area 3 precharge cycle insertion function yes (h8/3067 only) no yes no fast page mode yes (h8/3067 only) no yes no address shift amount 8 bit/9 bit/10 bit (h8/3067 only) 8 bit/9 bit 8 bit/9 bit/10 bit 8 bit/9 bit 911 item h8/3067, h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 5 timer functions 16-bit timers 8-bit timers itu 16-bit timers 8-bit timers itu number of channels 16 bits 3 8 bits 4 (16 bits 2) 16 bits 5 16 bits 3 8 bits 4 (16 bits 2) 16 bits 5 pulse output 6 pins 4 pins (2 pins) 12 pins 6 pins 4 pins (2 pins) 12 pins input capture 6 2 10 6 2 10 external clock 4 systems (selectable) 4 systems (fixed) 4 systems (selectable) 4 systems (selectable) 4 systems (fixed) 4 systems (selectable) internal clock , /2, /4, /8 /8, /64, /8192 , /2, /4, /8 , /2, /4, /8 /8, /64, /8192 , /2, /4, /8 complementary pwm function no no yes no no yes reset- synchronous pwm function no no yes no no yes buffer operation no no yes no no yes output initialization function yes no no yes no no pwm output 3 4 (2) 5 3 4 (2) 5 dmac activation 3 channels (h8/3067 only) no 4 channels 3 channels no 4 channels a/d conversion activation no yes no no yes no interrupt sources 3 sources 3 8 sources 3 sources 5 3 sources 3 8 sources 3 sources 5 6 tpc time base 3 kinds, 16-bit timer base 4 kinds, itu base 3 kinds, 16-bit timer base 4 kinds, itu base 7 wdt reset signal external output function yes (except products with on-chip flash memory) yes yes yes 8 sci number of channels 3 channels (h8/3067) 2 channels (h8/3062) 2 channels 3 channels 2 channels smart card interface supported on all channels supported on sci0 only supported on all channels no 912 item h8/3067, h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 9 a/d converter conversion start trigger input external trigger/8-bit timer compare match external trigger external trigger/8-bit timer compare match external trigger 10 pin control pin /input port multiplexing output only /input port multiplexing output only a 20 in 16 mb rom enabled expanded mode a 20 / i/o port multiplexing a 20 output address bus, as , rd , hwr , lwr , cs 7 cs 0 , rfsh in software standby state high-level output/high- impedance selectable ( rfsh : h8/3067 only) high-level output (except cs 0 ) low-level output ( cs 0 ) high-level output/high- impedance selectable high-level output (except cs 0 ) low-level output ( cs 0 ) cs 7 cs 0 in bus- released state high-impedance high-level output high-impedance high-level output 11 flash memory functions program/erase voltage 12 v application unnecessary. single-power-supply programming. 12 v application from off-chip block divisions 8 blocks 16 blocks 913 h.2 comparison of pin functions of 100-pin package products (fp-100b, tfp-100b) table h.1 pin arrangement of each product (fp-100b, tfp-100b) pin on-chip-rom products romless products no. h8/3067 series h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3042 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 1 vcc vcc vcc vcc vcc vcc 2 pb 0 /tp 8 /tmo 0 / cs 7 pb 0 /tp 8 /tmo 0 / cs 7 pb 0 /tp 8 / tioca 3 pb 0 /tp 8 / tioca 3 pb 0 /tp 8 /tmo 0 / cs 7 pb 0 /tp 8 / tioca 3 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tmio 1 / dreq 0 / cs 6 pb 1 /tp 9 /tmio 1 / cs 6 pb 1 /tp 9 / tiocb 3 pb 1 /tp 9 / tiocb 3 pb 1 /tp 9 /tmio 1 / dreq 0 / cs 6 pb 1 /tp 9 / tiocb 3 4 pb 2 /tp 10 /tmo 2 / cs 5 pb 2 /tp 10 /tmo 2 / cs 5 pb 2 /tp 10 / tioca 4 pb 2 /tp 10 / tioca 4 pb 2 /tp 10 /tmo 2 / cs 5 pb 2 /tp 10 / tioca 4 5 pb 3 /tp 11 / tmio 3 / dreq 1 / cs 4 pb 3 /tp 11 / tmio 3 / cs 4 pb 3 /tp 11 / tiocb 4 pb 3 /tp 11 / tiocb 4 pb 3 /tp 11 / tmio 3 / dreq 1 / cs 4 pb 3 /tp 11 / tiocb 4 6 pb 4 /tp 12 / ucas pb 4 /tp 12 pb 4 /tp 12 / tocxa 4 pb 4 /tp 12 / tocxa 4 pb 4 /tp 12 / ucas pb 4 /tp 12 / tocxa 4 7 pb 5 /tp 13 / lcas /sck 2 pb 5 /tp 13 pb 5 /tp 13 / tocxb 4 pb 5 /tp 13 / tocxb 4 pb 5 /tp 13 / lcas /sck 2 pb 5 /tp 13 / tocxb 4 8 pb 6 /tp 14 /txd 2 pb 6 /tp 14 pb 6 /tp 14 / dreq 0 / cs 7 pb 6 /tp 14 / dreq 0 pb 6 /tp 14 /txd 2 pb 6 /tp 14 / dreq 0 9 pb 7 /tp 15 /rxd 2 pb 7 /tp 15 pb 7 /tp 15 / dreq 1 / adtrg pb 7 /tp 15 / dreq 1 / adtrg pb 7 /tp 15 /rxd 2 pb 7 /tp 15 / dreq 1 / adtrg 10 reso /fwe* reso /fwe* reso /v pp * reso reso reso 11 vss vss vss vss vss vss 12 p9 0 /txd 0 p9 0 /txd 0 p9 0 /txd 0 p9 0 /txd 0 p9 0 /txd 0 p9 0 /txd 0 13 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 1 /txd 1 p9 1 /txd 1 14 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 2 /rxd 0 p9 2 /rxd 0 15 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 3 /rxd 1 p9 3 /rxd 1 16 p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 p9 4 /sck 0 / irq 4 17 p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 p9 5 /sck 1 / irq 5 18 p4 0 /d 0 p4 0 /d 0 p4 0 /d 0 p4 0 /d 0 p4 0 /d 0 p4 0 /d 0 19 p4 1 /d 1 p4 1 /d 1 p4 1 /d 1 p4 1 /d 1 p4 1 /d 1 p4 1 /d 1 20 p4 2 /d 2 p4 2 /d 2 p4 2 /d 2 p4 2 /d 2 p4 2 /d 2 p4 2 /d 2 21 p4 3 /d 3 p4 3 /d 3 p4 3 /d 3 p4 3 /d 3 p4 3 /d 3 p4 3 /d 3 22 vss vss vss vss vss vss 23 p4 4 /d 4 p4 4 /d 4 p4 4 /d 4 p4 4 /d 4 p4 4 /d 4 p4 4 /d 4 24 p4 5 /d 5 p4 5 /d 5 p4 5 /d 5 p4 5 /d 5 p4 5 /d 5 p4 5 /d 5 914 table h.1 pin arrangement of each product (fp-100b, tfp-100b) (cont) pin on-chip-rom products romless products no. h8/3067 series h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3042 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 25 p4 6 /d 6 p4 6 /d 6 p4 6 /d 6 p4 6 /d 6 p4 6 /d 6 p4 6 /d 6 26 p4 7 /d 7 p4 7 /d 7 p4 7 /d 7 p4 7 /d 7 p4 7 /d 7 p4 7 /d 7 27 p3 0 /d 8 p3 0 /d 8 p3 0 /d 8 p3 0 /d 8 d 8 d 8 28 p3 1 /d 9 p3 1 /d 9 p3 1 /d 9 p3 1 /d 9 d 9 d 9 29 p3 2 /d 10 p3 2 /d 10 p3 2 /d 10 p3 2 /d 10 d 10 d 10 30 p3 3 /d 11 p3 3 /d 11 p3 3 /d 11 p3 3 /d 11 d 11 d 11 31 p3 4 /d 12 p3 4 /d 12 p3 4 /d 12 p3 4 /d 12 d 12 d 12 32 p3 5 /d 13 p3 5 /d 13 p3 5 /d 13 p3 5 /d 13 d 13 d 13 33 p3 6 /d 14 p3 6 /d 14 p3 6 /d 14 p3 6 /d 14 d 14 d 14 34 p3 7 /d 15 p3 7 /d 15 p3 7 /d 15 p3 7 /d 15 d 15 d 15 35 vcc vcc vcc vcc vcc vcc 36 p1 0 /a 0 p1 0 /a 0 p1 0 /a 0 p1 0 /a 0 a 0 a 0 37 p1 1 /a 1 p1 1 /a 1 p1 1 /a 1 p1 1 /a 1 a 1 a 1 38 p1 2 /a 2 p1 2 /a 2 p1 2 /a 2 p1 2 /a 2 a 2 a 2 39 p1 3 /a 3 p1 3 /a 3 p1 3 /a 3 p1 3 /a 3 a 3 a 3 40 p1 4 /a 4 p1 4 /a 4 p1 4 /a 4 p1 4 /a 4 a 4 a 4 41 p1 5 /a 5 p1 5 /a 5 p1 5 /a 5 p1 5 /a 5 a 5 a 5 42 p1 6 /a 6 p1 6 /a 6 p1 6 /a 6 p1 6 /a 6 a 6 a 6 43 p1 7 /a 7 p1 7 /a 7 p1 7 /a 7 p1 7 /a 7 a 7 a 7 44 vss vss vss vss vss vss 45 p2 0 /a 8 p2 0 /a 8 p2 0 /a 8 p2 0 /a 8 a 8 a 8 46 p2 1 /a 9 p2 1 /a 9 p2 1 /a 9 p2 1 /a 9 a 9 a 9 47 p2 2 /a 10 p2 2 /a 10 p2 2 /a 10 p2 2 /a 10 a 10 a 10 48 p2 3 /a 11 p2 3 /a 11 p2 3 /a 11 p2 3 /a 11 a 11 a 11 49 p2 4 /a 12 p2 4 /a 12 p2 4 /a 12 p2 4 /a 12 a 12 a 12 50 p2 5 /a 13 p2 5 /a 13 p2 5 /a 13 p2 5 /a 13 a 13 a 13 51 p2 6 /a 14 p2 6 /a 14 p2 6 /a 14 p2 6 /a 14 a 14 a 14 52 p2 7 /a 15 p2 7 /a 15 p2 7 /a 15 p2 7 /a 15 a 15 a 15 53 p5 0 /a 16 p5 0 /a 16 p5 0 /a 16 p5 0 /a 16 a 16 a 16 54 p5 1 /a 17 p5 1 /a 17 p5 1 /a 17 p5 1 /a 17 a 17 a 17 55 p5 2 /a 18 p5 2 /a 18 p5 2 /a 18 p5 2 /a 18 a 18 a 18 56 p5 3 /a 19 p5 3 /a 19 p5 3 /a 19 p5 3 /a 19 a 19 a 19 915 table h.1 pin arrangement of each product (fp-100b, tfp-100b) (cont) pin on-chip-rom products romless products no. h8/3067 series h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3042 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 57 vss vss vss vss vss vss 58 p6 0 / wait p6 0 / wait p6 0 / wait p6 0 / wait p6 0 / wait p6 0 / wait 59 p6 1 / breq p6 1 / breq p6 1 / breq p6 1 / breq p6 1 / breq p6 1 / breq 60 p6 2 / back p6 2 / back p6 2 / back p6 2 / back p6 2 / back p6 2 / back 61 p6 7 / p6 7 / p6 7 / 62 stby stby stby stby stby stby 63 res res res res res res 64 nmi nmi nmi nmi nmi nmi 65 vss vss vss vss vss vss 66 extal extal extal extal extal extal 67 xtal xtal xtal xtal xtal xtal 68 vcc vcc vcc vcc vcc vcc 69 p6 3 / as p6 3 / as p6 3 / as p6 3 / as as as 70 p6 4 / rd p6 4 / rd p6 4 / rd p6 4 / rd rd rd 71 p6 5 / hwr p6 5 / hwr p6 5 / hwr p6 5 / hwr hwr hwr 72 p6 6 / lwr p6 6 / lwr p6 6 / lwr p6 6 / lwr lwr lwr 73 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 md 0 74 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 md 1 75 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 md 2 76 avcc avcc avcc avcc avcc avcc 77 v ref v ref v ref v ref v ref v ref 78 p7 0 /an 0 p7 0 /an 0 p7 0 /an 0 p7 0 /an 0 p7 0 /an 0 p7 0 /an 0 79 p7 1 /an 1 p7 1 /an 1 p7 1 /an 1 p7 1 /an 1 p7 1 /an 1 p7 1 /an 1 80 p7 2 /an 2 p7 2 /an 2 p7 2 /an 2 p7 2 /an 2 p7 2 /an 2 p7 2 /an 2 81 p7 3 /an 3 p7 3 /an 3 p7 3 /an 3 p7 3 /an 3 p7 3 /an 3 p7 3 /an 3 82 p7 4 /an 4 p7 4 /an 4 p7 4 /an 4 p7 4 /an 4 p7 4 /an 4 p7 4 /an 4 83 p7 5 /an 5 p7 5 /an 5 p7 5 /an 5 p7 5 /an 5 p7 5 /an 5 p7 5 /an 5 84 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 6 /an 6 /da 0 p7 6 /an 6 85 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 p7 7 /an 7 /da 1 p7 7 /an 7 86 avss avss avss avss avss avss 87 p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 p8 0 / irq 0 p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 p8 0 / rfsh / irq 0 88 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 p8 1 / cs 3 / irq 1 916 table h.1 pin arrangement of each product (fp-100b, tfp-100b) (cont) pin on-chip-rom products romless products no. h8/3067 series h8/3062 series h8/3048 series h8/3042 series h8/3006, 3007 h8/3002 89 p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 p8 2 / cs 2 / irq 2 90 p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 / adtrg p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 / adtrg p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 / adtrg p8 3 / cs 1 / irq 3 91 p8 4 / cs 0 p8 4 / cs 0 p8 4 / cs 0 p8 4 / cs 0 p8 4 / cs 0 p8 4 / cs 0 92 vss vss vss vss vss vss 93 pa 0 /tp 0 / tend 0 /tclka pa 0 /tp 0 /tclka pa 0 /tp 0 / tend 0 /tclka pa 0 /tp 0 / tend 0 /tclka pa 0 /tp 0 / tend 0 /tclka pa 0 /tp 0 / tend 0 /tclka 94 pa 1 /tp 1 / tend 1 /tclkb pa 1 /tp 1 /tclkb pa 1 /tp 1 / tend 1 /tclkb pa 1 /tp 1 / tend 1 /tclkb pa 1 /tp 1 / tend 1 /tclkb pa 1 /tp 1 / tend 1 /tclkb 95 pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 /tclkc pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 /tclkc pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 /tclkc pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 /tclkc pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 /tclkc pa 2 /tp 2 / tioca 0 /tclkc 96 pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 /tclkd pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 /tclkd pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 /tclkd pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 /tclkd pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 /tclkd pa 3 /tp 3 / tiocb 0 /tclkd 97 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 / cs 6 /a 23 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 pa 4 /tp 4 / tioca 1 /a 23 98 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 / cs 5 /a 22 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 pa 5 /tp 5 / tiocb 1 /a 22 99 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 / cs 4 /a 21 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 pa 6 /tp 6 / tioca 2 /a 21 100 pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 pa 7 /tp 7 / tiocb 2 /a 20 note: * functions as reso in the mask rom versions, and as fwe in the flash memory and flash memory r versions. h8/3067 series, h8/3067 f-ztat tm hardware manual publication date: 1st edition, march 1998 3rd edition, february 1999 published by: electronic devices sales & marketing group semiconductor & integrated circuits group hitachi, ltd. edited by: technical documentation group ul media co., ltd. copyright ? hitachi, ltd., 1998. all rights reserved. printed in japan. |
Price & Availability of HD64F3067
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |